The Canadian field-naturalist

eye
le aiaig inal pete

ee,

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

el

LIBRARY

OF THE

Museum of Comparative Zoology

He
m8

ARYAN a
et

,
i

bY

‘
BAIN

Lee i ap
te i 1 , t i
{ ij \
‘4 4

ait

af
Rai

The CANADIAN
RE EDN Aeneas

Volume 69

okie

Published 6
THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

OTTAWA, ONTARIO, CANADA

=

i
AY
4
OF
ay
i
iq

comet

Aw peipengle:

if
:
x
PE
;
f

id

saan inhasaes eka

eae

Cael

we

Mae By SPY | Clan at a
; Wit se

A od aime ' ie Any a cl
Ferarnsd-vcsn nner Mu niwrar ies wn

q |
* 69 : JANUARY-MARCH, 1955 No. 1]
| )

The CANADIAN

ag ES ere
a

eee =

Birds of the lower Back River Northwest Territories, Canada.

SE VARN VE Pe TOCKENTICQE Gs he ited eC JUN I ar Be MAC a Re Pe eat ain aT cE a 1

Notes on movements of banded muskrats. By L. E. Wragg o......0...ccccecececeeeescteteeeesees 9
elanism in the varying hare, Lepus americanus Erxleben

b, LER a SO) St De oF 1s Rea et PRE A IE ee wes. OMNES of Oe Mach d PAL mR RN GI 11

:: B Badgers in Kent and Elgin Counties, Ontario. By C. O. Bartlett 00.00.00... 12

‘The Golden Eagle nesting in the Gaspé Peninsula, Quebec. By James L. Baillie .......... 13

Distribution and populations of the Seen hare in southern Ontario.
IBS Aho Wee REV EIOLOSS tesco yen et aed eA ed tes ci hoa ce cad Mee, UL MEO MNT MAB OP GN Sah 14

ie he seventy-sixth annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club,

St atement of financial standing, The Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club,

ENO VCINBer 2 Ost UO SA Oat See hes J sll faehtv en fo utar an main SiR A URW A SUN ao a aeatey 23
Notes and Observations: —

Mid-Atlantic migration of Long-tailed Jaegers and Terns (sp. ?).

By Hoyes Lloyd ..... he aS eee ire, in 6 oe ine Vinee eh is eM Leas MUNI Me EO AOA AY 24
Bird ‘breeding census, 1953.) By .T:, Fo. Toi Morland 20.0: incl a 25
Nutria, Myocastor coypus, in Thunder Bay District, Ontario. By A. E. Allin ........ 25

i. “Cougar or Mountain Lion reported in northwestern Ontario. By L. S. Dear

fale 26

g eS 59 GGUSE) AT CIMLAT ION Ey. Ws. ukys) SENET 10s 8.58. nae pees ieee cede cea atcha ya nn) a 26

_ White Pelicans at Crescent Beach, B.C. By Martin W. Holdom oo..c.ccccccccccccssssseeee 27

~ First record of the Starling in the Northwest Territories. By W. A. Fuller ............ 27

} Viviparus viviparus L. in Eastern Canada. By E. L. Bousfield ..........c.cccccsscccesssee: 27
TET ETA Me og i a is AOE SE A SE SP SPR SOIREE AME ene Rae Reb Dy 28

Authorized as second class wail, Post Office Department, Ottawa

TREY SUT or gn SOUT EY. NEM aU ae CI a APO ORM ROI MA re ocr Vy eta 21)"

1 1655

Published by the | ye Hamann
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB | a cate
He ck ye ¥ us

Che Ottawa Ss ield -aturalists’ Club

Patron :
His Excellency, The Rt. Honourable Vincent Massey, C. lai , Governor-General of i n

President: Mr. W. K. W. Batpwin > 4
1st Vice-President: Dr. L. S. RUSSELL 2nd Vice-President: Dr. E. L.

Treasurer: RAYMOND Moore, ~ See Hy: ScoccAN, ue
Division of Botany, - National Misael of nada,
Science Service, Dept. of ‘Ottawa. | eva

Agriculture, Ottawa. at ae

R. D. Harris, E. O. Hucues, W. ILLMAN, W. ue LANCELEY, tHE eee W. W. M.
T. H. MANNING, H. Marsuwatt, D. A. Munxo, A. E. Porsttp, H. L. J. Ree BS
RuDDELL, D. B. O. SAILE, ‘A. A. SENN, V. E.. . So-maN, E. A. ‘TURNAU. eet

Auditors: I. L. Conners, C. FRANKTON, ‘ hy i

Editor: : Rees
Dr. H. A. SENN, > MK HS eae ce
Division of Botany, . Sty ae
Science Service Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.
Associate Editors: . Aas
WWE GR DOR RRM TC ie kh me. nCMs Botany R. M. ANDERSON ........c Y

AS MAROCOUR (MN nn Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN .............. ie i
PGF CRAWEORDI 3) Ve CEN as Entomology WE) GopERey, 7073 Monel OF 0
PAU AE COCK pa WAG, Ses n ies Muay Geology Wi Wa NALUBEET ole iets
SHERMAN BLEAKNEY .............. Herpetology JoRoe DY MOND ye ona

Business M anager: .
W. J. Copy,
Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa.

The Saal publications of THz Orrawa FreLtp-NATURALISTS’ Cue ae he ie
issued since 1879. The first were Te Transactions of the Ottawa Field-N aturalis.
Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886-1919, ‘thirty
two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian "Field-N aturalist to
date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued quarterly. Its scope is the publica ‘
of the results of original research in all departments of Natural History.

Price of this volume (4 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 90c paid Boe.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moore, —
Div. of Botany, Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture,
OTTAWA, CANADA.

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Vol. 69

OTTAWA, CANADA, JANUARY-MARCH, 1955 No. 1

~ BIRDS OF THE LOWER BACK RIVER
NORTHWEST TERRITORIES, CANADA?

W. J. BRECKENRIDGE

Minnesota Museum of Natural History, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis.

EW AREAS remain in North America

for which at least distributional notes on
the breeding bird life present are not avail-
able. The interior of Northern Keewatin,
Canadian Northwest Territories, is such a
practically virgin area which was visited by
the University of Minnesota-Wilkie Expedi-
tion during July and early August of 1953.
A simple annotated list of birds observed
there to further round out our knowledge
of the distribution of certain arctic breeding
species as well as some discussion of the
factors influencing bird distributions in this
remote region may appropriately go on
record. The area visited comprises the lower
portion of the Back River below Garry and
Macdougall Lakes. This region lies just south
of the Arctic Circle and between 97° and 99°
west longitude, and is roughly 600 miles
NNW of Churchill, Manitoba.

C. H. D. Clarke, in his extensive report on
the Thelon drainage area just to the south
of the Back River (4), states, “... King with
Back’s expedition in 1834 still has the honour
of being the only zoologist to visit Back
River.” Back’s expedition was a fast moving
exploration trip and King’s biological notes
(5) were meager. Since that time, J. Ander-
son (1), a Hudson Bay factor, again tra-
versed the Back in 1855 in search of clues
to the fate of the Franklin party, but no
trained biologist accompanied his expedition
and only scattered notes on the wildlife are
contained in his reports.

Our party 2 left Churchill by plane on July
12 and arrived at the point selected for a
base camp on July 13. This was a gravel
point on the north side of the Back River
at 66°-10’ north latitude and 96°-57’ west
longitude. Intensive field work was carried
on within 6-8 miles of this point until Au-
gust 6. On July 28, Breckenridge and

1) Received for publication May 10, 1954.

Taylor flew west to Macdougall Lake
from which point they came approximately
85 miles down the Back River by small
boat arriving back at camp on August 2.
Three of the party, R. J. Wilkie, J. W.
Wilkie, and Lawrence Larson, returned by
plane on July 28. Unfortunately, this party
was forced to make a crash landing in the
Arctic Wings Norseman plane on Lake Ka-
minuriak 300 miles north of Churchill. The
plane partially sank and, although the per-
sonnel escaped injury, the losses included
approximately 50 prepared bird and mammal
skins, a number of preserved fish specimens,
all the terrestrial insects collected between
July 13 and 28, about three thousand feet
of exposed motion picture film and numerous
rolis of exposed 35 mm. still pictures. The
number of specimens lost does not seem
great, but, considering the scarcity of wildlife
in the area, and the difficulty of collecting,
the small number takes on greater im-
portance. The remaining 4 members of the
party returned to Churchill on August 6 by
plane.

The terrain surrounding the base camp was
rugged and rocky for the most part with
occasional boggy meadows interspersed, few
exceeding two to three thousand acres in ex-
tent. Bold outcroppings of metamorphosed
rocks rose to as much as four hundred and
fifty feet above the river. Extensive sloping
boulder fields of frost-shattered rocks and
some talus slopes occupied much of the area

2) The expedition originated from a generous offer of
financial assistance from R. J. and J. W. Wilkie of
the Wilkie Foundation. An outline of the aims of
the expedition brought substantial financial aid from
the Quartermaster Corps of the U.S. Army and,
through this connection, the R.C.A.F. extended much
appreciated assistance in the form of aerial trans-
portation. Further aid and cooperation were se-
cured from the Wildlife Management Institute, the
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, and the Geological
Society of America. The expedition personnel in-
cluded Dr. W. J. Breckenridge, leader, Mr. H. L.
Gundersen, Mr. John Jarosz, Mr. Richard Spence
Taylor, Mr. Robert Wilkie, Mr. James Wilkie, and
Dr. Lawrence Larson.

Vol. 68, No. 4, October-December, 1954, was issued September 16, 1955.

Pil 4 EF

2 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

between the bedrock outcroppings. Many
small clear lakes bordered here and there by
narrow spongy peat meadows filled the de-
pressions. Drainage slopes were often car-
peted by dense hummocky mats of sphag-
num moss, sedges, cottongrass, Eriophorum
sp., Arctic labrador tea, Ledum decumbens,
Dwarf birch, Betula glandulosa, bearberry,
Arctostaphylos sp., etc.

The melting of the upper layers of perma-
frost left the ground saturated like a thick
viscous liquid, thus causing such a mat of
vegetation to move slowly and imperceptibly
down the slope in a combination of a sliding
and rolling movement. Under these condi-
tions water draining to lower levels tended
to filter through the surface vegetation
rather than to gather into streams as is the
ease in temperate climates. Dry hillsides sup-
ported a minimum of plant life, but many
of the tiny plants such as Arctic avens,
Dryas integrifolia, Arctic poppy, Papaver
radicatum, Arctic fireweed, Epilobium lati-
folium, Moss Pink, Silene acaulis var. ex-
scapa, White Heather, Cassiope tetragona,
had surprisingly showy blossoms. Numerous
species of willow (Salix sp.) and Dwarf
Birch (Betula glandulosa) sprawled pros-
trate over and between the rocks (Botanical
Report by Dr. Ernst Abbe, University of
Minnesota Botany Department, on the speci-
mens collected in preparation).

The Back River at our camp was approxi-
mately 300 yards wide and every few miles
along its course down from Macdougall
Lake it plunged over roaring rapids and
falls, the measured drop at some points
amounting to as much as 50 feet per mile.
The river banks at the rapids were formed
of either bed rock or glacial boulders, many
up to the size of a small house. Through
most of its course from Macdougall Lake to
our base camp the Back would be called a
geologically immature river which had not
as yet developed a well-defined valley. Its
course often paralleled eskers and moraines
of huge boulders and gravel or cut through
them leaving tremendous _ steep-walled
gashes of apparently very recent origin. The
yanks at many places appeared to have been
shaped by enormous bulldozers. In this
ease, of course, this was the work of huge
ice blocks shoved ashore by the tremendous
force of the spring floods. At numerous
points, notably a few miles below Sinclair
Falls, the glacial deposits consisted of less
hilly ground moraine. (Geological Report

[Vol. 69

by expedition geologist, R. Spence Taylor, in
preparation). Here, literally square miles
of cottongrass and other plants grew on the
slightly more productive soil and animal life
was somewhat more abundant, or it might
better be described as less scarce.

Under such barren’ surroundings one
would hardly expect an abundance of wild-
life and this was certainly true. In fact,
much of this area resembles what the bota-
nists have described as rock deserts or fell-
fields.

The following are approximate distances
above our base camp of several locations (ex-
cept # 4) named by Captain Back (2) and
referred to in the distribution notes:

Miles above

camp
1. Macdougall Lake ...............0...... 85
2s Rock’ Rapidsi=:.22.... eee 80
SeoSinclair, Walls eee eee 75
4. Arctic Loon Meadow .............. 63
5) Escape “Rapids 8.22.22 45
6: Wolf ‘Rapidsit)...2%.... 25
7. Mouth of Meadowbank River .. 14

Early explorers’ notes on bird distributions
along the west coast of Hudson Bay and in
the District of Mackenzie were very well
summarized by Preble (9) (10) early in the
century. C. H. D. Clarke in his report on the
Thelon Game Sanctuary (4), continued the
work up to 1937 and extended the coverage
eastward from Mackenzie and northward from
Manitoba. These reports have extensive
bibliographies. Since those dates, Scott (12),
cooperating with Harold Hanson and Paul
Queneau, reported on the life of the Perry
River region (1949) 150 miles to the north-
west of the lower Back River; Savile (11)
has published (1951) on the birds of Chester-
field Inlet 300 miles to the southeast, and
Manning (6) has added data (1947) on the
region to the south between Reindeer Lake
and Baker Lake. It would seem to be un-
necessary duplication to review the above
reports. It is of primary interest here to
note the extreme barrenness of the Back
River regions and the absence from our lists
of many species reported by the above
workers. Of the 30 species observed by us,
five were represented by single individuals;
four, by only two individuals; and five others
are in the list on the basis of three to five
individuals.

The following is an annotated list of the
30 species of birds observed by the party
near camp, July 13 to August 6, and on the

January-March, 1955]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Table 1. BIRDS COLLECTED AT BACK RIVER
July 13 - August 6

Old Squaw

66 6é 66 6eé

36 66 66 6é

Semipalmated Plover

Baird’s Sandpiper Erolia bairdii

ce ce

Herring Gull Larus argentatus
Glaucous Gull

Rock Ptarmigan

ce “cc

Lagopus mutus

Lapland Longspur

Snow Bunting

ce 6 “

“cc

Clangula hyemalis

Charadrius hiaticula

Larus hyperboreus

Calearius lapponicus

Plectrophenax nivalis

6cé

$3

Museum

Sex Number
3 10587
9 10588
2 10589
imm ¢ 10592
juv ° 10593
— 10605
yng ¢ 10606
imm ¢ 10607
? 10594
3 10595
9 10590
Q 10591
Q 10596
g 10597
imm @ 10598
imm 9 10599
3 10600
9 10601
juv ¢ 10602
g 10603
3 10604

Back River trip from Macdougall Lake down
to camp, July 28 to August 2, 1953:

Yellow-billed Loon, Gavia adamsi (Gray).
One was seen on the Back River a couple
miles above Sinclair Falls on July 29, while
another was noted just below Sinclair Falls
on the Back on July 30.

Arctic Loon, Gavia arctica (L.). Two were
seen on the Back River one-half mile below
Sinclair Falls on July 30. A nest contain-
ing one egg (2.70” x 1.92") was found near
a tiny pond on the Arctic Loon Meadow ad-
jacent to the Back River on July 30. The
incubating adult was wildly excited over my
intrusion.

Red-throated Loon,Gavia stellata (Pontop-
pidan). A pair was found on the small lake
across the Back River from camp on July
19. A careful search of the shore failed
to reveal a nest. One bird flew over our
camp nearly every evening (July 19-August
6) giving a peculiar “quok-quok” call. This
was uttered 3 to 4 times per second, was a
bit sharper and higher in quality than a
female Mallard quack, and evidently was
the odd call described by Savile (11). These

birds’ actions strongly suggested nesting in
the vicinity. One other pair was seen on
the Back River just above Sinclair Falls on
July 29 and another pair two miles below
the Escape Rapids camp on August 1.

Canada Goose, Branta canadensis (L.). The
only Canada Geese recorded were 5, probably
B.c. parvipes, the Lesser or Tundra Canada
Goose, seen flying along the Back River
near camp on July 15: A few primary
feathers found along the shore of the bay
near camp and at other points have been
identified as of this species. These must
have been shed previous to this season in-
dicating that at least some of these geese
were present in this area possibly the year
previous (1952).

[Lesser Snow Goose, Chen hyperborea
(Pallas). A single white goose was seen
July 18 flying down the river near camp
and veering off toward the south. Presuma-
bly it was of this species, although it could
have been a Ross’ Goose. ]

Old Squaw, Clangula hyemalis (L.). The
only duck positively identified in the area
visited. Flocks of up to 23 birds, mostly, but

4 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

not all, males, were seen on several lakes
within 5 miles of camp. A few small groups
were made up of females only. No evidence
of nesting was seen. Males showing white
feathers in the head, indicating the begin-
ning of moult, were seen as early as July
14. All birds appeared capable of flight
until August 2 when two females were col-
lected, one of which had shed the primaries
and the other was just shedding them. No
evidence of a flightless condition of males
was seen. Four specimens were taken.

Rough-legged Hawk, Buteo lagopus s.-johan-
nis (Gmelin). A single normal plumaged
bird was seen only at a distance around the
cliff two miles northwest of camp. A nest
was found on a ledge near the top of a 100-
foot cliff containing 4 white (!) eggs on
July 24. On July 25 rechecking indicated
the nest was deserted and the eggs were
collected. A faint pattern was evident on
the protected under side showing that the
exposed parts were bleached. On _ being
blown, they revealed dead embryos, and,
since they were unbroken by freezing, they
must have been laid earlier this year and
deserted probably as the result of the dis-
appearance of one of the pair.

A pair was seen on August 3, three and
one-half miles west of camp. Both birds
showed normal patterns, although one was
markedly lighter than the other. A _ fresh-
looking nest was found on a low cliff. This
nest contained newly shed feathers but no
indication of eggs or young. Murie (7) found
Golden Eagles at Mt. McKinley repairing an
old nest at the same time young were being
raised in another. This might be the same
situation with this hawk.

A pair of these birds screamed their con-
cern near the cliffs along the portage around
the Rock Rapids in the Back River. One of
these was normal in pattern while the other
was jet black except for white tail bands
and light areas under wings.

Golden Eagle, Aquila chrysaétos canaden-
sis (L.). One adult was seen hunting along
glacial boulder banks of the Back River
about 5 miles above Wolf Rapids on August
I.

Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus anatum
Bonaparte. One bird was seen about Mount
Meadowbank on July 19. On July 21 the
nest was discovered on a cliff ledge only a
few feet from a deserted stick nest probably

[Vol. 69

that of an American Rough-legged Hawk.
The nest contained one newly-hatched
young, one pipped and one unpipped egg.
Another pair screamed at us at the foot of
the portage around Rock Rapids on the Back
River, indicating that it undoubtedly was
nesting there.

Rock Ptarmigan, Lagopus mutus rupestris
(Gmelin). A female with several young only
a few days old was found 3 miles west of
camp on July 15. Two young were collected
but later lost in the plane crash. On August
3 a female and nine one-third grown young,
found a half-mile farther west, might have
been the same family, although we felt it
was not. Two of the young were preserved.
Two hatched Ptarmigan nests (presumably
of this species) were found on portages along
the Back River between Lake Macdougall and
the base camp.

Semipalmated Plover, Charadrius hiaticu-
la semipalmatus Bonaparte. A pair, seen
along the gravel beach of the bay one mile
west of camp on July 16 and 18, was con-
cerned and evidently had young. An oc-
casional individual was seen near camp
throughout the period of our stay. One young
not yet able to fly was collected on a small
rocky island in the bay one-half mile north
of camp on August 1.

Golden Plover, Pluvialis dominica domini-
ca (Miller). One pair was seen along the
Back River at the Arctic Loon Meadow on
July 30. Both birds appeared concerned,
sneaking away and dragging their wings.
This suggested hidden young, but none
could be located.

White-rumped Sandpiper, Erolia fuscicollis
(Vieillot). One adult, seen July 31 along the
Back about 5 miles above Escape Rapids,
put on the broken wing act indicating pro-
bable nesting.

Baird’s Sandpiper, Erolia bairdii (Coues),
The only species of Sandpiper found breed-
ing extensively but sparingly throughout
the area. Three pairs were found on July 19
localized on breeding territories in swampy
meadows adjacent to Mount Meadowbank
one to three miles south of camp where two,
perhaps 2-day-old, downy young were col-
lected. A watercolor painting was made of
this plumage, and colored movies taken of
the birds. Another young on the wing was
collected one-half mile west of camp on
August 2. An adult was identified just

January-March, 1955]

above Sinclair Falls on July 30. An adult
and four two-thirds grown young were
found on July 31 a mile above the Escape
Rapids along the Back River. The adult and
one young were collected. Another family
of three young on the wing and an adult
was found on August 1 about 15 miles above
the mouth of the Meadowbank River. One
young was collected. Five of the 9 speci-
mens including the downy young were lost
in the plane crash.

Red-backed Sandpiper, Erolia alpina (L.).
One adult was seen along the Back River at
the Arctic Loon Meadow on July 30. The
bird joined the Golden Plover pair, noted
above, in protesting the intrusion which at
least suggested nesting.

Northern Phalarope, Lobipes lobatus (L.).
Several birds including one flock of 6 or
8 were seen about the ponds on the Arctic
Loon Meadow on July 30. No definite evid-
ence of nesting was secured.

Parasitic Jaeger, Stercorarius parasiticus
(L.). One pair flew over camp on July 23.
Again on August 1, three were seen at camp
while a single bird flying near camp on
August 3 caused a great clamor among the
gulls.

Long-tailed Jaeger, Stercorarius longicau-
dus Vieillot. From 6 to 10 were seen
each day from July 28 to August 1 from
Macdougall Lake down the Back River to
near the mouth of the Meadowbank River.
Through this area the terrain was largely
glacial till, gravel and boulders with fre-
quent extensive cottongrass meadows. No
Jaegers, identified as Parasitic, were seen
here. Lower down on the Back near camp
the terrain was more barren bedrock out-
croppings and frost shattered boulders, and
no Long-tailed Jaegers were seen in this
type of terrain, only an occasional Parasitic.

Herring Gull, Larus argentatus smithso-
nianus Coues. An occasional individual was
seen along the Back River between Mac-
dougall Lake and camp, July 28-August 2.
One or two appeared about camp on July
14 and the number increased gradually
during the period of our stay until 15 were
counted at one time on August 5. No
evidence of nesting was seen. Nearly all the
birds were adult with only a few showing
black in the tail or dark feathers in the
back and wings. One bird was collected.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 5

Glaucous Gull, Larus hyperboreus hyper-
boreus Gunnerus. An occasional individual
was seen on the Back River from Macdougall
Lake to camp July 28-August 2. One or two
visited camp occasionally between July 14
and August 6. All birds appeared to be in
adult plumage and no evidence of nesting
was seen. One bird was collected.

Arctic Tern, Sterna paradisaea Pont. Sev-
eral birds were seen each day on the Back
River between Macdougall Lake and the
Meadowbank River. These were somewhat
more common near rocky islands above Sin-
clair Falls and near the mouth of the
Meadowbank River. None were seen at base
camp and no evidence of nesting was Se-
cured.

Horned Lark, Eremophila alpestris (L.).
A few pairs were found widely scattered in
the area about camp. All had young on the
wing by the time of our arrival July 13. In
a walk of 5 to 7 miles we would see per-
haps 2 to 4 families. Pairs were seen at
several points along the Back River between
Macdougall Lake and camp, July 28-August
3. At no point were they as common as
Lapland Longspurs. The yellow on _ the
throats of these birds was hardly noticeable.
An adult and several young were collected
but later lost in the plane crash.

Cliff Swallow, Petrochelidon pyrrhonota
(Vieillot). Single individuals were seen fly-
ing over camp on July 18 and July 24.

Raven, Corvus corax principalis Ridgway.
One individual was seen one-half mile west
of camp on August 1 and another flew over
camp on August 4.

American Pipit, Anthus spinoletta rubes-
cens (Tunstall). This bird was second in
abundance to the Lapland Longspur in our
camp area. Bare rock outcroppings and
boulder fields were the typical habitat of
the pipit, none being found in the cotton-
grass meadows. In such rocky areas 2 to 3
families would be encountered in each
mile traversed. By the time of our arrival
July 13, the adults were feeding young al-
ready out of the nest. The courting flight
songs were no longer being given; only their
characteristic twitters were heard. A series
of these was collected but lost later in the |
plane crash.

Redpoll, Acanthis sp. This species was en-
countered once a mile northwest of camp

6 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

on July 15 and again about 3 miles
NNW of camp on July 23. The latter bird
was carrying food and undoubtedly had
young. These were dark, probably A. lina-
ria, but no specimens were collected to al-
low of specific recognition.

Savannah Sparrow, Passerculus sandwi-
chensis (Gmelin). Nearly all of the scat-
tered boggy meadows around camp were
inhabited by this sparrow, and the species
was seen in Similar habitat on a portage just
above Sinclair Falls on July 30. Several
pairs were feeding young on the wing, and
a series of specimens was taken but these
were lost in the plane crash.

Gambel’s Sparrow, Zonotrichia leucophrys
gambelw (Nuttall). One pair was found and
collected on July 24 in a particularly sturdy
growth of dwarf birch and willow among
large boulders about a mile west of camp.
The specimens were later lost, but a care-
ful watercolor sketch of the head of one
shows definitely the light lores of the Gam-
bel’s Sparrow. The female’s ova were re-
duced to pinhead size, but the male testes
were still fairly large. They probably had
nested, but we found neither nest nor young.

Lapland Longspurs, Calcarius lapponicus
lapponicus (L.). The commonest bird
throughout the area. Young just out of the
nest were seen at the time of our arrival,
July 13. Three to four families per mile
would be encountered and they appeared to
occupy both the boggy meadows and the
rocky fields and hillsides. Fully grown
young were regularly seen by July 25, and
flocks of more than a single family began
drifting by our camp on the rocky point
by the last of July. The species was com-
monly seen all along the Back River from
Macdougall Lake to camp, July 28 to Au-
gust 2, flocks, mainly of young birds, often
invading camp and walking about within
10 to 15 feet of our camp fires. A series
of developing young was collected but lost
in the plane crash.

Snow Bunting, Plectrophenax nivalis ni-
valis (L.). These birds were widespread
throughout the area but were definitely less
common than either the American Pipit
or Lapland Longspur. Adults were feeding
well-grown young on our arrival, July 13.
Several families were seen at numerous
points along the Back River between Lake
Macdougall and camp July 28 to August 2.
Boulder-strewn lake shores and river banks

[Vol. 69

were frequented by adults seeking food for
their young. Gathering of family groups
into larger flocks was first noticed on July
30 when such groups appeared at camp
where none had previously occurred.

One of the major objectives of our trip
was to investigate the breeding population
of geese, which both Back (2) in 1834 and
Anderson (1) in 1855 mentioned as being
abundant.

Back passed the location of our base camp
on July 26 and camped a few miles below.
In describing this camp, he stated, “It was
opposite to a solitary bank that formed the
western entrance to a small river apparently
a favorite resort for geese, which, having fre-
quented it in numberless flocks during the
moulting season had left thousands of the
finest quills strewn on the sand. Carts might
have been laden with them.”

Back gave no clue to the species of geese
seen, but Anderson mentions repeatedly the
abundance of Canada Geese. Anderson’s
party crossed Macdougall Lake and en-
camped at Sinclair Falls on July 25. (We
camped there July 29). His notes for that
day mentioned that they “killed 13 male
Canada Geese”. On July 28 while still above
the mouth of the Montresor River (covered
by us by plane on July 14 and again on
July 28), Anderson reported that “immense

numbers of Canada Geese were seen — 20
killed.”
Considering the changes in waterfowl

populations throughout North America
during the last century, it would not be
surprising to find the birds breeding in this
region reduced in numbers, but the total
absence of any evidence of either ducks or
geese breeding in this area this year was
not anticipated. There is evidence (returns
from geese banded in Alaska, Sigurd Olson,
Jr. correspondence) (3) indicating that local
populations of geese have a strong tendency
to winter in restricted areas in the United
States. The particular local breeding popu-
lation from this area might have been
decimated or even completely eliminated by
hunting during the past 75 years leaving
little or no breeding stock whose ancestral
nesting grounds was the Lower Back River.
Nearly all other populations of geese winter.
ing in the United States have been reduced,,
and their breeding areas are probably be-
coming less rather than more crowded. Con-
sequently, population pressures are not tend-

January-March, 1955]

ing to push breeding birds back into this
particularly barren area.

Another explanation of this lack of water-
fowl centers around the possibility that this
was a season of particularly late breakup
of the ice. Pilots who flew us into the Back
River from Churchill stated that although
early in the season it threatened to be an
unusually early breakup, the weather turned
cold again and the season actually turned
out to be unusually late.

The following explanation for the lack of
birds during late seasons was suggested
originally by Mr. Arthur Hawkins and Mr.
Ed. Wellein, biologist of the U.S. Fish and
Wildlife Service, working on Arctic water-
fowl problems. Species of geese and ducks
normally adapted to arctic nesting move
northward along the west coast of Hudson
Bay as rapidly as possible in spring. En-
countering frozen, uninviting conditions, as
the above reports suggest that they might
have this year, they tend to follow the SE-
NW isotherms toward the northwest where
the ice disappears earlier and these birds
would nest farther to the north and west
as the breeding urge finally made nesting
imperative, instead of moving directly north
into this Back River area.

Similarly, wintering waterfowl, including
Lesser Snow Geese and Ross’s Geese from
along the California coast, move northward
along the Pacific and across the mountains
to the Mackenzie Delta. The Lesser Snow
Geese evidently move on from there north-
eastward along the Arctic Ocean to Banks
Island, since large numbers of these birds
were on their nesting grounds on Banks
Island this year (1953) as early as May 30
(EK. O. Hohn, correspondence, February 16,
1954). Ross’s Geese evidently follow a simi-
lar route to the Mackenzie Delta but continue
on eastward to Perry River. Perhaps those
as well as Tule Geese and others may move
on farther eastward and into the interior
during early seasons but would be prevented
from further advances in this direction in
late seasons. Whether or not the Ross’s
Geese nested in normal numbers in the
Perry River area this year is not now known.

Whether or not these theories apply to
this year’s barren situation in the Back River
area depends entirely on whether or not
this year’s spring break-up could correctly
be considered as “unusually late”.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 7

In this connection, Back (2) described in
graphic terms how huge masses of ice from
Lake Macdougall temporarily blocked the
Back River at Rock Rapids on July 24, the
year that geese occurred abundantly on the
river. We saw no ice on Lake Macdougall
or at Rock Rapids on July 28 and 29, in-
dicating that this past spring (1953) breakup
could not have been later and probably was
not as late as in 1834. Furthermore, river
temperatures recorded at our base camp
dropped suddenly from 46° F. on July 18
to 43° on July 19, and some ice was seen on
the bank above camp on July 21. This sug-
gested some major mass of ice entering the
Back on this date or earlier, and this could
have been the same phenomenon mentioned
by Back occurring several days earlier in
July this year.

A study of the monthly weather maps is-
sued by the Meteorological Division of the
Canadian Department of Transport shows
that during 1953, the central Keewatin region
was considered to have had temperatures
during April of 10° F. above the long term
average; May, 3° F. above average; June,
2° above average; July, 1° below average;
and August, 2° above average.

Admittedly, the Back River area has no
reporting weather station,? and the above
data are interpolated from Baker Lake and
Cambridge Bay reports. Still these data do not
seem to support the supposition that this
past year (1953) was an unusually late sea-
son in the Back River area. These frag-
mentary bits of evidence, then, would sug-
gest that our report on waterfowl breeding
must be considered as representing a fairly
typical season’s conditions, and that, as far
as temperatures are concerned, only occa-
Sional seasons might be expected to be more
favorable.

One further possible explanation of the
waterfowl scarcity would be that a major

3) BACK RIVER WEATHER CONDITIONS. Temperature
readings were taken at two-hour intervals when
time permitted, from July 15 to August 6. Maximum-
minimum temperatures were recorded July 20
through July 29, and on August 4, 5, and 6. Preci-
pitation, amount of cloudiness and wind velocity
were recorded daily. The lowest temperature record-
ed was 34° on July 23 and the lowest average daily
temperature recorded was 45° on July 28. The
highest temperature tallied was 77° at noon on
August 3. The highest daily average, 62°, was on
August 5. The greatest daily variation recorded was
33° (43°-76°) on August 4. Precipitation occurred on
8 days but was so light that it was measurable only
on three days when 5/16, ¥, and 1/16 inches fell,
for a total of 2 inch. Winds of 25-38 miles per hour
(estimated from the Beaufort scale) were frequent
and winds up to 46 miles per hour were recorded
on two days.

8 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

shift in the breeding grounds of these geese
may have taken place. If this has occurred,
weather or food conditions must be the
cause, since human interference in this area
can not have changed materially in the past
100 years. There is some precedent for sup-
posing that such a shift away from a large
area as a breeding grounds could occur.
Preble (9) did not mention finding in 1902
Blue and Snow Geese around Eskimo Point
where Soper (13) reported they were nest-
ing in 1944 and had been for sometime be-
fore that; and, where there were still large
numbers breeding this past season (1953).
Porsild (8) reported seeing no Snow Geese
nesting on Banks Island in 1949, a particu-
larly late season, where Pilot Ernie Boffa
had seen large numbers in previous years.
Many nested there again last year (1953)
(correspondence, E. O. Hohn). Further-
more, Soper’s report (15) of the unexplained
shift of the migrating Blue and Snow Geese
in spring from their Grant’s Lake, Manitoba,
resting area suggests that geese are capable
of making major changes in what might be
considered “permanent” ancestral flight
lanes.

It might be suggested that another reason
for our lack of evidence of breeding geese
was that we simply missed the lakes where
they bred this year. If they retained their
habit of moving down onto the Back River,
as both Back (2) and Anderson (1) found
them doing at the same time as during the
summer of our visit, then we should have
encountered them somewhere on the 130
miles we covered along that river.

The extreme scarcity of predatory birds
was also unexpected. No Snowy Owls were
seen and as noted above, only one pair of
Peregrine Falcons and one pair and a lone
bird of the Roughlegged Hawk were found
in the base camp area. Six transient Para-
sitic Jaegers and a few non-breeding Herring
and Glaucous Gulls complete the list of pre-
datory birds Competition from mammalian
predators could hardly be a factor. (A re-
port by Harvey L. Gunderson, John Jarosz,
and Breckenridge on the mammals en-
countered appeared in Journ. Mam., Vol. 36,
No. 2, May 1955, pp. 254-259.) One family
of Arctic Foxes lived 342 miles west of camp;
another family den was located 13 miles up
the Back River; and some distant barking
heard one night from across the bay pos-
sibly indicated the range of another family.
No wolves were seen or heard. A few ap-

[Vol. 69

parently fresh tracks were seen, but we
found the freshness of tracks in this region
could be very deceiving. The population
levels of the prey species probably was the
determining factor. Lemmings, both Col-
lared and Brown, occurred in the area. One
hundred snap traps, set in lines intersecting
various habitats, took 31 specimens in 1898
trap nights (.0162 specimens per trap night).
Comparison of these data with Shelford’s
(13) Churchill figures would seem to justify
our considering these rodents as hardly at
an extreme low in population, but certainly
not abundant.

Snowy Owls appeared in the northern
states in moderate numbers in the winter of
1953-1954. Although this suggests a low in
lemming populations during the previous
summer (1953), such invasions usually result
from low average regional population levels
(14) and would not necessarily mean a mini-
mum lemming population in this particular
area.

Small, scattered populations of Parry’s
Ground Squirrel were also found. Five speci-
mens of these were taken from the several
small colonies which were located within
3 to 4 miles of camp. Avian prey for pre-
dators could have included Lapland Long-
spurs, American Pipits, Snow Buntings,
Horned Larks and Baird’s Sandpipers. All
these, as noted previously, were widespread
but definitely not abundant. Rock Ptarmigan
were rare and could hardly have afforded
much food.

It thus seems probable that if predatory
birds ever move into this barren region in
numbers, they probably do so only during
periods of peak abundance of prey species,
particularly Lemmings and Arctic Ground
Squirrels.

LITERATURE CITED

(1) Anderson, James. Chief Factor James
Anderson’s Back River Journal of
1955. Canadian Field Naturalist, 54:
63-67, 84-89, 107-109, 125-126, 134-
136; 55: 9-11, 21-26, 3844, 1940-41.

(2) Back, Sir George. Narrative of the Arc-
tic Land Expedition to the mouth of
the Great Fish River, and along
the shores of the Arctic Ocean in
the years 1833-34 and 35. Philadel-
phia, E. C. Carey and H. Hart. 1836.

(3) Cartwright, B. W., and Gavin, A. Where
the Ross’s Geese nest. Beaver, Out-
fit 271. pp. 6-8. December, 1940.

January-March, 1955]

(4) Clarke, C. H. D. A biological investiga-
tion of the Thelon Game Sanctuary.
Canada. National Museum Bulletin.
No, 96, Biological Series No. 25.
1940.

(5) King, Richard. Narrative of a journey
to the shores of the Arctic Ocean in
1833, 1834 and 1835 under the com-
mand of Captain Back. R. N. Lon-
don, R. Bentley, 1836.

(6) Manning, T. H. Notes on the country,
birds and mammals west of Hud-
son Bay between Reindeer and Baker
Lakes. Canadian Field Naturalist.
62: 1-28. 1948.

(7) Murie, Adolph. The Wolves of Mount
McKinley. U.S. Department of the
Interior. Fauna of the National
Parks Series No. 5. 1944.

(8) Porsild, A. E. Bird notes from Banks
and Victoria Islands. Canadian Field
Naturalist. 65: 40-42. 1951.

(9) Preble, E. A. A biological investigation
of the Hudson Bay region. U.S. De-
partment of Agriculture. Division

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

9

of Biology. Survey. North American
fauna. No 22. 1902.
A biological investigation of
the Athabasca-Mackenzie region.
U.S. Department of Agriculture.
Division of Biology. Survey. North
American fauna. No. 27. 1908.
(11) Savile, D. B. O. Birds observed at
Chesterfield Inlet, Keewatin in
1950. Canadian Field Naturalist.
65: 145-156. 1951.

(12) Seott, Peter. Wild geese and Eskimos.
Charles Scribner’s Sons, New York.

(10)

1951.
(13) Shelford, V. E. The abundance of col-
lared lemmings (Dichrostomyx

grenlandicus (Tr) var. richardsoni
Mer) in the Churchill area 1929 to
1940. Ecology, 24: 472-484. 1943.
The relation of snowy owl
migration to the abundance of col-
lard lemmings. Awk, 62: 592-596.
1945.
(15) Soper, J. D. Supplementary data con-
cerning the Blue Goose. Canadian
Field Naturalist. 60: 110-112. 1946.

(14)

NOTES ON MOVEMENTS OF BANDED MUSKRATS ”?

L. E. WRaGG
Dept. of Anatomy, University of Wisconsin, Madison.

URING a study of the muskrat ?, observa-

tions on the movements of banded
animals were made which add to the data
already accumulated on this subject.

Locality and Method

Most banding was done between May and
October 1947, near Oshawa, Ont., in a 25-
acre section of a privately-trapped 175-acre
marsh the population of which had been
moderately reduced the previous year by
disease. Traps used were Nationals; tags
were 50 x 5 mm. metal bands secured around
the tendon of Achilles. Final captures were
made by commercial trappers.

Results

During the period indicated, 81 muskrats
were tagged and released. Eleven live re-

1) From an M.A. thesis submitted to the Department of
Zoology, University of Toronto, financed in part by
the Research Council of Ontario and the Royal
Ontario Museum of Zoology.

2) Received for publication April 7, 1954.

3) Notes on the Life History of the Muskrat in Southern
Ontario. Can. Field-Nat., 67: 174.

captures were made during banding opera-
tions — usually at or near the site where
the individual was banded a few days
previously. Twenty-six recoveries were made
by commercial trappers in March, 1948, and
three more in March, 1949. Another record
was obtained from one of nine animals
tagged in fall in a game preserve at Hamil-
ton, Ont., and captured the following spring
(see Table 1).

These data apparently show two types of
movement; long wanderings involving re-
distribution of populations, and shorter local
movements. Of the 30 recaptured animals,
15 were over 100 yd. from the banding site,
and eight of these were more than % mi.
away. Nine animals were taken outside the
home marsh. They had apparently travelled
along watercourses, for not one was caught
in creeks or marshes as close as 400 yd.
distant, unless connected to the home marsh
by a direct water route.

10 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Table 1. Number of Muskrats Recovered at Various Distances from Banding Site.

ne EU EEEEEE EEE E EUEEESEE EEE EEEREEREE

Interval No. of Muskrats Recovered at these Distances Between
Animal ; Between Initial and Final Points of Capture.
Banded C
aptures || 9.100 yd. | 100-400 yd. | 400 yd-1mi.| 1-4 mi. | 8 mi.
5-10 mo. 15 5 0 3 1
Adults on. 62 és
17 mo. 0 1 2, 0 0
Young in 28 10 mo. 0 1 1 1 0
nest...
Total sos. 90 5-17 mo. 15 7 3 4 1

I

The one record of overland travel was that
of a huge female killed by a dog along a
railway track in winter. At this time a
number of untagged muskrats which were
frozen out of houses built in shallow water
were found wandering over the ice of the
marsh, across farmland, or frozen in snow.

All these emigrants (i.e. nine animals
which left the home marsh) left what ap-
peared excellent habitat the population of
which was well below normal. In most cases
they were recovered in less favorable
habitat and some were in poorer condition
than home marsh ’rats. It is highly im-
probable that population pressure or lack of
food prompted their leaving the home marsh.

Five of these nine animals wandered over a
mile, and were caught as follows. One was
found frozen in a hole in a creek bank 2%
miles away, where it had probably frozen or
drowned. Another was a kit which had been
tagged in the nest in July and the following
spring was taken in poor condition along a
small stony creek three miles from the
banding site. A third stepped into a trap
along a creek over a mile from the place
where tagged. The huge female killed by a
dog in winter has been mentioned. The other
was in a small creek eight miles distant from
the place where tagged.

Of 28 young tagged in the nest only three
were recovered but each of these was a
considerable distance from its home nest. A
litter of 10 was tagged on June 5. Two of
these were trapped the following spring —
one 175 yd., the other 500 yd. away. The
third was from a litter of 4 tagged July 26.
It was taken in spring three miles distant.

In contrast with these longer wanderings,
restricted local movements are suggested by
the recaptures of 15 animals within 100 yd.
of the place where banded at least five
months earlier. For example a female live-
trapped along a creek bank on October 24
was recaptured two days later at a small
willow tree 100 ft. distant. Five months later
it was killed at the same tree.

In October an adult male and an adult
female were taken and banded on successive
nights on a small house under construction.
When captured the following spring, the
female was only 150 ft. from the cabin but
the male was half a mile upstream. Such
an observation is in line with the idea that
animals in pairs or families construct a
winter house where they live till spring.
At this time males appear to wander ex-
tensively, females less so.

Summary and Interpretation

Thirty of 90 tagged muskrats were re-
covered a total of 41 times within 1% years
after banding. These data from the area

studied — a somewhat under-populated but
apparently excellent marsh habitat — sug-
gest:

1—During the year half the animals re-
main in a restricted locality, and possibly a
half but more certainly a third move to new
feeding grounds.

2—Of the adult population a) about half
remains in a limited area throughout the
year. Fifteen of 24 recaptures made after
an interval of 5-10 months which included
the active spring and fall periods were less

January-March, 1955]

than 100 yd. away. All of three others taken
after 17 months were at further distances.

b) At least 20% move to a different
locality during the year. Of 30 animals, 4
after 5-10 months, and two after 17 months
had moved at least %4 mile and averaged
one mile. These six, and two others taken
a little less than 400 yd. from the banding
site, all left the home marsh.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 11

3—Young apparently distribute themselves
away from the home cabin. Of 28 young
banded in the nest, three were recovered 10
months later at distances of approximately
175 yd., 500 yd., and three miles.

4—Movement tends to be along water
courses and does not appear to be stimulated
necessarily by population pressure or lack
of food.

MELANISM IN THE VARYING HARE,
LEPUS AMERICANUS ERXLEBEN *

RatpH D. Birp
Science Service, Entomology Division, Brandon, Man.

N December 16, 1953, a young hunter,

Clare Hillis, shot a completely melanistic
varying hare 15 miles northwest of Brandon
near Smart Siding. He notified the local press,
The Brandon Sun, a representative of which
in company with the writer visited Mr. Hillis.
Mr. Hillis stated that he had been hunting
rabbits in company with two other boys and
that they had shot about fifty, as rabbits were
very abundant in the willow and poplar scrub.
They had seen the one black rabbit, which
he was able to shoot. On the suggestion of
the writer he readily agreed to donate it to
The Manitoba Museum, Winnipeg. The mu-
seum director, R.W. Sutton, who made a
study skin of the specimen, reported that it
was a male in good flesh with a length of 15.7
inches and hind foot 4.75 inches. The speci-
men was completely black, with a bluish cast.
The toe nails and eyes were also black. Mr.
Sutton stated that he had no records for
melanistic snowshoe rabbits from Manitoba,
with the possible exception of a sight record
in June 1951 on the road to The Pas, when
he and two others thought they saw a black
rabbit cross the highway, but he did not get
a clear view of it as it ran through the bush.

A search of the literature has located only
the following reference to melanism: Seton
(Life Histories of Northern Animals, p. 624),
“numerous melanisms, that is black freaks, of
this hare, are on record; I have seen three
— one in Montreal, two in New Hampshire.”

Inquiries prompted by the scarcity of pub-
lished records have brought the following
replies.

National Museum of Canada — L.S. Russell.
“JT have examined the specimens of Lepus

americanus in our collection and find that
they include three melanistic examples, two
of them from Quebec and one from Prince
Edward Island. Among the specimens from
western Canada there are several with un-
usually dark backs or rumps, but none that I
should call melanistic.”

Royal Ontario Museum — R.L. Peterson.
“We have three such specimens in our col-
lections as follows:

Lepus americanus virginianus.
No. 23-11-15-1¢, Sutton, York Co., Ont., Nov.
15, 1923, 18.75" — 1.63" — 5.30”.
No. 10,017 2, Mont Albert, York Co., Ont.,
Jan. 8, 1937, 480-38-140, wt. 1725.
No. 16,962 2, Asphodel Twp., Peterborough
Co., Feb. 15, 1947, 449-53-126, wt. 1200.”

Provincial Museum, Province of Saskatche-
wan — Fred G. Bard. “We have only one
specimen here on record in the Provincial
Museum. This was taken on Wolverine Creek,
North of Marchwell, Saskatchewan, by Amil
Krewaltd. It was sent to us by Mr. W.H.
Schwalm, Box 532, Russell, Manitoba. This
was received on April 16th, 1953.

“Mr. Schwalm says he saw this melanistic
phase Varying Hare with the normal brown
members of the rest of the litter several times
in 1952. This specimen is mounted and on
display in the Provincial Museum.”

The University of British Columbia, Depart-
ment of Zoology — I. McT. Cowan. “I have
no specimens of melanistic Lepus nor do I
know of any being taken in the Province.”

In Journal of Mammalogy, February, 1954,
page 122, the taking of two melanistic snow-
shoe rabbits in New York in 1951 is recorded.

1) Received for publication February 4, 1954.

12 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

BADGERS IN KENT AND ELGIN COUNTIES, ONTARIO?

C. O. BARTLETT
Ontario Dept. of Lands and Forests, Aylmer, Ont.

EVEN BADGERS (Tazidea taxus (Schre-

ber) were captured in Kent and Elgin
Counties of south-western Ontario in the
period from June 1953 to May 1954.

A review of the literature indicates that
there are no recent records of badger for
either Kent of Elgin Counties. Cross and
Dymond (1929) included the badger as
among those species extinct in Ontario in
the wild state. Downing (1948) indicated
that they occurred occasionally in the west-
ern part of the Rainy River district and
that there were a few early reports from
the Lake Erie region. One recent record
was available for a specimen secured near
Port Dover, Norfolk County, in 1934.

I obtained the information presented here
from (a) an examination of five specimens
(Badgers 1, 4, 5, 6 and 7), (b) from inter-
views with persons responsible for the cap-
ture of all seven specimens and (c) from
periodic visits made to the localities where
the specimens were obtained.

BADGER 1 — Immature male; captured
near Highgate, Orford Township, Kent Coun-
ty, by Mr. Thomas Hastings, on June 17,
1953; total body length 18.5 in., length of
hind foot, 2.8 in., weight 2.6 lbs.; captured
alive in an apple orchard approximately thirty
feet from farm buildings; later killed by Mr.
Hastings.

BADGER 2 — Sex unknown; captured
near Highgate, Orford Township, Kent Coun-
ty, approximately one mile southeast of
Badger 1, by Mr. Cecil Stewart, on August
14, 1953; estimated weight 13 lbs; kept in
captivity at Rondeau Provincial Park, later
sent to Riverdale Zoo, Toronto.

BADGER 3 — Immature female; captured
near Clearville, Orford Township, Kent
County, by Mr. Alfred Shute, in the latter
part of April, 1954; captured alive with
Badger 4 in a den and killed by Mr. Shute.

BADGER 4 — Immature male; captured
with Badger 3; the small size (approximate-
ly six inches in total length), the short fur
and the description of the den given by Mr.
Shute indicate that Badgers 3 and 4 were

1) Received for publication June 29, 1954.

two of a litter of badgers born in that area.
Badger 4 is presently being held in captivi-
ty by Mr. Shute. The general appearance
and small size of this animal, examined by
the writer on June 13, 1954, is supporting
evidence that a litter of badgers was born
in that area.

BADGER 5 — Adult male; captured near
Clearville, Orford Township, Kent County,
by Mr. Alfred Shute, in the last week of
April, 1954. The animal was caught in a trap
approximately 500 yards from the location of
Badgers 3 and 4. Mr. Shute, who killed the
animal, estimated its weight at approximately
25 pounds. The carcass was examined by the
writer on June 13th and the skull obtained.

BADGER 6 — Immature female; captured
near New Glasgow, Aldborough Township,
Elgin County, by Mr. Murray McLean, on
May 8, 1954; found alive in rear of farm
buildings, later killed by Mr. McLean;
stretched pelt measured 21.8 in. in total
length.

BADGER 7 — Immature female; captured
near New Glasgow, Aldborough Township,
Elgin County, by Mr. Norman MeNichol, on
May 25, 1954. The location is approximately
two miles east of Badger 6. Captured alive,
this badger weighed 4 pounds on June 9,
1954. It is presently on display at Rondeau
Provincial Park.

It is interesting to note that all specimens
described here were taken within a radius
of nine miles from Muirkirk near the
Kent-Elgin County boundary. Sand hills and
gullies are numerous in this area, forming
part of the Bothwell sand formation that
extends south into Kent and Elgin Counties.
This formation supports a large woodchuck
(Marmota monax Linnaeus) population and
signs of badger activity were more prevalent
in the sandy knolls where woodchuck bur-
rows were concentrated. Ground squirrels
(Citellus sp.), an important food item for
badgers in the western parts of North
America, have not been reported in this
part of Ontario. The badger-woodchuck
association that exists in the Kent-Elgin

January-March, 1955]

County area presents an interesting field for
further investigation.
LITERATURE CITED

Cross, E. C. and J. R. Dymond, 1929. The
Mammals of Ontario. Roy. Ont. Mus. Zool.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 13

Handbook No. 1, University of Toronto Press,
52 pp.

Downing, S. C., 1948. A Provisional Check-
List of the Mammals of Ontario. Roy. Ont.
Mus. Zool., Misc. Pub. No. 2, Toronto, 11 pp.

——

THE GOLDEN EAGLE NESTING IN THE
GASPE PENINSULA, QUEBEC!

James L. BAILLIE
Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology, Toronto.

RECENT REVIEW of the _ breeding

records of the Golden Eagle (Aquila
chrysaétos) in eastern Canada has been
published by Snyder (1949), wherein evi-
dence of nesting, past and present, is given
for Nelson River (northern Manitoba), Cape
Henrietta Maria on James Bay, Rainy River
District, north shore of Lake Superior and
north Frontenac County (Ontario), Fort
Chimo, Michikamau, the north shore of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence and Anticosti Island
(Quebec), and for Prince Edward Island and
Nova Scotia.

More recent nestings at Fort Chimo have
been published elsewhere by Bateman (1953),
and Palmer (1949) has stated that the bird
still breeds in two or three counties in
Maine.

No suggestion that the Golden Eagle sum-
mered or bred in the Gaspé Peninsula on
the south shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence
in Quebec is given by Snyder, and there is
no evidence of any occurrences at all there
in the writings of Townsend (1920), Demille
(1926), Lewis (1930) or Ball (1938, 1943)
concerning the bird-life of that section of
Quebec.

Recently, in conversation with Mr. David
Lambden, I was assured, however, that a
pair has nested for many years on the east
slope of Mont Notre Dame on the Matane
River, in Couq Township, Matane County,
Que., roughly 50 miles southeast of Matane,
on the south shore of the Gulf of St. Law-
rence at the base of the Gaspé Peninsula.

Since a previously unrecorded breeding
place seemed indicated, I asked Mr. Lambden
to provide me with further details, which
he was kind enough to do by letter. Mr.
Lambden in 1951, was in the employ of the

1) Received for publication July 20, 1954.

Hammermill Paper Company, on the edge
of whose lands the nestings occurred, and
it was during that year his observations were
made.

Herewith are the significant parts of Mr.
Lambden’s letter:

“Further to our discussion [about]...
Golden Eagles. I spoke to Mr. [L. S.] Lister,
the local manager, and I understand that an
injured immature bird was taken by him
several years ago. It was mounted, and for
a long time occupied a prominent place in
the local grocery store of Desrosiers. With
renovation of the store, it was given to an
out-of-towner for his store and no one knows
now who that was...

“Several times young birds have been seen
and some captured and kept at the club at
Lake Matane. They leave the nest and in
learning to fly keep flopping down the steep
hillside through the woods until reaching
the road along the lake.

“The eagles have been carefully protected
by the Company... The [nest] site is actual-
ly on the Crown Lands in Couq Township,
leased by Price Brothers and Company,
Ltd. The Pechedek River [a tributary of
the Matane, west of Mont Notre Dame] is
being cut now by mechanical logging
methods. They could, by this method, log
all Mont Notre Dame... [but] there is not a
great amount of sawlog material on these
east slopes.

“I don’t know the elevation of Mont
Notre Dame. It would be about 2200 feet
with the eagles nesting at about 1600 feet.
The elevation of the lower end of the lake
[Matane] at the dam and club site is about
1100 feet.

“T have talked with workers of the Com-
pany who tell me that the pair has been here

14 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

more than 25 years. Michel Ouellet, a team-
ster, says he saw them in 1951 on March
20th. Michel first saw these birds when he
was 18 years old. He is now [1954] 57, so
that places the earliest record I can get at
1915...

“TAll persons interrogated stated] that the
birds were of a uniformly dark color, some
mentioning a little white under the wings,
and that all birds seen at close range had
fully feathered legs...

“There... [was] no mention of Bald
Eagles at all.

“On April 12th [1951] I saw one of the
eagles for the first time, at a fair height,
say 1500 feet, along the cliffs at the west
side of Lake Matane and with 8x glasses in
good light figured it to be a pretty uniform
dark color.

“IT saw the birds, singly or together, several
times after that [that summer], but each
time without glasses. On June 17th, in com-
pany with P. G. Machley, a student-assistant
from U. N. B., who has had some moun-
taineering experience, I reached the nest,
or rather the foot of a sheer cliff. Above
us about 20 feet was a great rock fissure
piled high with branches. The birds were
nowhere around.

“On August 5th, while driving along the
road below Mont Notre Dame we spotted
an eagle soaring along the faces about 200
feet above us and with the glasses made the
best observation of the season, which checked
out completely with Taverner and Peterson
field notes. Amazing size, isn’t it ?

[Vol. 69

“Again... Sept. 24th, I saw the birds over
the flowage of the Trout River Dam. Several
groups of scaups, and golden-eyes and some
black ducks immediately took wing and kept
passing haphazardly to and fro till the cir-
cling of the eagles carried them off to the
east...

““Mont Notre Dame has been studied a
number of times by the botanical-minded
priests for its Arctic type flora. Caribou
occur in the Gaspe National Park and wander
occasionally into the property. I saw one
here at the Trout Depot in March, apparent-
ly sick, and was told that one was killed
by a truck about 6 miles east of the Depot.”

LITERATURE CITED

Ball, Stanley C., Can. Field-Nat., vol. 52, no.
7, Oct., 1938, pp. 95-103; vol. 52, no..
8, Nov., 1938, pp. 120-122; and vol. 57,
no. 1, Jan., 1943, pp. 14.

Bateman, Bob., The Intermediate Naturalist
(published by the Toronto Intermedi-
ate Naturalists), no. 8, 1953, p. 5.

Demille, John B., Auk, vol. 43, no. 4, Oct.,
1926, pp. 508-527.

Lewis, Harrison F., Can. Field-Nat., vol. 44,
no. 6, Sept., 1930, pp. 129-130.

Palmer, Ralph S., Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol.
102, July, 1949, p. 144.

Snyder, L. L., Can. Field-Nat., vol. 63, no. 1,
Jan.-Feb., 1949, pp. 39-41.

Townsend, Charles W., Can. Field-Nat., vol.
34, no. 4, Apr., 1920, pp. 78-80; vol. 34,
no. 5, May, 1920, pp. 87-95.

DISTRIBUTION AND POPULATIONS OF THE EUROPEAN HARE
IN SOUTHERN ONTARIO *?

J. K. REYNOLDS
Division of Fish & Wildlife, Dept. of Lands and Forests, Maple, Ontario.

History of Introduction and Spread

HE PRESENT POPULATION of Euro-
pean hares (Lepus europaeus hybridus
Desmarest) (vide Peterson and Reynolds 1954)
is apparently descended from seven females
and two males which escaped from captivity
on the Bow Park Farm, about three miles
1) From a Ph.D. thesis, ‘‘The biology of the European
hare (Lepus europaeus Pallas) in southwestern On-
tario’’, Dept. of Zoology, University of Western On-
tario, 1952; financed in part by the Research Coun-

cil of Ontario.
2) Received for publication September 7, 1954.

south of the City of Brantford, Brant County,
Ontario, in 1912 (Dymond 1922). Additional
hares of this species may have entered On-
tario by crossing the International Boundary
between Canada and the United States in the
vicinity of the Niagara Peninsula as a result
of the introductions into Pennsylvania and
New York described by Silver (1924) and
Bump (1940), but this seems unlikely.

These “Jackrabbits”, as they are commonly
called in Ontario, attracted little attention

January-March, 1955]

during the first decade of their existence in
the province, but subsequent accounts in-
dicate that the population must have been
increasing and extending its range rapidly
during this period.

In its spread southwestward from Brant
County the European hare reached Aylmer
in Elgin County by 1919 (Anderson 1923), In-
gersoll in Oxford County by 1921 (Dymond
1922), Simeoe in Norfolk County by 1923
(Anderson 1923), and Port Rowan, also in
Norfolk County, by about 1925 (Snyder and
Logier 1931). Silver (1924) credited Pro-
fessor A. B. Klugh with a statement to the
effect that by 1924 the European hare oc-
cupied 4,500 square miles of country imme-
diately north of Lake Erie. By 1928 it had
penetrated as far west as Highgate in Kent
County (Dymond 1928a), and by the following
year it occupied most of southwestern Ontario
(Cross and Dymond 1929).

The northward extension of its range
brought it to Waterloo and Wellington Coun-
ties by 1921 (Dymond 1922, Soper 1923, Howitt
1925), Walkerton in Bruce County by 1928
(Dymond 1928a), Flesherton and Meaford in
Grey Ccunty by 1928 (Dymond 1928a, 1930),
Tottenham, Collingwood, and Penetanguishene
in Simcoe County by 1928 (Dymond 1928a,
Baillie 1928, Saunders 1932), and Burk’s Falls
in the Parry Sound District by 1948 (Downing
1948).

The earliest reports of the hare’s eastward
extension of range showed that it occupied
the Niagara Peninsula and Wentworth County
in 1921 (Dymond 1922, Howitt 1925). It pro-
gressed eastward through the country north
of Lake Ontario, reaching Woodbridge, Erin-
dale, and Maple in York County in 1925
(Baillie 1929, Snyder and Logier 1930, Mayall
1939). Its range had extended to Markham
and Uxbridge in Ontario County by 1928
(Dymond 1928a, Cross and Dymond 1929),
and into Darlington Township in Durham
County by 1930 (Allin 1940). Between 1930
and 1936 it must have crossed Northumber-
land County, for in the latter year it was
first reported in Prince Edward County
(Snyder et al. 1941). The earliest reports of
its occurrence in Frontenac County came from
Conservation Officer R. B. Page, Ontario
Department of Lands and Forests, who re-
ported (in litt. 1950) that one was killed on
Highway No. 38 near Hartington in the au-
tumn of 1948. According to District Biologist
H. G. Lumsden, (in litt. 1952), of the same

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 15

Department, this hare has not yet colonized
Amherst or Wolfe Islands in the extreme
eastern end of Lake Ontario and it is still
rare in Pittsburg Township, the southeastern-
most township of Frontenac County.

The foregoing extensions
shown in Figure 1.

of range are

At the present time the European hare
occupies most of the area of Ontario south
of the Precambrian Shield, exclusive of the
islands off the Bruce Peninsula, in the west
end of Lake Erie, and in the eastern end
of Lake Ontario. It has not yet populated
that part of extreme eastern Ontario east of
the Precambrian Shield, but it will probably
do so within the next few years.

According to Lt.-Col. L. S. Dear and Dr.
A. E. Allin (in litt. 1950) the European hares
transplanted from southern Ontario into the
District of Thunder Bay, reported by Allin
(1950), do not seem to have been successful.
District Forester G. F. Meyer, Ontario Depart-
ment of Lands and Forests, reported (in litt.
1949) that an attempt to introduce these hares
near Cochrane at some time subsequent to
1940 was a complete failure.

Burt (1946) and Burt and Grossenheider
(1952), in their maps intended to depict
the range of the European hare in the Great
Lakes area, have greatly exaggerated the situa-
tion as it applies to Ontario.

Populations

The majority of the foregoing reports of
the hare’s spread in Ontario were based on
occurrences of single animals or small num-
bers as the hare extended the periphery of
its range. Unfortunately, little was published
about its abundance in the districts in which
it was already established. Anderson (1923)
stated that the hare was “very abundant”
in a wide area of southwestern Ontario in
1923, and other early writers on the subject
made similarly inconclusive statements about
its abundance.

The only quantitative accounts of its num-
bers are those of Dymond (1928a, 1928b,
1929). He reported that in the winter of
1928-29, up until February 7, 300 hares were
killed by hunters in an area of six square
miles near Ilderton, Middlesex County. His
informant, the late Roger T. Hedley, a well-.
known farmer-naturalist, reported to him that
on February 18, 1929, seven hunters killed 10
hares and saw 80 more in an area of a little
more than one square mile in Lobo Town-

16 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

ship, Middlesex County. In east Nissouri
Township, Oxford County, similarly dense pop-
ulations may have been present, for Dymond
was able to report that “in organized hunts
that were held each Thursday throughout
the winter, 218 European hares were killed
by the end of December (1928) and 86 had
been killed on the last drive”.

According to verbal reports of many sports-
men who hunted hares in Ontario south and
west of Lake Simcoe, populations must have
continued at or above the high levels which
Dymond’s accounts suggest from the late
1920’s until the early 1940’s. Since it seemed
that ‘“jackrabbits” could be most successfully
hunted by groups of men operating in
“drives”, rather than by single hunters or
small parties, during the 1930’s small clubs,
organized for the purpose of shooting Euro-
pean hares, sprang up all over the southern
part of the province from about Oshawa west-
ward. Many hunters also came from Michigan,
New York, and Ohio to shoot hares.

Unfortunately, none of these hunters or
clubs seems to have kept useful records of
their activities. Today only verbal accounts
remain as yardsticks by which to measure the
past numbers of these hares. Yet, the very
abundance of the accounts and their general
consistency seem to add credibility to the
belief that populations of the order of at least
50 hares per square mile may have been
common in many parts of the province south
and west of Lake Simcoe between 1929 and
1941. In some instances, as suggested by
Dymond’s accounts given above, populations
of the order of 100 hares per square mile
may have existed during those years.

It seems reasonable to suppose that be-
tween 1912, when the hare first escaped from
captivity, and about 1928, when it first came
prominently to the attention of hunters, ex-
tensions of range were absorbing most of
the annual increments to the population. In
addition to building up local densities, hares
were flooding into hundreds of square miles
of the province that were almost devoid of
competitors and important predators.

By 1928, or thereabouts, it seems to have
come to occupy almost all of southwestern
Ontario, which then as now, apparently con-
stituted the best range in the province. In
the years that followed, further expansion of
its range could take it only northeastward
into areas progressively less well suited to it.
Inevitably, some hares crossed into the State

[Vol. 69

of Michigan (Burt 1946), but the Great Lakes
and their connecting waterways seem to
have presented an almost impenetrable barrier
to further progress southwestward. With this
removal of opportunities of further controlling
population densities by emigration into un-
occupied areas, the hare soon became an
abundant animal in Ontario south and west
of Lake Simcoe.

Between 1928 and 1941 many thousands
of hares were killed annually by hunters
without any apparent reduction in the size
of the population during that period. But
in the early 1940’s hunters began to appre-
ciate a widespread decline in the population.
Curiously enough, this decline coincided with
2 marked diminution in hunting pressure
dictated by war-time shortages of hunting
equipment, transportation, and hunters. Dur-
ing the period of reduced hare population
there does not, however, appear to have been
an appreciable shrinkage in the area occupied
by the hare. Rather the decline seems to
have been essentially in population density
and small numbers of hares were present in
all or most of the areas previously populated.

Throughout most of southwestern Ontario
this low level of the population lasted from
1941, or thereabouts, until about 1948. Some
hunters believe that an increase was notice-
able during the hunting season of 1947-48,
but it was definitely recognizable in 1948-49.
Judged by reported hunting success, the in-
crease first became tangible in Middlesex,
Oxford, Lambton, and Perth Counties, then it
spread in all directions and engulfed the
entire range of the hare in two or three years.
Hunters in the vicinity of London believe that
the rate of increase, which began about 1947
and was almost immediately followed by a
considerable upsurge in hunting pressure,
levelled off about 1950. The numbers of
hares taken by hunters in that area during
the hunting seasons of 1950-51, 1951-52, 1952-
58, and 1953-54 seem to have been about
the same each year, but in areas east of
Toronto the populations are still increasing.

Thus, in the European hare’s short history
in Ontario, quite profound numerical fluctua-
tions have occurred, but it is too soon to
draw conclusions about their longterm nature.
The spectacularly violent population fluctua-
tions of Lepus americanus are especially well
known, but other species of hares, including
Lepus europaeus, are reported to oscillate

17

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

January-March, 1955]

OTYVLNO NYYHLNOS

“4X04 905

ST}BIEp JO_ *oFLequo udeyyznos ut
eley uBsedoIng Jo suojtsueyxe eszusy
*T emnety

OFIequQ 9 xT

eS }
-'~ @THIHS NVINSNVOTud
JO uaqYOR NUTHLNOS.

SS

eTIT eXeT

t sy
‘ -

“ eg6Te
Bab TO een

uoIny exeyT

\ -

‘Sv6T @

\

T8 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

numerically in Europe (Middleton 1934, Migu-
lin 1937, Kolosov 1941, Andersen 1953).

At the present time (1954) this hare is
abundant in Lambton, Middlesex, Elgin, Nor-
folk, Haldimand, Brant, Lincoln, Welland, Ox-
ford, Perth, Huron, Wellington, Waterloo,
Dufferin and southern Simcoe Counties. There
is a locally high density of hares in the
“apple belt” of Grey and Simcoe Counties
adjacent to Georgian Bay. In these areas of
greatest abundance, in which the hares are
designated “abundant” in Figure 2, it is
estimated on the basis of field studies, inter-
views, questionnaires, reports of hunting suc-
cess, and other sources of information that
the average density is about 25 hares per
square mile.

Successively smaller population densities
occur in (a) Essex, Kent, Wentworth, Halton,
southern Peel, and York Counties, and (b)
the remainder of the range of the species
in the province.

Discussion

In the main, two alternative destinies seem
to face exotic plants and animals: they either
die out more or less completely, or they
thrive to the point of excess. Of all the
different kinds of organisms that have been
transplanted, accidentally or intentionally,
into various parts of the world, few of the
survivors seem to have “fitted in” with the
existing flora and fauna without altering the
generally balanced equilibrium present before
the introduction.

The factors which decide the fate of an
introduced species may seem to be more or
less obvious in some cases, but in many they
are far from apparent. It seems axiomatic
that if an organism is introduced into an area
whose climatic conditions are unsatisfactory
for it, it will fail to survive. Similarly, if
introduced plants or animals fail to encounter
conditions of soil, food, and moisture which
they require for survival, their eventual
failure seems assured.

Regardless of what other factors may act
to determine whether or not a transplanted
species will survive, it seems apparent that
even if the environmental conditions are satis-
factory, it will survive only if introduced into
a range in which its required ecological niche
is not already occupied by species with which
it cannot successfully compete.

Therefore if a species is transplanted into
an ecologically suitable environment in num-

[Vol, 69

bers sufficient for its reproductive and social
requirements, it ought to survive. However,
the failure of early introductions of the star-
ling into the New World indicates that this
does not always follow. If the exotic species
does survive, the degree to which it will
thrive then depends jointly upon its reproduc-
tive potential and the environmental resist-
ance which it encounters.

The spectacular biological success of Euro-
pean rabbits (Oryctolagus cuniculus) introduc-
ed into Australia is well known. They in-
creased to such proportions and destroyed
so much forage for sheep that the numbers
of sheep in New South Wales were reduced
from 60,000,000 in 1893 to 32,000,000 in 1923
(Henderson and Craig 1932). Apparently the
rabbits encountered highly satisfactory ecolo-
gical conditions. This, in conjunction with
a high biotic potential, enabled them to pop-
ulate the range quickly and in considerable
density.

The increase and spread of the European
hare in southern Ontario seems to have been
somewhat similar. Following the clearing of
the major portions of the forests of southern
Ontario around the middle of the nineteenth
century, a predominantly grassland biome
developed. While it is probably true that
woodchucks (Marmota monax) and several
genera and species of cricetid rodents flourish-
ed, it seems likely that the biome was
“faunally unsaturated”.

There was apparently an unoccupied ecolo-
gical niche well suited to a herbivore like
the European hare when it escaped in 1912.
Its increase and spread were favoured by
both the ecological conditions it encountered
and its own high reproductive potential.

In its present status, this hare does not
seem to come into serious competition with
native or domestic animals and it competes
only locally with man’s economic interests.
It therefore seems probable that as long as
its numbers can be maintained within present
limits by hunting and other controls, it should
continue indefinitely to be considered a bene-
ficial addition to the fauna of southern
Ontario.

REFERENCES

-ALLIN, A. E.

1940. The vertebrate fauna of Darling-
ton Township, Durham County,
Ontario. Trans. Roy. Can. Inst.

23:83-118.

19

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

January-March, 1955]

OTYVAiNO NaHHLNOS

tty;

LA,
uowuo) tyzpye U2 L222 Ze Lt

ZZ eyIT syeT LA

quepunqy

eouepunqe aAtTyeTer of fay

*ofIBqUO ULeyyNOS
uy erey usedoing ey} Jo souBpuNqe
SATIETOI pue UOT INGTIISTp eYewTxolddy
°g odnsty

—

OTIBQUC EHV]

LEE LES,
OX ZZ
Nee Za
Sanitere

Bo 2 \

ai aaheleeM ete
«wee te

uoIny 6xBT

20 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

1950. European hare introduced into
the District of Thunder Bay, On-
tario. Can. Field-Nat. 64(3):122-
124.
ANDERSEN, J.
1950. Harer og frugttraeer. Meddelelse

fra Vildtbiologisk Station, Kal,
Nr. 1:1-12.
ANDERSON, R. M.

1923. Further notes on the European
hare in Ontario. Can. Field-Nat.
37(4):75-76.

BAILLIE, J. L., JR.

1928. European hare at Collingwood.
Can. Field-Nat. 42(7):179.

1929. The European hare, a new mam-
mal for Toronto. Can. Field-Nat.,
43 (3) :64.

BUMP, G.

1940. The introduction and transplan-
tation of game birds and mam-
mals into the state of New York.
Trans. N. A. Wildlife Conf. 5:409-
420.

BURT We A:
1946. The mammals of Michigan. Univ.

Mich. Press, Ann Arbor.
BURT, W. H. and R. P. GROSSENHEIDER.
1952. A field guide to the mammals.
Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
CROSS, E. C. and J. R. DYMOND.
1929. The mammals of Ontario. Roy.
Ont. Mus. Zool., Handbook No.
1:1-55.
DOWNING, S. C.
1948. A provisional check-list of the
mammals of Ontario. Roy. Ont.
Mus. Zool., Mise. Pub. 2:1-11.
DYMOND, J. R.
1922. The European hare in Ontario.
Can. Field-Nat. 36(8):142-143.
1928a. The present range of the Euro-
pean hare in Ontario. Can. Field-
Nat. 42(4):95.
The European hare (jackrabbit)
in Ontario. Rod and Gun in Can-
ada, July 1928.
The spread of the European hare
in Ontario. Roy. Ont. Mus. Zool.
Bull. 2:9-11.
The European hare at Meaford.
Can. Field-Nat. 44(8):199.
HENDERSON, J. and E. L. CRAIG.
1932. Economic mammalogy. Thomas,
Baltimore.

1928b.

1929.

1930.

[Vol. 69

HOWITT, H.
1925. Another invasion of Canada. Can.
Field-Nat. 39(7):158-160.

KOLOSOV, A. M.

1941. ‘Reproductive biology. of the
common hare (Lepus europaeus
Pall.)” Zool. Zhurn. 20(1):154-
171. Moscow. (In Russian).
MAYALL, K. M.
1939. The natural resources of King

Township, Ontario, 1938. Trans.
Roy. Can. Inst. 22(48):1-54.
MIDDLETON, A. D.

1934. Periodic fluctuations in British
game populations. J. Animal Ecol.
3(2):231-249.

MIGULIN, A.
1937. Einige Gesetmassigkeiten der

Aenderungen in der Anzahl der
Hasen (Lepus europaeus Pall.)
in der Ukr. S.S.R. Trav. Mus.
Zool. 20103-113. Kiev. (In Rus-
sian, with German summary. Not
seen).

PETERSON, R. L. and J. K. REYNOLDS.

1954. Taxonomic status of the Euro-

pean hare in Ontario. Contrib.
Roy. Ont. Mus. Zool. and Pael.,
No. 38:1-7.

SAUNDERS, W. E.

1932. Notes on the mammals of On-
tario. Trans. Roy. Can. Inst. 18
(Part 2):271-309.
SILVER, J.
1924. The European hare (Lepus euro-

paeus Pallas) in North America.
J. Agric. Res. 28(11):1133-1137.
SNYDER, L. L. and E. B. S. LOGIER.

1930. A faunal investigation of King
Township, York County, Ontario.
Trans. Roy. Can. Inst. 17 (Part
2):167-208.

1931. A faunal investigation of Long

Point, and vicinity, Norfolk Coun-
ty, Ontario. Trans. Roy. Can. Inst. ,
18 (Part 1):117-236.

SNYDER, L. L. et al.

1941. A faunal investigation of Prince
Edward County, Ontario. Univ.
Toronto Studies, Biol. Ser. 48:1-

SOPER; J. D:
1923. The mammals of Wellington and

Waterloo Counties, Ontario. J.
Mammal. 4(4):244-252.

January-March, 1955]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 21

THE SEVENTY-SIXTH ANNUAL MEETING OF THE
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, DECEMBER 2, 1954

Report of Council

Since the last Annual Meeting, there were
four meetings of Council: December 7, 1953,
at St. Patrick’s College, with 17 members pre-
sent; February 25, 1954, at the home of Mr.
and Mrs. Hoyes Lloyd, with 19 members
present; September 24, 1954, at St. Patrick’s
College, with 15 members present; and Nov-
ember 8, 1954, at St. Patrick’s College, with
22 members present.

Appointments were made for 1954 as follows:

Editor of the Canadian Field-Naturalist — Dr.
H. A. Senn.

Business Manager — Mr. W. J. Cody.

Chairman of the Publications Committee —
Dr. L. S. Russell.

Chairman of the Excursions and Lectures
Committee — Dr. W. I. Illman.

Chairman of the Reserve Fund Committee —
Mr. Hoyes Lloyd.

Chairman of the Special Lectures Committee —
Dr. L. S. Russell.

Chairman of the Membership Committee —
Mr. W. K. W. Baldwin.

Chairman of the Bird Census Committee —
Mr. R. D. Harris.

Chairman of the Macoun Field Club Com-
mittee — Dr. E. L. Bousfield.

Chairman of the Gatineau Park Advisory Com-
mittee — Col. W. W. Mair.

Representatives, Canadian Section, Interna-
tional Committee for Bird Preserva-
tion — Dr. H. F. Lewis, Mr. Hoyes
Lloyd.

Report of the Publications Committee

During the period December 1, 1953 to
December 1, 1954, two numbers of Volume
68 of The Canadian Field-Naturalist were pub-
lished, with a total of 94 pages. Papers, notes
and reviews were distributed as follows:

Papers Notes Reviews
BOCANYeeeeee eee 5
Ichthyology ............. a}
Invertebrate Zoology 1
Mammalogy ............... 1
Ornithology... 4 7 2
Palaeontology .......... 1

Miscellaneous

Three maps and eleven other illustrations
were used. Sale of single and back numbers
of the Naturalist during the year amounted
to $487.55. Council approved the preparation
of a guide-book to the geology of the Ottawa
District, and this is being written by Dr. Alice
E. Wilson.

Report of the Excursions and Lectures
Committee

The Annual Dinner of the Club was held in
April, the guest speaker being Dr. Alice E.
Wilson, who gave an illustrated talk on her
trip up the Amazon River. Displays provided
by the Macoun Field Club were well received
by the 132 persons in attendance. About 65
members and friends attended the Members’
Night held on November 18 at the Ottawa
Normal School, when talks were given by the
Rev. Father F. E. Banim, Dr. H. H. J. Nesbitt,
Dr. L. S. Russell, Dr. D. B. O. Savile, and
Mr. E. A. O. Turnau. A refreshment hour,
arranged by Miss Deborah Haight, was much
enjoyed by all. The planned spring excursions
suffered a surfeit of rain, except for the all-
day trip to Pakenham, which was well attended.
The study groups have been active during
the year, holding both indoor meetings and
excursions. A large number of local members
took part in the activities.

One number of the Newsletter has been
issued, and considerable material is in the
hands of the editor, Mrs. Ken Bowles, toward
another number. Contributions from members
will be welcomed.

Report of the Special Lectures Committee
Three Audubon Screen Tours completed the
1953-54 series:

January 8—A Missouri Story, by Alfred G.
Etter.
March 22— Western Discovery,
Reynolds.
20 — By Erie’s Changing Shores, by G.
Harrison Orians.

The following Audubon Screen Tours of the
current season complete the programme for
1954:
October 19

by Laurel

April

—Land of the Scarlet Macaw.
by Ernest P. Edwards.

November 27 — Wildlife of Marsh and Moun-

tain, by Cleveland P. Grant.

22 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Report of the Membership Committee

Following the recommendation of last year’s
chairman, the committee was divided at the
beginning of the year into two groups. One
subcommittee, headed by Mr. W. J. Cody,
dealt with out-of-town membership; the other,
headed by Miss Verna Ross, attended to the
Ottawa membership. This proved a convenient
division of the work of the committee and
should be continued.

The subcommittee on out-of-town member-
ship launched an enquiry to increase member-
ship in Canada through present members
seattered across the country at various biolo-
gical institutions. It is recommended that
membership campaigns follow a varying pat-
tern of canvassing individuals in Canada and
abroad, as well as libraries and scientific
institutions.

The subcommittee on Ottawa membership
made a strong appeal to the audience at the
Audubon Screen Tours. Exhibits were dis-
played on one side of the auditorium rotunda
and an information desk set up on the other
side. Parents of Macoun Field Club members
were canvassed by letter with an encouraging
response. Memberships falling in arrears were
canvassed by mail to keep up their subscrip-
tions. A special evening was arranged by the
Fern Group to welcome new members and
this was addressed by the chairman.

A prospectus of the activities of the Club
was drafted but not yet published. This is
designed for use over several years and
contains information which will not go quickly
out of date.

The membership at large has been main-
tained in 1954 and the Ottawa membership
increased.

Report of the Macoun Field Club Committee

The present committee consists of Miss V.
Humphreys, Miss M. Godwin, and Mr. J. S.
Bleakney, appointed by the National Museum,
Mr. H. Groh and Mr. D. C. Maddox, appointed
by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club; and
the chairman, Dr. E. L. Bousfield.

The meetings of the Macoun Field Club
were held, as in previous years, at weekly in-
tervals in the National Museum of Canada;
the Senior Group (Grades 10 and up) on
Tuesdays after school, and the Juniors (Grades
5-7) and Intermediates (Grades 8 and 9) at
different hours on Saturday morning. The

[Vol. 69

programme included 21 regular meetings, of
which seven were field trips to various suitable
nature spots in the vicinity of Ottawa. The
Senior Group numbered 18 active members,
headed by Earle Covert and a committee of
four. Similar committees acted for the Inter-
mediate Group of 28 under the chairmanship
of Chris Durden, and for the Junior Group of
28 under Jim Ingles.

The programmes of all three groups were
given over primarily to special talks and dis-
cussions led by members of the Museum staff,
the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, parents
and friends of the Club members. A Christ-
mas party was held in the Museum auditorium
on Dec. 5, at which the election of officers
for the year took place. The sixth annual
birthday party also took place there on April
24. Badges were given out to 19 new mem-
bers (2 Senior, 6 Intermediate, and 11 Junior)
and prizes were donated to the winner of the
attendance and merit game in both Interme-
diate and Junior Groups. A special party was
held for other successful contestants in the
game.

The Club’s activities included the publica-
tion of a fall and spring issue of the “Little
Bear” (No.’s 6 and 7), edited by Mr. Groh
and Mr. Maddox, and very well contributed
to by the members. The Club continued to
provide a team of ushers, under the leader-
ship of Earle Covert, for the Audubon Screen
Tours. A large exhibit of the collections and
hobbies of the members was displayed at the
Annual Banquet of the O.F.-N.C. in April.
All these activities have been reported upon
in detail at previous meetings of the Council,
and the special events reported upon in the
Ottawa newspapers. A radio broadcast on part
of the Club’s activities was made in December.
Plans are now being made for a televised
showing of a club meeting, thus spreading
more effectively and to larger audiences the
work that these young Ottawa naturalists have
been doing.

Report of the Bird Census Committee

The Christmas Bird Census was taken on
December 27, 1953. A total of 33 species and
5,519 individuals was reported. The Christ-
mas Bird Census for all of Canada was pub-
lished in the January-March, 1954, issue of
The Canadian Field-Naturalist.

R. FRITH, President,
H. J. SCOGGAN, Secretary.

January-March, 1955]

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL STANDING

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

23

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, NOVEMBER 26, 1954

Assets

Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54
Bills receivable

Receipts

Bal. in Bank, Nov. 30/53
Fees:
Current
Advance and
Arrears
Assoc.

1,664.80

337.89
39.00

Separates

Single and Back Numbers
Miscellaneous

Audubon Tours (net)

Assets

Hydro-Electric Power
Comm. Ont., Bonds, 3%
Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54

Receipts
Bale ine Banks sNOves 30/53). ecc-s.-.-
Bankgsintenesty see eee
Bond interesty -.. ee
Assets

Hydro-Electric Power
Comm. Ont., Bonds, 3%
Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54

CURRENT ACCOUNT

3,745.57
10.70
240.00

$3,996.27

2,134.66

2,041.69

482.32
486.90

48.34
470.60

$5,664.51

Liabilities

Audubon Screen Tours, guarantee

Bills outstanding
Balance

Expenditures

Can. Field-Nat. (2 nos.)
Editor’s honorarium

Business Mgr’s Hon. ...........

Separates
Illustrations
Postage and Stationery
Miscellaneous
Bank discount

Foreign exchange ....................

Cheques 0/s 1953

Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54 ...

RESERVE FUND

Liabilities
3,000.00 NIL
475.80
$3,475.80
Expenditures
382.28 Rent safety deposit box ....................
S52 balasinu banks NOVO D4 eee
90.00
$ 480.80
PUBLICATION FUND
Liabilities
1,500.00
295.43 NIL

$1,795.43

750.00:
623.10
2,623.17

$3,996.27

998.40:
100.00
15.00
398.10
74.44
95.56
74.54
25.40
22.50:
115.00
3,745.57

$5,664.51

5.00
475.80

$ 480.80

24 THE
Receipts
Baliyin' Banks sNov:730/53i0 2. ee 245.18
IBankoimteCrestiecs er eee 5.25
Bond" cinterest) (eee eee 45.00
$ 295.43

Audited and found correct.

(Signed) I. L. Conners,
C. Frankton.

Auditors.
Nov. 26, 1954.

CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Expenditures

Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54 295.43

$ 295.43

R. J. Moore
Treasurer.

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

Mid-Atlantic migration of Long-tailed
-Jaegers and Terns (sp?). — In May 1950,
bird records were kept daily while I was a
‘passenger aboard the Canadian Pacific S.S.
“Empress of France” en route from Montreal
to Liverpool via Cape Race and Inishtrahull.

On May 10, position at 12.00 hours, 53°
19° N., 26° 45' W., a remarkable flight of
Long-tailed Jaegers (Stercorarius longicau-
dus) was recorded. The weather was bright,
with fog patches, the wind southeast. Before
10.00 hours I had noted one hundred of the
birds, all of which were light coloured. Their
flight was light and airy as they drifted by
in loose flocks; swift and erratic when one
pursued another. As their maximum altitude
did not exceed two or three hundred feet
they were seen perfectly with field-glasses.

I was taken to the bridge by courtesy
of Chief Officer, E. F. Aikman, R.D., R.N.R.,
to check their course which was roughly at
right angles to ours. His calculation showed
them to be following a route which would
take them from North-west Africa to Green-
land.

Fourth Officer, R. Stewart, who was on
watch at the time, reported that the birds
had been crossing our course since 4.30
hours.

The flight continued more or less inter-
mittently as follows:

11.00 hours, a few;

14.30 hours, four to six;

15.15 hours, a few;

15.30 hours, 16 going north-east;
16.00 hours, 27.

Thus for about twelve hours we passed
across the flight line of this migration. The

last two groups of birds seen had a different
course from the others.

Twenty or thirty Terns were seen about
13.30 hours and my notes state that they
were feeding by diving. At 14.30, 12 Terns
were seen and then 25 more, the latter rest-
ing on the sea and flying. Terns and Jaegers
were seen together, but the Terns were not
pursued. These were presumably Arctic
Terns, and even without positive identifica-
tion it seems of interest that they were
migrating in mid-Atlantic, that they were
apparently feeding on migration, that they
were alighting on the water, and that they
were associated with Long-tailed Jaegers.
Wynne-Edwards! has reported upon Arctic
Tern migration in the Atlantic and calls the
Jaegers their inevitable companions. He
found that the Terns stop to feed in the
Atlantic only on the rarest occasions and
“never by any chance settle on the water”.
Nicholson? has found them feeding at sea.

Wynne-Edwards (loc. cit.) tells of passing
through a great flock of Long-tailed Jaegers
on May 23, 1933 in 51° N., 23° 50’ W. The
position where he met this flock, according
to Mr. Aikman, is about two hundred miles
from where I observed a migration on May
10, 1950, and about on the same great circle
route from North-west Africa to Greenland.

It was an interesting chance that per-
mitted Wynne-Edwards’ unique observation
of this trans-Atlantic migration to be con-
firmed by me.

HOYES LLOYD, Rockcliffe Park, Ont.

1 Wynne-Edwards, V. C. — On the habits and dis-
tribution of birds on the North Atlantic. Proc. of the
Boston Soc. of Nat. Hist. Vol. 40, No. 4, pp. 233-346.

2 Nicholson, E. M. — Bird notes from the North Atlantic.
British Birds 22: 122-133.

January-March, 1955]

BIRD BREEDING CENSUS, 1953

Location. Burnet Que.; in Gatineau Valley 15
miles from Hull, P.Q.

Area. 19 acres in a strip 50 yards each side
of a virtually disused road, and 750 yards
in length. Area crossed by small stream.

Description. Well matured second growth de-
ciduous forest. 60% maple, 20% beach, 10%
elm, 10% mixed oak, basswood, yellow birch,
spruce and hemlock. Many dead trees still
standing. Strip along road, 25 yards wide,
composed of willow, poplar, alder, sumac, and
saplings of forest trees, to height of 10 feet.

Edge. Area bounded on all sides by similar
thick bush for at least 500 yards. Strip of
roadway provided 750 yards of edge for oc-
cupants of area.

Coverage. Average of 10 times per week
from 1st May 1953 to 31st July 1953. Hours
varied from 6.30 a.m. to 10 p.m. Total man-
hours, over 100.

Breeding population. Actual numbers of
breeding pairs; in parenthesis number of
pairs per 100 acres where 3 or more pairs
in area. Chestnut-sided Warbler 4 (21); Oven-
bird 4 (21); White-throated Sparrow 4 (21);
Robin 3 (16); Veery 3 (16); Yellow-throat 3
(16); Winter Wren 2; Red-eyed Vireo 2;
Black-throated Blue Warbler 2; Black-throated
Green Warbler 2; Mourning Warbler 2; Red-
start 2; Song Sparrow 2; Yellow-shafted Flick-
er 1; Sapsucker 1; Hairy Woodpecker 1;
Wood Peewee 1; White-breasted Nuthatch 1;
Hermit Thrush 1; Philadelphia Vireo 1; Black-
burnian Warbler 1; Rose-breasted Grosbeak 1.
Total pairs 19 acres, 44; for 100 acres, 232.

Visitors. Individuals regularly seen in area
but not believed to have nested in it. Ruffed
Grouse 2, Pileated Woodpecker 1, Downy
Woodpecker 2, Crested Flycatcher 1, Blue
Jay 1, Wood Thrush 2, Warbling Vireo 2.

Remarks. The large population of Warblers
and Sparrows may be due to the favourable
feeding and nesting area provided by the
partially grown up road area.

Observer: T. F. T. MORLAND,
Halifax, N.S.

Nutria, Myocastor coypus, in Thunder Bay
District, Ontario. — On May 15, 1953, John
Flontek trapped a strange animal in the
Whitefish River near the village of Hymers,
20 miles west of Fort William in the District
of Thunder Bay, Ontario. The skinned carcass
was subsequently submitted to me for identifi-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 25

cation by Frank Sitch on whose property the
animal had been taken. It proved to be a
nutria, or coypu, Myocastor coypus, weighing
seven pounds. The carcass was forwarded to
the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology and
Palaeontology where my identification was
confirmed by Dr. Randolph Petersen. On
November 29, 1953, another trapper, Victor
Ranta, trapped a second coypu eight miles
farther up the same river. He gave it to
George Whitefield, Wildlife Management Of-
ficer, Ontario Department of Lands and For-
ests, who permitted me to examine it.
According to Mr. Sitch, John Flontek took
two more nutria in January and February,
1954, near Hymers.

Dr. Petersen (1953: in litt.) informs me
two nutria had previously been taken in south-
ern Ontario but both were traced as recent
escapes from fur-farms. It would appear
therefore that the four specimens taken in
the District of Thunder Bay were the first
feral nutria to be taken in Ontario.

The nutria is a South American rodent
originally introduced by fur-farmers into the
United States and Canada. They were re-
leased, or escaped, in several States and are
now established in Louisiana, Oregon, and
probably California. In the mid-Western States
they have been reported from Iowa and
Michigan. Harvey L. Gunderson, Museum of
Natural History, University of Minnesota
(1954: in litt.) informs me several apparently
feral nutria have been taken in Minnesota,
the northern boundary of which lies only
20 miles south of Hymers. These may have
originated from releases made in the Rat
Root River, between 1941 and 1945, or from
animals turned loose in Ontario across Rainy
River from Baudette, Minnesota. Both these
regions of north-western Minnesota are in
the Hudson Bay Drainage and remote from
the Whitefish River, a tributary of the Kami-
nistiquia River, which enters Lake Superior
at Fort William.

It is possible the nutria has become estab-
lished in other Ontario localities and that its
presence has been overlooked. Walter E.
Howard (Jour. Mamm. 34: 512-513, 1953) re-
ported 15 animals were trapped in a California
swamp and it was assumed none survived.
The following year, however, 30 more nutria
were trapped in the same region. It is not a
preferred fur-bearer and is considered a
potential hazard due to its burrowing habits.
In the Whitefish River area it is not likely
to become a menace, although, should it

26 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

become established and multiply, it might
compete with the muskrat and the beaver
which occur commonly in the watershed.

A. E. ALLIN,
Fort William, Ontario.

COUGAR or MOUNTAIN LION reported in
North-western Ontario. — On July 23, 1953,
Albert Sideen, master mechanic and Edward
Anderson, electrical superintendant for the
Great Lakes Paper Co. Ltd. of Fort William,
were driving on the Trans-Canada highway
near Martin, about thirty miles west of Fort
William when they saw by the side of the
road what they are convinced was a moun-
tain lion. They drove past, turned round
and drove back again. As the animal was
still there they were able to get a good view
of it. They state that it was of the cat
family, of a tawny colour and with a long tail.
They estimated it to be about 5% feet long
and standing about thirty inches high. On
their return they reported what they had seen
to Mr. R. Windsor, chief Fish & Wild Life
Officer of the Ontario Department of Lands
& Forests, Port Arthur. I had subsequent
confirmation from Mr. Sideen.

On August 6th. 1953, Leslie E. McCauley,
route supervisor for Palm Dairies Ltd. of
Fort William, asked me if I had ever heard
of a mountain lion being seen in the district.
As I knew nothing of the previous report at
that time, I told him I had not. He then told
me that on the previous evening while on
a fishing trip about twenty-five miles west
of Fort William, he was driving along a little
used side road when he saw what he was sure
could be nothing else but a mountain lion
crossing the road. He has since told me that
he saw it again in the same vicinity four days
later. His description conformed to that given
by Mr. Sideen. Like myself, he had no
knowledge of any previous report. Unfortun-
ately the weather was very dry and there was
no opportunity to examine any foot prints.

During the first week in September of
1953, Winston Boyle, salesman of Port Arthur,
was driving at night about five miles east of
Beardmore when a cougar with two cubs
crossed the road well within range of his
headlights. Being at night he was unable
to see the colour, but he states that the old
one was between five and six feet long, had a
long tail and stood at least thirty inches
high. He says that he knows both the lynx

[Vol. 69°

and the bob-cat well and they were certainly
not either of those species.

A further report has been published in an
issue of the Times-Journal of Fort William
under date of April 17, 1953. In substance
the report is as follows.

About 6.40 p.m. on April 13, 1954, Charles
Seal, engineer, and Glen Chisamore, fireman,.
were on a run on the C.N.R. between Port
Arthur and Atikokan and saw a cougar about
43 miles west of Port Arthur. The report
states that the animal cut across the tracks in
front of the train and leaped up on a rock cut
about six feet high without any trouble. They
described it as about five feet long and brown
in colour. At one point it was not more than
twenty-five feet from them. It headed up a
rocky hillside into the timber as the train
passed. Both men have worked in British
Columbia and have seen cougars in the Rocky
Mountains. Mr. Chisamore says, ‘“‘we saw it
right there, on the hoof, and there was no
mistake about it”.

While we have only sight records so far,
the evidence appears to be conclusive, beyond
doubt. It is strengthened by the fact that
there have been at least twenty-one sight re-
cords from Minnesota during the past five
years, as reported in the 1952 September-
October issue of the Conservation Volunteer,
the official bulletin of the Minnesota Depart-
ment of Conservation. Several of these records
are from the north-eastern portion of the
State, bordering on Ontario, at least three
of them at no great distance from Fort Wil-
liam: one at Cascade River, about 100 miles
south of Fort William on June 22, 1950; one
at Crow Creek, about 166 miles south of
Fort William on June 8, 1951; and one at
Two Harbours about 174 miles south of
Fort William in the fall of 1948.

There have been other reports from sur-
rounding districts, but as I have been unable
to get any first hand particulars, they have
not been included.

L. S. DEAR,
Port Arthur, Ont.

Ross’s Goose in Ontario. — During the
annual meat harvest of the natives at Han-
nah Bay of James Bay, Ontario, an Indian
shot a Ross’s Goose (Chen rossiz) on October
13, 1953. The bird was procured by Mr. Paul
Holmes, preserved aS a specimen and pre-
sented to the Royal Ontario Museum. The

January-March, 1955]

specimen, an adult female, no. 81311, sub-
stantiates the first known occurrence of this
species in Ontario. According to Bent (U. S.
Natl. Mus. Bull., no. 130, p. 188) the nearest
casual occurrence is for Winnipeg, Manitoba.

L. L. SNYDER,
Royal Ontario Museum of
Zoology and Palaeontology,
Toronto.

White Pelicans at Crescent Beach, B.C. —
On June 1, 1954, Mr. Lawrence Berry, a com-
mercial fisherman living on the bank of the
Nicomekl River, arrived at our home about
8 am. to say that some large white birds
which he took to be pelicans were resting
and preening their feathers on the marsh
just north of the mouth of the river. I drove
up there at once. With an 18 power tele-
scope there was no question. Four white
pelicans (Pelecanus erythrorhynchos) were
feeding in a back water just west of the
Great Northern track. About half an hour
later they took flight. After circling Mud
Bay they spiraled to a great height and
headed inland in a south-easterly direction.
According to “The Bird Fauna of B.C.” by
Munro and Cowan there is a nesting colony
at Stum Lake in the Cariboo Parklands.
Reported to be casual on the coast there is a
record from Comox, B.C., June 15, 1941. Mr.
Berry who is a good observer and has been
crab fishing for several years in Boundary
Bay tells me he has never seen pelicans and
I have no previous record for this part of
the Fraser Valley.

‘MARTIN W. HOLDOM,
Crescent Beach, B.C.

- First Record of the Starling in the North-
west Territories. — On April 27, 1954, a dead
Starling (Sturnus vulgaris) was found at
latitude 60° 04’, longitude 112° 25’, about
26 miles west of Fort Smith, N.W.T. This
appears to be the first record of the Starling
in the Northwest Territories and the north-
ernmost record in North America to date.
Formerly, the record was held by Churchill,
Manitoba, in latitude 58° 45’ (Beckett, Can.
Field-Nat., 1953, 67 (1): 44; and Mayfield
Auk, 1954, 71 (2): 199) where an individual
was first reported in June, 1940, and suc-
cessful nesting was observed in 1952.

Circumstances surrounding the finding of
the present specimen were as follows. All
winter the writer had operated a line of
poison stations in connection with the ex-
perimental wolf control project on some

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 27

extensive prairies locally known as the “salt
plains’. With the advent of spring, the baits
were being picked up and transported to
Fort Smith for destruction by deep burial.
On April 27, while loading two baits, the
dead Starling was found. It seems probable
that the bird had eaten some of the poisoned
meat.

The weather at this time was abnormally
cold. Winter conditions still prevailed with
more than a foot of snow on the prairies
and temperatures generally ranging between
O°F. and 32°F.

A study skin has been prepared which
is at present in the representative collection
of local birds and mammals in the writer’s
laboratory at Fort Smith, N.W.T.

W. A. Fuller,
Canadian Wildlife Service,
Fort Smith, N.W:T.

Viviparus viviparus, L. in eastern Canada.
— During the summer of 1953 a number of
large, strikingly coloured, operculate snails
were observed and collected in the tidal
zone of the upper (fresh-water) part of the
St. Lawrence estuary. The shell, approxi-
mately one inch in height and three-quarters
of an inch in width, is typically cream-
coloured and marked by three brown or pur-
plish-brown spiral bands; occasional speci-
mens are uniformly purplish-brown.

Specimens were sent to Dr. A. La Rocque,
Ohio State University, who identified them
as Viviparus, probably of European origin.
At his suggestion, Germain’s “Faune de
France: Mollusques’, 1930, was consulted
and the shells proved to be Viviparus vivi-
parus L. The species is new to Canada, and
perhaps also to North America.

Specimens were obtained from the follow-
ing localities in Quebec province: St. Law-
rence south shore:—Lévis, St. Michel Plage,
St. Vallier, Berthier, and Montmagny;
empty shells at L’Islet, St. Jean Port Joli,

and St. Roch des Aulnaies. St. Lawrence
north shore:— Chateau Richer and Cap
Tourmente; empty shells at St. Joseph de

la Rive (Ile aux Coudres) and Pte-au-Pic.
The dead shells were probably transported
seaward to the salt water localities by strong
tidal currents and by ice action in winter.
No living specimens were observed along the
south shore from Lévis upriver to Trois-Ri-
vieres in June 1954.

28 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

The. fact that this species, abundant and
conspicuous along the shores below Quebec
City, was not recorded by Ami, Bell, Pro-
vancher, Whiteaves, and other early concho-
logists, supports the suggestion of Dr. La

[Vol. 69

Rocque that the colony stems from recently
released aquarium stock.

E. L. Bousfield,
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa.

REVIEWS

Audubon Guides. All the Birds of Eastern
and Central North America. By Richard H.
Pough. Color Illustrations by Don Eckelberry.
Line Drawings by Earl L. Poole. Small Land
Birds, pp. I-XLII, 1-312; Water, Game, and
Large Land Birds, pp. I-XXVIII, 3-352, 1953;
Doubleday & Company, Inc., Garden City,
N.Y. ($6.50).

Pough’s deservedly popular Water Bird
Guide to water, game, and large land birds,
published in 1951, (reviewed Can. Field-Nat.,
1951, Vol. 65, No. 5, p. 190) and his Audubon
Bird Guide to small land birds, published in
1946, are here combined apparently without
revision under one cover. The text, covering
the birds of eastern and central North Ameri-
ca, gives useful information for each species
on field identification, range, habits, habitat
preferences, voice, nest, eggs, and other
aspects of the subject. Seventy introductory
pages contain much general information for
those who enjoy observing birds in the field.

Some 885 excellent colored pictures by
Eckelberry depict 533 bird species and show
seasonal and age differences in plumage
where these differences are appreciable in
the field. Although all these pictures are
grouped on 96 colored plates, postures are
interesting and life-like and proportions and
colours excellent. Poole’s line drawings,
which bring the total of illustrations to more
than one thousand, are decorative and useful
in showing aspects of some of the birds in
flight.

Doubtless many will wonder why the con-
tents of Water Bird Guide were not placed
in the front, instead of the back, of the new
volume. This would have brought the species
into a natural sequence beginning with the
Gaviiformes.

The coupling of elaborate illustrations
with an informative text in this one light,
compact volume will undoubtedly make it
very popular with amateurs whose interests
lie east of the Rockies in either Canada or
the United States. — W. EARL GODFREY.

OUR WILDLIFE LEGACY. By Durward L.
Allen, published by Funk and Wagnalls Com-
pany, New York, 1954, x, 340 pages, Refer-
ence Notes 37 pages, Bibliography 29 pages,
26 illustrations, index 14 pages. Distributed
by the Ryerson Press, Toronto, Canada. $6.00.

It is not often that a reviewer has the
pleasant opportunity to review a book with
whose author he is in complete agreement.
Durward Allen is a Senior Biologist in the
Branch of Research of the United States
Fish and Wildlife Service. The present work
sets forth in clear, easily-read form the
most important concepts of the most modern
phase of wildlife management. Many work-
ers in the field will be pleased to learn how
much new information has been gathered
on the subject in recent years, and will
perhaps for the first time realize that the
art of wildlife management has developed
to the point where the word “Science” can
be applied to it appropriately.

Despite the excellent works which have
been written in recent years on the subject of
wise use of wildlife resources, it has remained
for Durward Allen to bring together in one
place a story which is more arresting than
fiction and at the same time completely
factual and excellently documented both with
detailed reference notes, and with a biblio-
graphy of more than 500 titles.

The book is written in a form which will
make it readily useful to professional wild-
life management personnel as a reference
work. At the same time the style of writing
is adapted to convenient use by the sportsmen
and nature lovers who have much to gain
by a careful reading of the material pre-
sented.

Beginning with the Indian’s relation to and
dependence on the buffalo, the progress of
knowledge of ecology is traced up to 1953.
Many of the mistaken ideas of the past are
discussed at length, and the place of new
knowledge in providing for more adequate
understanding of such fundamentals as rep-

January-March, 1955]

roductive rates and species inter-relations is
clearly demonstrated.

The enormous productivity of most forms
of wildlife under ideal conditions of habitat
is impressively demonstrated, with data from
a variety of areas and species. The true
effect of harvesting of various sex and age
classes on populations is discussed, and the
necessity of harvesting surplus stocks is clear-
ly defined. The chapters dealing with pre-
dators and their management are particularly
well-prepared. The discussion of bounties
and the exposition of their shortcomings is
the most convincing statement of its kind
that I have been privileged to read.

Throughout the book the point is made
repeatedly that sufficient information is now
available upon which to base really effective
wildlife management. It is, however, im-
possible to put much of this modern know-
ledge into effect since public acceptance of
many of the scientific data is not yet com-
plete. Old traditions and beliefs, many of
which are directly contrary to the results of
carefully-controlled scientific studies, are dif-
ficult to dislodge from the public mind.

The political implications of wildlife man-
agement are dealt with in an excellent chapter
under the heading of ‘“Biopolitics”, and in
many cases the record of achievement of
wildlife management agencies reflects a lack
of understanding of biological principles on
the part of those in the political arena who
set up programs for the public.

Needless to say the author has shown by
carefully documented facts that the ideas of
the game farm and fish hatchery as sole
means of maintaining public hunting and
fishing have been left behind.

The book brings together much information
which shows beyond all doubt the great com-
plexity of the inter-relations of the wildlife
species and of their relations to the flora.
It clearly demonstrates the need for flexibi-
lity of mind and of policies in dealing with
problems of wildlife management.

I sincerely hope the book will be widely
read so that sportsmen, naturalists and other
members of the public may be sufficiently
well supplied with facts concerning their
areas of interest, that they will urge the
appropriate agencies to take well-advised
action in regard to wildlife management.
Administrators and other government offi-
cials who avail themselves of the information
furnished in the book will be well able to
deal with public demands for wise policies
of wildlife management, and will be able

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 29

to understand and work effectively with the
wildlife scientists who continue to produce
new information upon which ever more
practical and effective methods of wildlife
management may be based. It has been said
that public understanding and acceptance of
new ideas usually follows many years behind
the development of new scientific informa-
tion. If this book receives the public re-
cognition and support that it deserves, it
may well be a most effective means of
shortening the time between the attainment
of new knowledge in the wildlife field, and
public acceptance and use of this knowledge.
Such a situation will result in immediate
benefit to all citizens, since all benefit from
the most progressive type of renewable re-
source management.

The author expresses it, “My guiding
thought is that the patient — our wildlife
resource — is ill; and it is important to all
of us that the patient get well’.

The book is excellently printed and is
illustrated with high-quality photographic il-
lustrations. The editorial work has been
carefully done and typographical errors are
rare.

V. E. F. SOLMAN.

BIRDS OF WASHINGTON STATE, by S. G.
Jewett, W. P. Taylor, W. T. Shaw and J. W.
Aldrich. University of Washington Press,
pp. XXXII and 767, 12 color plates, 99
black and white plates, 51 distribution maps
and 1 inserted map of Life Zones.

This volume constitutes a valuable addition
to the regional ornithological studies of North
America.

The University of Washington Press is
to be complimented on the excellence of the
press work and the artistry of the binding,
details that contribute much to the appeal
and usefulness of the volume.

“Birds of Washington” is not designed
primarily as a manual for the identification
of the birds of that state. For each species
and subspecies it gives the salient distinc-
tive features of both adult and young, but
for those species, such as the gulls, in which
the plumage sequences are numerous and
complicated, only the adult and downy plu-
mages usually are dealt with. In general,
distinctive differences between similar spe-
cies are not emphasized. Obviously the be-
ginning student of birds will need to combine
the information given here with the details
on identification presented so graphically in
the modern handbooks to the birds of west-
ern North America.

30 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

The color plates have been chosen for the
interest and appeal they give rather than
for their aid in identification.

The real value of the study lies in its
careful documentation of the occurrence of
each of the 450 species and subspecies and

the inclusion of all available information
upon their life histories as observed in
the state.

A typical species treatment contains in-

formation upon local status; description in-
cluding measurements; nest and egg detail;
distribution; dates of migration; habitat; call
notes and other miscellaneous information.

The nomenclature both vernacular and
scientific is with some exceptions that of the
forthcoming revised edition of the Ameri-
can Ornithologists Union Check List. Though
this reviewer decries the use of cumbersome
compound vernaculars for subspecies that
cannot be differentiated under field condi-
tions, the authors here do so on good precept.

Equal status in treatment has been ac-
corded all resident subspecies and the ex-
treme view of the authors upon the degree
of difference constituting a recognizable
subspecies has led to a confusing situation.
Several supposed subspecies based upon
tenuous characteristics and not currently re-
cognized by the American Ornithologist
Union Committee on Classification and No-
menclature are included in “Birds of Wash-
ington”. The systematics can be said to
represent the extreme “splitters” view and
will present a confusing interpretation to
the many who do not understand the nature
of the decisions involved and find only a
disagreement between the local authority
in this volume and the forthcoming revision
of the A.O.U. Check List of North American
Birds. For these it will be advisable to
await the publication of the latter, before
incorporating too many new _ subspecific
names into their vocabulary. It should be
emphasized however that these cases do not
bulk large in the study and consequently
do not detract too seriously from its general
usefulness.

A number of subspecies assignments, e.g.
Regulus satrapa satrapa, Dendroica coronata
coronata, Wilsonia pusilla pusilla, Sturnella
neglecta neglecta are based upon 1 to 3
specimens taken in migration. The nature
of variation within the subspecies renders
such action of doubtful scientific value unless
supported by data of unequivocal interpreta-
tion.

[Vol. 69

In addition to the species treatments the
book includes a most useful list of systematic
and vernacular names; a brief characteriza-
tion of the main geographic features and
regions of the state; a very conventional
treatment of ecological distribution based
upon Merriam Life Zones, an excellent sketch
of the history of bird study in Washington
and a superficial treatment of some aspects
of bird conservation.

A twenty-eight page Gazeteer will be wel-
comed by all those studying the details of
distribution of birds in Washington. A 41
page bibliography and a well organized
index to species, subspecies, and ornitholo-
gists complete the volume.

The 14” x 20” colored map of Life Zones
embodies the innovation of separating the
distinct phases of the Transition zone. Humid
transition zone, timbered and timberless Arid
Transition Zones are outlined and clearly
distinguished. Within the former the small
prairie areas are also indicated. The use
of Arctic for Arctic-alpine implies a fallacy
and is unfortunate.

All serious students of the birds of West-
ern North America will find this a useful
addition to their working library, while the
amateur ornithologist in Washington, the
adjacent states, and the Province of British
Columbia will find in it much of the informa-
tion they seek and, by implication, a clear
indication of the information still needed.

I. McT. COWAN,
Dept. of Zoology,
University of British Columbia.

The Lives of Wild Birds. By Aretas A. Saun-
ders. 1954. Doubleday and Company, Inc.,
Garden City, New York. 256 pp. ($3.85).

The ambitious amateur student of birds,
desirous of making serious contributions to
ornithological knowledge, will find plenty of
suggestions on what to do and how to do it
in this attractive little volume. The author,
well known for his own meticulous field
studies, draws from long experience to fill
his book with pertinent information and
good advice on how to study birds in the
field. Finally there is a wisely chosen
bibliography which is sure to be useful to
the amateur. This book is very readably
written, well printed, and is free of typo-
graphical errors. — W. EARL GODFREY.

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1953-54

i ieceident Emeritus: C. W. LOWE; Hon. President: A.
G. LAWRENCE; President: ae K. STEWART-HAY; Vice-
‘Presidents: C. I. TILLENIUS, Mrs. W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
Treasurer: H. MOSSOP; Asst. Treasurers: Miss W.
DOWNES, J. J. MOTT; Gen. Secretary: J. J. McDONALD;
Exec. Secretary: Mrs. G. I. KEITH; Social Convenor:
% Mrs. A. A. STEER Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT.

‘ie SECTIONS—

‘Chairm. J.
M i 5 Entomology: Sees R. M.
_ PRENTICE, Sec. J. a ‘DROUIN; Geology: Chairm. E.
I. LEITH, Sec. Mrs. C. CRAN: STONE; Herpetoleay:
Ch STEWART HAY, Sec. G. COTTER;
Ichthyology: Chairm. G. E. gee Sec. W. F. JOHNS-

Mammalogy: Chairm. Ae . TILLENIUS, Sec. S.
ae aC puithology. Chairm. J. J. MOTT, Sec. Miss

= mate:

: Lectures on the first and third Monday evenings of
each month will be held in the 4th floor Board Room
f the Free Press. Friday evening lectures will be
eld in Room 204 of the University Extension Service,
emorial Boulevard. The meetings open at 8.00 p.m.,
ie lectures commencing at 8.15 p.m.

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
__-HISTORY OF CANADA

Bs OFFICERS FOR 1955

eee T. J. A. HUNTER; Ist Vice-President: J. A.
-BIGONESSE; 2nd Vice-President: J. K. HILL; Secretary-
Treasurer: Geo. A. Le CLERC; Chief-Scientific Sect.: Dr.
. A. DERY; Chief-Protection Sect.: Napoleon BEAUDET;
J. G. COOTE; Chief-Informa-
Other directors: O. MARCEAU,

5s PRICE, F. D. ROSS, Jos. MORIN,
. PLAMONDON.

Secretary’s address: Geo. A. Le CLERC, 300 Fraser St.,
- Quebec, P.Q.
H

. THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

president: A. A. OUTRAM; Vice-President: J. L.
BAILLIE; Secretary-Treasurer: MRS. J. B. STEWART,
21 Millwood Rd., Toronto; President of Junior Club:

MRS. L. E. JAQUITH. Executive Council: G. M. BART-
MAN, J. BARNETT, MRS. N. BROWN, ALFRED BUNKER,
MISS F. BURGESS, ALEXANDER CAMERON, MISS VERA
CLARK, MISS B. DOUGLAS, PROF. T. W. DWIGHT, DR.
M. FRITZ, W. W. H. GUNN, DR. L. E. JAQUITH, MRS.
J. D. KETCHUM, MISS V. KOHLER, MRS. H. H. MARSH,
ec. Ss. McKEE, D. S. MILLER, JOHN MITCHELE, R. M.
SAUNDERS, EARL STARK, H. H. SOUTHAM. Ex. Officio:
A. J. V. LEHMANN, C. A. WALKINSHAW, T. F. McIL-
_ Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday ot
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
pola during the spring and autumn and on the second
i day of each month during the winter.

‘MRS. J. MURRAY SPEIRS; Vice-President of Junior Club: ©

~ AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

OFFICERS 1955-56

Hon. President: Dr. N. A. M. MACKENZIE; Past President:
F. WAUGH; President: A. R. WOOTTON; Vice President:
J. J. PLOMMER; Hon. Secretary: C. B. W. ROGERS; Re-
cording Secretary: Mrs. Augusta MARTIN; Programme
Secretary: J. GARDNER; Hon. Treasurer: F. SANFORD:
Librarian: Mrs. Dorothy BRADLEY; Editor of Bulletin:
N. PURSSELL; Chairmen of Sections: Botany-Dr. T. M. C.
TAYLOR; Geology—Dr. J. E. ARMSTRONG; Pentcnislogy==
Prof. G. J. SPENCER; Ornithology—W. HUGHES; Mam-
mology—Dr I. McT. COWAN; Marine Biology—Mrs. M.
L. McLUCKIE; Photography—B. GLEIG; Junior Section—
Miss W. L. PEARSON; Mycology—Dr. R. STACE-SMITH;

Audubon Screen Tours—S. BRADLEY; Additional Mem-

bers of Executive: Dr. V. C. BRINK, Dr. M. Y. WILLIAMS.
All meetings at 8 p.m. Room 100, Applied Science

Building, University of British Columbia, unless other- —
wise announced.

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1955

Past President: Mrs. G. CUMMINGS, R.R. #4, London;
President: Mr. F. Howard KEAST, 44 Graydon St., Lon-
don; Vice-President: Dr. W. W. JUDD, 685 Strathmeyer
St., London; Recording Secretary: Miss M. J. HEIGHWAY,
66 Ciliftonvale Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr, J. C.
LAUGHTON, R.R. #4, London; Corresponding Secretary:
Mrs. W. R. JARMAIN, 301 Oxford St., London; Migra-
oa Secretary: Mr. J. LEACH, Platts Lane, R.R. #3,
ondon,

Meetings are held at 8.30 p.m. in the Public Library
building on the second Monday of each month from:
September to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1954-1955
President: Dr. M. J. DUNBAR; Vice-President: Jf. P.
ANGLIN; Vice-President: J. L. VAN CAMP; Treasurer:
W. H. RAWLINGS; Secretary: Miss R. S. ABBOTT,
166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE

Miss P. C. ABBOTT, Miss R. S. ABBOTT, J.
W. B. BERTRAM, Miss R. B. H

P. ANGLIN,

Dr.
DeLISLE ‘GARNEAU, pi
Miss G. HIBBARD, R. LEPINGWELL, ‘IAN McLAREN,
G. H. MONTGOMERY, W. H. RAWLINGS, J. W. ROBIN-
SON, C. C. SAIT, Miss M. SEATH, H. G. SEYMOUR,
Dr. J. H. SUMMERBY, J. L. VAN CAMP.

Meeting held the second Monday of the month except
during summer. Field Trips held in spring and autumn,

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY

President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-Prseident: H. M.
ING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. af
Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C.

CALGARY NATURALISTS’ CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1954

President: Miss JULIE HRAPKO; Vice-President: J. C.
BARNHARDT; Secretary-Treasurer: Miss MARGARET
COPE, 1719 — 13th Ave. W., Calgary, Alta.

4
:
Ae
Aa
if
i :
”
\ dincad
¥4,7
Ay yy),
a
i
’
f

AUTOBIOG

OF

The Club has a limited number a:
of the autobiography of this femous

Canadian naturalist for sale. He

*

GET YOUR COPY BY SENDING $3.00 TO:

bs

The CANADIAN

Contents |

summer colony of the Least Bat, Myotis subulatus leibii
ee vieee and te By) Harold, Bor Hitcheocks eee Pa as oh 31

otes on 4 ete from eniiess Rene — II Boletaceae.
BY ei alton! Grovessandsneila (©. Thomsony eke ee oho 44

The Alaska Fan Pere Basencil diaca zaboria Oberholser and Oregon
Junco Junco oreganus oreganus (Townsend) in the Caribou Parkland,

F BGs By, Leo: Jobim 30": ae ea ee a CN Rue aar ats OE MCU ERAN MANIC 65
Interesting records of birds collected in the Peace River Parkland,
be : Brit shiy Colin Dias y PeVine eo STODE Loi) soeries nol ena Nees. secu itten setae scott gk 65
4 Bi _ First record of the Dakota Song Sparrow Melospiza melodia juddi
‘ Bishop for British Columbia. By Leo Jobin .......000.00000.ccc.. ate 66
Pseudomma affine G. O. Sars: an addition to the list of the
Mysidacea of eastern Canada. By W. L. Klawe .............00.0ce 66
POpplen MaAnbise EnV xCONeen Oy GALONen ili s Kia illic iin cleus Qoumcembeiied 66
The Barred Owl in Alberta. By A. F. Oeming and E. T. Jones ......0.c0000 66
* First records of the American Egret in Alberta.
aig Bys Avie OCHRNP MATIC Engr RimeAallan wy tem eo TNA cre. ae 67
Reviews MNES Met iNee Soca RAPE, pe, MEISE AL dy oe EE mS YB SRC bicennsegece! 108

Ss Pe LoAAaY
Published by the
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Authorized as second class mail, Post Office Department, Ottawa

Vol. 69 APRIL-JUNE, 1955 No. 2

- sage: aN 3 1956)

The Ottawa Field-Maturalists’ Club

¥

Patron : PONE at
His Excellency, ‘The Rt. Honourable ‘Vincent Massey, C.H., Governor-General of

President: Mr. W. K. W. BALDWIN Rte
1st Vice-President: Dr. L. S. RUSSELL 2nd Vice-President: Dr. E as Bous

4

Treasurer: RAYMOND Moore, Secretary: H. Th ‘Scoscan,

Division of Botany,
Science Service, Dept. of
Agriculture, Ottawa.

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. J. W. Groves, Mrs. Hoves eos
Brown, Miss RutH Horner, Miss VIOLET HUMPHREYS, Miss VERNA |]
LINE SNURE, Miss Mary Sruart, THE REVEREND FATHER 1 1By BANIM,
ANDERSON, i. ARNOLD, J. S. BLEAKNEY, B. Boivin, K. Bow es, W. J. Copy, _ is
NERS, W. G. Dore, C15 RANKTON, R. FritTH, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, J. W. x
Re Harris, E. O. HucuHes, W. ILLMAN, Wo LANCELEY, H. Lioyp, W. W. Mar,
ADeUEL: MANNING, H. MARSHALL, D. A. nae A. E. Porsizp, Lae Ruopes P.e
RUDDELL, D. B. O. Sate, H. A. SENN, V. E. F. Sorman, E. A. TURNAU.

Auditors: Pea: Connens, C. FRANKTON.

Ottawa. Ny ‘i

Editor:

Dr. H. A. SENN,
Division of Botany,
Science Service Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa. —

Associate Editors: —

Wii Go Doret os a A ee Botany RMS ANDERSON, 3.200) ce

A EAR OCOUED | MOM lea es: Conchology A. G. HUNTSMAN .............. 4
HG CRAWFORD: 0 Cen Entomology _ W.. E. GODFREY ............-.-.0000
BEN UN COCK SU eA) MVE AGM Geology Wii As BEDE) (20! UN es PMs
SHERMAN BLEAKNEY .............. Herpetology § J. R. DyMonpb ............. Peete J

Business Manager:
W. J. Copy,
. Division of Botany, _ i
Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa. ;

ae the results of oe research in all pose Gusts of nanel ee
Price of this volume (4 numbers) $3.00; Single copies 90c each.

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Tiaoae mi.
Div. of Botany, Science Service, ‘Dept. of Ds
_ OTTAWA, CANADA,

Vol. 69

OTTAWA, CANADA, APRIL-JUNE, 1955

A SUMMER COLONY OF THE LEAST BAT,
MYOTIS SUBULATUS LEIBII (AUDUBON AND BACHMAN) ?

Harotp B. HitcHcock
Middlebury College, Middlebury, Vermont.

INCE 1841, when Dr. Leib collected the

first specimen of the bat that now bears
his name, comparatively little has been learn-
ed about the creature’s summer activities. The
recovery of two winter-banded individuals and
the subsequent finding of a summer colony
of the species are, therefore, of particular
interest.

On July 6, 1953, Mrs. Leslie Gibbons found
the bodies of two bats that had been crushed
behind a shed door at her home near North-
cote, Renfrew County, Ontario. One of the
bats had been banded, and was reported by
Mrs. Gibbons to the Fish and Wildlife Serv-
ice, Washington. This bat had been banded
the preceding February in a cave at Fourth
Chute, about ten miles from the Gibbons farm.
Its identification as Myotis subulatus leibi
was confirmed by the United States National
Museum, Washington, where the skeleton has
been preserved. Although some 400 bats of
this species have been banded in Canada
(see Hitchcock, 49), and a lesser number in
the United States, most of them by Mohr in
Pennsylvania (see Mohr, ’42), this is the first
specimen whose summer as well as winter
habitat has been known. It also led to the
discovery of the first recognized summer
colony of the species.

The colony was estimated by Mrs. Gibbons
to have consisted of about a dozen bats, but
as they dispersed after the accident, no de-
tailed study could be made. The retreat was
behind a sliding door that was customarily
kept in the open position, up against the
wall of the shed. Between the horizontally
placed siding boards were grooved spaces
more than adequate to accommodate bats
even if the door were snugly against the
wall, which it was not when inspected in
November. Fecal pellets were clinging to

1) Received for publication April, 1954.

the boards, but no accumulation was noted
on the ground. The door is so located that
sunlight strikes it only during the morning.
Air could circulate freely from all sides
behind the door, making it a somewhat cooler
place than those selected by this bat’s more

common relative, the little brown bat, Myotis

l. lucifugus.

On September 21, 1953, Mr. Ernest Wilson
of Cobden, Renfrew County, Ontario, picked
up another dead, banded Myotis subulatus
leibii in his yard. This bat had been banded
at Fourth Chute in December, 1949, and had
been retaken at the cave in February, 1953.
Cobden is about twelve miles from the cave.

The finding of these two specimens sug-
gests that man’s buildings provide suitable
places for the summer shelter of this species,
and that bats of this species may not go far
from their summer home to hibernate if
suitable places are available nearby.

Much information regarding the movements
of banded animals must come from persons
who happen to find them — frequently per-
sons without knowledge of the purposes for
which banding is done. All naturalists can
perform a service to the banders by makihg
known as widely as possible the importance
of reporting the finding of banded birds and
bats. Reports should be made to the Cana-
dian Wildlife Service, Ottawa, or to the Fish
and Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C., where
duplicate records are kept.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Hitchcock, H.B. 1949. “Hibernation of bats in
southeastern Ontario and adjacent Que-
bec.” Canadian Field-Naturalist, vol. 63,
no. 2, pp. 47-59.

Mohr, C.E. 1942. “Results of ten years’ bat
marking in Pennsylvania.” Proceedings,
Pennsylvania Academy of Science, vol. 16,
pp. 32-36. '

Vol. 69, No. 1, January-March, 1955, was issued November 28, 1955.
—

HA AAT SD
I 4

32 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

SPIDERS AND HARVESTMEN FROM WATERTON AND GLACIER
NATIONAL PARKS ?

Lorna R. Levi amd HERBERT W. LEvI
University of Wisconsin, Extension Center, Wausau, Wisconsin. 2

HIS PAPER is largely the

tensive summer collecting during 1953
at Waterton National Park in Alberta and
Glacier National Park in Montana. Some of
the specimens were collected at Waterton
during a brief visit to that park in 1951.
No list of spiders of this region is available
at the present time, although Emerton col-
lected in the Banff region, and in 1939
Gertsch and Jellison published a list of
spiders, most of which came from Ravalli
County, Montana.

result of in-

This collection and paper were made pos-
sible through the kind cooperation of Park
Naturalist M. E. Beatty and Superintendent
J. W. Emmert who granted the permits ne-
cessary in order to collect in Glacier Nation-
al Park. Many thanks are extended to them,
to Dr. W. J. Gertsch of the American Museum
of Natural History and Mr. W. Ivie, who
helped determine many of the more difficult
species, and to Dr. J. G. Edwards of San
Jose State College for his additions to the
collection. Representative samples of the
collection will be deposited in the laboratory
of the Ranger Naturalist at Glacier National
Park, and in the American Museum of Na-
tural History, which will receive also the
types of the new species. For each species,
reference is given to a readily available des-
cription.

For those not familiar with this area, it
may be helpful to point out that the following
localities are in Waterton National Park,
Alberta: Bertha Lake, Cameron Lake, Carth-
ew Lakes, Rowe Brook, Summit Lake, Upper
Rowe Lake and Waterton Lake (east shore).
All other localities, unless otherwise men-
tioned, are in Glacier National Park, Monta-
na.

Order Phalangida (Harvestmen)
Phalangiidae 3
Leiobunum paessleri Roewer, 1910. Davis,
1934, p. 684, figs. 25, 29. Summit Lake, 6300
ft.; Cameron Lake, 5500 ft.; Olson Creek
Valley, 5000 ft.; Grinnell Lake, 5000 ft.; Ca-
nyon Creek, 5700 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4000 ft.

1 Received for publication April 14, 1954.

2 Present address: Dept, of Zoology, Univevsity of Wis-
consin, Madison,

3 Homolophus biceps

Phalangium opilio Linnaeus, 1758. Bishop,
1949, p. 183, figs. 29-33. Summit of Marias
Pass, 5200 ft. Roewer, 1952, described a
new species, Opilio angulatichelis, from Gla-
cier Park. This new Opilio differs from
Phalangium opilio chiefly in having poorly
developed spurs on the second segment of
the chelicerae and having the supra-cheliceral
laminae unarmed. This condition is present
in some juveniles of Phalangium opilio and
it seems probable that the specimen in ques-
tion may be an immature male of that species.

Order Araneae (Spiders)
Theridiidae (Comb-footed spiders)

Ctenium vigerens (Chamberlin and Ivie),
1933. Kaston, 1946, p. 13, figs. 9, 10, 29-31,
dd. Under logs and stones. Waterton Lake,
4200 ft.; Grinnell Glacier trail, 5500 ft.; St.
Mary River Valley, 4900 ft.; Two Medicine
Lake, 5200 ft.; Avalanche Creek, 3500 ft.

Dipoena nigra (Emerton), 1882. Kaston,
1948, p. 90, figs. 88-90. Ole Creek, (coll. L.
P. Schultz).

Steatoda hespera Chamberlin and Ivie,
1933, p. 9, figs. 46. On buildings. Many Gla-
cier. (coll. J. G. Edwards); Josephine Lake,
4800 ft.; Cut Bank Creek, 5100 ft.; Two Medi-
cine Lake, 5200 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.

Theridion (Allotheridion) differens Emer-
ton, 1882. Kaston, 1948, p. 103, figs. 123-124,
144-145. Sweeping in lodgepole forest. In
North Fork Valley at Kintla Creek, 3900 ft.,
and near Logging Creek, 3400 ft.; Bowman
Lake, 4100 ft.

Theridion (Allotheridion) montanum Emer-
ton, 1882, p. 10, pl. 1, fig. 3. On vegetation.
Rowe Brook, 6000 ft.; Bertha Lake, 5800 ft.;
Grinnell Glacier trail, 5500 ft.; Two Medicine
Lake, 5200 ft.

Theridion (Allotheridion) ohlerti Thorell,
1870. Levi and Levi, 1951, p. 220, figs. 3, 7,

(Thorell) was not collected in
Glacier Park, although it is abundant in the south-
em Rockies, the northernmost localities from which
we have collected it being Fremont County, Idaho
and the Jackson Hole area, Wyoming. A specimen
from Togwotee Pass, Wyoming, was recently de-
scribed as a new species and placed in a new
genus (Togwoteeus granipalpus) by Roewer, 1952.
A comparison of our own specimens from the
type iocality and the immedicte vicinity, in which
H. biceps is common, revealed that characters on
which the new genus and species are based are
variable. It is undoubtedly H. biceps.

April-June, 1955]

8, @. T. simulatum Emerton, 1926, p. 115,
figs. 1, 2, ¢. On vegetation. Grinnell Glacier
‘trail, 5500 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4200 ft.

Theridion rugosa (Emerton), 1909. Eno-
plognatha pikes Chamberlin and Ivie, 1942,
figs. 89-91. Under stones above timberline.
Carthew Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.; Piegan Pass,
7900 ft.; Cut Bank Pass, 7600 ft.

Theridion (Allotheridion) sexpunctatum
Emerton, 1882, p. 12, pl. 2, fig. 5. On veget-
ation. Bertha Lake Trail, 5400 ft.; Two Me-
dicine Lake, 5200 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.;
North Fork road near Logging Creek, 3400
ft.

Theridion (Allotheridion) zelotypum Emer-
ton, 1882, p. 11, pl. 4, fig. 4, 9. Kaston, 1948,
p. 109, fig. 150, ¢. Sweeping in lodgepole
forest. Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.

Linyphiidae
Subfamily Linyphiinae. (Sheet-web weavers)
Bathyphantes sp. (close to pullatus). In

lodgepole pine log. Bowman Lake, 4000
Ltr Oe

Lepthyphantes aldersoni, new species. Fig-
ure 10.

Female: Carapace, clypeus, chelicerae, max-
illae, coxae, and legs yellow-brown. Labium
dusky, sternum yellow-gray with margin
dusky. Abdomen dorsum gray-white with
three longitudinal rows of three gray spots
each, followed by a series of transverse bars
which become very narrow toward the spin-
nerets. Sides glossy gray with white flecks,
venter glossy gray with a pair of lateral light
lines. Spinnerets and epigastric region yel-
lowish. Anterior eye row straight, posterior
row slightly recurved. Anterior median eyes
smallest, in a ratio of 3:5 to others which are
subequal. Anterior medians one-fourth dia-
meter apart, one diameter from laterals.
Posterior medians three-fourths diameter
apart, one-half diameter from laterals. Ant-
erior and posterior laterals almost touching.
Clypeus straight, undercutting eye region,
and as high as three to four diameters of
anterior median eyes. This species can be
distinguished from other members of the
genus by the epigynum (fig. 10). Total length,
2.909 mm. Carapace, 1.11 long, 0.85 wide.
First femur, 1.28; patella and tibia, 1.53;
metatarsus, 1.28; tarsus, 0.85. Second patel-
la and tibia, 1.36; third, 1.19; fourth, 1.53.

Type locality: the female holotype was
collected in Waterton National Park, Alberta,
under stones near Lower Carthew Lake, 6500-
7200 ft., on July 27, 1953.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 33

Lepthyphantes arborea (Emerton), 1915.
Zorsch, 1937, p. 885, figs. 64-66. Sweeping
vegetation. Bertha Lake trail, 5400 ft.

Lepthyphantes berthae, new species.
ure 9.

Fig-

Female: Carapace pale yellow with a dusky
margin and central mark. Clypeus and la-
bium yellow with dusky. Maxillae yellow
with white tips. Sternum yellow shaded with
dusky and with a dusky margin. Chelicerae,
palpi, and legs yellow. Coxae whitish. Ab-
domen dorsum gray-white flecked with white
and overlaid with an indistinct gray pattern
of paired spots and transverse bars. Sides
gray, flecked with white, venter gray-white.
Both eye rows slightly recurved. Anterior
median eyes smallest, in a ratio of 2:3 to
others, which are subequal. Anterior median
eyes three-fourths diameter apart, one dia-
meter from laterals. Posterior median eyes
separated by one diameter, one-half diameter
from laterals. Anterior and posterior laterals
almost touching. Clypeus as high as two
diameters of anterior median eyes, slanting
forward from below eyes. Chelicerae diver-
gent distally. This species can be disting-
uished from other members of this genus
by the epigynum (fig. 9). Total length, 2.38
mm. Carapace, 0.94 long; 0.76 wide. First
femur, 1.36; patella and tibia, 1.53; metatar-
sus, 1.19; tarsus, 0.68. Second patella and
tibia, 1.36; third, 1.02; fourth, 1.36.

Type locality: The female holotype was
collected in Waterton National Park, Alberta,
at Bertha Lake, 5800 ft., on July 29, 1953.

Lepthyphantes calcarata (Emerton), 1909.
Zorsch, 1937, p. 874, figs. 40-43. On building.
Cut Bank Creek, 5100 ft.

Lepthyphantes chamberlini Schenkel, 1950.
Levi and Levi, 1951, p. 222, figs. 4, 6. This
species has been collected with L. calcarata
in the San Juan Mountains, Colorado, and
may be the female of that rare species. Cut
Bank Creek, 5200 ft.

Lepthyphantes pollicaris Zorsch, 1937, p.
897, figs. 91-93, ¢. Fig. 8. Under stones and
logs. Carthew Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.; Grinnell
Glacier trail, 5500 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4000
ft.; Numa Ridge, 5000 ft.

Lepthyphantes rainieri Emerton, 1926.
Zorsch, 1937, p. 895, figs. 83-87. On veget-
ation. Bertha Lake trail, 5400 ft.

Lepthyphantes sammamish, new species.
Figures 11-13.

Female: Carapace yellow with radiating
dusky marks and dusky margin. Clypeus

34 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

and chelicerae yellow with light dusky shad-
ing. Maxillae, legs and palpi yellow, coxae
yellow-white. Sternum and labium yellow,
heavily shaded with dusky, anterior margin
dark gray. Abdomen dorsum yellow-white,
lightly shaded with dusky; venter slightly
darker with indications of a pair of lateral
light lines. Spinnerets yellow-white, sur-
rounded by a dark dusky ring. The female
paratype from Montana is darker in color-
ation. Both eye rows straight. Anterior me-
dian eyes slightly smaller than other eyes,
which are subequal. Anterior median eyes
one-half diameter apart, three-fourths dia-
meter from laterals. Posterior medians
three-fourths diameter apart, same distance
from laterals. Anterior and posterior lateral
eyes touching. Clypeus equals four diameters
of anterior median eyes. Epigynum illustrat-
ed by figure 11. Total length, 3.2 mm. Ca-
rapace 1.53 long, 1.19 wide. First femur,
1.36; patella and tibia, 1.70; metatarsus, 1.15;
tarsus, 0.72. Second patella and tibia, 1.36;
third, 1.19; fourth, 1.62.

Male: In color the male is similar but
darker than the female allotype. Carapace
yellow-orange with dusky radiating marks
and a dusky shield-shaped mark on the back
of the head. The sternum is greenish shaded
with dark dusky. The abdomen dorsum is
dark dusky flecked with white and with a
narrow median light line, venter glossy dark
gray with a pair of lateral longitudinal light
lines. Both eye rows straight. Anterior me-
dian eyes slightly smaller than others, which
are subequal. Anterior medians less than
one-half diameter apart, one-half diameter
from laterals. Posterior medians less than
one diameter apart, same distance from late-
rals. Anterior and posterior laterals touch-
ing. Clypeus slightly higher than three dia-
meters of anterior median eyes. Palpus il-
lustrated by figures 12 and 13. Total length,
2.8 mm. Carapace, 1.36 long, 1.10 wide. First
femur, 1.36; patella and tibia, 1.62; metatarsus,
1.11; tarsus, 0.77. Second patella and tibia,
1.45; third, 1.19; fourth, 1.53. This species
is tentatively placed in Lepthyphantes be-
cause of its similarity to the members of that
genus. It differs, however, in that the epi-
gynum lacks the characteristic scape.

Type specimens: The male holotype and
female allotype were collected on May 23,
1953 at Lake Sammamish State Park in King
County, Washington, by B. Malkin and C.
Taylor. A female paratype was collected in
Glacier National Park, Montana, in the St.
Mary River valley, 4900 ft., on Aug. 7, 1953.

[Vol. 69

Linyphia marginata C. L. Koch, 1834. Kas-
ton, 1948, p. 122, figs. 220-230. In webs be-
tween rocks or in shrubs. Many Glacier, 5000
ft.; Roes Creek, 5100 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4100
ft.; Numa Ridge, 5000 ft.; Fish Lake, 4100
ft.; Sprague Creek, 6000 ft.

Linyphia pusilla Sundevall, 1830. Kaston,
1948, p. 124, fig. 231-236. Sweeping in wet
meadow. Bowman Lake, 4000 ft.

Meioneta ordinaria Chamberlin and Ivie,
1947, p. 59, figs 74, 75. Under logs and stones.
Waterton Lake, 4200 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4000
ft.

Meioneta sp. Carthew Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.,
9; pass above Cobalt Lake, 7300 ft., ¢.

Pityohyphantes cristatus Chamberlin and
Ivie, 1942, p. 58, figs. 141-143. Although
females were very common in shrubs in
forested parts of the parks, the identification
of this species was based on the males. Only
two males were collected, one from Rowe
Brook, 6000 ft., the other from Cut Bank
Creek, 6000 ft. Both were ascribed to P.
cristatus in spite of the considerable dif-
ferences in the tibial spurs of the two spe-
cimens.

Subfamily Erigoninae (Dwarf spiders)

Ceraticelus atriceps (O. P.- Cambridge),
1874. Crosby and Bishop, 1925, p. 15, figs.
15-18. Fig. 6. Sweeping vegetation. Josephine
Lake, 4800 ft.; North Fork road at Kintla
Creek, 3900 ft.

Ceraticelus crassiceps Chamberlin and Ivie,
1938, p. 68, figs. 52-54. Fig. 7. Sweeping ve-
getation. Near Babb, Glacier Co., 4500 ft.;
Cut Bank Creek, 5200 ft.; North Fork road
at Kintla Creek, 3900 ft.; Bowman Lake,
4100 ft. (very common).

Ceraticelus fissiceps (O. P.- Cambridge),
1874. Crosby and Bishop, 1925, p. 22, figs.
39-43, 111. Fig. 5. Sweeping in lodgepole.
Bowman Lake, 4100 ft. (very common).

Ceraticelus rowensis, new species. Figures
1-4.

Female: Carapace brown to orange-brown,
eye region black. Some specimens have
dusky radiating marks on carapace. Clypeus
black near eyes, orange-brown at margin.
Sternum orange-brown to dark brown, la-
bium dark brown. Chelicerae, maxillae and
legs yellow-gray. Abdomen gray to light
orange, sclerotized parts orange. Cephalo-
thorax highest in eye region. Anterior eye
row Straight, posterior row slightly recurved.
Anterior mediap eyes one diameter apart,

April-June, 1955]

two diameters from laterals. Posterior medi-
ans one and one-half diameters apart, slight-
ly more than one diameter from laterals.
Anterior and posterior laterals nearly touch-
ing. Diameter of anterior medians 0.7 of
posterior medians, which are equal in size
to posterior laterals. Width of oval anterior
laterals equals diameter of posterior medi-
ans. Clypeus as high as five diameters of
anterior median eyes. Abdomen sparsely
clothed with dark hairs, marked with four
dorsal sclerotized muscle scars, a ring around
pedicel and a band anterior to spinnerets
ventrally. Epigynal area separated from epi-
gastric plates by a narrow non-sclerotized
strip on each side. Epigynum and female
genitalia illustrated by figures 1 and 2. Total
length 1.8-2.1 mm. Total length of female
allotype, 1.85. Carapace 0.78 long, 0.65 wide,
0.34 high. First patella and tibia, 0.65;
second, 0.59; third, 0.52. Fourth femur, 0.60;
patella and tibia, 0.66; metatarsus, 0.42; tar-
sus, 0.30.

Male: Carapace orange-brown with a central
dusky mark. Larger lobe of head dusky
greenish with a pair of longitudinal dark
dotted lines. Smaller lobe black. Sclerotized
parts of abdomen orange, remainder dusky
on yellowish background. A large scutum
covers most of dorsum of abdomen, sclero-
tized rings around pedicel and spinnerets.
Head region bulbous (fig. 3), divided into
two lobes by a deep constriction between the
anterior and posterior median eyes. Lateral
eyes nearly touching. Diameter of anterior
median eyes 0.7 of other eyes, which are
subequal. Tibial apophysis deeply notched
and with a large tooth (fig. 4) though both
notch and tooth are reduced in a specimen
from Sunwapta Pass, Alberta. The males of
this species differ from all others in the
genus in the shape of the carapace (fig. 3)
and the palpus (fig. 4). Total length of male
holotype, 1.75 mm. Carapace 0.84 long, 0.65
wide, 0.49 high at lobe on head. First patel-
la and tibia, 0.65; second, 0.59; third, 0.52.
Fourth femur, 0.60; patella and tibia, 0.68;
metatarsus, 0.43; tarsus, 0.27.

All specimens were collected running on
moss and rocks in sunshine.

Type locality: The male holotype, female
allotype and one male and nine female para-
types were collected in Waterton National
Park, Alberta, at Upper Rowe Lake, 7100 ft.,
on July 24, 1953.

Records: Hidden Lake Pass, 7100 ft., Aug.
8, 1953, 2 ¢, 1 9; Sunwapta Pass, 6900 ft.,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 35

in Jasper National Park, Alberta, Aug. 10,
TOS Toe

Ceraticelus sp. Sweeping vegetation. Jose-
phine Lake, 4800 ft., 9.

Ceratinella brunnea Emerton, 1882, p. 36,
pl. 8, fig. 3. Sweeping in lodgepole forest.
Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.

Ceratinops sp. Two Medicine Lake, 5200
ftAiQ:

Collinsia clypiella (Chamberlin), 1920.
Crosby and Bishop, 1928, p. 64, figs. 78-80,
é. Fig. 17. Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.

Collinsia ksenia (Crosby and Bishop), 1928,
p. 428, figs. 81-83. Fig. 18. At timberline
under stones. Iceberg Lake, 6000 ft. De-
scribed from Mt. Rainier National Park,
Washington, but also known from British
Columbia and Alaska.

Collinsia plumosa (Emerton), 1882. Cros-
by and Bishop, 1928, p. 70, figs. 97-99, 101, ¢.
Chamberlin, 1948, p. 490, figs. 6, 7, 9. Fig.
16. Under rocks. Belly River (coll. J. G.
Edwards).

Collinsia wilburi, new species. Figures 14-
iby Alc

Male: Carapace orange with radiating dusky
marks and dusky margin. Thoracic groove a
short longitudinal brown mark. Clypeus
orange shaded with dusky; chelicerae, maxil-
lae, and legs orange. Coxae yellow-orange.
Sternum orange shaded with dusky, a dark
band inside orange margin. Abdomen gray
flecked with whitish, faint indication of dor-
sal transverse whitish marks. Spinnerets and
epigastric plates whitish. Both eye rows
straight or nearly straight. Anterior median
eyes smallest, in a ratio of 2:3 to others,
which are subequal. Anterior medians one
diameter apart, more than one diameter from
laterals. Posterior medians almost one dia-
meter apart, one diameter from laterals.
Anterior and posterior laterals nearly touch-
ing. Clypeus straight, as high as three dia-
meters of anterior median eyes. Chelicerae
very large with a well developed tooth and
a cluster of hair tipped tubercles on an-
terior face (fig. 27). It can be distinguished
from other members of the genus by the
palpus (figs. 14-15). Total length: 2.1 mm.
Carapace, 1.06 long, 0.77 wide. First femur,

0.85; patella and tibia, 0.98; metatarsus,
0.59; tarsus, 0.47. Second patella and tibia, —
0.89; third, 0.72; fourth, 0.98.

The placement of this species in Collinsia
is tentative.

36 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Type locality: The male holotype was
found in Glacier National Park, ‘Montana, at
Iceberg Lake, 6000 ft., under stones, on July
15, 1953.

Coloncus ?siouw Chamberlin, 1948, p. 525,
fig. 48, 49. Under stones. Iceberg Lake,
6000 ft., ©.

Coloncus sp. Sweeping vegetation. North
Fork road near Ford Creek, 3800 ft., 9.

Disembolus chera (Chamberlin and Ivie),
1933. D. stridulans Chamberlin and. Ivie,
1945, p. 226, figs. 14-18. At timberline under
rocks. Hidden Lake Pass, 7100 ft.

Dismodicus modicus Chamberlin and Ivie,
1947, p. 35, fig. 32. Sweeping vegetation.
Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4100
it:

Erigone denticulata Chamberlin and Ivie,
1938, p. 57, fig. 2. Two Medicine Lake, 5200
ft.

Erigone sp. At timberline under rocks.
Hidden Lake Pass, 7100 ft., 9.

Islandiana alata (Emerton), 1919, p. 3, figs.
5-7. [not Aduva alata (Emerton), Bishop and
Crosby, 1936] Above timberline under rocks.
Swiftcurrent Mountain, 8000 ft.

Maso sundevalli (Westring), 1851. Kaston,
1948, p. 145, fig. 346-350. Sweeping wet mea-
dow. Bowman Lake, 4,000 ft.

Pelecopsis sculptum (Emerton), 1917. Cros-
by and Bishop, 1931, p. 382, figs. 80-85. Grin-
nell Glacier trail, 5500 ft.

Sisicottus sp. Above timberline, under
rocks. Swiftcurrent Mountain, 7500 ft., °.

? Tigellinus sp. At timberline, under sto-
nes. Upper Rowe Lake, 7100 ft., 9; Iceberg
Lake, 6000 ft., 9; Swifteurrent Mountain,
WOOO} tte Or

Walckenaera vigilax (Blackwall), 1853.
Kaston, 1948, p. 206, figs. 639-640, 659-661.
At timberline under stones. Upper Rowe
Lake 7100 ft.; Iceberg Lake, 6,000 ft.

erigonid In lodgepole pine log. Bowman
Lake, 4000 ft., @.

Argiopidae (Orb weavers)

Araneus gemmoides Chamberlin and Ivie,
1935, p. 22, fig. 80, 9. Levi, 1951, p. 12, figs.

[Vol. 69

14-16, ¢. Outside Many Glacier Hotel (coll.
J. G. Edwards).

Araneus marmoreus Clerck, 1757. Epeira
raji, Kaston, 1948, p. 257, figs. 816-822. In
shrubs along meadows or in woods. Town of
Waterton, 4300 ft.; Roes Creek, 5100 ft.;
Cut Bank Creek, 5200 ft.; Bowman Lake,
4100 ft.

Araneus nordmanni (Thorell), 1870. Kas-
ton, 1948, p. 250, figs. 783-784, 793-795. Very
common in forested parts of the eastern
slope, especially in the St. Mary River Val-
ley.

Araneus patagiatus Clerck, 1757. E. dume-
torum, Kaston, 1948, p. 255, figs. 788, 804,
813. Common throughout park on buildings
at lower elevations.

Araneus solitarius (Emerton), 1884. Kas-
ton, 1948, p. 250, figs. 785-786, 796-797. Sweep-
ing in aspen woods. Marias Pass summit,
5200 ft.

Araneus trifolium (Hentz), 1847. Kaston,
1948, p. 258, figs. 823-825. Common in shrubs
along forest edge up to an elevation of 5200
ft.

Araniella displicata (Hentz), 1847. Kaston,
1948, p. 258, fig. 806, 9. Collected common-
ly by sweeping in light woods at low eleva-
tions.

Cyclosa conica (Pallas), 1772. Kaston, 1948,
p. 236, figs. 711-713. Common on the west
slope in light forest. On the east slope, col-
lections were made at Josephine Lake, 4800
ft.; St. Mary River Valley, 4900 ft.

Neoscona arabesca (Walckenaer), 1841.
Kaston 1948, p. 245, figs. 750, 771-773, 775.
Sweeping shrubs. Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.

Singa variabilis Emerton, 1884. Kaston,
1948, p. 241, figs. 760-765. Bowman Lake,
4000 ft.

Tetragnatha extensa (Linnaeus), 1758 .T.
manitoba Chamberlin and Ivie, 1942, p. 61,
figs. 153-158. Sweeping meadows. Bowman
Lake, 4000 ft.; North Fork road near Log-
ging Creek, 3400 ft.

Tetragnatha laboriosa Hentz, 1850. Kaston,
1948, p. 269, figs. 850-851, 859-861. Collected

PLATE 1

Figs. 1-4. Ceraticelus rowensis, new species. 1. Female genitalia, dorsal view. 2. Epigynum.
3. Carapace of male, lateral view. 4. Left palpus, ectal view. Fig. 5. Ceraticelus fissiceps (O. P.-Cam-
bridge), female genitalia, dorsal view. Fig. 6. Ceraticelus atriceps (O. P.-Cambridge), female genitalia,
dorsal view. Fig. 7. Ceraticelus crassiceps (Chamberlin and Ivie), female genitalia, dorsal view. Fig. 8.
Lepthyphantes pollicaris Zorsch, epigynum. Fig. 9. lLepthyphantes berthae, new species, epigynum.
Fig. 10. Lepthyphantes aldersoni new species, epigynum. Figs. 11-13. Lepthyphantes sammamish, new
species. 11. Epigynum. 12. Palpus, submesal view. 13. Palpus, subectal view. Figs. 14-15. Collinsia wil-
buri, new species. 14. Palpus, mesal view. 15. Palpus, ventral view. Fig. 16. Collinsia plumosa (Emerton)
epigynum. Fig. 17. Collinsia clypiella (Chamberlin), epigynum. Fig. 18. Collinsia ksenia (Crosby and
Bishop), epigynum.

Plate 1

PLATE 2.

Figs. 19-23. Tetragnatha numa, new species. 19. Left male chelicera, anterior view. 20. Posterior view.
21. Female chelicera, anterior view. 22. Posterior view. 23. Palpus, ventral view. Figs. 24-25. Thanatus
sp. 24. Palpus, ventral view. 25. Epigynum. Fig. 26. Pardosa wyuta Gertsch, palpus. Fig. 27. Collinsia
wilburi, new species, left chelicera, anterior view. Figs. 28-30. Cryphoeca peckhami Simon. 28. Palpus,
ventral view. 29. Tibia of palpus, dorsal view. 30. Epigynum.

April-June, 1955]

commonly throughout park by sweeping in
meadows and aspen groves.

Tetragnatha numa, new species.
19-23.

Female: Carapace and maxillae yellow-
gray with some dusky markings. Chelicerae
yellowish, each with a median dusky line.
Sternum sooty along margin, yellow central-
ly. Palpi and legs yellow, distal portions of
tarsi and metatarsi dusky. Abdomen dor-
sum silver spotted on gray-pink background
with an indistinct folium, and a pair of longi-
tudinal yellow lines. Venter of abdomen has
a broad black median stripe with a narrow
line of silver spots on each side. Sides of
venter tan with scattered silver spots. Spin-
nerets brown. Abdomen somewhat thicker
at base and notched above pedicel; turned
up at end above spinnerets. Both eye rows
are slightly recurved. Anterior median eyes
are one diameter apart, two diameters from
anterior laterals, and almost one and one-
half diameters from posterior medians. Pos-
terior medians are one and three-fourths dia-
meters apart and about the same distance
from the posterior laterals which are about
one and one-fourth diameters from anterior
laterals. Posterior medians are about 1.1
diameters, anterior laterals about 0.8 dia-
meter of other eyes, which are subequal.
Chelicerae are slightly more than half the
length of the carapace. Anterior margin of
fang furrow has a medium sized tooth at the
apex, and after a space, five more medium
to small teeth (fig. 21). The posterior mar-
gin has a medium tooth at the apex, a space,
then a rather large tooth which is twisted
180° on its axis, and a row of five teeth (fig.
22). The fangs are stout, evenly curved, and
only slightly more than half the length of
the chelicerae. Total length 7.5 mm. Cara-
pace, 2.2 long, 1.3 wide, 0.7 high. First
femur, 4.5; patella and tibia, 5.5; metatar-
sus, 5.0; tarsus, 1.2. Second patella and tibia,
3.2; thind, 1.5; fourth, 3.0:

Male: Coloration of cephalothorax like that
of the female except that carapace has a
pair of dusky lines extending from the la-
teral eyes to the thoracic depression. Abdo-
men dorsum closely silver spotted on a
gray-pink background. Posterior third of
abdomen has three or four pairs of dark
spots on yellow stripes. Venter gray-brown
with a pair of longitudinal silver spotted yel-
low lines. Spinnerets brown. Posterior eye
row slightly recurved, anterior row nearly
straight. Anterior median eyes one diameter

Figures

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 37

apart, one and one-half diameters from
laterals, and slightly more than one diameter
from posterior medians. Posterior medians
one and one-half diameters apart, same dis-
tance from posterior laterals, which in turn,
are two diameters from anterior laterals. In
size the posterior median eyes are 1.2, pos-
terior laterals 0.9, and anterior laterals 0.6 of
anterior median eyes. The clypeus is as high
as two diameters of the anterior median
eyes. The chelicerae more than half the
length of the carapace. The dorsal spur on
the apical third of each chelicera is shallow-
ly bifid. Anterior margin of the fang fur-
row has a small apical tooth and after a
space, a large flattened tooth followed by
three smaller teeth (fig. 19). The posterior
margin has five well spaced teeth (fig. 20).
The fangs are slightly sinuate and are about
two-thirds the length of the chelicerae. The
palp is illustrated by figure 23. Total length,
3.0 mm. Carapace, 1.4 long; 0.9 wide. First
femur, 2.8; patella and tibia, 3.3; metatar-
sus, 2.5; tarsus, 1.0. Second patella and tibia,
2255 thind He1-F fourth, (251.

This species can be distinguished from
other members of the genus by the large
tooth on the posterior margin of each female
chelicera and by the male palpus and cheli-
cerae. It is named after Numa Ridge, near
which the specimens were found.

Type locality: The male holotype and fe-
male allotype were collected by sweeping
near Bowman Lake, 4100 ft., in Glacier Na-
tional Park, Montana, on August 2, 1953.

Tetragnatha versicolor Walckenaer, 1841.
Kaston, 1948, p. 270, figs. 852, 862-964. Com-

monly taken by sweeping in meadows. The
webs may overhang water.
Agelenidae (Funnel-web weavers)
Agelenopsis utahana (Chamberlin and
Ivie), 1933. Chamberlin and Ivie, 1941, p.

600, figs. 12, 23, 38. Collected from funnel
webs among low shrubs in forest. Water-
ton Lake, west shore, 4200 ft.; Olson Creek,

5000 ft.; Many Glacier, 5000 ft.; Josephine

Lake, 4800 ft.; Roes Creek, 5100 ft.; Bow-

man Lake, 4000 ft; Numa Ridge.
Cryphoeca peckhami Simon, 1898. Figs.

28-30. Under logs and stones. Bertha Lake,
5800 ft.; Waterton Lake, west shore, 4200
ft.; Iceberg Lake, 6000 ft.; Roes Creek, 5100
ft.

Lycosidae (Wolf spiders)

Arctosa alpigena (Doleschal), 1852. Levi
and Levi, 1951, p. 223, figs. 9, 20. Running

38 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

on surface of ground. Summit Lake (Water-
ton Park), 6300 ft.; Upper Rowe Lake, 7100
ft.; Rowe Brook, 6000 ft. Olson Creek,
5000 ft.; Iceberg Lake, 6000 ft.

Lycosa pratensis Emerton, 1885. Kaston,
1948, p. 330, figs. 1092-1094, 1117-1118. Gun-
sight Lake, 5300 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4000 ft.

Pardosa anomala Gertsch, 1933 (a), p. 26,
fig. 36, @. Levi and Levi, 1951, p. 223, fig.
10, ¢. This species was commonly collected
on the east slope running on the ground at
elevations near timberline. It was not col-
lected on the west slope.

Pardosa coloradensis Banks, 1894. P. ster-
nalis Chamberlin, 1908, p. 185 (in part) pl.
14, fig. 2, 9. P. ontariensis Gertsch, 1933 a,
p. 18, fig. 27, ¢. Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.

Pardosa concinna (Thorell), 1877. P. mus-
cicola Emerton, 1911, p. 401, pl. 5, fig. 2.
Cut Bank Creek, 5200 ft.

Pardosa fuscula (Thorell), 1875. Levi and
Field, 1954, p. 456, figs. 65, 69. Cameron Lake,
5500 ft.

Pardosa groenlandica (Thorell), 1872. Levi
and Levi, 1951, p. 225, figs. 13, 14. Common-
ly found running on the ground above tim-
berline.

Pardosa mackenziana (Keyserling), 1876.
Kaston, 1948, p. 338, figs. 1133-1136. Very
commonly found running along the ground
in all parts of the park, though slightly less
abundant above timberline.

Pardosa moesta Banks, 1892. Kaston, 1948,
p. 334, figs. 1122, 1123, 1137. Bowman Lake,
4000 ft.; North Fork road at Anaconda
Creek, 3400 ft.

Pardosa solituda Levi and Levi, 1951, p.
225, figs. 11, 16. Piegan Pass, 7900 ft.

Pardosa sternalis (Thorell), 1877. Cham-
berlin, 1908, p. 185, pl. 13, figs. 5-6. At tim-
berline. Summit Lake, 6300 ft.

Pardosa wyuta Gertsch, 1934. P. atra
Chamberlin, 1908, p. 188, pl. 8, figs. 3, 8, 9.
Fig. 26. Iceberg Lake trail, 5900 ft.

Tarentula aculeata (Clerck), 1757. Kaston,
1948, p. 312, figs. 1024-1025, 2139-2140. Many
Glacier, 5000 ft.; Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.;
Cracker Lake, 6000 ft.

Tarentula kochii Keyserling, 1876. Cham-
berlin, 1908, p. 263, pl. 21, figs. 4, 5. Numa
Ridge, 4000 ft.; Glacier Park Headquarters,
3300 ft., (coll. J. Kendall).

Gnaphosidae (Running spiders)
Drassodes neglectus (Keyserling), 1887.
Kaston, 1948, p. 351, figs. 1176, 1188-1189,
1195. Under rocks. Near Carthew Lakes,
7400 ft.

[Vol. 69

Gnaphosa brumalis Thorell, 1875. Kaston,
1948, p. 346, figs. 1156-1157, 1185. Under sto-
nes at or above timberline. Carthew Lakes,
6500-7200 ft.; Little Chief Mountain, 7500 ft.
(coll. J. G. Edwards); Cut Bank Pass, 7600
ft.; pass above Cobalt Lake, 7300 ft.

Gnaphosa muscorum (L. Koch), 1866. Kas-
ton, 1948, p. 344, figs. 1152-1155, 1160, 1177.
Under stones. West shore of Waterton
Lake, 4200 ft.; pass above Cobalt Lake, 7300
hte

Gnaphosa parvula Banks, 1896. Kaston,
1948, p. 346, figs. 1161-1162, 1184. Under
lodgepole log. Bowman Lake, 4000 ft.

Orodrassus coloradensis (Emerton), 1877.
Drassodes melius Chamberlin, 1919, p. 246,
pl. 16, figs. 4, 5. Under logs and rocks. West
shore of Waterton Lake, 4200 ft.; Josephine
Lake, 4800 ft.; Swiftcurrent Ranger Station
(coll. J. G. Edwards); Two Medicine Lake,
5200 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4100 ft; Numa
Ridge, 5000 ft.

Poecilochroa montana Emerton, 1890, p.
175, pl. 4, fig. 2. Olson Creek, 5000 ft.; Can-
yon Creek, 5700 ft.

Zelotes subterraneus (C. L. Koch), 1839.
Kaston, 1948, p. 356, figs. 1248-1251. Under
rocks and logs. Summit Lake, 6300 ft.; Swift-
current Mountain, 8000 ft.; Josephine Lake,
4800 ft.; Cracker Lake, 6000 ft.; Roes Creek,
5100 ft.; Two Medicine Lake, 5200 ft.; Bow-
man Lake, 4100 ft.

Clubionidae (Sac-spiders)

Clubiona canadensis Emerton, 1890. Kas-
ton, 1948, p. 376, figs. 1288-1290, 1344-1346.
Common in forested parts of parks (4100-
7000 ft.), rolled up in leaves (especially
leaves of Alnus sp. and Rubus sp., and some-
times of Acer sp.).

Clubiona trivialis C. L. Koch, 1841. Locket
and Millidge, 1951, p. 140, figs. 72, 73. Car-
thew Lakes, 6500-7200 ft., under stones in
krummholz (very common); Bowman Lake,
4100 ft., sweeping.

Micaria altana Gertsch, 1933 (b), p. 6,
fig. 5, 2; 1935, p. 17, fig. 38, ¢. Running on
trail. Swiftcurrent Valley, 5200 ft.

Micaria hesperella Gertsch and Jellison,
1939. M. constricta Emerton, 1894, p. 414,
pl. 2, fig. 5. M. canadensis Roewer, 1951, p.
446. Under rocks or running on rocks at or
near timberline. Carthew Lakes, 6500-7200
ft.;5 Summit Lake, 6300 ft.; Upper Rowe
Lake, 7100 ft.; Iceberg Lake, 6000 ft.; Ptar-
migan Lake, 6600 ft.; Cobalt Lake, 6800 ft.;
pass above Cobalt Lake, 7300 ft.

April-June, 1955]

Scotinella pelvicolens (Chamberlin and
Gertsch), 1930, p. 138, figs. 6-8. West shore
of Waterton Lake, 4200 ft.; Grinnell Glacier
trail, 5500 ft.; Roes Creek, 5100 ft.

Thomisidae (Crab spiders)

Misumena vatia (Clerck), 1757. Kaston,
1948, p. 411, figs. 1481-1482, 1496-1498. Com-
monly collected by sweeping meadows.

Philodromus alascensis Keyserling, 1884.
Levi and Levi, 1951, p. 230, figs. 33, 34. On
snow. Boulder Pass (coll. J. G. Edwards).

Philodromus aureolus (Clerck), 1757. Kas-
ton, 1948, p. 436, figs. 1557-1559. North Fork
road near Logging Creek, 3400 ft.

Thanatus sp.+ Figures 24-25. On and under
rocks in talus. Many Glacier, 5000 ft., 3, 9;
between Lincoln and Gunsight Passes, 6500-
7000 ft., ¢. This species is currently being
described from the Teton Mountains in Wyo-
ming by Dr. D. C. Lowrie.

Tibellus oblongus (Walckenaer), 1802.
Kaston, 1948, p. 440, figs. 1607-1608, 1616.
Collected by sweeping meadow. Near town
of Waterton; near Babb, Glacier County,
4500 ft.

Xysticus benefactor Keyserling, 1880.
Gertsch, 1939, p. 399, figs. 246, 247, 260. Col-
lected by sweeping in meadow. Near Babb,
Glacier County, 4500 ft.

Xysticus labradorensis Keyserling, 1887.
Gertsch, 1939, p. 401, figs. 248, 249, 268. Un-
der rocks at or above timberline. Carthew
Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.; Swiftcurrent Mountain,
8000 ft.; Dawson Pass, 7500 ft.

Xysticus lutulentus Gertsch, 1934. Gertsch,
1939, p. 396, figs. 242, 243, 262. Many Glacier,
5000 ft.; Iceberg Lake, under stones, 6000
ft.; Canyon Creek, rolled up in leaves, 5700
ft:

Salticidae (Jumping spiders)

Chalcoscirtus carbonarius Emerton, 1917,
p. 271, fig. 23. On and under stones above
timberline. Carthew Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.
(very common); Cracker Lake, 6000 ft.; Cut
Bank Pass, 7600 ft.; Dawson Pass, 7500 ft.

Evarcha hoyi (Peckham), 1883. Kaston,
1948, p. 469, figs. 1713-1717, 2134-2136. Col-
lected from varied habitats, sweeping and
under rocks. West shore of Waterton Lake,
4200 ft.; Many Glacier, 5000 ft.; Bowman
Lake, 4100 ft.; North Fork road near Log-

4 This species has been described as Apollophanes
patricia Lowrie and Gertsch, 1955, Amer. Mus. Novi-
tates, no. 1736, p. 18, figs. 25, 26, 28. An additional
record is of one male, Rainbow Peak, 8000 ft., Glacier
Park (coll. J. G. Edwards).

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 39

ging Creek, 3400 ft.; and near Anaconda

Creek, 3400 ft.

Metaphidippus californicus (Peckham),
1888. Peckham and Peckham, 1909, p. 466,
fig. 5. Under stones. Carthew Lakes, 6500-
7200 ft.

Metaphidippus clematus Levi and Levi,
1951, p.232, figs. 37, 39, 40, 42. Sweeping in
aspen grove. Near Babb, 4500 ft.

Metaphidippus nigromaculatus (Keyser-
ling), 1884. Dendryphantes jeffersoni, Cham-
berlin and Gertsch, 1929, p. 110, fig. 51.
Under stones above timberline. Carthew
Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.; Piegan Pass, 7900 ft.;
pass above Cobalt Lake, 7300 ft.

Metaphidippus uteanus (Chamberlin and
Gertsch), 1929, p. 110, fig. 50, 51. Bertha
Lake trail, 5400 ft.

Paraphidippus marginatus (Walckenaer),
1837. Kaston, 1948, p. 479, figs. 1762-1765,
1782-1784, 2131-2132. Near Babb, Glacier
County, 4500 ft.

Pellenes lagganit Peckham and Peckham,
1909, p. 560, pl. 49, fig. 2, ¢. Levi and Levi,
1951, p. 232, figs. 47, 49, 9. Under stones.
Bertha Lake, 5800 ft.

Phidippus altanus Gertsch, 1934, p. 12, fig.
13, ¢. Levi and Levi, 1951, p. 232, figs. 48,
50, @. Ptarmigan Falls (coll. J. G. Edwards).

Phidippus johnsonii Peckham and Peck-
ham, 1883. Peckham and Peckham, 1909, p.
404, pl. 31, fig. 1. Among stones. West shore
Waterton Lake, 4200 ft.; Many Glacier, 5000
ft.; Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.; Roes Creek,
4800 ft.; near Triple Divide Pass, 7000-7600
ft.

Sitticus finschii (L. Koch), 1879. Levi and
Levi, 1951, p. 232, figs. 38, 41, 44. Under
stones near timberline. Near Triple Divide
Pass. 7000 ft.; between Lincoln and Gunsight
Passes, 6500-7000 ft.

Sitticus palustris (Peckham and Peckham),

1883. Kaston, 1948, p. 458, figs. 1660-1662,
1667-1668. Wet meadow. Bowman Lake,
4000 ft.

Sitticus ranieri Peckham and Peckham,
1909, p. 520, pl. 43, fig. 5. On and under
rocks near timberline. Above Cameron Lake,
(coll. J. G. Edwards); Grinnell Glacier trail,
6000 ft.; Cracker Lake, 6000 ft.; Hidden
Lake Pass, 7100 ft.; between Lincoln and
Gunsight Passes, 6500-7000 ft.

Uloboridae (Feather-foot spiders)

Hyptiotes gertschi Chamberlin and _ Ivie,
1935, p. 12, figs. 38, 39. Roes Creek, 5100 ft.

40 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Dictynidae (Hackled band weavers)

Callobius nomeus (Chamberlin), 1919, p.
240, pl. 14, figs. 1, 2. Josephine Lake, 4800
ft.; Cut Bank Creek, 5100-5200 ft.; Two
Medicine Lake, 5200 ft.; North Fork road at
Kintla Creek, 3900 ft.; Avalanche Creek,
3500 ft.

Dictyna alaskae Chamberlin and Ivie, 1947,
p. 13, figs. 2, 3. Rowe Brook, 6000 ft.; Bow-
man Lake, 4100 ft.

Dictyna annulipes Blackwall, 1846. D. mu-
raria, Kaston, 1948, p. 506, figs. 1893, 1919-
1926. Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.

Dictyna coloradensis Chamberlin, 1919, p.
241, figs. 6-8. West of Babb, Glacier County.

Dictyna ‘major Menge, 1869. D. vincens
Chamberlin, 1919, p. 248, figs. 1, 2. Col-
lected fairly commonly by sweeping in high
grass at lower elevations with the exception
of one female which was collected at Upper
Rowe Lake, 7100 ft.

Dictyna peragrata Bishop and Ruderman,
1946, p. 3, figs. 5-8. Rowe Brook, 6000 ft.;
Josephine Lake, 4800 ft.; Two Medicine Lake,
5200 ft.; Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.; Sprague
Creek camp ground, 3200 ft.

Dictyna phylax Gertsch and Ivie, 1936, p.
7, figs. 29, 30. Bowman Lake, 4100 ft.

Lathys alberta Gertsch, 1946, p. 3, fig. 11.
Carthew Lakes, 6500-7200 ft.; Piegan Pass,
7900 ft.; Dawson Pass, 7500 ft.

Pagomys monticola Gertsch and Mulaik,
1936, p. 2, fig. 2. Under stones, Iceberg
Lake, 6000 ft.; Cracker Lake, 6000 ft.

Titanoeca sp. Cracker Lake, 6000 ft., 9°;
Hidden Lake Pass, 7100 ft., 9; between Lin-
coln and Gunsight Passes, 6500-7000 ft., @.

References Cited

Bishop, S. C. 1949. Proc. Rochester Acad.
Sci., 9: 159-235.

Bishop, S. C. and C. R. Crosby, 1936. Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington, 49: 39-42.

Bishop, S. C. and C. Ruderman, 1946.
59: 1-8.

Chamberlin, R. V. 1908. Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philadelphia, 60: 158-318.
1919. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer., 12: 239-260.
1948. ibid., 41: 483-562.

Chamberlin, R. V. and W. J. Gertsch, 1929.
Jour. Ent. Zool., 21. 101-112.
1930. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, 43: 137-
144.

ibid.,

[Vol. 69

Chamberlin, R. V. and W. Ivie, 1933. Bull.
Univ. Utah, biol, ser., 2(2): 1-79.
1935. ibid., 2(8): 1-79.
1938. Seventh Int. Ent. Kongr., 1: 56-73.
1941. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer., 34: 585-625.
1942. Bull. Univ. Utah. biol ser., 7(1): 1-
117.

1945. Trans. Connecticut Acad. Sci., 36:
215-235.

1947. Bull. Univ. Utah, biol. ser., 10(3): 1-
103.

Crosby, C. R. and S. C. Bishop, 1925.
York State Mus. Bull., 264: 1-71.
1928. ibid., 278: 1-96.
1931. Jour. New York Ent. Soc., 39: 359-
403.
Davis, N. W.
15. 662-705.
Emerton, J. H. 1882.
Acad. Sci., 6: 1-86.
1890. ibid., 8: 166-206.
1894. ibid., 9: 400-429.
1911. ibid., 16: 383-407.
1917. Canadian Ent., 49: 261-272.
1919. Rept. Canadian Arct. Exped., 3: 34-
94.
1926. Canadian Ent., 58: 115-119.
Gertsch, W. J. 1933 a. Amer. Mus. Novitates,
636: 1-28.
1933 b. ibid., 637: 1-14.
1934. ibid., 726: 1-26.
1935. ibid., 805: 1-24.
1939. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 76: 277-
442.
1946. Amer. Mus. Novitates, 1319: 1-21.
Gertsch, W. J. and W. Ivie, 1936. ibid., 858:
1-25.

New

1934. Amer. Midland Natur.,

Trans. Connecticut

Gertsch, W. J. and S. Mulaik, 1936. zb:d.,
851: 1-21.
Kaston, B. J. 1946. ibid., 1306: 1-19.
1948. Bull. Connecticut Geol. Nat. Hist.
Surv., 70: 1-874.
Levi, H. W. 1951. Amer. Mus. Novitates,
1501: 1-41.

Levi, H. W. and H. Field, 1954. Amer. Mid-
land, Nat., 51: 440-467.

Levi, H. W. and L. R. Levi, 1951. Zoologica,
36: 219-237.

Locket, G. H. and A. F. Millidge, 1951. British
Spiders, vol. 1, London.

Peckham, G. W. and E. Peckham, 1909. Trans.
Wisconsin Acad. Sci., 16: 355-646.

Roewer, C. Fr. 1951. Abhandl. naturwiss.
Verein Bremen, 32: 437-455.

1952. Zool. Anz., 149:267-273.

Zorsch, H. M. 1937. Amer. Midland Nat. 18:

856-898.

April-June, 1955]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 4i

BIRDS AND MAMMALS OBSERVED ON A CRUISE IN AMUNDSEN
GULF, N.W.T., July 29th- August 16th, 1953 °

E. O. HOoHN
Department of Physiology, University of Alberta, Edmonton, Alberta.

N July 9, 1953 the native-owned motor

schooners “North Star” and “Reindeer”
left Sach’s Harbour on S.W. Banks Island
to take the Eskimos who had wintered there
and myself who had spent the preceding
three months with them, to Tuktuoyaktuk on
the mainland. The journey normally takes
three days but in this case extensive ice
floes south and southeast of Banks Island
forced us to make a very roundabout journey,
as far East as Holman Island, which lasted
nearly three weeks. In the course of this
journey we anchored at various points on
the Victoria Island and mainland shores of
Amundsen Gulf. Although the only un-
expected observation made was the finding
of thick-billed Murres (Uria lomvia) breed-
ing at Cape Parry, it is felt that the other
observations I was able to make in the short
period available at any one point may be
of some interest as some of the places
visited have probably not been visited by
any naturalist. For the sake of readability
the observations are presented as a narrative
of the journey rather than grouped under
species headings. The accompanying sketch
map shows the place names mentioned and
the route taken.

July 29 — Sach’s Harbour to a position west
of Cape Lampton, Banks Island. One bearded
seal (Erignathus barbatus) was seen in
Sach’s Harbour Bay and by midnight 5
ringed seals (Phoca hispida) had been seen.
We passed two Bowhead Whales (Balaena
mysticetus) travelling along the floe edge.
Birds observed were a flock of about 300
male King Eiders (Somateria spectabilis) a
flock of about 50 Red Phalaropes (Phalaro-
pus fulicarius) swimming at sea and 5 Long-
tailed Jaegers (Stercorarius longicaudus).

July 30 — South and southeast of southern
Banks island. Most of the day the vessels
were moored to an ice floe as progress in
any desirable direction was barred by ice.
While I was asleep a polar bear (Thalarctos
maritimus) was seen on the ice in the early
hours by several of the natives. The follow-
ing birds were noted — Long-tailed Jaegers

1) Received for publication May 17, 1954.

4, Pomarine Jaegers (Stercorarius pomari-
nus) 2, 2 male King Eiders, 1 Yellow-billed
Loon (Gavia adamsi), 2 Glaucous Gulls
(Larus hyperboreus) and 3 Herring Gulls
(Larus argentatus). At 8:30 p.m. we were
under way again and just before midnight
sighted a polar bear on the ice. Rather than
withdrawing at the sight of the vessels it
approached, at times scenting towards them.
It was shot by one of the natives and proved
to be a male. It was interesting to note
that after it had been disembowelled on the
ice, 4 Glaucous and 1 Herring Gull appeared
at once to feed on the remains while none
had been in sight until then. In the course
of the day 4 ringed seals were seen, two
being shot.

July 31 — Off Cape Woolaston, Victoria
Island. As there were still ice floes south
of us it was decided to make for the trading
post of Holman Island on Victoria Island.
Ten ringed seals were seen in the course of
the day and an adult white whale (Delphi-
napterus leucas) accompanied by a grey
calf. Birds seen were 2 Glaucous Gulls, 2
Longtailed and 1 Pomarine Jaegers.

August 1 — Holman Island, Victoria Island.
We arrived here about 1:30 am. Two Yel-
low-billed Loons were observed in the bay.
A number of Horned larks (Eremophila al-
pestris), Lapland Longspurs (Calcarius lap-
ponicus) and Snow Buntings (Plectrophe-
nax nivalis) were seen here daily, through-
out our stay, ie., until August 9.

August 2 — Holman Island. At a point on
the coast about 1 mile northwest of the
post 20 Glaucous and 10 Herring Gulls were
seen as well as 1 Raven (Corvus corax) and
2 Baird’s Sandpipers (Erolia bardi). A
young female Arctic hare (Lepus arcticus)
was brought in by a native.

August 3 — Holman Island. On a lakelet
about 1 mile north of the post a female
Old Squaw (Clangula hyemalis) and a
female King Eider with two downy young |
were seen. About 6 American Pipits (An-
thus spinoletta) were seen near the post.
One was collected this day and three more
the following day. The skins of these pipits

42

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Banks Id.

xe Sachs Harbour

C. Lampbote oe

mR ee agutdmone 8

eG ene

*S sHousePint

Mainland

Vicforia Id.

Kelson Head = Min 5

givelaston es
~ Holman Th

R stoet:
ert Sound

nets

“Prince

Map of Amundsen Gulf Area.

were examined for me by Mr. T. H. Man-
ning at the National Museum of Canada and
determined as Anthus spinoletta rubescens.
An American Rough-legged Hawk (Buteo
lagopus s. johannis) was also seen. On the
coast 2 American Golden Plovers (Pluvialis
dominica) were seen as well as five Ravens.
A Herring Gull collected this day was also
examined for me by Mr. Manning and de-
termined as a Thayer’s Gull (Larus argen-
tatus thayeri) and is it probable that all the
Herring Gulls observed on this journey be-
longed to this subspecies. A Baird’s Sand-
piper was collected also.

August 4 — Holman Island to a native camp
in the south shore of Minto Inlet. I was
taken by the Oblate Fathers of the R.C.
Mission, Holman Island to see two sick na-
tives at a camp on Minto Inlet. On this trip
12 Glaucous Gulls, 3 Yellow-billed Loons
and 1 Pacific Loon (Gavia arctica) were seen.

August 6 — Holman Island. Two Lapland
Longspurs were noted in song this day. The
song was shorter and more subdued than
the typical spring song.

August 7 — Holman Island. A walk of about
2 miles eastward on the rocky plateau be-
hind the post revealed very few birds: 3

American Pipits, 2 Lapland Longspurs, a
flock of 10 Horned Larks and the droppings
of Willow Ptarmigan (Lagopus lagopus).

August 8 — Holman Island. I collected the
skull of a female polar bear which with its
cub had been shot on the coast near the
post on July 25 by one of the natives.

It may be noted that A. E. Porsild (1951)
working in parts of Banks and Victoria
Islands in part of July and August 1949
used Holman Island as his main base. The
following species of birds recorded above
at Holman Island were not recorded by him
for that area: Golden Plover, Baird’s Sand-
piper, Pacific Loon, Glaucous Gull, Horned
Lark, American Pipit, Raven (though an
old nest site was seen). In view of this it
is perhaps worth adding that during an ap-
proximately 24 hour visit to Holman Island
on September 2-3, 1949, I observed numerous
American Pipits, several Glaucous Gulls and
2 Ravens near the post.

August 9 — Holman Island to an islet west
of Investigator Island on the west side of
Prince Albert Sound. We left Holman Island
in the evening but because of rough weather
anchored by a small island off the north
shore of Prince Albert Sound until August
wk

April-June, 1955]

August 11 — Island west of Investigator
Island Prince Albert Sound. In an _ hour’s
walk over the rocky island to which we were
anchored I observed Herring Gulls, 3 Snow
Buntings, 1 Lapland Longspur, I American
Rough-legged Hawk and one Yellow-billed
Loon. A flock of 30 Eiders which were too
far away to enable me to be sure whether
they were King or Pacific Eiders were also
seen. On the vertical cliffs of another
island north of the one to which were
anchored Herring Gulls were obviously nest-
ing.

August 12 — Prince Albert Sound to House
Point (east of Pearce Point on the mainland).
During the crossing from Prince Albert
Sound to the mainland 1 Long-tailed and 2
Pomarine Jaegers were seen. At House Point
there were 4 Pintails (Anas acuta) and 1
Herring Gull.

August 13 — House Point to the Booth Islands
off Cape Parry. As we left the bay three
downy young Duck Hawks (Falco peregri-
nus anatum) were seen on a grassy ledge
on the cliff on the west shore of the bay,
both parent birds were also present. At the
entrance to the harbour Herring Gulls were
seen as well as a pair of Glaucous Gulls
which appeared to be nesting. Several
ringed seals were seen in the course of the
day. At the eastern extremity of Cape
Parry a fine male Barren Ground caribou
(Rangifer arcticus) was seen and shot by
one of the natives. Four pintails were seen
also here. At Cape Parry proper an almost
isolated rocky bluff held a colony of about
100 pairs of Thick-billed Murres (Uria lom-
via). We went ashore here and from the
cliff top I saw one downy young on the
highest ledge proving that this is a breeding
colony. I have no doubt there were other
birds or eggs on some of the other ledges.
Clarke (1944) records that he saw several
birds of this species at Cape Parry on Au-
gust 18, 1942, but does not mention any
evidence of breeding. His was the first
record of the species in the western Arctic
while the observation noted above is the
first breeding record for the area. Clarke
also records that he was told by an Eskimo
that this was one of the component species
of a large bird colony at Nelson Head, Banks
Island. However I was informed by Mr. T.
H. Manning (in correspondence) that he
saw no murres anywhere along the south
coast of Banks Island at the end of July,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 43

1952 or on a visit to Nelson Head in early
September 1951. It is fairly certain that the
Cape Parry colony is of recent origin since
Anderson, (1913) in his report of the
natural history collections of the 1908-1913
Canadian Arctic Expedition states that he
saw no murres anywhere east of Flaxman
Island, Alaska while there is no doubt that
he or other members of the expedition
passed Cape Parry during the breeding sea-
son. The fact that Clarke in 1942 recorded
several murres while I saw about 200 in
1953 indicates that the colony has been
growing during that period and is also in
agreement with the idea of the recent origin.
Unfortunately I collected no specimens, so
the subspecies to which these birds belong
is unknown. There is however no doubt
of the species involved as I made a note of
seeing the pale area on the bill of these birds
at the time.

There were also 6-10 pairs of Glaucous
Gulls nesting here, several downy young
being seen. Just before reaching the Cape 5
Pacific Loons were seen in two groups.

August 14 — Booth Islands near Cape Parry.
We remained anchored in a bay of Big
Booth Island for most of the day; during
a walk of an hour and half the follow-
ing birds were identified: 6 Baird’s Sand-
pipers, 3 Semi-Palmated Plovers (Chara-
drius hiaticula semipalmatus), 7 Sanderlings
(Crocethia alba), 1 Semi-palmated Sand-
piper (Ereunetes pusillus), 1 Northern Pha-
larope (Lobipes lobatus), 8 Glaucous Gulls
and 2 Herring Gulls, 6 Pintails, 1 Pacific
Eider (Somateria mollissima v nigra), 2
Red Breasted Mergansers (Mergus serrator),
1 adult and 3 almost fully fledged young
Duck Hawks, one of which I was able to
band, 1 Pomarine Jaeger. However there
were no passerine birds here at all. The
Red-breasted Merganser is apparently a new
record for this area as Anderson (1913)
records it only for the Mackenzie Delta and
the Arctic Coast of Alaska.

August 15 — Baillie Island off Cape Bathurst.
En route Booth Islands to Baillie Island
the only bird observed was 1 Arctic Tern
(Sterna paradisaea). On the sand pit at
the southwest end of Baillie Island 1 pair
of Glaucous Gulls was seen as well as 10
Arctic Terns including a young bird already
able to fly, 3 Old Squaws and about 50
Pacific Eiders many in moult and unable
to fly. One ringed seal was also seen here.

44 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

August 16 — Baillie Island to Tuktuoyaktuk.
Two flocks of Lesser Snow Geese (Chen
hyperborea hyperborea) were seen flying
overhead in a southwesterly direction.
Other birds observed on this last leg of the
journey were 20 Arctic Terns and 3 Sabines
Gulls (Xema sabini).

Addendum: Observations of T. H. Manning
in the Amundsen Gulf area 1951, 1952 and
1953. Mr. T. H. Manning has placed at my
disposal notes based on observations made by
him and A. H. McPherson in 1951 and 1952
and by himself in 1953. Those of his observa-
tions made on coastal areas or at sea within
the limits of Amundsen Gulf are summarized.
The presentation is according to locality,
localities being arranged in the general order
followed by my journey described above.

Cape Berkeley, Western Victoria Island: Sept.
5-7 inclusive, 1953. Six hours spent ashore
here. Observations: Pacific Eider — 15 males,
6 females seen Sept. 8 on leaving the cape
by boat. King Eiders — 7 all females (some
collected). Duck Hawk — 1; Golden Plover
— 1; Ruddy Trunstone — 1; White-rumped
Sandpiper — 10; Horned Larks — 6; Ravens
—2; Lapland Longspurs — 10; Snow Buntings
— 25.

North Shore of Minto Inlet: Sept. 8, 1953.
Observed while travelling by canoe. American
Rough-legged Hawk — 1; Duck Hawk — 2;
Glaucous Gulls — 4.

North Shore of Minto Inlet: Sept. 10, 1953.
During two hours walking ashore at about

[Vol. 69

the midpoint of the north shore of the inlet.
American Rough-legged Hawks — 2; Arctic
Hares — 2.

Baillie Island: Sept. 23-27, 1952. About 300
Rock Ptarmigan (Lagopus mutus) concentra-
tion apparently due to some sort of a migratory
movement perhaps from Banks Island; only
a few Willow Ptarmigan.

Cape Dalhousie (mainland coast between
Baillie Island and Tuktuoyaktuk). A. H. Mc-
Pherson saw a grizzly bear (Ursus horribilis)
about 12 miles south of the cape on September
28, 1952. Sept. 6 to 8th, 1951: A Pintail and
a Willow Ptarmigan as well as 6 male Rock
Ptarmigan, tentatively assigned to the subspe-
cies Lagopus mutus rupestris were collected
here, also a Glaucous Gull.

REFERENCES

Anderson, R. M. 1913. Report of the Natural
History Collections of the Expedition
(1908-1912) in Steffanson V. “My
Life with the Eskimoes” New York,
Macmillan Co.

Clarke, C. H. D. 1944. Notes on the status
and distribution of certain mammals
and birds in the Mackenzie River and

Western Arctic Area in 1942 and
1943. Canadian Field-Naturalist, 58:
97-103.

Porsild, A. E. 1951. Bird notes from Banks
and Victoria Islands. Canadian Field-
Naturalist, 65: 40-42.

NOTES ON FUNGI FROM NORTHERN CANADA
II BOLETACEAE *

J. Watton Groves? and SHEILA C. THOMSON ®

ECORDS of Boletaceae from the far north

in North America appear to be very few.
Boletus scaber Bull. ex Fr. was reported
from Greenland by Rostrup (1888, 1904),
from Herschell Island by Dearness (1928),
and from Alaska by Cash (1953). No other
records of this group of fungi have been
encountered by us so far. It is, therefore,

—

Received for publication June 1, 1954.
Contribution No. 1399 from the Botany and Plant
Pathology Division, Science Service, Department of
Agriculture, Ottawa, Canada.
Principal Mycologist.
Assistant Mycologist.

wh

of some interest to record the species of
boletes collected by members of the bio-
logical survey parties operating in the Can-
adian north under the auspices of the De-
fence Research Board during the summers of
1948-51.

For the most part, North American au-
thors have recognized only three genera of
boletes, Boletus, Boletinus, and Strobilomy-
ces. It has been clearly evident that the
genus Boletus contained a heterogeneous as-
semblage of species, and recently Snell

April-June, 1955]

(1941, 1942), Slipp and Snell (1944), and
Singer (1945a, 1945b, 1947), have proposed
classifications aimed at splitting the old
genus Boletus into more natural groups and
bringing the nomenclature into line with the
International Rules.

Although the classification of the boletes
cannot be considered to be stabilized as yet,
it is believed that these proposals represent
a distinct advance in the taxonomy of the
group. It is, therefore, proposed to adopt
them, and on this basis the boletes collected
by the northern biological survey parties, fall
into five genera, Boletinus, Boletus, Lecci-
num, Suillus and Xerocomus.

The genus Boletinus is used in the tradi-
tional sense to include species in which the
pores are not readily separable from the
pileus or from each other, and show a more
or less radial arrangement, especially near
the stipe, sometimes approaching a lamellate
configuration. The spores in Boletinus are
smooth and narrow-ellipsoid, and usually ra-
ther small. The type species is B. cavipes
(Opat.) Kalchbr.

It is difficult to draw a sharp dividing
line between Boletinus and Swillus which
comprises the old section Viscipelles of Bo-
letus in the broad sense. The spores are very
similar in both Boletinus and Suillus and
often the tubes in Suillus species show more
or less radial arrangement especially in
young stages. The genus is_ principally
characterized by having a viscid pileus and
ellipsoid spores. The type species is S. lu-
teus (L. ex Fr.) S. F. Gray.

In Xerocomus the pileus is dry and may
be glabrous to subtomentose, the tubes are
never stuffed and do not have red mouths,
the stipe is not subbulbous and the spores
are subfusiform. The type species is X. sub-
tomentosus (L. ex. Fr.) Quél.

Leccinum includes the species formerly
placed in the section Versipelles of Boletus.
The tubes are very long, whitish (or yellow
in the section Luteoscabra which is not re-
presented in the northern collections), free,
or if adnate when young becoming deeply
depressed around the stipe. The stem is
relatively slender and furfuraceous-scabrous.
The spores are subfusiform and usually re-
latively large. The type species is L. au-
rantiacum (Bull. ex) S. F. Gray.

Among the northern collections, the only
representative of the genus Boletus in the

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 45

more limited sense is B. edulis Bull. ex Fr.
which is the type of the genus.

The following species have been identified.

Boletinus cavipes (Opat.) Kalchbr. Bot. Zeit.,
ONY, eps Lode GGre

Boletus cavipes Opat. Comm. Bolet. p. 11.
1836.

The specimen cited below consists of three
fruit bodies 3-5 cm. broad in the dried condi-
tion. The colour was described by the col-
lector as ‘light lemon yellow” when fresh.
They are now “Ochraceous Tawny’? to
“Straw Yellow’. The cap is fibrillose-squa-
mulose and the stem is hollow. The spores
measure (7-) 8-9:5 (-10) x (2.5-) 3.0-3.5
(-4.0) u. The species is associated with Larix
and widely distributed in North America and
Europe.

Specimen examined: DAOM 22073, Yellow-
knife, N.W.T. Coll. Cody & McCanse (3518),
Aug, 17, 1949.

Boletinus glandulosus Peck Bull. N.Y. St. Mus.
131:34. 1909.

Snell and Dick (1941) stated that the only
collections of this species known to them
were from Nova Scotia and Maine and they
reported an additional collection from New
Hampshire. It is interesting that this ap-
parently rare species should appear so many
times in these northern collections. Evident-
ly its range is predominantly northern and
the Fort Smith collections represent a very
considerable extension of its range. In addi-
tion to the specimens listed below, we have
collections in the herbarium from Nova
Scotia and from St. Aubert, L’Islet Co., Que.

The dried specimens are 2.5-6 cm. broad,
dark reddish brown to dark maroon brown
or nearly black, (‘““Hay’s Maroon”, “Diamine
Brown”, “Hessian Brown”, “Dark Indian
Red’), somewhat shiny. The spores are
8.5-11 x 3-45 wu. The distinctive character
from which it takes its name is the presence
of abundant glandular dots on the tubes and
upper part of the stem above the annulus.
The presence of these glandular dots and the
viscid cap are characters which indicate that
this species should be placed in Suillus ra-
ther than Boletinus. However, no combina-
tion is available in Suillus and it is not con-
sidered desirable to make a new combination
in this paper.

4 Colour names according to Ridgway, R. 1912. Color
Standards and Color Nomenclature. Washington,
D.C.

46 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Specimens examined: DAOM 38661, St.
Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D. B. O. Savile & J.
Vaillancourt (2827), August 9, 1951; DAOM
28449, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D. B. O. Sa-
vile & J. Vaillancourt (2922), August 16,
1951; DAOM 28453, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll.
D. B. O. Savile & J. Vaillancourt (2834),
August 9, 1951; DAOM 27593, Fort Smith,
N.W.T. Coll. C. C. Loan (L244), August 16,
1950; DAOM 28414, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll.
D. B. O. Savile & J. Vaillancourt (2791),
August 8, 1951; DAOM 27592, Fort Smith,
N.W.T. Coll. C. C. Loan (L256), August 17,
1950; DAOM 27564, Fort Smith, N.W.T. Coll.
C. C. Loan (L278), August 19, 1950.

Boletinus spectabilis (Peck) Murrill N. Amer.
Fi. 9:160. 1910.

Boletus spectabilis Peck. Ann. Rep. N.Y.
St. Mus. 23:128. 1872.

The red scaly caps of this fungus make it
a very showy species. It has generally been
considered as rather rare. It is usually, and
perhaps exclusively, found with larch, with
which it is said to form mycorrhiza.

It is likely to be confused with B. pictus
Peck. The latter has red scales on a yellow
background whereas in B. spectabilis the sca-
les are usually grayish on a red background.
They can be distinguished with certainty by
the spores which are 11-14 x 4.5-6 p in B.
spectabilis and (7.5-) 8-10 (-11) x 3.04.0 u
in B. pictus. Singer (1945b) also points out
that in B. spectabilis the veil is duplex, the
inner veil gelatinizing, and for this reason
he places it in a separate section of Boleti-
nus.

Only a single collection was received
among the northern specimens and B. pictus
was apparently not collected at all.

Specimen examined: DAOM 21946, Great
Whale River, Que. Coll. J.R. Vockeroth, Sep-
tember 7, 1949.

Boletus edulis Bull. ex Fr. Syst. Mycol. 1:392.
1821.

This well known and widely distributed
species appears to be very variable and a large
number of forms and varieties have been
described. The distinguishing characters of
the species are the tubes, which are at first
whitish and stuffed, becoming greenish yel-
low; the bulbous stem which is more or less
reticulate; and the rather large spores, 13-18
(-21) x 4.06.0 u. The colour of the cap
is variable, usually in shades of yellow to
reddish-yellow to reddish-brown often paler
on the margin.

[Vol. 69

The collection referred here consists of
two fruiting bodies 6 and 8 cm. diam. in the
dried condition. They were described as
cream to fawn when fresh and when dried
are “Cinnamon Buff” to “Tawny Olive” to
“Verona Brown”. A _ striking character of
these specimens is that they are deeply ri-
mose to frustose and suggest Boletus frustu-
losus Peck in this character. However Singer
(1947) stated that this frustulose character is
simply the result of meteorological condi-
tions and he regarded B. frustulosus as a
synonym of B. edulis.

Kallenbach (1926) published a photograph
of B. edulis, Fig. 14, that almost exactly il-
lustrates the condition found in these fruit
bodies. These specimens have spores match-
ing those of typical B. edulis and the stem
is reticulate on the upper third but not very
strongly so.

Specimen examined: DAOM 43638, Goose
Bay, Labrador. Coll. J.M. Gillett & J.S. Bar-
ton (5733), August 14, 1950.

Suillus hirtellus (Peck) Kuntze Rev. Gen.
Plant. 32:535. 1898.

Boletus hirtellus Peck. Bull. N.Y. St. Mus.
8: 94. 1889.

The collection referred to this species was
rather difficult to place. It consisted of
two fruit bodies 4-6 cm. in diameter when
dried. It was obviously a Suillus from the
spores and viscidity of the cap but lacked
an annulus and apparently lacked glandular
dots on the stem. Careful search revealed
that a few were present near the apex. The
scales on the cap are very inconspicuous and
appressed-fibrillose, but they are similar to
those in specimens from Michigan identified
by A. H. Smith. The stems are stout and
shorter than in the Michigan specimens and
the glandular dots on the stem are less evi-
dent, but this seems to be the best disposi-
tion of these specimens. The species appears
to be rather rare and not very well known.
We have no other Canadian record.

Specimen examined: DAOM 34971, White-
horse, Y.T. Coll. J. M. Gillett (3417), June
20, 1949.

Suillus piperatus (Bull. ex Fr.) Kuntze Rev.
Gen. Plant. 37:535. 1898.

Boletus piperatus Bull. ex. Fr. Syst. Myc.
ieRscowelon l=

The specimen cited below consists of three
fruit bodies, 2-4 cm. in diameter in the dried
condition. The caps are close to “Clay Color”
and the pores near ‘Prout’s Brown” to

April-June, 1955]

“Mummy Brown” and are quite large. The
stem shows some yellow at the base. The
spores are 8-11 x 34 un.

This is a common species in the Ottawa
District and one of its most distinctive
characters is the very acrid, peppery taste.
There were no notes on the taste in this
specimen but it matches dried specimens in
every respect.

Specimen examined: DAOM 34973, St. An-
thony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile & J. Vaillan-
court (2833), August 9, 1951.

Xerocomus chrysenteron (Bull. ex Fr.) Quel.
Fl. Myc. Fr. 418. 1888.

Boletus chrysenteron Bull. ex Fr.
Syst. Mycol. 415, 1838.

This is also a widely distributed and fairly
well known species. It is rather variable and
a number of forms and varieties have been
described. Coker and Beers (1943) stated
that the spores are truncate at one end but
Singer (1945a) claimed that this fungus with
truncate spores is not the true X. chrysen-
teron.

In the herbarium at Ottawa there are
several specimens identified as X. chrysen-
teron in which the spores are truncate, but
there are as well, several specimens, also
identified as X. chrysenteron, in which the
spores are not truncate. In other characters
such as the olive-brown, velvety cap, crack-
ing on the margin, the rather large, green-
ish-yellow tubes, and the striate, partly red-
dish stem, they seem very similar.

The Newfoundland specimens cited below
have spores 11.0-14.5 x 3.0-5.0 » and they
are not truncate. These specimens, there-
fore, seem best disposed as X. chrysenteron
if we accept Singer’s statement that the form
with truncate spores is not the European
X. chrysenteron.

Specimens examined. DAOM 34954, St. An-
thony Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile & J. Vaillan-
court (2921), August 15, 1951; DAOM 34959,
St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile & J.
Vaillancourt (2826), August 9, 1951.

Epicr.

Xerocomus subtomentosus (L. ex Fr.) Quel.
Fl. Myce. Fr. 418. 1888.

Boletus subtomentosus L. ex Fr. Syst. Myc.
I) 3898 1821:

This species is similar to X. chrysenteron
in the colour of the cap and the velvety to-
mentose character but the cracks in the
cuticle of this species show yellow whereas
in X. chrysenteron they show red. The stem

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 47

of X. subtomentosus is somewhat reticulate
at the apex, not striate and not coloured red.
The spores in the specimen cited below are
11-14 x 45 u, very close to X. chrysenteron
in size. X. subtomentosus occurs in both
North America and Europe.

Specimen examined: DAOM 26285, Goose
Bay, Lab. Coll. J. Gillett and W. Findlay
(5428), July 22, 1950.

Leccinum

The genus Leccinum includes the species
formerly placed in the section Versipelles of
the genus Boletus. Most of the collections
of boletes received from the far north be-
longed here and they proved much the most
difficult to identify.

Snell (1936) recognized and attempted to
distinguish eight species in the section Versi-
pelles: B. albellus Peck, B. aurantiacus Bull.
ex. Pers., B. chromapes Frost, B. leucophaeus
Pers., B. niveus Fr., B. scaber Bull. ex Fr.,
B. subpunctipes Peck, and B. versipellis Fr.
Singer (1947) concluded from an examina-
tion of the type of B. subpunctipes, that it
was a synonym of Tylopilus ferrugineus
(Frost) Sing. and did not belong with this
group. B. chromapes is quite distinct but the
remaining six species comprise a difficult
group.

Singer (1947) revised this group as section
Versipelles of the genus Leccinum, and he
recognized seven species, L. albellum (Peck)
Sing., L. aurantiacum (Bull. ex) S. F. Gray,
L. chalybaeum Sing. L. duriusculum
(Schulz.) Sing., L. oxydabile (Sing.) Sing.,
L. scabrum (Bull. ex. Fr.) S. F. Gray, and
L. testaceo-scabrwum (Secr.) Sing. For the
purpose of this paper two of these may be
disregarded: L. chalybaeum known only in
Florida, and L. duriusculum known only in
Europe. Of the remainder, the concepts of
albellum and aurantiacum remain the same
whereas B. versipellis becomes L. testaceo-
scabrum. B. scaber is split into two species,
L. oxydabile and L. scabrum, and the latter
is further subdivided into two subspecies,
L. scabrum ssp. rotundifoliae (Sing.) Sing.
and L. scabrum ssp. niveum (Fr.) Sing. B.
niveus is thus reduced to the rank of sub-
species but the status of B. leucophaeus is
still somewhat uncertain. Singer’s disposition
of this species is not clear and it may pos-
sibly be recognizable as a tomentose form in
which the flesh blackens.

The principal characters used in dis-
tinguishing these five species are the colour
of the cap, the colour and colour changes of

48 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

the flesh, microscopic structure of the cu-
ticle of the cap, and the spores. In view of
the difficulty of separating these species and
the confusion that has existed concerning
them, the entire collection in the Myco-
logical Herbarium of the Division of Botany
and Plant Pathology, comprising about 110
specimens, was worked over independently
by both of us with these characters particu-
larly in mind in an attempt to evaluate them
as a means of distinguishing species in the
light of Singer’s (1947) treatment.

The character of the colour changes of the
flesh was of no assistance to us because the
material consisted entirely of dried speci-
mens and in only a few instances were there
any notes on the fresh condition referring to
colour changes.

Examination of the cuticle was carried out
by moistening with alcohol, removing a very
thin shaving with a sharp scalpel, and
mounting in KOH. The size range of the
spores and the A.M. number were deter-
mined.

The concept of the A.M. number was pro-
posed by Snell and Dick (1941). In deter-
mining this number the extremes of both
the length and width are ignored and the
number is constructed by taking the average
size of the majority of spores. Thus, if the
spores were found to be (12-) 15-17 (-18) x
(4-) 5-6 (-8) uw the A.M. number would be
16-5.5. In proposing the use of this number
Snell and Dick recognized that it was to
some extent a subjective character and that
different individuals might not obtain the
same numbers. We found this to be true
for the number as determined by the senior
author almost invariably proved to be slight-
ly larger than that determined by the junior
author for the same specimen. A.M. num-
bers published by one author must be used
with caution by others. Nevertheless we are
convinced that with experience it is an
extremely valuable tool to aid in the identifi-
cation of boletes, especially dried material.

Of the five species recognized by Singer
that might be expected to occur in this
region, L. albellum (Peck) Sing. is the most
distinctive by reason of the cuticle being
composed of several layers of sphaerocysts
arranged in chains. This character was easily
observed in some specimens, but in others
it was difficult to demonstrate and several
mounts were necessary before sphaerocysts
could be found. The spores were (12-) 14-18
(-20) x (4.5-) 5-6 (-6.5) w with an A.M. num-
ber of 16-5.5 or in some specimens slightly

[Vol. 69

smaller to 15-5.5. Most of the specimens re-
ferred here had light coloured caps, whitish
to pale grey, although a few were evidently
fairly dark grey. L. albellum was not found
among the northern collections.

In L. oxydabile (Sing.) Sing. the cuticle is
predominantly filamentous but there are a
few chains of short, vesiculose cells. The hy-
phae are up to 15 u in diameter. The spores
are large (15-) 17-22 (-24) x (5.0-) 6-7.5
(-8.0) uw with an A.M. number of 19-7 or
19-6.5. Among the specimens examined, a
consistent correlation was found between the
presence of large spores and the occurrence
of some chains of vesiculose cells in the
cuticle and some hyphae up to 15 u or oc¢a-
sionally more in diameter. The flesh of L.
oxydabile is said to turn red when cut and
the field notes on one specimen recorded
this colour change. The cap is greyish, or
grey-brown to blackish.

Among the collections examined, sixteen
were referred to L. oxydabile on this basis.
Most of them had originally been identified
as Boletus scaber Fr. but some had been
called B. leucophaeus Pers. No specimens
from northern Canada were referred to L.
oxydabile.

L. aurantiacum, L. testaceo-scabrum and
L. scabrum all have a filamentous cuticle.
L. scabrum may be various shades of grey-
brown from whitish to nearly black, whereas
the other two species are more brightly co-
loured, yellowish to orange or rufous, al-
though L. aurantiacum may occasionally be
brownish or nearly whitish.

The principal characters in which L. au-
rantiacum and L. testaceo-scabrum differ ac-
cording to Singer may be listed as follows:

1. An orange pigment is present in the
hyphae of the cuticle in L. aurantiacum but
not in L. testaceo-scabrum.

2. The context rarely turns blue on injury
in L. aurantiacum but usually turns blue or
occasionally reddish in L. testaceo-scabrum.

3. The scabrosity of the stipe is at first
whitish to brownish and finally blackish in
L. aurantiacum, and is black from the be-
ginning in L. testaceo-scabrum.

4. The mycelium of L. aurantiacum is
associated with Populus, Carpinus, Fagus or
Quercus, whereas that of L. testaceo-scabrum
is associated with Betula.

In the material we examined, in most
cases we had no information concerning co-
lour changes of the flesh, colour of the sca-

April-June, 1955]

brosity on the stipe when fresh, or the tree-
associate. The cuticle was examined micros-
copically and in every specimen it was pos-
sible to demonstrate pigment in the hyphae.
We found that it was also possible to de-
monstrate pigment in the surface hyphae of
L. scabrum and L. oxydabile which often
appeared as brightly coloured as those of
L. aurantiacum. Consequently we are rather
inclined to question the value of this charac-
ter as a basis of species distinction, and, at
least, we found nothing in the material we
examined that could be referred to L. testa-
ceo-scabrum on this basis.

Nearly fifty specimens were, therefore,
referred to L. aurantiacum (Bull. ex) S. F.
Gray. Most of these had been originally
identified as Boletus aurantiacus Bull, or
Boletus versipellis Fr. but a few as B. scaber.
In these specimens the cuticle is filamentous,
the hyphae are rather variable in width,
usually up to about 15 u, but in occasional
specimens hyphae up to 25 u in diameter
were observed. The hyphae tended to break
up rather readily into separate cylindric or
curved cells. These separate cells were al-
ways at least twice as long as broad, and
often proportionately much longer, and they
did not resemble the rounded, or short,
broad cells found in L. oxydabile. Another
character that appears to be constant is that
the margin is appendiculate in L. aurantia-
cum and is not in L. oxydabile or L. scabrum.

The spores in L. aurantiacum are smaller
than in L. scabrum and were found to be
rather variable in different collections. The
A.M. number was usually about 13-4, but
often 14-4, and sometimes up to 154.5. Snell
and Dick (1941) noted that more than one
A.M. number could be obtained for this spe-
cies and Singer (1947) also noted that it was
a somewhat variable species. Since we were
unable to correlate any other character
with this difference in spores, all of these
specimens were referred to L. aurantiacum.
The northern collections are listed below.

The remaining species, L. scabrum, has
long been regarded as one of our commonest
and best known boletes, but it is now evident
that it is easily confused with L. oxydabile
and can only be distinguished microscopical-
ly, at least in the dried condition.

The specimens considered to be typical
L. scabrum all have the cuticle entirely fila-
mentous composed of slender hyphae that
very rarely exceed 10 u in diameter and are
mostly 5-7 uw. The spores are smaller than

TuHE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 49

those of L. oxydabile but larger and more
deeply coloured under the microscope than
those of L. aurantiacwm. The size range is
(14-) 15-19 (-22) x (4.5-) 5-7 (-7.5) w and
the A.M. number is 17-6. The cap is coloured
various shades of grayish-brown. Five col-
lections from the north were considered to
belong to the typical form of L. scabrum.

There is some doubt concerning the Baffin
Island specimen because of the locality, but
the spores are too narrow for ssp. rotundi-
foliae and the cap is considerably larger than
any other specimens placed in rotundifoliae.
It seemed best disposed as L. scabrum.

As noted above, Singer (1942) recognized
two subspecies of L. scabrum, ssp. niveum
and ssp. rotundifoliae. It is not clear why
these were regarded as subspecies rather
than varieties and, in fact, there does not
seem to be any very good reason why they
should not be regarded as autonomous spe-

cies, although admittedly very close to L.

scabrum. It does seem desirable that they
should be accorded some taxonomic status
and, in order to avoid creating new combina-
tions at this time, Singer’s nomenclature is
followed.

L. scabrum ssp. niveum proved the more
difficult to determine. There were a num-
ber of specimens in the herbarium labelled
Boletus niveus but careful examination re-
vealed the presence of sphaerocysts in the
cuticle in most of these and necessitated
their re-disposition as L. albellum. The
sphaerocysts were sometimes difficult to de-
monstrate and several mounts were neces-
sary before they could be found. This raised
the question as to whether ssp. nivewm might
not be simply L. albellum in which the sphae-
rocysts had been overlooked.

Three collections were studied in which
we failed to find sphaerocysts, but in which
the spores were smaller than in typical L.
scabrum and very similar to those of L. al-
bellum. Two of these specimens were ac-
companied by field notes. In one it was
noted that the cap had green tones in the
colouring and that grub channels were
pinkish, and in the other a colour change
to pinkish in the cut flesh was noted. The
occurrence of green tones in the colouring
of ssp. niveus was noted by Peck (1908) and
Singer (1942), and Singer (1947) stated that
the flesh of L. albellum was strictly un-
changing. It was concluded, therefore, that
these specimens were properly referred to
ssp. niveum. It is probable that L. scabrum

50 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

ssp. niveum and L. albellum have frequently
been confused, but they are distinct entities
and can be distinguished by careful examina-
tion. One collection from Newfoundland
was considered to belong to L. scabrum ssp.
niveum.

L. scabrum ssp. rotundifoliae appears to
have been distinguished by Singer (1942)
principally on the basis of its association
with Betula rotundifolia (B. glandulosa)
and he noted (1947) that it had been found
in arctic Canada. It seemed probable that
this subspecies would be found among our
northern collections. Among the specimens
received, only one was definitely noted by
the collector as being associated with Betula
glandulosa. The spores of this specimen are
slightly longer and broader than those of
typical scabrum and gave an A.M. number
of 18-7. The cuticle is filamentous but the
hyphae are broader than in typical scabrum,
up to 15 wu in diameter and fairly readily
separating into cylindric cells as found in
L. aurantiacum. Eight other specimens that
exhibited the same combination of charac-
ters were found among the northern col-
lections. In general, the fruit bodies were
also somewhat smaller than those of L. sca-
brum.

In working through the collections of
L. scabrum, four specimens were found
which, on the basis of the characters above,
would have to be placed in ssp. rotundifoliae
but which were collected outside the range
of Betula glandulosa. Two of these speci-
mens were from Ringwood, N.Y., one from
Montreal Island, and one from the Petawawa
Forest Experiment Station, Ontario. No in-
formation was available on the tree-associa-
tes of these specimens, but it is possible that
ssp. rotundifoliae is not strictly limited to
B. glandulosa but might be associated with
other Betula species, possibly B. pumila.

Leccinum aurantiacum (Bull. ex) S.F. Gray.
Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1:646. 1821.

Boletus aurantiacus Bull. ex Pers.
logia Europ. 2: 147. 1825.

Specimens examined: DAOM 21916, Great
Whale R., Que. Coll. D.B.O. Savile, July 20,
1949; DAOM 21939, Rock Creek, Yukon.
Coll. J.A. Calder and L.G. Billard (3953)
July 26, 1949; DAOM 21948, West Dawson,
Yukon. Coll. J.A. Calder and L.G. Billard
(3244), June 22, 1949; DAOM 21953, Mac-
Rae, Yukon. Coll. D.A. Mitchell (210), Aug.
11, 1949; DAOM 21980, Great Whale R., Que.

Myco-

[Vol. 69

Coll. D.B.O. Savile and J. R. Vockeroth, Aug.
11, 1949; DAOM 21985, Great Whale R., Que.
Coll. D.B.O. Savile, July 27, 1949; DAOM
21997, Great Whale R., Que. Coll. J.R. Voc-
keroth, Sept. 4, 1949; DAOM 26276, Fort
Smith, N.W.T. Coll. C. Loan (259), Aug. 17,
1950; DAOM 26280, Fort Smith, N.W.T. Coll.
C. Loan (119), Aug. 6, 1950; DAOM 26281,
Goose Bay, Labrador. Coll. J.M. Gillett and
W.I. Findlay (5924), August, 1950; DAOM
28446, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile
and J. Vaillancourt (2408), July 19, 1951;
DAOM 28448, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O.
Savile and J. Vaillancourt (2551), July 28,
1951; DAOM 43637, King Salmon, Alaska.
Coll. W.B. Schofield (265), Aug. 9, 1952.

Leccinum scabrum (Bull. ex Fr.) S.F. Gray.
Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1:647: 1821.

Boletus scaber Bull. ex Fr. Syst. Mycol.
I: 393. 1821.

Specimens examined: DAOM 28426, St. An-
thony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile and J. Vail-
lancourt (2832), Aug. 9, 1951; DAOM 28433,
St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile and
J. Vaillancourt (2831), Aug. 9, 1951; DAOM
28435, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile
and J. Vaillancourt (2793), Aug. 8, 1951;
DAOM 26270, Fort Smith, N.W.T. Coll. C.C.
Loan (275), Aug. 19, 1950; DAOM 21318,
Hudson Bay Post, Ward Inlet, Frobisher
Bay, Baffin Island. Coll. T. N. Freeman,
July 19, 1948.

Leccinum scabrum ssp. niveum (Fr.) Singer.
Ann. Mycol. 40:36. 1942.

Boletus niveus Fr. Obs. I, p. 111, 1815.

Specimen examined: DAOM 28444, St. An-
thony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Savile and J. Vail-
lancourt (2407), July 19, 1951.

L. scabrum ssp. rotundifoliae Singer. Ann.

Mycol. 40:36. 1942.

Specimens examined: DAOM 21722,
Dawson, Yukon. Coll. W.W. Judd,
DAOM 21738, Yellowknife, N.W.T. Coll.
Cody and McCanse (3517), Aug. 17, 1949;
DAOM 21937, Jensen Flats, Yukon. Coll, J.
A. Calder and L. G. Billard (3919), 1949;
DAOM 25819, Great Whale R., Que. Coll.
D.B.O. Savile, July 13, 1949; DAOM 25829,
Gillam, Man. Coll. W.B. Schofield (1162),
July 16, 1950; DAOM 25858, Chesterfield
Inlet, Keew. Coll. D.B.O. Savile and J. Voc-
keroth (1353), Aug. 9, 1950; DAOM 26288,
Goose Bay, Labrador. Coll. J.M. Gillett and
W.I. Findlay (5393), July 20, 1950; DAOM
34972, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D.B.O. Sa-

West
1949;

April-June, 1955]

vile and J. Vaillancourt (2855), Aug. 12,
1951; DAOM 34976, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll.
D.B.O. Savile and J. Vaillancourt (2441), July
21, 1951.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The authors wish to express their indebted-
ness to Dr. W.H. Snell, Brown University,
Providence, Rhode Island, who kindly read
the manuscript and has offered many help-
ful suggestions.

LITERATURE CITED

Cash, Edith K. 1953. A check list of Alaskan
fungi. Pl. Dis. Rep. Suppl. 219.
Coker, W.C. and Alma Holland Beers. 1943.
The Boletaceae of North Carolina. The
University of North Carolina Press.

Chapel Hill.

Dearness, John, 1928. Report on fleshy fungi
collected in August 1926. In J. Dewey
Soper. A faunal investigation of south-
ern Baffin Island. Nat. Mus. Can. Bull.

53: 1-143.
Kallenbach, Franz. 1926. Die Pilze mitteleu-
ropas. Bd. I. Die Rohrlinge (Boleta-

ceae). Lieferung 1, pp. 1-4.

Peck, C.H. 1908. N.Y. St. Mus. Bull. 122: 1-
160.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 51

Rostrup, E. 1888. Oversigt over Grognlands:

Svampe. Medd. om Grgnl. 3: 517-643.

. 1904. Fungi Groenlandiae orientalis

in Expeditionibus G. Amdrup 1898-1902.
Medd. om Grgnl. 30: 113-121.

Singer, R. 1942. Das System der Agaricales.
II. Ann. Mycol. 40: 1-132.
. 1945a. The Boletineae of Florida.
with notes on extralimital species I.
Strobilomycetaceae. Farlowia 2: 97-141.
. 1945b. II. The Boletaceae (Gyropo-
roideae) Farlowia 2: 223-303.
———. 1947. III. Amer. Midl. Nat. 37: 1-
135.

Albert W. and Walter H. Snell. 1944.
Taxonomic-ecologic studies of the Bo-
letaceae in northern Idaho and ad-
jacent Washington. Lloydia 7: 1-66.

Snell, Walter H. 1936. Tentative keys to the
Boletaceae of the United States and.
Canada. Rhode Island Bot. Club. Publ.
No. 1: 1-25.

. 1941. The genera of the Boletaceae.
Mycologia 33: 415-428.
and Esther A. Dick. 1941. Notes on
Boletes VI. Mycologia 33: 23-37.
1942. New proposals relating to:
the genera of the Boletaceae. Mycolo-
gia 34: 403-411.

Slipp,

CHRISTMAS BIRD CENSUS — 1954

St. John’s, Nfld. — (City limits and two spot
checks outside). Dec. 27, 1954; 9.30 a.m. to
430 p.m.; temp. 32° to 36°; overcast, no
snow; light breeze; 15 observers in five
parties and one at feeding station; total party
hours, 20%; total party miles, 35. Old-squaw,
15; Common Eider, 24; Gyrfaleon, 1; Glau-
cous Gull, 26; Iceland Gull, 203; Great
Black-backed Gull, 26; Herring Gull, 361;
Black Guillemot, 22; Flicker, 14; Downy
Woodpecker, 1; Raven, 2; Crow, 39; Black-
capped Chickadee, 24; Brown-capped Chicka-
dee, 33; Robin, 310; Golden-crowned King-
let, 16; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 1,545;
English Sparrow, 207; Evening Grosbeak, 67;
Purple Finch, 138; Pine Grosbeak, 202; Red-
poll, 145; Red Crossbill, 10; White-winged
Crossbill, 70. Total, 25 species; 3,491 indi-
viduals. — Miss C. Furlong, Mrs. A.G. Gos-
ling, R.K. Harper, Geoffrey Hiscock, John
Macgillivray, H.D. Macgillivray, Robert Mc-

Grath, Rev. A.M. Old, P.B. Rendell, David
Rendell, Dr. D. Sergeant, Mrs. D. Sergeant,
H.H. Squires, L.M. Tuck, Wayne Tuck, H.H.
Winter (Natural History Society of New-
foundland).

Wolfville, N.S. — (From uninhabited wood-
land through second growth to open farm
and orchard land and a muddy tidal shore).
Dec. 27, 1954. Overcast, some misty rain in
morning, poor visibility, temperature 36 - 40°,
light SW wind. Three cars, one party on
foot, one bird-table. 65 miles by car; 30 miles
on foot. Canada Goose, 152; Black Duck, 235;
American Golden-eye, 25; Barrow’s Golden-
eye, 14; Surf Scoter, 2; American Mergan-
ser, 11; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Red-tailed
Hawk, 3; Rough-legged Hawk, 3; Bald
Eagle, 3; Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse,
5; European Partridge, 16; Pheasant, 28;
Mourning Dove, 5; Black-bellied Plover, 1;

52 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Wilson’s Snipe, 1; Great Black-backed Gull,

112; Herring Gull, 560; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Canada
Jay, 2; Blue Jay, 50; American Raven, 65;

American Crow, 447; Black-capped Chicka-
dee, 100; Brown-capped Chickadee, 11; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 2; Red-breasted Nuthatch,
1; Robin, 2; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 8;
Starling, 1260; English Sparrow, 560; Eve-
ning Grosbeak, 44; Pine Grosbeak, 44; Red-
poll, 25; American Goldfinch, 9; White-
winged Crossbill, 33; Slate-colored Junco, 16;
Tree Sparrow, 3; Song Sparrow, 2. Total, 41
‘species, 3963 individuals. — L. Duncanson,
D. Erskine, J. Erskine (compiler), R. Erskine,
M. Forbes, M. Gibson, M. Miller, R.W. Tufts.

West Middle Sable, Nova Scotia. — (Matthews
Lake and Hemeon Head to Sable River and
1% mi. N., also Port ’Hebert and Jones Har-
bour to Sable River; all within 7.5 mi. of
school in W. Mid. Sable; mixed woods, large-
ly coniferous, 39%; ocean shore, 13%; _ shel-
tered brackish water, 29%; sand beach, 9%;

scattered rural community, 10%.) — Dec. 31;
7.30 a.m. to 5.45 p.m. Forty per cent cloudy
temp. 37° to 48°; wind W to NW, 5-15

m.p.h., calm at sunset; no frost, snow or ice.
Two observers in 2 parties, 1 at feeding-sta-
tion. Total party-hours, 17 (12 on foot, 3 by
bicycle, 2 by car); total party-miles, 76 (13
on foot, 45 by car, 18 by bicycle). Common
Loon, 1; Horned Grebe, 1; European Cormo-
rant, 69; Canada Goose, 1375 (725 est.);
Black Duck, 1068 (1000 est.); Pintail, 4;
Greater Scaup, 600 (est.); American Golden-
eye, 59; Bufflehead, 29; Old-squaw, 1; Com-
mon Eider, 10; American Merganser, 2;
Red-tailed Hawk, 1; Bald Eagle, 1; Killdeer,
1 (excellent detailed view at 30 ft—H.F.L.);
Great Black-backed Gull, 71; Herring Gull,
299; Black Guillemot, 2; Canada Jay, 2;
Blue Jay, 2; Common Raven, 8; American
Crow, 41; Black-capped Chickadee, 5; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 5; Common Starling, 19;
House Sparrow, 35; Cowbird, 58; (one flock
of both sexes — H.F.L.); Pine Grosbeak, 6;
Song Sparrow, 1; Snow Bunting, 1. Total, 30
species; about 3777 individuals. (Seen in
area Dec. 28, Ruffed Grouse, 1; Slate-colored
Junco, 1; Dec. 29, American Goldfinch, 5;
Dec. 30, Gannet, 1; Red-breasted Merganser,
5; Purple Sandpiper, 1; White-throated Spar-
row, 1; Jan. 1, Fox Sparrow, 1; Jan. 2, Aca-
dian Chickadee, 6; Evening Grosbeak, 29;
Common Redpoll, 40 (est.): — Laura N.
Lewis, Harrison F. Lewis, Harold F. Tufts.

[Vol. 69

Montreal, Que. — (Mount Royal, St. Helen’s
Island, Nun’s Island, St. Lambert, Thorn Hill,
Dorval, (Saraguay, Bois Frane, Back River,
Montreal North, north shore St. Lawrence
River from Mercier Bridge to Victoria Bridge,
south shore from Mercier Bridge to Jacques
Cartier Bridge) — Dec. 26, 1954; 8:30 a.m.
to 4 p.m. Clear; temp. 20°F. to 32°F.; wind
NE to S, light; 5-6 inches snow; moderate
shore ice and heavy brash ice on river. 25
observers in 7 parties. Total party hours, 40.
Total party miles, 120 (29 on foot, 89 by car,
2 by boat). Mallard, 3; Black Duck, 757, Scaup
(sp.), 1; Am. Goldeneye, 1249; Bufflehead, 1;
Old-squaw, 2; Am. Merganser, 41; Goshawk, 1;
Rough-legged Hawk, 5; Sparrow Hawk, 4;
Ruffed Grouse, 2; Ring-necked Pheasant, 15;
Great Black-backed Gull, 3; Herring Gull, 34;
Ring-billed Gull, 2; Sereech Owl, 1; Horned
Owl, 3; Snowy Owl, 1; Barred Owl, 1; Long-
eared Owl, 1; Short-eared Owl, 2; Hairy Wood-
pecker, 4; Downy Woodpecker, 7; Horned
Lark, 7; Am. Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee,
31; Whitebreasted Nuthatch, 13; Brown
Creeper, 4; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 2; Gray
Shrike, 2; Common Starling, 1317; House
Sparrow, 661; Red-winged Blackbird, 3; Pine
Grosbeak, 25; Common Redpoll, 15; Pine
Siskin, 6; Am. Goldfinch, 7; Am. Tree Spar-
row, 5; Song Sparrow, 2; Lapland Longspur,
4; Snow Bunting, 418. Total, 41 species; about
4664 individuals. (Seen in area Dec. 29 —
Am. Robin, 1) — Miss A. Allin, A. Bain,
B. Borden, Miss S. Boyer, J. Brierley, Mrs.
H. E. Chalk, J. D. Cleghorn, J. Delafield, P.
H. Du Boulay, D. Galvin, Miss G. Hibbard, B.
M. Holmes, P. Landry, A. R. Lepingwell, J.
Lowther, I. McLaren, G. H. Montgomery, J.
Montgomery, Miss I. Rhein-Knudsen, Mrs. P.
Roberts, J. W. Robinson, D. Ryan, H. F. Sey-
mour,.G. S. Unwin, Mrs. G. S. Unwin (Prov.
Que. Soc. for the Protection of Birds).

Hudson Heights, Hudson and Como, Que. —
(Same area as in 1953, with addition of estate
of Mrs. P. L. Lukis, 8 acres in Choisy two
miles westward of westerly boundary of above
area, on Lake of Two Mountains). — Jan.
8; 7:00 am. to 3:30 p.m. Sunny all day;
temp. 1° to 6° to noon, to 17° in afternoon;
wind W by N, 6 m.p.h., in morning in wind
bitterly cold; 18-in. snow, water frozen ex-
cept in swift currents. Thirty-three observers
in 8 parties. Total party-hours, 120% (59%
on foot, 51 on skis, 10 by car); total party
miles, 154 (48 on foot, 70 on skis, 36 by car).

April-June, 1955]

Ruffed Grouse, 13; Pileated Woodpecker, 1;
Hairy Woodpecker, 19: Downy Woodpecker,
16; Blue Jay, 50; Black-capped Chickadee, 241;
White-breasted Nuthatch, 39; Red-breasted
Nuthatch, 3; Brown Creeper, 1; Winter Wren,
1; Starling, 63; House Sparrow, 20; Bronzed
Grackle, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 1; Pine Gros-
beak, 79; Common Redpoll, 183; Am. Gold-
finch, 6; Slate-coloured Junco, 2; Am. Tree
Sparrow, 4; Snow Bunting, 1. Total, 20 spe-
cies; 744 individuals. (Seen in area Jan. 2,
European Partridge.) — Ruth Abbott, Phyllis
Abbott, Mrs. T. E. Bibily, Mr. and Mrs. Audry
Bryan, Amy Clarke, Marnie Clarke, Mr. and
Mrs. E. D. Croll, Mr. and Mrs. R. H. Cundill,
Mrs. G. H. Golden, George Guerden, Col.
W.G. Hanson, C. Hope, A. Johnson, A.R.
Lepingwell, Mrs. P.L. Lukis, Mrs. D.L. Ma-
ecaulay, Janet Macdonald, Major Robert Mac-
Duff, Harry G. Marpole, G.G. Ommanney
(compiler), Mrs. L.J. Papineau, Mrs. R.L.
Puxley, Miss May Riley, Mrs. Geo. C. Riley,
E.F. Smith, Vera Smith, E.B. Watson, Mrs.
C.R. Whitehead, Mrs. R.W. (Jo.) Wright,
(convener), Mr. N.M. Yuile.

Ottawa, Ont. (742 mile radius) — Dec. 26,
1954; 9.00 a.m. to 4.00 p.m. Clear, cool; temp.
10° to 30°; 3-6 inches of snow. Thirty-seven
observers in 14 parties. Total party-hours,
6834 (441% on foot, 241% by car). Total party-
miles, 289 (56 on foot, 233 by car). Black
Duck, 2; Am. Golden-eye, 246; Am. Merganser,
62; Hooded Merganser, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 5;
Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Goshawk, 1; Ruffed
Grouse, 10; Hungarian Partridge, 61; Ring-
necked Pheasant, 15; Screech Owl, 2; Great
Horned Owl, 1; Snowy Owl, 1; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 11; Downy
Woodpecker, 22; Blue Jay, 23; Crow, 19; Am.
Pipit, 1; Black-capped Chickadee, 163; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 18; Northern Shrike, 3;
Starling, 2508; English Sparrow, 1769; Robin,
1; Red-winged Blackbird, 1; Purple Finch, 5;
Goldfinch, 29; Redpoll, 276; Pine Siskin, 2;
Evening Grosbeak, 17; Pine Grosbeak, 177;
Tree Sparrow, 4; Snow Bunting, 1280. Total,
34 species, about 6,640 individuals. — H.
Lloyd, R. Frith, Suzanne Dexter, Mr. & Mrs.
A. Ruddell, Mr. & Mrs J. Hanes, B. Hart, D.
Friend, J. Smith, M. Millman, B. Millman, Eric
Mills, Miss V. Humphreys, Ann Banning, Verna
Ross, H. Brown, K. Bowles, Dr. & Mrs. J.W.
Groves, Miss M. Flynn, Mr. & Mrs. C. Frankton,
Dr. & Mrs. D.B.O. Savile, B.A. Fauvel, V.E.F.
Solman, J.S. Tener, R.D. Harris, D.A. Munro,
Mr. & Mrs. H. Marshall, M. Spencer, Miss S.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 53

Clarke, Mrs. B. Clarke, J. Bird, A.E. Bourgui-
gnon (Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club).

Pakenham, Lanark Co., Ont. — Dec. 30, 1954;
9.00 am. to 4.00 p.m.; overcast, no wind,
temperature 22° to 33°; 14 inches of snow.
Hungarian Partridge, 6; Hairy Woodpecker, 1;
Blue Jay, 5; Blackcapped Chickadee, 9; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 3; English Sparrow, 43;
Evening Grosbeak, 73; Redpoll, 7. Total, 8
species, 147 individuals. (Seen recently in the
area, Ruffed Grouse, 3; Pileated Woodpecker,

1; Crow, 2; Snow Bunting (flock). — Edna
G. Ross.
Carleton Place, Ont. — (a circle of 742 miles

radius centred on Bridge St., where it crosses
the Mississippi River). Jan. 2, 1955; 9.00
am. to 4.00 p.m. Light rain in morning;
cloudy with some sunny periods during day;
clearing in late afternoon; temp. 38 to 30;
wind light, north changing to west; depth of

snow 18”. 17 observers in 4 parties. Total
party hours, 21; total party miles, 171%
(64% on foot, 165 by ear). Black Duck, 2;

Am. Golden-eye, 16; Greater Scaup, 1; Am.
Merganser, 1; Goshawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 2;
Downy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 16; Crow,
3; Black-capped Chickadee, 68; White-breasted
Nuthatch, 5; Northern Shrike, 2; Starling, 21;
English Sparrow, 351; Pine Grosbeak, 4; Tree
Sparrow, 2; Common Redpoll, 10, Snow Bunt-
ing, 55. Total, 18 species, 561 individuals.
(Seen in area Jan. 1. Wood Duck, 1; Evening
Grosbeak, 6; Goldfinch, 1.) — Gail Robertson,
R.F. Robertson, Jennifer Findlay, G.E. Findlay
(compiler), Norah Findlay, D.H. Findlay, D.G.
Findlay, Mr. and Mrs. W.F. Findlay, Jeannie
Findlay, Peter Findlay, Mr. and Mrs. Lloyd
Hughes, Mr. and Mrs. Ross Ferguson, Leonard
Elliot, D.D. Findlay.

Brockville, Ont. — (From Brockville to five
miles west, along the St. Lawrence River) —
December 26, 1954; 8.00 am. — 4.30 p.m.;
mostly sunny, temperature 30° to 35°; wind
southwest 5 - 10 m.p.h.; total miles — 12
(5 by ear, 7 on foot); depth of snow — 4 to 6
inches, river open. — Black Duck, 5; Greater
Seaup, 43; American Golden-eye, 180; Ameri-
can Merganser, 2; Bald Eagle, 2; Herring Gull,
74; Downy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 3; Black-
capped Chickadee, 8; Starling, 215; House
Sparrow, 168. Total species, 11; about 701 .
individuals. (Seen in same area — December
24 — Goshawk; December 25 — Pigeon hawk;
December 31 — Screech Owl.) — D. Hurrie.

54 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Peterborough, Ont. — (7% mile radius from
the City Hall including Jackson Park — Lily
Lake, Chemong Park, Otonabee ‘River —
Nassau — Heronry, Burnham’s Woods — Rifle
Range, Lower Otonabee River — Crawford’s
Grove. Open farmland, 45%; marsh, 9%;
water, 4%; mixed woods, 24%; deciduous
woods, 8%; coniferous woods, 10% ). — Decem-
ber 26, 1954, 8.30 am. to 4 p.m. Variable
cloudiness with sunny intervals; temperature
28 — 35°; wind SW, 5 — 20 m.p.h.; ground
snow covered with 3 - 4 inches of soft snow;
lake frozen, river open in most places. 18
observers in 5 groups. Total party-miles 70
(50 by car, 20 on foot). — American Mer-
ganser, 14; Goshawk, 1; Pigeon Hawk, 2;
Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 3; Herring
Gull, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 3; Downy Wood-
pecker, 4; Blue Jay, 4; Black-capped Chickadee,
86; White-breasted Nuthatch, 7; Starling, 179;
House Sparrow, 215; Meadowlark, 1; Pine
Grosbeak, 3; Common Redpoll, 62; American
Goldfinch, 119; Tree Sparrow, 47; Snow Bunt-
ing, 250. Total, 19 species, 1003 individuals.
L.J. McKeever and F.R. Pommett, compilers
(Peterborough Nature Club).

Ruthergien, Ont. — (From 18 miles east of
North Bay, villages of Bonfield and Rutherglen,
areas around Kaipuskong, Amable du Fond,
Mattawa, and Ottawa rivers, and Pimisi Bay
to town of Mattawa; open farmland 10%,
woodlots 10%, mixed second growth forest
50%, marshes and bogs 5%, lakes and rivers
15%, settlements 10%) — Dec. 31; 7:30 a.m.
to 4 pm. (1 hr for lunch). Partly cloudy
to cloudy; temp. 14° to 33°; wind W to SW
2-5 m.p.h.; ground covered with 12-13 inches
soft powder snow; all fresh water except
rapids and the Ottawa River frozen. 1 ob-
server. Total hours 7% (31 on foot, 4 by
car); total miles 48 (6 on foot, 42 by car). —
American Goldeneye, 14; Hairy Woodpecker,
7; Downy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 5; North-
ern Raven, 3; Black-capped Chickadee, 52;
White-breasted Nuthatch, 1; Red-breasted Nu-
thatch, 1; House Sparrow, 15; Common Redpoll,
7. Total, 10 species; about 106 individuals.
(Seen in area Dec. 26 American Robin, 1,
seen and heard by 2 observers, L.C. Lawrence
and L. de K.L.; Dec. 29 Evening Grosbeak, 6;
Jan. 1 Pileated Woodpecker, 1; American Crow,
2; Common Starling, 2; Pine Grosbeak, 3; Snow
Bunting, 32). Louise de Kiriline Lawrence.

Huntsville, Ont. — December 19, 1954; 9 a.m.
to 4.30 p.m.; temperature, zero to 12 degrees;

[Vol. 69

cloudy, with short intervals of sun; light north-
west wind; all small bodies of still water
frozen, rivers and larger lakes partly open;
6-8 inches snow; all trees and shrubs heavily
laden with snow, making observation in the
bush difficult; 10 observers in 7 parties —
Goshawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 13; Herring Gull,
2; Hairy Woodpecker, 14; Downy Woodpecker,
12; Blue Jay, 20; Black-capped Chickadee, 69;
White-breasted Nuthatch, 6; Red-breasted Nu-
thatch, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 3; Starling,
46; English Sparrow, 38; Evening Grosbeak,
1; Pine Grosbeak, 9; Redpoll, 35; Tree Spar-
row, 2; Snow Bunting, 66. Total, 17 species;
338 individuals. — Paul Conway, Chick Gryier,
Aubrey May, Dorothy Fletcher, Jim Kay, Ken
Perrin, Pearl Rogers, Russ. Rutter, Mr. and
Mrs. Wilfred Waters (The Huntsville Nature
Club).

Toronto, Ont. — Dec. 26, 1954; 7.30 a.m. to
5 p.m.; bright and cool, wind SW 10 m.p.h.;
ground mostly bare; creeks and ponds mostly
frozen but bay and inside breakwater open;
temperature 31° to 46° F.; 108 observers in
26 parties; total party-hours, 14342. — Great
Blue Heron, 1; Mallard, 772; Black Duck, 744;
Pintail, 2; Green-winged Teal, 1; Greater
Scaup, 2,307; Am. Golden-eye, 219; Buffle-head,
113; Old-squaw, 489; Am. Merganser, 36; Red-
breasted Merganser, 2; Sharp-shinned Hawk,
4; Red-tailed Hawk, 32; Rough-legged Hawk,
3; Marsh Hawk, 6; Pigeon Hawk, 1; Sparrow
Hawk, 62; Ruffed Grouse, 6; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 176; Wilson’s Snipe, 1; Iceland Gull,
2; Great Black-backed Gull, 30; Herring Gull,
3,427; Ring-billed Gull, 544; Mourning Dove,
25; Horned Owl, 18; Snowy Owl, 6; Barred
Owl, 1; Long-eared Owl, 18; Short-eared Owl,
2; Belted Kingfisher, 3; Yellow-shafted Flicker,
2; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Red-headed Wood-
pecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 50; Downy
Woodpecker, 107; Blue Jay, 136; Crow, 45;
Black-capped Chickadee, 593; White-breasted
Nuthatch, 84; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 7; Brown
Creeper, 8; Brown Thrasher, 1; Robin, 7;
Golden-crowned Kinglet, 14; Northern Shrike,
31; Starling, 5,887; House Sparrow, 1,944; Red-
winged Blackbird, 2; Cardinal, 73; Evening
Grosbeak, 8; Purple Finch, 21; Pine Grosbeak,
1; Common Redpoll, 1; Pine Siskin, 35; Gold-
finch, 246; Red Crossbill, 1; Towhee, 4; Slate-
coloured Junco, 372; Tree Sparrow, 234; White-
throated Sparrow, 4; Swamp Sparrow, 5; Song
Sparrow, 20; Lapland Longspur, 35; Snow
Bunting, 320. Total, 65 species, 19,354 in-
dividuals. Mrs. P. Addison, W. Addison, Robert

April-June, 1955]

Anderson, J.L. Baillie (compiler), H. Bare, H.
Barnett, Robert Bateman, Ross Bateman, G.M.
Bennett, O.D. Boggs, O.D. Boggs, Jr., D.E.
Burton, Robert Campbell, Wishart Campbell,
C.H.D. Clarke, J. Clarke, Lee Clarke, W.
Clarke, B. Clifford, R. Corlett, F. Crawford, C.
Crowley, J. Crowley, C. Davies, I. Davies, A.
Dawe, O.E. Devitt, F.H. Emery, A. Falls, J.B.
Falls, T. Farley, B. Foster, C.D. Fowle, M.
Foy, B. Geale, D. Geale, J. Geale, C. Goodwin,
A. Gordon, H.M. Halliday, Paul Harrington,
Peter Harrington, R. Hensell, H. Hogg, J. Hogg,
R.F. James, F. Keim, R. Knights, G. Lambert,
L. Langstaff, C. Leavens, B. LeVay, J. LeVay,
N. LeVay, R.V. Lindsay, J. Livingston, J.R.
Mackintosh, N. Martin, K. Mayall, R. McCleary,
W. McGregor, T.F. Mcllwraith, J. McIntyre,
I. Metcalfe, W. Milne, A.J. Mitchener, C. Mo-
lony, F. Mueller, M. Nourse, R.E. Pannell,
J. Parker, D.E. Perks, M. Porter, A. Reid, H.
Richards, D. Ripley, R. Riseborough, R.C. Rit-
chie, T. Russell, J. Satterly, R.M. Saunders, B.
Seovell, Dorothy Scovell, Douglas Scovell, R.
Scovell, F.B. Sharp, J. Sherrin, T.M. Shortt,
F. Smith, W.W. Smith, D.H. Speirs, J.M.
Speirs, N.R. Speirs, D. Summer, E.H. Taylor,
H. Thorpe, R.W. Trowern, E. Wasserfall, W.
Wasserfall, E. Welch, D.A. West, J.D. West,
M. West, H. White, H. Whyte, W. Williams, M.
Wood and J. Woodford (30th consecutive
Brodie Club Christmas Census).

Hamilton, Ont. — (Same area as former years).
— Dec. 26; 7.30 a.m. to 5.30 p.m. Mostly clear;
temp, 21° to 46°; wind S to SW, 10-18 m.p.h.;
ground bare; marshes frozen, harbor open.
Sixty observers in 27 parties. Total party-
hours, 133 (123 on foot, 10 by car); total
party-miles, 304 (159 on foot, 145 by car).
Horned Grebe, 3; Great Blue Heron, 1; Mal-
lard, 161; Black Duck, 83; Redhead, 1; Canvas-
back, 14; Greater Scaup, 895; Lesser Scaup, 5;
Am. Golden-eye, 350; Buffle-head, 16; Old-
squaw, 70; White-winged Scoter, 107; Ruddy
Duck, 12; Hooded Merganser, 3; Am. Mer-
ganser, 670; Red-breasted Merganser, 285;
Cooper’s Hawk, 2; Red-tailed Hawk, 14; Bald
Eagle, 2; Marsh Hawk, 1; Peregrine Falcon,
1 (seen by 3 parties); Sparrow Hawk, 25;
Ruffed Grouse, 5; European Partridge, 5; Ring-
necked Pheasant, 41; Am. Coot, 1; Glaucous
Gull, 6; Iceland Gull, 2; Great Black-backed
Gull, 147; Herring Gull, 12600; Ring-billed Gull,
80; Mourning Dove, 31; Screech Owl, 3; Great
Horned Owl, 7; Long-eared Owl, 2; Belted
Kingfisher, 3; Yellow-shafted Flicker, 3; Hairy
Woodpecker, 31; Downy Woodpecker, 50; Blue

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 55

Jay, 78; Am. Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee,
521; Tufted Titmouse, 1; (at Schneiders’ feed-
ing station since Nov. 19); White-breasted
Nuthatch, 47; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 8; Brown
Creeper, 14; Winter Wren, 4; Mockingbird, 1
(visiting Miss Malcolm’s garden since Nov. 12);
Am. Robin, 2; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 19;
Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 1 (J.C., K.J.C., J.D.);
Cedar Waxwing, 7; Gray Shrike, 9; Common
Starling, 1700; House Sparrow, 1900; Cardinal,
67; Evening Grosbeak, 12; Purple Finch, 25;
Pine Grosbeak, 4; Common Redpoll, 2; Pine
Siskin, 6; Am. Goldfinch, 115; White-winged
Crossbill, 15; Slate-colored Junco, 226; Am.
Tree Sparrow, 223; Swamp Sparrow, 4; Song
Sparrow, 13. Total, 67 species; about 20,764
individuals. — Brock Atkinson, W. Edward
Benner, Miss Stella Brown, Neil Bourne, Mr.
and Mrs. R.D.F. Bourne, Frank W. Buckle,
Don Bucknell, Miss Janet Clarkson, James
Cole, Kenneth J. Cox, Harold Cunliffe, James
A.N. Dowall, Robert O. Elstone, Mrs. Dorothy
Falladown, Mrs. J.H. Forbes, Leopold Fucikovs-
ky, Leslie Gray, Ian Halladay, John A. Hen-
cher, Peter F. Henderson, Robert Henry, David
Hick, Mr. and Mrs. William R. Holley, Charles
Hunter, Angus B. Jackson, Roger Jackson,
Herbert E. Kettle, Mr. and Mrs. Leslie Laking,
Miss Margaret Lamb, Miss Eleanor Malcolm,
Mr. and Mrs. Julius Mannheimer, George O.
McMillan, George Meyers, Glen Meyers, Mr.
and Mrs. John J. Miller, Mrs. Carl Morden,
John W. Moule, Albert B. Nind, George W.
North (compiler), Laurel E. North, Miss Jean
Plewes, Mr. and Mrs. C.L. Powell, David K.
Powell, Robert K. Sargeant, Mrs. Frank Schnei-
der, Edward Stacey, Robert W. Stamp, Miss
Laura Stewart, Mr. and Mrs. Gordon Sweatman,
Miss Mabel Watson, Mr. and Mrs. M.R. Watters,
J. Harvey Williams (Hamilton Nature Club).

Kirkland Lake, Ont. — (712 mile radius center-
ing on a point on #112 Highway one mile
north of Dane; fields 20%; towns 5%; coni-
ferous woods 30%; deciduous woods 35%;
slimes 5%; cattail marsh 5%; and 5 feeding
stations). December 27, 8.30 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.
Clear sky; temperature 0° to 6°; wind north
10 m.p.h.; 12 inches snow on ground; lakes
frozen, streams mostly frozen. 11 observers
in 8 parties. Total party-hours 41 (8% on
foot, 642 by car, 26 at stations). Total party-
miles 75 (17 on foot, 58 by car). — Hairy
Woodpecker, 14; Downy Woodpecker, 4; Gray
Jay, 13; Blue Jay, 29; Common Raven, 3;
Black-capped Chickadee, 123; Common Star-
ling, 3; House Sparrow, 31; Pine Grosbeak, 32;

56 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Common Redpoll, 2; Slate-colored Junco, 1;
Snow Bunting, 12. Total species, 12; 267 in-
dividuals. (A Pileated Woodpecker visited one
of the feeding stations regularly but was not
observed on December 27. The Junco was
first seen at a feeding station on December
27 and has been a daily visitor since). J.G.
Stephenson (Kirkland Lake Nature Club).

Kitchener, Ont. — (7% mile radius centering
on the extreme South Westerly boundary of
the city; cattail marsh 4%, open farm land
and pasture 35%', deciduous woods 26%,
coniferous 14%, swamp 10%, city suburbs 5%,
open water 6%). — Dec. 26; 8.00 a.m. to
430 p.m. Mostly clear, some cloudy intervals;
temp. 30 to 44; wind SSW, 10-15 m.p.h.; very
light snow cover, thawing in p.m., most rivers
and creeks open. Eighteen observers in 6
parties. Total party-hours, 42% (37 on foot,
516 by car); total party-miles, 194 (40 on foot,
154 by car). Great Blue Heron, 1; Mallard, 3;
Black Duck, 13; Am. Golden-eye, 11; Am.
Merganser, 4; Redtailed Hawk, 3; Marsh Hawk,
1; Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 8; Ring-
necked Pheasant, 11; Herring Gull, 18; Belted
Kingfisher, 2; Pileated Woodpecker, 4; Hairy
Woodpecker, 9; Downy Woodpecker, 21; Blue
Jay, 6; Am. Crow, 3; Black-capped Chickadee,
301; White-breasted Nuthatch, 14; Brown
Creeper, 8; Winter Wren, 2; Brown Thrasher,
1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 25; Loggerhead
Shrike, 1; Northern Shrike, 3; Common Star-
ling, 147; House Sparrow, 659; Cardinal, 33;
Evening Grosbeak, 1; Purple Finch, 7; Pine
Grosbeak, 2; Common Redpoll, 28; Am. Gold-
finch, 63; Slate-colored Junco, 53; Am. Tree
Sparrow, 53; Snow Bunting, 350. Total, 36 spe-
cies; 1,870 individuals. — Malcolm Campbell,
Eric M. Carter, Horace A. Dahmer (compiler),
James Detweiler, Miss Margaret Dickson, Roy
Dickson, Brian Drown, Ralph Hendry, Richard
C. Hilborn, Miss Margaret Lemon, Robert
Pickering, Morley C. Preston, Mrs. Dorothy
Russell, Harold Russell, Willard H. Schaefer,
Frank Shantz, Russell Hilt, Arthur Woods.

Yorkton, Sask. — (7%4-mile radius centering
on Yorkton. Mixed farming district, 25% wood-
ed). Dec. 26, 1954; 8.30 a.m. to 5 p.m. Slight
overcast; temp. — 7° to 5°; wind NNW, 5 to
15 m.p.h.; ground covered with 2 inches snow.
23 observers in 6 parties. Total party-hours, 23
(8 on foot, 15 by car), total party-miles, 12644
(14% on foot, 112 by car). — Goshawk, 1;
Ruffed Grouse, 5; Sharp-tailed Grouse, 43;
European Partridge, 30; Horned Owl, 3; Snowy

[Vol. 69

Owl, 9; Hairy Woodpecker, 3; Downy Wood-
pecker, 3; Blue Jay, 2; American Magpie, 47;
Black-capped Chickadee, 65; Bohemian Wax-
wing, 287; Common Starling, 4; House Sparrow,
814; Red-winged Blackbird, 1; Brewer’s Black-
bird, 7; Pine Grosbeak, 51; Common Redpoll,
57; Slate-colored Junco, 4; Snow Bunting, 474.
Total, 20 species, about 1,910 individuals.
Tyrone Balacko, Paul Barski, Wayne Bjorgan,
Jim Bridgewater, Brother Clarence, Lionel and
Ronald Coleman, Brother Halward, Dr. and
Mrs. Stuart Houston (compilers), John Hut-
chinson, Preston McDonald, Dave McVey, Allan
Nurse, Jack Park, Irving Pearce, Jack Shaver,
C.C. Shaw, Mr. and Mrs. Jeff Smith, Frank
and Gillean Switzer, Brother Vincent (York-
ton Natural History Society).

Saskatoon, Sask. — (15-mile radius). Jan. 1,
1955. Temp. —2° to —8°; clear with 1-27
fresh snow; light wind; 2 Parties, 4 Observers.
Mallards, 7; Am. Golden-eye, 5; Am. Mergan-
ser, 1; Hungarian Partridge, 3; Great Horned
Owl, 1; Snowy Owl, 3; Short-eared Owl, 9;
Magpie, 23; Chickadee, 2; Red-breasted Nu-
thatch, 1; Bohemian Waxwing, 65; English
Sparrow, 855+; Redpoll, 175+; White-winged
Crossbill, 8; Snow Bunting, 750+; Total, 15
species, 1918 individuals. (Seen in area re-
cently Downy Woodpecker, 1; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 9; Blue Jay, 2; Shrike, 1). — Mr. and
Mrs. F.J.H. Fredeen, Mr. and Mrs. J.B. Gollop.

Grande Prairie, Alberta. — (742-mile radius
centered on 100 St. and 100 Ave.; deciduous
woods 23%, coniferous woods 41%, swamp
18%, cultivated 15%, town 3%). — Dec. 27;
8:00 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Overcast, clearing at
11:00 p.m.; temp. 28.8 to 34; wind SW 10 to
20 m.p.h.; ground covered with 24%” snow in
open 8” wooded area, no open water; activity
concentrated in south and SE section. Two
observers in 1 party. Total party-hours, 9%
(6 on foot, 3% by car); total party-miles, 77
(7 on foot, 70 by car). Goshawk, 1; Rough-
legged Hawk, 2; Gyrfalcon, 1; Ruffed Grouse,
2; Snowy Owl, 3; Gray Jay, 9; Am. Magpie, 35;
Common Raven, 12; Black-capped Chickadee,
6; Gray Shrike, 2; House Sparrow, 80; Pine
Grosbeak, 2; Snow Bunting, 3. Total, 13 spe-
cies; about 158 individuals. (Seen in area
Dec. 30. Common Redpoll, 50; Hairy Wood-
pecker, 1; Bohemian Waxwing, 9). — Rev.
Marvin Fowler (Sexsmith), R. Fraser Smith
(Grande Prairie) (compiler).

Vernon, B.C. — Dec. 19, 1954; 9:00 a.m. to
3:30 p.m.; cloudy, wind light except E. in

April-June, 1955]

Coldstream; temp. 22° to 32°; maximum snow
depth 1”; Okanagan and Kalamalka Lakes
clear of ice; Swan Lake mostly frozen. Thir-
teen observers in 3 parties; west to Okanagan
Landing, north to Buckerfieids’ Ranch, south
to Kalamalka Lake (Rattlesnake Point) and
east to Coldstream Ranch. Common Loon, 1;
Horned Grebe, 1; Mallard, 280; Pintail, 13;
Green-winged Teal, 3; Baldpate, 166; Redhead,
26; Lesser Secaup, 120; Am. Golden-eye, 26;
Bufflehead, 13; Am. Merganser, 2; Hooded
Merganser, 8; Goshawk, 3; Sharp-shinned
Hawk, i; Golden Eagle, 1; Marsh Hawk, 4;
Sparrow Hawk, 1; European Partridge, 26;
Ring-necked Pheasant, 56; Am. Coot, 1,426;
Killdeer, 2; Wilson’s Snipe, 4; Herring Gull,
7; Horned Owl, 1; Pygmy Owl, 2; Short-eared
Owl, 8; Belted Kingfisher, 2; Red-shafted
Flicker, 36; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy
Woodpecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker, 5;
Horned Lark, 30; Steller’s Jay, 2; Am.
Magpie, 71; Common Raven, 20; Am.
Crow, 27; Clark’s Nutcracker, 29; Black-capped
Chickadee, 33; Mountain Chickadee, 2; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 2; Red-breasted Nuthatch,
12; Pygmy Nuthatch, 25; Am. Dipper, 2;
Robin, 179; Townsend’s Solitaire, 4; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 6; Bohemian Waxwing, 2,389;
Northern Shrike, 8; Starling, 8; House Spar-
row, 304; Western Meadowlark, 5; Brewer’s
Blackbird, 60; Evening Grosbeak, 172; Pine
Grosbeak, 8; Oregon Junco, 312; Tree Sparrow,
12; Wnite-crowned Sparrow, 21; Song Sparrow,
45. Total, 58 species; about 6,036 individuals.
(Seen during period Towhee, 2; Goldfinch, 40;
Mourning Dove, 47) — E. Alderman, H. Baerg,
Miss K. Bartholomew, J.B. Beddome, J.T.
Fowle, J. Grant, A.N. Humphries, C. McClou-
nie, J. Obaba, J. Quirk, D.A. Ross, B.A.
Sugden, P. Tassie (The North Okanagan Natu-
ralists’ Club).

Crescent Beach, B.C. — (Parts of coast and
bush between Crescent Beach and Ocean Park,
including Blackie’s Spit and Crescent Oyster
Company’s property). Dec. 30, 1954; 8.30 a.m.
to 4.30 p.m.; temp. 38° to 45°; very heavy
rain until 3.00 p.m.; visibility poor, three
observers, one confined at home watched
feeding table all day. Total miles 15 (10 by
ear, 5 on foot). — Common Loon, 7; Horned
Grebe, 12; Eared Grebe, 1; Western Grebe,
7; Double-crested Cormorant, 2; Pelagic Cor-
morant, 2; Great Blue Heron, 6; Mallard, 1;
Green-winged Teal, 2; Canvas-back, 3; Greater
Seaup Duck, 80; Am. Golden-eye, 17; Barrow’s
Golden-eye, 2; Buffle-head, 8; Old-squaw, 5;

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 57

White-winged Scoter, 150 (plus); Surf Scoter,
130 (plus); Am. Scoter, 20 (plus); Hooded
Merganser, 1; Red-breasted Merganser, 3;
Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 4;
Black Turnstone, 10; Sanderling, 1; Glaucous-
winged Gull, 60; Short-billed Gull, 25; Belted.
Kingfisher, 1; Red-shafted Flicker, 7; North-.
western Crow, 6; Black-capped Chickadee, 7;
Chestnut-backed Chickadee, 2; Bewick’s Wren,
1; Am. Robin, 1; Varied Thrush, 1; Golden-
erowned Kinglet, 3; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 1;
English Sparrow, 3; Purple Finch, 12; Pine
Siskin, 50; Spotted Towhee, 4; Oregon Junco,
30; Fox Sparrow, 2; Lincoln Sparrow, 1; Song
Sparrow, 10; Total, 44 species, 702 individuals.
(Owing to heavy rain land birds hard to find.
Lincoln Sparrow, exceptional record, seen with.
fox and song sparrows in thick scrub close to
sea near Ocean Park. Immature Bald Eagle.
feeding on small duck Dec. 28). — H.N.
Clarke, M.W. Holdom, E.E. Woodford.

Vancouver, B.C. — (Bridgeman Park, Stanley
Park, Spanish Banks and University of British
Columbia Gardens, Blenheim Flats, North and
West Shores of Lulu Island, Sea Island, north
side of North Arm of Fraser River). Decem-
ber 27, 1954. Temperature 40°, overcast, south-
east wind 15 m.p.h. — Common Loon, 4;
Black-throated Loon, 21; Red-throated Loon,
37; Eared Grebe, 1; Horned Grebe, 36; West-
ern Grebe, 284; Double-crested Cormorant, 132;
Baird’s Cormorant, 3; Great Blue Heron, 43;
Lesser Snow Goose, 1; Mallard Duck, 580;
Pintail Duck, 969; Green-winged Teal, 2;
Baldpate, 187; Canvas-back, 8; Greater Scaup,
389; American Golden-eye, 61; Barrow Golden-
eye, 21; Buffle-head, 9; White-winged Scoter,,
21; Surf Scoter, 216; American Scoter, 23;
American Merganser, 11; Red-breasted Mer-
ganser, 29; Hooded Merganser, 7; Sharp-shin-
ned Hawk, 3; Red-tailed Hawk, 4; Bald Eagle,
5; Marsh Hawk, 7; Sparrow Hawk, 3; Ruffed.
Grouse, 1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 8; American.
Coot, 169; Killdeer, 46; Wilson Snipe, 5; Red-
backed Sandpiper, 62; Western Sandpiper, 10;
Glaucous-winged Gull, 8147+; Herring Gull,

265; Short-billed Gull, 878+; Sereech.
Owl, 3; Short-eared Owl, 13; Belted King-
fisher, 2; Red-shafted Flicker, 57; Pileated

Woodpecker, 3; Hairy Woodpecker, 3; Downy
Woodpecker, 5; Horned Lark, 11; Steller Jay,
7; Raven, 1; Crow, 189; Black-capped Chicka-
dee, 91; Bush-tit, 3; Dipper, 1; Winter Wren,
5; Bewick Wren, 4; Long-billed Marsh Wren,
2; Robin, 160; Varied Thrush, 5; Golden-crown-
ed Kinglet, 26; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 74;

58 THE CANADIAN

Bohemian Waxwing, 71; Cedar Waxwing, 19;
‘Northern Shrike, 6; European Starling, 2,741;
Crested Mynah, 21; House Sparrow, 103;
Western Meadowlark, 50; Red-winged Black-
bird, 77; Brewer Blackbird, 670+; Even-
ing Grosbeak, 74; Purple Finch, 73; House
Finch, 191; Pine Siskin, 1321+; American
Goldfinch, 1; Oregon Towhee, 31; Slate-color-
ed Junco, 2; Oregon Junco, 364; White-crown-
ed Sparrow, 4; Golden-crowned Sparrow, 7;
Fox Sparrow, 23; Song Sparrow, 132. Number
of species, 82. Number individuals, 19,354+.
Mr. and Mrs. E.N. Copping, R. Copping,
Mr. and Mrs. G. Stevens, R. Stevens, L. Stevens,
B. Stevens, Mrs. Foote-Waugh, Miss Nola
Waugh, L. Norman Precious, Miss Laura C.
Giegerich, Miss Gladys Heritage, Miss Heather
‘Leveson-Gower, Mrs. Francis Morgan, Miss E.
Lemon, F. Sanford, Miss Joan Ellingham, Miss
Beth Henson, Stewart Bradley, Mrs. Dorothy
Bradley, Miss Verna Newsom, Miss Sheila
Buchanan, Billy Picket, Ian McGregor, Mr. and
Mrs. J. Ross MacKay, William Hughes. (Van-
couver Natural History Society).

Victoria, B.C. — (Victoria district). Jan. 2.
‘Weather clear; temp. 38°; wind N.E. 5 mph.
Common Loon, 11; Red-throated Loon, 1;
Holboell’s Grebe, 3; Horned Grebe, 106;
Eared Grebe, 13; Western Grebe, 89; Pigeon
Guillemot, 4; Double-crested Cormorant, 40;
Baird Cormorant, 101; Great Blue Heron, 8;
Canada Goose, 18; Mallard, 793; Baldpate,
2077; Pintail, 37; Green-winged Teal, 210;
Blue-winged Teal, 18; Shoveller, 122; Wood
Duck, 4; Canvasback, 50; Greater Scaup,
884; Am. Golden-eye, 52; Bufflehead, 178;
Old-squaw, 18; Harlequin, 51; White-winged
Scoter, 67; Surf Scoter, 65; Am. Scoter, 8;
Ruddy Duck, 40; Hooded Merganser, 7; Am.
Merganser, 4; Red-breasted Merganser, 38;
Cooper’s Hawk, 2; Red-tailed Hawk, 4; Bald
Eagle, 1; Pigeon Hawk, 1; Duck Hawk, 2;
Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Hun-
garian Partridge, 10; California Quail, 51;
Pheasant, 5; Coot, 196; Black Oyster Cat-
cher, 3; Killdeer, 56; Surf Bird, 15; Black
Turnstone, 107; Wilson’s Snipe, 6; Hudsonian
Curlew, 1; Lesser Yellow-legs, 2; Aleutian
Sandpiper, 25; Glaucous-winged Gull, 1084;
Herring Gull, 2; Short-billed Gull, 154; Cali-
fornia Gull, 12; Bonaparte’s Gull, 5; Yel-
low-shafted Flicker, 56; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker, 2; European
Skylark, 12; Raven, 2; Northwest Crow,
912; Chestnut-backed Chickadee, 113; Bush-
tit, 25; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Brown

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Creeper, 4; Winter Wren, 18; Seattle Wren,
20; North-western Robin, 174; Pacific Thrush,
44; Hermit Thrush, 2; Western Bluebird, 5;
Golden-crowned Kinglet, 135; Ruby-crowned
Kinglet, 21; Cedar Waxwing, 1; European
Starling, 392; English Sparrow, 143; Western
Meadowlark, 15; Red-winged Blackbird, 50;
Brewer’s Blackbird, 25; California Purple
Finch, 9; House Finch, 50; Pine Siskin, 1270;
Oregon Towhee, 38; Oregon Junco, 217;
Puget Sound Sparrow, 1; Golden-crowned
Sparrow, 14; Fox Sparrow, 14; Song Spar-
row, 48. 89 species, 10702 individuals. — J.O.
Clay.

William Head, Vancouver Island, B.C. — De-
cember 27, 1954. (William Head Quarantine
Station, Pedder Bay, Mary Hill, Wier’s Beach
and south Montreul Hill. This covered ap-
proximately 1 square mile of land and 3
miles of rocky sea shore of Juan de Fuca
Strait). The cover constituents of the land
portion censused are approximately as fol-
lows: 25% open rocky moss-covered hillsides
with scattered tree growth; 25% dense coni-
fer stand; 25% slash, cut-over forest; 25%
meadows with scrub growth, chiefly, broom
(Cytisus). The dominant trees in the forested
areas are Douglas fir, Garry oak and madro-
na. Overcast, mild (low 38°, high 41°), stiff
east wind decreasing in afternoon. Ground
bare, ponds and creeks open. Two observers
together; all coverage on foot with a total
of 12 man-hours between 9 a.m. and 4.30 p.m.
P.S.T. — Common Loon, 6; Arctic Loon, 5;
Red-necked Grebe, 7; Horned Grebe, 68;
Eared Grebe, 16; Western Grebe, 42;
Brandt’s Cormorant, 9; Baird’s Cormorant,

44; cormorant sp., 8; Great Blue Heron, 3;
Baldpate, 2; Greater Scaup, 1; scaup sp.,
96; Common Golden-eye, 56; Buffle-head,
71; Old-squaw, 42; Harlequin Duck, 6;

White-winged Scoter, 57; Surf Scoter, 59;
scoter sp., 58; Ruddy Duck, 1; Red-breasted
Merganser, 13; Red-tailed Hawk, 1; Califor-
nia Quail, 20; Black Turnstone, 9;
Glaucous-winged Gull, 62; Short-billed Gull,
8; Common Murre, 2; Marbled Murrelet, 1;
Ancient Murrelet, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 1;
Red-shafted Flicker, 48; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker, 3; Raven, 1;
Chestnut-backed Chickadee, 34; Red-breasted

Nuthatch, 16; Brown Creeper, 3; Winter
Wren, 17; Bewick’s Wren, 2; American
Robin, 294; Varied Thrush, 28; Golden-

crowned Kinglet, 19; Ruby-crowned Kinglet,
9; Townsend’s Warbler, 1; Purple Finch, 17;

April-June, 1955] THE CANADIAN
House Finch, 1; Crossbill (Red ?), 1; Spot-
ted Towhee, 5; Oregon Junco, 68; Fox Spar-
row, 2; Song Sparrow, 9. Total, 49 species,
1364 individuals. (Seen during census period:
Double-crested Cormorant, Bald Eagle, Sharp-

shinned Hawk, Sparrow Hawk, Ruffed
Grouse, Herring Gull, Pigeon Guillemot,
Hairy Woodpecker, Steller’s Jay, North-

western Crow, Hermit Thrush, American Pipit,
Pine Siskin). — G.F. van Tets, George Fran-
cis, Vancouver, B.C.

Comox, B.C. — (Courtenay along river and
shore line to Comox, with side trips, one of
2 m. to village dump and adjoining logged-
over areas; except for last mentioned side
trip, same as previous years). January 2.
9 am. to 4 p.m.; temperature at start 30°,
warmer later. Bright morning but clouding
over later. Four observers, one (R.F.) part
time. Village of Comox, other three at times
together, other in two parties. Total mileage
approximately 10 m. mainly on foot, car to
dump. — Common Loon, 5; Pacific Loon, 4;
Red-throated Loon, 2; Red-necked Grebe, 4;
Horned Grebe, 7; Western Grebe, 7; Double-
crested Cormorant, 3; Pelagic Cormorant, 7;
Great Blue Heron, 7; Mallard, 350 +; Bald-
pate, 200 +; Greater Scaup, 150 +; Ameri-

FIELD-NATURALIST 59

can Golden-eye, 200 +; Barrow Golden-eye,
4; Buffle-head, 14; Old-squaw, 3; White-
winged Scoter, 500 +; Surf Scoter, 500 +.
Approximately 2500 unidentified ducks that
would be of the foregoing species but main-
ly the last two. American Merganser, 17;
Red-breasted Merganser, 2; Peregrine Fal-
con, 1; Bald Eagle, 1; California Quail, 3;
Ring-necked Pheasant, 3; Coot, 30; Wilson
Snipe, 12; Glaucous-winged Gull, 600 +;
Thayer Gull, 3; Short-billed Gull, 10; Cali-
fornia Murre, 1; Marbled Murrelet, 2; Belted
Kingfisher, 3; Red-Shafted Flicker, 8; Pi-
leated Woodpecker, 1; Harris Woodpecker,
2; Raven, 19; Western Crow, 4; North-
western Crow, 275 +; Chestnut-back Chick-
adee, 17; Brown Creeper, 1; Bewick Wren,
7; Winter Wren, 11; Golden-crowned King-
let, 30; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 1; House
Sparrow, 6; Western Meadowlark, 2; Brewer
Blackbird, 30; European Starling, 7; Purple
Finch, 9; American Crossbill, 2; Oregon
Towhee, 6; Oregon Junco, 60; Golden-
crowned Sparrow, 2; Fox Sparrow, 7; Song
Sparrow, 12. Total 55 species. (Seen in area
previous day (R.F.) Canvas-back, 1; Pin-
tail, 27; Killdeer, 1; Goshawk, 1; Red-tailed
Hawk, 1; Siskin, 30. — R. Fryer, D. Guthrie,
J. Hames, Theed Pearse.

FEEDING HABITS OF JUVENILE RING-NECKED PHEASANTS
ON PELEE ISLAND, ONTARIO *?

A. G. LoucHREY 2? and R. H. STINSON 4

VER the past thirty years numerous at-

tempts have been made to introduce the
ring-necked pheasant, Phasianus colchicus,
into south-western Ontario. Nowhere has an
introduction met with greater success than
on Pelee Island, lying off the southern tip of
Point Pelee in the western end of Lake Erie.
Here, over an area of 10,000 acres, it was
estimated by Stokes (1952) that a high density
of more than three birds per acre had been
reached in recent years.

1) Contribution from Department of Zoology, University
of Western Ontario.

2) Received for publication July 2, 1954.
3) Canadian Wildlife Service, Ottawa.

4) Department of Zoology, University of Western Onta-

T10.

Detailed study has been made of this pop-
ulation only during the last ten years. The
introduction of the bird and a brief history
of the fall shoot have been given by Taylor
(1942). Clarke and Braffette (1946) have
described the conditions on the island which
have apparently encouraged the high popula-
tion. Clarke (1947) has reviewed the status
of the population at that time. A description
of breeding behaviour has been given by
Ball (1950); and finally Stokes (1952) has
presented data on survival studies.

In the course of the latter investigation
there arose the question of the carrying
capacity of the island, particularly with re-
spect to the young birds, for lack of sufficient

60 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Table 1.— NUMBER OF JUVENILE PHEASANTS OF DIFFERENT AGES
TAKEN ON PELEE ISLAND FROM JUNE 19 to SEPT. 4, 1950.

Week Age in weeks

ending 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Or lO) eg ble
June 26 12 3 2

July 3 13 12 U 4

July 10 ia 13 3 6 2 1

July 17 4 4 9 9) 3

July 24 4 4 6 9 8 i

July 31 7 9 9 7 6

Aug. 7 1 2 5 8 9 5

Aug. 14 4 7 9 6 2

Aug. 21 4 13 6 6 4 2

Aug. 28 4 9 7 3 1
Sept. 4 il 3 3 6 7 i 2
Total 44 37 34 35 31 29 44 29 21 14 4 2 324

or suitable food might be a factor contribut-
ing to mortality occurring between the time
of hatching and the autumn hunt. The pre-
sent study of the feeding habits of juvenile
pheasants was conducted during the summer
of 1950 in order to determine the kinds and
quantities of food materials eaten by different
age groups of juvenile birds, and whether
the selection of such items was the result
of preference or availability.

The largest of the chain of islands in the
western end of the lake, Pelee is quite flat,
the highest point being only 38 ft. above lake
level and much of the interior lying two to
three feet below this level. In 1950 approxi-
mately 6400 acres of this area were under
cultivation, 1,200 acres in pasture and 600
acres in woodlots. Three-quarters of the
cultivated area contained soya beans, wheat
occupied about one-eighth, and the remainder
was sown in corn, oats, barley and other crops.
The low-lying sections are drained by a series
of canals with dense undergrowth lining the
banks. Together with the shrubbery along
roadsides and fencerows there is a consider-

able amount of cover present over the remain-
ing uncultivated land.

METHOD

The food habits of the birds were interpret-
ed from a quantitative analysis of the contents
of their crops. From June 19 to September
4, 324 specimens ranging from one to twelve
weeks of age were taken from four food-
producing habitats which had been classified
as pasture, woodlot, cultivated and uncultivat-
ed areas (Table 1). The age of a bird was
determined by measurements of the primary
wing feathers according to the procedure out-
lined by Trautman (1949), a week being used
as the unit of age. The crops were removed,
tied off and preserved in 70% alcohol.

Over the winter of 1950-51 the crop con-
tents were analyzed volumetrically. Each crop
was opened and the contents placed in a
dish of water. Food items were separated
and their volumes determined by water dis-
placement. Amounts of less than 0.05 c.c.
were recorded as traces.

April-June, 1955] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST 61

Table 2. — CONDITION OF CROPS COLLECTED FROM 324 JUVENILE PHEASANTS.

Age in weeks

1 2; 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 al tz Total
No. of crops [Quel 22229 2G cine oO Ree 4 1 251
with food
No. of 26 6 AG?» 12 6 5 2 il 1 1 0 1 73
empty crops
iO a A ee ee
Total 449037 034 35%) 3i..6n29 6844" S29) 2-21 14 4 2; 324
ee
RESULTS In Table 3 is presented the volumetric

It can be seen from Table 2 that almost
one-quarter of the crops examined were
empty, and that the greatest proportion of
these empty crops occurred among the young-
est birds. Since Dalke (1935) has stated that
pheasant chicks begin feeding before they
are 36 hours old, the presence of so many
empty crops among the birds of one to three
weeks is likely due to the small size of the
crop and the fact that food does not remain
in it for long, rather than to the possibility
that the birds have not yet begun to eat. It
was observed particularly with older birds
that they did much of their feeding in early
morning and late afternoon, hence most col-
lecting was done at these times in order to
secure birds with full crops.

Table 3.— FOODS EATEN BY DIFFERENT AGE GROUPS

analysis of 251 full crops. The percentages:
shown here are based upon the total quantity
of each item in all the crops of each age:
group.

ANIMAL FOOD

It is evident from Table 3 that during
the first three weeks the diet was almost
wholly of animal origin, with insects making
up the larger portion. Other arthropods con-
sisted chiefly of spiders, some phalangids,
mites, diplopods, chilopods and isopods. Mol-
luses included land slugs and field snails.
In Table 4 is shown the relative importance
of different insect orders in this diet. It is
apparent that a wide variety of insects is:
found in the crops. In fact one two-day old

OF JUVENILE PHEASANTS

GIVEN AS PERCENTAGES BASED ON VOLUMETRIC ANALYSIS OF 251 FULL:

CROPS.
Age in weeks

Foods i 2 3 4 5 6 w 8 9 10-12:

WHSCCUSS a te ecen teres eceeee 82.5 82.6 93.1 69.8 35.6 2000 18.3 15.4 3.8 7.2)
Other arthropods ....... na Aik 15.8 182 4.2 4.6 1,3 0.6 1.4 0.7 0.9
VIOUS CS eee 6.0 1.6 0.0 0.1 1.0 0.2 0.5 1.8 0.2 0.4
GralnsPi. pee ec: 0.0 0.0 5306056 B13... 58:4. 37.2 . 41.9, 401. | 45:6
WWW RRETTEStP se -.-seee ee 0.0 0.0 0.0 8.5 13.6 6.3 24.0 18.7 15.7 16.8
Grass and leaves ......... 0.2 0.0 0.0 ey INP 2.8 7.0 4.0 11.4 6.8
Séedso ist Seas . aes 0.2 0.0 0.4 0.1 IY (5) 12.4 16.8 28.1 220
IST Gar ce INI FTROUS .OARe) 210 POO seo Ws B08 BS Uae a Oe

100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

a ad

62 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Table 4.—INSECT ORDERS EATEN BY DIFFERENT AGE GROUPS OF JUVENILE PHEA-

SANTS GIVEN AS PERCENTAGES

251 FULL CROPS.

Insect order 1 2 3 4
‘Orthoptera ............ 0.0 1.7 0.2 1.3
Neuroptera ............ 0.2 0.0 0.2 0.1
Ephemerida.......... 16.0 629 508 52.9
Homoptera ............ 6.8 9.7 18.7 7.6
Hemiptera _............ 15.5 1.4 0.7 0.6
‘Coleoptera _............ 1.9 0.7 1.2 0.4
Trichoptera _.......... 04 119 0.5 8.6
‘Lepidoptera .......... 17.3 35) 240) eae
Dipteraigeee. cbse: 38.2 8.2 3.7 3.9
Hymenoptera ........ 3.7 0.0 0.0 8.9

100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

chick had eaten insects representing six
orders, and examples of ten orders were
found in the crop of a four-week old bird.

Orthoptera formed about nine per cent of
the total, occurring most frequently in eight
to twelve-week old birds. This is explained of
course by the fact that grasshoppers do not
become available to any extent until August.
Those of the family Acrididae were taken
most frequently, though Gryllidae and Rha-
phidophoridae were also represented. The
order Neuroptera formed a negligible portion
and was represented entirely by larval forms,
chiefly of the Chrysopidae.

The order of insects represented in greatest
numbers was the Ephemerida, for may-flies
formed 54 per cent of the total insect matter.
The crop of one six-week old bird contained
170 ephemerids. Several species occur on
the island, but the one most frequently iden-
tified was Hexagenia occulta Walker. The
large number of may-flies consumed is due
to the fact that these insects emerge from
the shallow water in the west end of Lake
Erie and swarm in countless numbers over
the island during the latter part of June and

BASED ON VOLUMETRIC ANALYSIS OF

Age in weeks Aver-
5 6 7 8 9 10-12 age
2.4 3.9 7.0 242°°11.3 247 9.3
0.5 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1

69.4 82.5 600 468 14.5 3.6 54.4
3.4 1.7 2.0 1.2 6.9 1.3 3.7
1.3 1.2 0.8 1.5 2.6 5.1 1.7
0.9 1.6 als) 2.5 4.1 5.3 1.8

12.1 0.9 13.2 05 43.1 540 11.8
17 3.0 4.3 92 103 4.6 7.2
7.0 1.7 3.1 4.7 1.0 0.2 4.3
1.3 3.4 8.1 9.4 6.2 12 out

100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

the first weeks of July. They come to rest
on the ground, bushes and trees in such num-
bers that a concentration of 100 may-flies per
sq. ft. may occur in some areas after a parti-
cularly heavy flight. It should be noted that
they do not occur in any quantity in the
crops of week-old chicks, possibly because of
the relatively large size of the insect at this
time.

Bugs of the orders Homoptera and Hemip-
tera were consumed in the largest numbers
during the first three weeks. The families
most frequently represented in these orders
were Cicadellidae, Aphidae, Lygaeidae and
Miridae. The common forms of Coleoptera
were adults of the Coccinellidae and Curcu-
lionidae.

Larvae and adults of Trichoptera formed
some 12 per cent of the total, the majority
taken by the older birds. The occurrence
of insects of this order in the crops of young-
er birds was rather irregular. In the case
of the adult insects this probably resulted
from different dates of emergence of the
various species, but the irregular occurrence
of the larvae was possibly related to their

April-June, 1955]

100

aquatic habitat. Under normal circumstances
the larvae would not be exposed to the young
birds, so those taken were probably found
at the edges of shallow meadow pools which
had begun to dry up.

Lepidoptera and Diptera formed the bulk
of the insect diet of the first week. The
former consisted mainly of larvae while the
latter included adult Chironomidae and larval
Syrphidae. Representatives of Hymenoptera
occurred chiefly in the older birds, the com-
mon forms being pupae and adults of For-
micidae; the crop of one seven-week old bird
contained 380 ants.

PLANT FOOD

After six weeks of age cultivated grains
make up the largest portion of the diet. Of
these, wheat formed 86 per cent, soya beans
seven per cent and oats and barley seven
per cent. The wheat became available to
the birds as waste wheat after it was com-
bined. Often up to 500 young pheasants
could be seen feeding in a 30-acre stubble
field in an evening. Although most of the
cultivated area was in soya beans, these beans
were not found in any quantity in the crops
because the pods were not ripe by the time
sampling was terminated on Sept. 4.

Like the grains, wild fruits, grass, leaves
and seeds became increasingly important in
the diet after the third week. The fruits
found to occur most frequently were those of
fragrant sumac (Rhus aromatica Ait.), snow-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

63

PLANT MATTER~7

10-12

—
w 80
Fax)
a)
q
S60
=
uw
°
140
w
rs)
[nd
WwW
a 20
i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AGE IN WEEKS
Fig. 1. Amounts of animal and plant matter in the

diet of 251 juvenile pheasants.

berry (Symphoricarpos albus L.), grapes (Vi-
tis spp.), panicled dogwood (Cornus racemosa
Lam.), hackberry (Celtis occidentalis L.), stag-
horn sumac (Rhus typhina L.) and bittersweet
(Solanum Dulcamara L.). A single fruit of
serviceberry (Amelanchier sp.) was found in
the crop of a four-week old bird. This is of
interest since Core (1948) does not record
the serviceberry for Pelee Island.

Among the leaves commonly found were
those of sweet clover (Melilotus sp.), black
medick (Medicago lupulina L.), common rag-
weed (Ambrosia artemisiifolia L.), dock (Ru-
mex sp.) and bittersweet.

Of the seeds the meadow grasses (Poa sp.)
were the most important items. Other seeds
taken by juvenile birds included those of
sedges (Carex spp.), foxtail grass (Bromus
sp.), vetch (Vicza sp.), sorrel (Ozxalis sp.),
black medick and sweet clover.

Grouping the categories of Table 3 into
plant and animal food, Fig. 1 is presented
to show the change in these components of
the diet over the 12-week period. It is ap-
parent that between four and six weeks of
age the young pheasants made a rather sharp
change-over from a diet largely animal to
one largely of plant material.

PREFERENCE VS. AVAILABILITY

So striking is this change from animal to
plant food that an attempt was made to de-
termine whether it might be the result of

64 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

PER CENT OF TOTAL DIET

AGE \
IN WEEKS

DATE

(a)

Fig. 2. Left.

[Vol. 69

CIRM,

\N

WK
CCG

\
N

(b)

Foods eaten by 55 juvenile pheasants of Group I, hatched from June 9-19.

Right. Foods eaten by juvenile pheasants of Group II, hatched from july 10-24.

a change in nutritional requirement on the
part of the bird, or a change in the availability
of the food. Whether or not food is available
depends of course not only on the season but
on the mobility of the bird. Those from one
to three weeks of age, and to a lesser degree
those of four and five weeks, are dependent
upon the food in their immediate surround-
ings, while birds six weeks and older can
travel some distance to a source of supply.

Fig. 2 (a) shows graphically the foods
eaten by 55 birds, hatched between June 9 and
19. This figure illustrates in more detail the
change from animal to plant food and the
date at which this took place. In Fig. 2 (b)
appears a similar plot for 48 birds hatching
between July 10 and 24. Although Group II
has hatched at least three weeks later than I,
the picture is somewhat the same. The change
from animal to plant food still occurred be-
tween the fourth and the sixth week despite
the fact that the wheat was combined by
July 24 and thus waste wheat became avail-
able in quantity to the birds of Group II
when they were only three weeks old. It is
evident that at this date they were still
largely insectivorous, while those of Group I
were eating a considerable amount of wheat.
It can also be seen that grass and leaves were
not taken until the fourth week. Since these
are available throughout the summer, this
also might indicate a selection determined

perhaps by nutritional requirement beginning
at four weeks of age.

However, availability of food does play a
part in determining what is eaten. For ex-
ample, at six weeks of age the later-hatched
birds ate less grain but considerably more
seeds than those of the same age group
hatching earlier. This was possibly due to
there being less wheat available, but almost
certainly because of the increasing supply of
ripened seeds in August.

SUMMARY

1. The contents of 251 full crops of juvenile
ring-necked pheasants taken on Pelee
Island were analysed volumetrically.

2. The young birds were almost wholly
insectivorous for the first three weeks;
they changed between the fourth and
sixth week to a diet consisting mainly of
plant food.

3. May-flies of the order Ephemerida form-
ed the bulk of the insect diet, and wheat
the bulk of the plant diet.

4. Both preference and availability appear
to play a part in the selection of food
items.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

This study was carried out under a grant-
in-aid from the National Research Council
of Canada.

April-June, 1955]

REFERENCES
Ball, K.E. 1950. Breeding behaviour of the

ring-necked pheasant of Pelee Island,
Ontario. Can. Field-Nat. 64: 201-207.

Clarke, C.H.D. 1947. Pelee Island pheasant
shoot. Sylva 3 (4): 45-55.

(Clarke, C.H.D. and R. Braffette. 1946. Ring-
necked pheasant investigations in Ontario
1946. Dept. of Lands and Forests, To-
ronto. Mimeo. 11 pp.

‘Core, E.L. 1948. The flora of the Erie Islands.
Franz Theodore Stone Lab., Ohio State
Univ. Contrib. 9.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 65

Dalke, P.D. 1935. Food of young pheasants in
Michigan. American Game, 24(3): 36-46.

Stokes, A.W. 1952. Pheasant survival studies
on Pelee Island, Ontario, 1946-1950. Trans.
N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 17: 285-293.

Taylor, D.J. 1942. Game management in On-
tario. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 7:
361-365.

Trautman, C. 1949. Criteria for determining
the age of juvenile pheasants. S. Dakota
Pittman-Robertson quarterly progress re-
port, Sept.-Nov. pp. 37-75.

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

The Alaska Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca
zaboria Oberholser and Oregon Junco Junco
oreganus oreganus (Townsend) in the Cari-
bou Parkland, B.C. — On May 5, 1954, I col-
lected a female Junco oreganus oreganus 10
miles west of Williams Lake, B.C., and on
May 14, 1954, a female Passerella iliaca za-
boria from amongst a large flock of Golden-
crowned Sparrows at Williams Lake, B.C.

To my knowledge, no other record of the
races mentioned has been published before
for this area. — LEO JOBIN, Kelowna, B.C.

Interesting records of birds collected in the
Peace River Parkland, British Columbia. —
Palm Warbler Dendroica palmarum (Gmelin).

On May 25, 1954, I collected a mature female
of this species while it was feeding on the
ground near a small slough at Groundbirch,
BC.

Magnolia Warbler Dendroica magnolia (Wil-
son).

On May 28, 1954, two females were col-
lected near Tupper Creek P.O. and a male
was taken eight miles west of Little River
P.O. Another pair was observed nesting near
a small slough at this same place.

Bay-breasted Warbler Dendroica castanea
(Wilson).

At Tupper Creek P.O. I noticed a strange
birds amongst a large flock of Black-poll
Warblers which was feeding in heavy spruce
trees. I collected it and identified it as a

mature female of the species noted. Accord-
ing to Munro and Cowan, (Review of the
Bird Fauna of British Columbia, 1947) one
specimen was taken at Charlie Lake in the
Peace River Parkland on June 16, 1938.

Black-bellied Plover Squatarola squatarola
(Linnaeus).

On May 29, 1954, I collected a mature male
of this species in full spring plumage near
Rolla P.O., and also saw another specimen
at the same place. To my knowledge, this
would appear to be the first spring record of
this species in this part of B.C.

Philadelphia Vireo Vireo philadelphicus (Cas-
sin).

On June 5, 1954, I collected two males and
one female of this species in a grove of aspen
near a small creek eight miles west of Little
Prairie P.O. Each bird had a brood patch,
and several others of this species were seen
or heard in the same locality. To my know-
ledge, this is the first nesting record of these
birds for the Peace River Parkland, as well
as the westernmost record for this species.

Black-headed Steller Jay Cyanocitta stelleri
annectens (Baird).

On June 9, 1954, I collected a male on the
bank of the East Pine River, about 40 miles
west of Dawson Creek, B.C. Very few birds
of this species were observed in the Peace
River Parkland, and no record for that area
is mentioned in the “Review of the Bird Fauna

66 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

of British Columbia” by J. A. Munro and I.
McT. Cowan. — LEO JOBIN, Kelowna, B.C.

First record of the Dakota Song Sparrow
Melospiza melodia juddi Bishop for British
Columbia. — On May 27, 1954, while collect-
ing specimens in the Peace River Parkland,
British Columbia, I camped near the south
end of Swan Lake, Tupper Creek, Peace
River, British Columbia.

In the early morning of May 30, 1954, I
heard a bird singing in a patch of tall grass,
growing amongst some low bushes, about fifty
yards from the lakeshore. This song was un-
familiar to me. After careful watching I saw
two very similar birds. I killed both with
one shot, but was able to find only one. It
proved to be an adult male Melospiza melodia
juddi Bishop. It would appear that these
two birds were mated. The testes of the male
collected were fully enlarged. Total length
of the bird was 162 millimeters. I have been
unable to find any other record for this sub-
species in any literature covering the bird
fauna of British Columbia. — LEO JOBIN,
Kelowna, B.C.

Pseudomma affine G. O. Sars: an addition
to the list of the Mysidacea of Eastern Can-
ada. — A large number of specimens of
Mysidacea were collected during July and
August, 1952, in the vicinity of the Atlantic
Biological Station, St. Andrews, New Bruns-
wick, during a search for parasitic nema-
todes. Four species were collected, one of
which was new to Canada. It was Pseudom-
ma affine G. O. Sars. The other species were
already recorded by Tattersall (1939).

Five males and one female, from 11 to
12 mm. long, were collected about one mile
off Campobello Island, New Brunswick, in
80 to 110 metres of water. The only previous
record of this species on this side of the
Atlantic Ocean is of a single individual col-
lected at Fish Hawk Station 999 (39° 45’
13” N.; 71° 30’ W.; i.e. off Martha’s Vine-
yard) in 1881. (Tattersall 1951, page 132).
The depth was 484 metres. European records
were in depths of 120 to 900 metres. It is
not unusual for deep-water forms to be
found in lesser depths in the lower Bay of
Fundy where tidal mixing brings deep con-
ditions nearer to the surface.

Dr. F. A. Chace, Jr. compared two of our
specimens with the one in the United States
National Museum and found no significant
differences.

[Vol. 69

REFERENCES

Tattersall, W. M. 1939. The Mysidacea of
Eastern Canadian Waters. J. Fish. Res.
Bd. Can. 4 (4), 281-6.

Tattersall, Walter M. 1951. A Review of
the Mysidacea of the United States Na-
tional Museum. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. 201,
1-292.

W. L. Klawe,
Atlantic Biological Station,
Fisheries Research Board of
Canada, St. Andrews, N.B.

Purple Martins. — At our summer cottage
near Ottawa we have a 16 compartment mar-
tin box which has been used to capacity by
Purple Martins, Progne subis, for the past
several years. As they arrive every year in
April we have counted from day to day two
pairs coming in first being followed by other
pairs until all compartments are occupied.
There are apparently a few fights for pos-
session to start with but the colony soon
gets settled and breeding starts.

When the young are hatched out, one,
two, or three in every compartment, the
growing birds cause over-crowding and quite
a few of the off-spring seem to be edged
out and fall to the ground before they are
strong winged. The old birds, their mothers
and fathers, sometimes flutter above their
fallen chicks but scarcely ever are noticed
to ground to give assistance.

Until recently we have endeavoured to
save some of these young by placing them on
a bush adjacent to the martin box. Their
parents were able to service them there better
than on the ground.

However, we recently acquired a new
idea from one of our visiting guests. A long
bamboo pole with a perch fixed to its tip
was brought into action. The young bird was
placed on the perch to which it clung grim-
ly. The pole was then raised and when the
tip was alongside the box the bird flew into
the box — BUT — only if its nest was on
that side. If it was not on that side the bird
would again flutter to the ground and a
second raising to the opposite side enabled
the bird to find its own home. Many young
birds were saved in this fashion.

George C. Gardner,
Ottawa.

The Barred Owl in Alberta. — In the course
of our investigations and research on the
Great Gray Owl (Scotiaptex nebulosa nebu-

April-June, 1955]

losa) in Alberta, further interesting records
of the Barred Owl, Strix varia, have emerged.

To the best of our knowledge only four
previous records for this Barred Owl are
known from Alberta. They include a bird
collected at Kvass Creek, near Smoky river
about 120 miles north of Jasper, on August
9, 1945 by the Twomey-Mellon party. Preble
(Auk Vol. 58, pp. 407-408) heard one near
Ft. McMurray, May 1934, the basis for
Bent’s Ft. McMurray record in his volume
on the owls of North America. There is a
specimen at Cornell University taken at Cal-
gary Feb. 12, 1912. Barnie Hamm of Wem-
bley, in the Peace River country, reports
that a neighbor of his shot a Barred Owl in
the fall of 1952. Hamm saw the bird and is
thoroughly familiar with the owls.

The following records must now be added
to the Alberta list.

May 11, 1953

A single feather from the breast of a Bar-
red Owl was found by the senior author in
an area of dense muskeg approximately 15
miles north-west of Corbett Creek, which is
about 125 miles north-west of Edmonton.
Local settlers when interviewed spoke of an
owl that frequently emitted weird noises.

December 18, 1953

A dead female Barred Owl was brought to
A.F.O. by Indian trapper John S. Jacobs of
the Calling Lake area, approximately 140
miles north of Edmonton. The bird had
perished in a weasel trap. The mounted
specimen is now in my possession.

March 27, 1954

Mr. R. E. Junck of Grosmont, some 100
miles north of Edmonton sent A.F.O. a dead
female Barred Owl which was shot by a
trapper 20 miles west of the village of
Fawcett. The mounted specimen is now in
the collection of E. T. Jones of Edmonton.

April 11, 1954
While scanning heavy timber country
across the Athabaska river, 30 miles west of
the village of Flatbush, approximately 100
miles north of Edmonton, E. T. Jones, Wil-
liam McKay, Dr. E. Hohn and the senior
writer observed a Barred Owl in heavy
spruce timber along the Akinui Creek. E. T.
Jones was able to obtain several feet of
colored movie film of this bird.
April 28, 1954
While visiting with Mr. Guy Miller of the
Obed Lake area, approximately 155 miles west

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 67

of Edmonton, the bodies of two dead Barred
Owls were séen hanging from the back porch
of the cabin. They had been partly skinned
in an amateur’s attempt at taxidermy. Both
skins were secured. The sex of one bird
was determined, proving to be a female and
is now mounted and in the collection of R. W.
Salt of Edmonton. The other bird is now
mounted and in possession of Mr. Houle of
Edmonton. Both birds were trapped in
weasel sets north of Obed Lake.

May 15, 1954

While observing a nest of the Great Gray
Owls in an area approximately 45 miles west
of Rocky Mountain House, a dead Barred
Owl was found not less than 45 feet from the
base of the large black poplar tree containing
the nest of the Great Gray Owls. The bird
was too badly decomposed to determine sex
and cause of death was not determined, al-
though circumstances indicate a local trapper.

We continue to receive reports from ob-
servant woodsmen, who describe an owl an-
swering to the description of the Barred
Owl from many areas throughout northern
Alberta. Many have described perfectly the
voice of the Barred Owl and we have no
reason to doubt, especially on the evidence
of what has turned up in the past year, that
the Barred Owl enjoys a general distribution
throughout the province. We feel that when
more competent observers enter the field a
nest of this species will unquestionably be
discovered for the first time in Alberta. Fre-
quenting heavy timber in remote areas has
undoubtedly been the major reason for the
fact that the Barred Owl has hitherto almost
totally escaped observation and may prove
to be a relatively common bird in Alberta.

A. F. Oeming and E. T. Jones,
Edmonton, Alberta.

First records of the American Egret in
Alberta. — Two records for the American
Egret (Casmerodius albus egretta) have
emerged for the first time in the province
of Alberta during the summer of 1954.

Mr. F. H. Riggall of Claresholm, in south-
ern Alberta, was able to photograph an
American Egret first spotted by Mr. Ber-
nard H. B. Smith on May 6, 1954. The bird
was wading about a small slough on the
edge of the village of Cowley. Mr. Riggall
reports that the breeding plumes, so charac-
teristic of this species, were plainly visible.
Although the bird had been pestered by

68 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

village youths, Mr. Riggall was able to ap-
proach within 150 yards of it. A photograph
of the bird is now in the possession of the
senior author.

On August 23, 1954, an American Egret
was seen wading in a side pool of Big Lake
(ten miles north of Edmonton) by the senior
author. The bird was approached within 130
yards and showed no evidence of breeding
plumes, but showed unmistakably all other
marks of identification for this species. On
August 24, accompanied by Dr. E. O. Hohn,
John Matthews and Bud Lucas, the bird was
again sighted and corroborated at a distance
less than 100 yards. For three succeeding
days the bird was sighted by A.F.O. and all

[Vol. 69

attempts to collect the now extremely wary
creature were unsuccessful. ;

On September 1, 1954, Mr. E. T. Jones and
A.F.O. flew over Big Lake and Mr. Jones
was able to obtain approximately 50 feet of
color movie film of this bird.

An extensive re-check of all existing orni-
thological publications for Alberta, reveals
no other records of the American Egret for
the province, and so one must assume these
two to be Alberta’s first authentic rec-
ords for this species, and an outstanding
addition to an ever increasing Alberta check
list. .

A. F. Oeming and F. H. Riggall, —
EDMONTON, Alberta.

REVIEWS

CAP THOMSON’S FISH GAME & NATURE
GUIDE TO THE 1,000 ISLANDS Caribou
Press, Bronxville, N.Y. Price 35 cents.

This attractive information booklet has
been rather earefully scrutinized by officers
of the Canadian Wildlife Service.

Cap Thomson is “selling” the beauties of
the 1,000 Islands, but he is doing it in a pleas-
ing way. The 15 pages of glossy print con-
tain illustrations of the fauna of the region
in colour, and in black and white. Line
sketches of cones, leaves, etc. of trees in-
dicate the important characteristics of some
of the native trees.

A presentation of the geological history of
the region should prove most interesting to
visitors as well as to local inhabitants. As
fishing is an important attraction for many
tourists, the two pages of coloured plates
of local fish will be most useful. The birds
are covered quite concisely. The different
species are divided according to their habitat
preference thus giving the casual bird-watcher
a better idea of what birds he is likely to
see in certain locations.

The pertinent reference given at the end
of each section should be very helpful. The
addition of “Trees of Canada” published by
the Dept. of Resources and Development for
the section of trees would have been a useful
reference.

The booklet is produced for the tourist
who enjoys nature, not the scientist, but it
has much scientific background. It contains
slight inaccuracies which the trained observer
will note, but these detract little from its
value as a guide to the natural features of

this favoured recreational area. Since so
many persons visit the 1,000 Islands, the book-
let may well be widely circulated and should
serve to stimulate interest in ‘““North America
Outdoors”’.

Graham Cooch, Ottawa.

Summer Birds of Western Ontario. By L. L.
Snyder. 1953. Transactions of the Royal
Canadian Institute, Vol. 30, Part I, pp. 47-
95.

This carefully prepared report summarizes
the results of four summer expeditions to
parts of western Ontario. Some 170 species
of summer birds are listed, three hypothe-
tically, and 95 are shown to breed or to have
bred. Annotations are succinct concerning
mainly occurrence and distributional details
with some comments on voice and behavior.

The author’s taxonomic notes are based on
the examination of 739 specimens — by far
the best collection of birds in existence from
that area. Notes on Parus atricapillus ana-
mesus Todd and Setophaga ruticilla trico-
lora (Miller) are particularly full. Eastern:
most distributional cornerposts in Canada
for several campestrian forms are demon-
strated. The taxonomic comments are defi-
nite with none of that exasperating vague-
ness too often encountered as to why speci-
mens are referred to a given race. Many
measurements and other data useful to
taxonomists also are given. This reviewer
noted but one lapsus: the Yellow Warbler of
the area is referred to the nominate race,
Dendroica petechia petechia. The author
concludes that, “Comparison of specimens
collected.... shows that a considerable

April-June, 1955]

number are represented in western Ontario
either by races of western distribution or
display genetic influence from that direction
....Obviously faunal influx or peripheral
pressure is from the south and west”. This
publication well fills a long-felt want. — W.
EARL GODFREY.

SOCIAL BEHAVIOUR IN ANIMALS WITH
SPECIAL REFERENCE TO VERTEBRATES
By N. Tinbergen; xi + 150 pp.; 67 figures
and 8 plates; $3.00; Methuen & Co. Ltd.
and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1953.

For those who want a readable, non-tech-
nical introduction to animal social behaviour,
the present volume can be highly recommend-
ed. Several excellent books on the subject
have appeared within recent years, but for
the reader who must limit his purchases to
a single volume, Dr. Tinbergen’s Social Be-
haviour in Animals appears to be by far the
best. It is, in a sense, a general survey of
the entire field, despite the fact that the
author’s main purpose is to treat social be-
haviour in vertebrates only.

Such a wealth of material is packed in this
volume that it is impossible to do justice to
the book within the confines of a brief
review. In general three main biological prob-
lems associated with a study of animal be-
haviour are discussed: function, causation and
evolution. And these are considered from
the point of view of mating, fighting, family
and group behaviour and the ways in which
they are organized in various species, follow-
ed by a consideration of the evolutionary
aspects of social organization.

The material presented in the book is the
result of thousands of observations carried on
by a host of competent biologists observing
wild animals in their natural environment. In
the past behaviour studies were carried on
in the laboratory or observations made on
captive animals. It is only since scientists
have moved from the laboratory into the
field that many forms of behaviour have
acquired any meaning. Among those who
have been engaged in ethological studies are,
Dr. N. Tinbergen, author of the present
volume, Konrad Lorenz, David Lack, Fraser
Darling and F. B. Sumner, to mention only
a few.

Were it not for these field studies, it is
doubtful that we would understand many of
the forms of behaviour which we observe in
free-living organisms. Among these might be

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 69

mentioned the red spot on the lower mandible
of the herring gull and its relationship to the
feeding of the young, or the vertical postur-
ing of the male stickleback in the presence
of a rival male. The elaborate courtship be-
haviour exhibited by many birds, fishes and
insects would appear superfluous if we did
not realize that the female requires persuasion
and the male’s tendency to fight all other
individuals must be overcome. We should
wonder why the male robin permits other
species of birds to enter his territory except
those with red in their plumage. Many types
of behaviour would appear ridiculous and
meaningless, such as the grass-pulling of
herring gulls in the presence of a rival, if
we are not aware that it is a form of threat
behaviour. The vigorous singing of a male
bird following a fight with a rival has struck
many observers as absurd until the animal
sociologists discovered its true significance.
As the result of their studies, too, we now
know that individual birds recognize mem-
bers of their own flock as “‘personalities’”’ not
merely as members of the same species. Sex
recognition among flickers is based on the
presence or absence of the moustache; a
female who had been provided with an artifi-
cial moustache was treated as a male even by
her mate! Numerous examples of this kind
are treated in the book.

The last chapter, entitled “Hints for Re-
search in Animal Sociology” is perhaps the
most interesting section of all. Here the
author suggests how both professional as
well as amateur naturalists can make valuable
contributions to this fascinating field. He
outlines, in a general way, how behaviour
studies can be undertaken, what pitfalls to
avoid and how to interpret the results. He
also suggests literature that might be con-
sulted and periodicals where original paper
on the subject are published. Bs

It is to be hoped that Dr. Tinbergen will
reward us, in the near future, with another
book as delightful and as stimulating as the
present volume.

AUSTIN W. CAMERON.

THE DANCING BEES, an account of the life
and senses of the honey bee. By Karl von
Frisch. xiv + 183 pp., 61 text figs., + XXX
plates. Methuen & Co. Ltd., London. 1954.
($3.75). [English translation by Dr. Dora Ilse
of AUS DEM LEBEN DER BIENEN. 5th, re-
vised, edition published by Springer Verlag
(Berlin — Gottingen — Heidelberg) in 1953].

70 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

The English translation of this German
work by von Frisch, is written in a simple
but fascinating style which makes for plea-
sant reading, and easy understanding of the
elaborate experiments made by this long-life
observer of bees. His experiments led to
remarkable discoveries on the “language” of
bees. This peculiar language he explains in
a most detailed fashion, with the addition of
illustrations, in the longest and most impor-
tant of the 16 chapters, which constitute the
book. In order to understand this universal
and “wordless” language, one should know
something of the life, senses, mental capaci-
ties and behaviour of bees in comparison with
other social insects.

In various chapters of the book, reference
is made to the manner in which the honey
bee originally lived in nature, the size and
components of a colony, the division of labour,
and the feeding habits of bees. The com-
pound eye of a bee is explained by compari-
son with the human eye. The smell and taste
are demonstrated by experiments, and tests
are described which prove that, in vision, the
honey bee discriminates only 4 colours: yel-
low, blue-green, blue and ultra-violet.

As means of communication with their pol-
len and nectar collecting sister workers, honey
bees perform in the hive a “round dance”
and a “wagging dance’. The round dance con-
sists of a series of whirlings describing semi-
eircles in right and left hand directions.
This dance tells the companion workers the
neighbourhood of the food supply. The wag-
ging dance is performed by whirling in a
semi-circle, tracing a waving (or wagging)
line to the starting point, and whirling in
the opposite direction, to make altogether
the pattern of 2 semi-circles united by a
wagging line. The direction of the wagging
line tells the other bees the position of the
rich source of food which is expressed as the
angle formed between this line and a line
to the position of the sun. The distance
of the food supply is expressed by the num-
ber of waggings in a given time, this number
being greater when the distance is reduced,
and smaller when the distance is increased.
The kind of flower visited is determined by
the smell carried by the collector bee. A

[Vol. 69

similar dance is performed by the scouts in
the swarm cluster to indicate a suitable loca-
tion for the new colony.

It is a recognized fact that the honey bee,
as well as other bees and many other insects,
are important agents in the pollination of
flowers and, thus, contribute to the abundance
and quality of fruits. Tests have also proved
that, towards the end of the season, when the
yield of nectar from other crops is greatly
reduced, bees may be enticed to “dance”
for the collection of pollen and nectar on
thistle, in order to increase their winter
supply. There is also evidence that bees
can be trained to collect from clover, for
the increase of the seed production.

Among other insects which live in colonies
are listed the bumblebees, other bees, wasps,
ants and termites. None of these, however,
have reached the degree of perfection of the
social life existing in the honey bee. In spite
of their dwellings, associations, ability, and
powerful defence, honey bees have numerous
and dangerous enemies, and these are briefly
described in the work at hand.

New information on the habits of the
honey bee is constantly coming to hand.
Von Frisch tells us that queen bees mate
only once in their youth, but very recently,
bee experts have demonstrated that the
queen may mate several times on her first
or subsequent flights prior to egg-laying.

A few errors in printing and editing have
been noted, among the most important of
which are the interchange of plates XIII and
XIV in the text, and the omission of explana-
tion of figures 50 to 61 in the list of the text
illustrations.

Everyone interested in raising honey bees
for the rich product they supply, the pleasure
they bring to the beekeeper, or for the
pollination of fruit trees, other trees or
various agricultural plants, would be well
advised to read this book which explains,
in a simple manner, many facts formerly
unknown or erroneously interpreted.

Robert Lambert,
Entomology Division,
Department of Agriculture,
Ottawa, Ontario.

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1953-54

President Emeritus: C. W. LOWE; Hon. President: A.
_G. LAWRENCE; President: R. K. STEWART-HAY; Vice-
f C. I. TILLENIUS, Mrs. W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
Asst. Treasurers: Miss W.

xec. Secretary: Mrs. G. I. KEI
W. A. CARTWRIGHT.

_ SECTIONS—

_ Archaeology: Chairm. Mrs. P. H. STOKES; Sec. Mrs.
R. K. HELYAR; Botany: Chairm. J. S. ROWE, Sec.

Miss E. O. BURDENY; Entomology: Chairm. R. 2

PRENTICE, Sec. J. A. DROUIN; Geology: Chairm. E.

I. LEITH, Sec. Mrs. A. C. CRANSTONE; Herpetology:

MI, F. KEMP

Lectures on the first and third Monday evenings of
each month will be held in the 4th floor Board Room
_ of the Free Press. Friday evening lectures will be
held in Room 204 of the University Extension Service,
Memorial Boulevard, The meetings open at 8.00 p.m.,
_ the lectures commencing at 8.15 p.m.

HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1955

President: T. J. A. HUNTER; Ist Vice-President: J. A.
_ BIGONESSE; 2nd Vice-President: J. K. HILL; Secretary-
Treasurer: Geo. A. Le CLERC; Chief-Scientitic Sect.: Dr.
DD. A. DERY; Chief-Protection Sect.: Napoleon BEAUDET;
_ Chief-Propaganda Sect.: J. G. COOTE; Chief-Informa-
tion Sect.: Frs. HAMEL. Other directors: O. MARCEAU,
‘R. MEREDITH, J. C. PRICE, F. D. ROSS, Jos. MORIN,
Dr. V. PLAMONDON.

. ‘Secretary‘s address: Geo. A. Le CLERC, 300 Fraser St.,
_ Quebec, P.Q.

_ THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
| CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

A. A. OUTRAM; Vice-President: J. L.
_ BAILLIE; Secretary-Treasurer: MRS. J. B. STEWART,
21 Millwood Rd., Toronto; President of Junior Club:
_ MRS. J. MURRAY SPEIRS; Vice-President of Junior Club:
_ MRS. L. E. JAQUITH. Executive Council: G. M. BART-
_ MAN, J. BARNETT, MRS. N. BROWN, ALFRED BUNKER,
_ MISS F. BURGESS, ALEXANDER CAMERON, MISS VERA
_ CLARK, MISS B. DOUGLAS, PROF. T. W. DWIGHT, DR.
__M. FRITZ, W. W. H. GUNN, DR. L. E. JAQUITH, MRS.
_ Jj. D. KETCHUM, MISS V. KOHLER, MRS. H. H. MARSH,
Cc. S. McKEE, D. S. MILLER, JOHN MITCHELE, R. M.
- SAUNDERS, EARL STARK, H. H. SOUTHAM. Ex. Officio:
_ A. J. V. LEHMANN, C. A- WALKINSHAW, T. F. MclIL-
_ WRAITH.

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday ot
_ each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
_ held during the spring and autumn and on the second
Bpaturday of each month during the winter.

_ President:

AFFILIATED SOCIETIES >

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

OFFICERS 1955-56

Hon. President: Dr. N. A. M. MACKENZIE; Past President:
F. WAUGH; President: A. R. WOOTTON; Vice President:
J. J. PLOMMER; Hon. Secretary: C. B. W. ROGERS; Re-
cording Secretary: Mrs. Augusta MARTIN; Programme
Secretary: J. GARDNER; Hon. Treasurer: F. SANFORD:
Librarian: Mrs. Dorothy BRADLEY; Editor of Bulletin:
N. PURSSELL; Chairmen of Sections: Botany-Dr. T. M. C.
TAYLOR; Geology—Dr. J. E. ARMSTRONG; Entomology—
Prof. G. J. SPENCER; Ornithology—W. HUGHES; Mam-
mology—Dr I. McT. COWAN; Marine Biology—Mrs. M.
L. McLUCKIE; Photography—B. GLEIG; Junior Section—
Miss W. L. PEARSON; Mycology—Dr. R. STACE-SMITH;
Audubon Screen Tours—S. BRADLEY; Additional Mem-
bers of Executive: Dr. V. C. BRINK, Dr. M. Y. WILLIAMS.

All meetings at 8 p.m. Room 100, Applied Science
Building, University of British Columbia, unless other-
wise announced.

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1955

Past President: Mrs. G. CUMMINGS, R.R. #4, London;
President: Mr. F. Howard KEAST, 44 Graydon St., Lon-
don; Vice-President: Dr. W. W. JUDD, 685 Strathmeyer
St., London; Recording Secretary: Miss M. J. HEIGHWAY,
66 Ciliftonvale Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr. J. C.
LAUGHTON, R.R. #4, London; Corresponding Secretary:
Mrs. W. R. JARMAIN, 301 Oxford St., London; Migra-
tion Secretary: Mr. J. LEACH, Platts Lane, R.R. #3,
London,

Meetings are held at 8.30 p.m. in the Public Library
building on the second Monday of each month from
September to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1954-1955

President: Dr. M. J. DUNBAR; Vice-President: J. P.
ANGLIN; Vice-President: J. L. VAN CAMP; Treasurer:
W. H. RAWLINGS; Secretary: Miss R. S. ABBOTT,
166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE

Miss P. C. ABBOTT, Miss R. S. ABBOTT, J. P. ANGLIN,
W. R. B. BERTRAM, Miss R. B. BLANCHARD, Miss S.
BOYER, Mrs. P. H. du BOULAY, J. D. CLEGHORN,
Dr. M. J. DUNBAR, D. G. ELLIOT, Mrs. D. G. ELLIOT,
DeLISLE GARNEAU, G. HARPER HALL, W. S. HART,
Miss G. HIBBARD, A. R. LEPINGWELL, IAN McLAREN,
G. H. MONTGOMERY, W. H. RAWLINGS, J. W. ROBIN-
SON, C. C. SAIT, Miss M. SEATH, H. G. SEYMOUR,
Dr. J. H. SUMMERBY, J. L. VAN CAMP.

Meeting held the second Monday of the month except
during summer. Field Trips held in spring and autumn,

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY

President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-Prseident: H. M.
LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. at
Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C.

CALGARY NATURALISTS’ CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1954

President: Miss JULIE HRAPKO; Vice-President: J. C.
BARNHARDT; Secretary-Treasurer: Miss ARGARET
COPE, 1719 — 13th Ave. W., Calgary, Alta.

Mr.
Field-Noturolists cu, .

‘JULY-SEPTEMBER, 1955 No. 3

The CANADIAN
‘IELD. NATURALIST

75th ANNIVERSARY ISSUE

C aioli

: relation of man to solaris ee the ages.

By Tit Ey Mcliwinithins sl ck ON Nan ate py WON aie 71
sidents of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club ....................... Send 74
t us now praise famous men”, ,
Raabe yer bert Grol. sh. ee ean ae, BLAU NO ay le RAIA, OO Sa Seen 8)
sth Anniversary, Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ COHN a AR) ae IR le a So Pa See 78
ibliographic survey of James Fletcher’s Flora Ottawaensis.
By B. Boivin STAC WV Pat COG VRE CS IND ee Ma, CO en ae wee an Sekt cte aE a ee 79
| First t records of eight species of fishes in 2 ES ESE . |
Re U BY, hag Vity Aton sand, RePofolnsonve. sco Ceara tts FeO hr HORM 82
. "Plants of Cunningham Island, Ottawa, Ontario. | )
LARRY Lee Cain toe § Ci cals Mee ROO eae aie rae ea PE nd SP OPUS Ah LOR: eee wee 85
. Bird observations from southern Keewatin and the interior of
northern Manitoba. By Farley M. Mowat and Andrew H. Lawrie ................ 93 =
o RBgenical investigations on coastal southern Cornwallis Island,
iy Franklin District, N.W.T. By W. B. Schofield Wes, Fo, COM ree o tues fy 0G
Be Additions to the flora of Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia. By W. L. Klawe ............ 129
ian Notes and Observations: —
a: - Ring-necked Duck Verne collaris), breeding in |
, Pasay Saguenay County, Quebec: By ‘Graham! Cooch! 60 een 130
i a se dark specimen of the giant slug, Limax maximus L., |
Ti 4 collected at London, Ontario. By W. W. Judd 0.0.0.0... "BEV a 130
} b -Torilis japonica in the Ottawa District. By David Erskine oo... 131
ee - Notes on the Black Swift and Vaux Swift at their nesting sites
Bh ae ed in central British Columbia. By Leo Jobin ............ Is Se WSU Pesaran ale gH 131
; a seats The columnar form of the western red cedar — an
eee be : environmental modification. te. Pl ay Erp y Ja RHOGES Sher Oh Vash ce bets aati 132
Reviews Rarer We Seah Le ab Sai Beles PAL AAs cdr ene RRR Resco, A Bee Mes 133
Be ; } } of oes
ae ae) Published by the
ye sss OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB
a ay - Authorized as second class mail, Post Office Department, Ottawa.
” A Nei } } y ‘ Val !

No oh Dp, Harris, E. O. Hucues, W. ILLMAN, W. i -LaNcELEY,

: \Datrog : an ;

His Excellency, The Rt. Honourable Vincent Massey, iG He s0verl

_ President: Mr. w. K. aye BALDWIN AG :
1st Vice-President: Dr. L. S. RUSSELL

Treasurer: RayMoND ‘Moore,

Division of Botany, | us
‘Science Service, Dept. of — Ret Ottawa, aa . a
Agriculture, Ottawa. “ai iad Paimeah vine

Additional Members of Council: Mrs. lL Ww. cao Mrs.
Brown, Miss RutH Horner, Miss VIOLET HuMPHREYS, inte:
LINE SNURE, ‘Miss Mary Stuart, THE REVEREND FATHER F. E
ANDERSON, Jj. ARNOLD, Jc. BLEAKNEY, B. Borvin, K. Bow es 4
NERS, W. G. Dore, C. FRANKTON, R. Fritu, w. E. GODFREY, i ¢

)

Ds WG “Mannine, H. “MARSHALL, D. AL Munro, ALES iy Gua) i
RUDDELL, D. B. 0. ‘SAVILE, H. A. SENN, Vv. 1) Oe SoLMAN, BAL

Auditors: pew Connens, rox FRANKTON, :"

Editor: CAIN ads ae ee a

Dr. H. A. SENN, a OE Nae

Division of | Botany, Qo Ee,

‘Science Secs Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa, ie

Mae ate . ; Gre Wage) - Associate Editors: va |
Wi (Ge Dore yee e eine Botany R. M. AnprErson .

AVE AROCOUB, ice. 2 ae Gonaee A. G. HUNTSMAN ..

H. G. CRAWFor» .......... cece. Entomology

Bop ALCOCK 2) hia ee DUEE Raaie ge Geology W. iN ‘BELL . Beeb sth
SHERMAN BLEAKNEY .............. _ Herpetology eRe DyMonp . RP a

"Business Manager: SAE MENTE E
W. J. Copy, PE SACK A SNE
Division of Botany, VAC Os a
_ Selence Service, Bea of Agriculture, Ottawa,

Club, 1879, 1886, two volumes; the next, The Gitnen N aturalist, 1886- 1919, | ee
two volumes: and these have been continued by The Canadian ’Field-N aturalist to a 3
date. The Canadian Field-Naturalist is issued quarterly. Its scope is the publica on aie
of the results of original research in all departments of Natural History. | at

Price of this volume (4 numbers ) va ou Single copies 70¢ each. ;

Subscription ($3.00 per year) should be forwarded to Dr. R. J. Moore, oa
Div. of Botany, Science ‘Service, Dept. of Agri
ma OTTAWA, CANADA.

The Canadian

Vol. 69

OTTAWA, CANADA, JULY-SEPTEMBER, 1955

Field-Naturalist

THE RELATION OF MAN TO NATURE THROUGH THE AGES!

T. F. McItwraltH
Professor of Anthropology, University of Toronto

An address delivered at the 75th Anniversary Dinner
of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club

N anniversary is a suitable time to look

both backward and forward. I congratu-
late the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club on
marking their 75th birthday by this gathering,
and I regard it as a very great compliment
that I have been asked to be the guest
speaker.

I have naturally chosen an anthropological
subject, but one which, I hope, is in keeping
with the historical thought which pertains
to an anniversary, and one which I feel to
be of major importance at the present time.
We are all apt to forget that our life depends
upon the earth, the water, and the living
organisms of our world; in this machine
age we naturally think of our increasing
ability to control our environment, but we
must never forget that we are still part of it.

My subject is man’s relationship to nature,
from before the dawn of history until today.
I feel that it can be divided into three main
chapters:

Man the Defender
Man the Attacker
Man the Controller

Man the Defender

In the Upper Palaeolithic Age, preceding
the last advance of the glacial ice, man lived
in southern Europe, western Asia, and parts
of Africa. By means of archaeology we are
able to reconstruct much of his life. We
know that he was a hunter from the broken
bones of deer, bison and other mammals
that served for food; we know his tools,
crude unpolished stone knives and points.
We know many of the things which he
lacked; he had no metal, no pottery, no
weaving, no bow and arrow, no system of
writing. Still relying on evidence from
archaeology, we may infer that the popula-
tion was sparse and that the social units were

1) Received for publication January 19, 1956.
Vol. 69, No. 2, April-June, 1955,

small, little more than family

groups.

Yet man survived with these miserably
poor tools. His world was a hard one, per-
haps an increasingly hard one with the ad-
vance of the last ice sheet. He lived as a
neighbour of the wolf, the bear, the mam-
moth, the bison, and other mammals, first
in a warm climate and later in a cold period.
With his tools he could not cut down a
single tree—his life was controlled by his en-
vironment. He was the hunted rather than
the hunter, relying largely upon wild roots
and plants and smaller game animals. Life
must have been a struggle, in the same sense
that it is today for any weak carnivorous
mammal that is constantly seeking its own
food as it strives to escape becoming the
food of predators stronger than itself. I
have used the term “‘defender” in this period
to emphasize the weakness of man in rela-
tionship to other forms of life.

The important point is that man survived.
Perhaps the very perils of his existence
stimulated his ingenuity. It was at this
period that man became a tool-using creature,
wherein he differs from all other animals.
Since that time he has increased the number
and complexity of his tools, but the initial
step, the fabrication of stone or wood to
make a tool with which he could supplement
his bodily strength, belongs to’ this period.
Two other basic elements of all human
culture likewise go back to the Palaeolithic
Age, namely, fire and religion. Fire helped
man protect himself; religion undoubtedly
gave him inward strength. While still a
weakling in a strong world, man had de-
veloped the elements of greatness.

Man the Attacker

Very slowly man developed new and better
tools, and with these he was able to attack
his environment. After the retreat of the

1955.

probably

was issued December 29,

Sf eae

1) THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

last ice sheet, when the climate in Europe
and western Asia grew rapidly warmer, hu-
man civilization in Eurasia changed signifi-
cantly. Although tools were still of stone,
man had learned to polish them, and to make
axes with which it was possible to cut down
trees, and to make wooden utensils of dif-
ferent kinds. Wood and stone were becoming
increasingly effective human servants. The
bow and arrow gave him a relatively effective
weapon for hunting, and in the manufacture
of pottery man brought the inorganic ele-
ment of clay to his service.

It was at this period, the Neolithic Age,
that man first conquered — and I use the
term advisedly — various plants. He learned
to cultivate barley, rye, and, in Palestine,
emmer, a simple form of wheat. No longer
was man exclusively a wanderer. His crops
provided a reliable source of food, but, more
than that, they began to dominate his life.
Social co-operation was needed in the clearing
of land and the planting and harvesting of
cereals. Population increased, and with it
social co-operation on a larger scale became
possible. Not only were domesticated plants
valuable for food, but from flax came ma-
terials necessary for weaving; a new era in
clothing manufacture had begun.

It may have been slightly before the Neo-
lithic Age that man began to spread around
the world. He crossed Bering Strait to
America; he reached the farthest islands
of the South Pacific; indeed the Antarctic
alone remained unpopulated. It must not
be thought that this movement took place
within a few years. It was a slow spread,
similar to the gradual extension of range of
a plant or an insect and, likewise, influenced
by climatic and geographical factors. And of
course there was no uniformity either in the
rate of spread, or in the addition of new
skills. In Europe, for example, man learnt
to master the inorganic elements of tin, lead
and even iron several thousand years ago,
whereas stone was the basic material in most
of North America until the time of Columbus,
and in the interior of New Guinea until
World War II. If, however, we use stone
polishing as the criterion of the Neolithic
Age, we owe to the nameless farmers of that
period every one of our modern crops. Corn,
potatoes, tomatoes, peanuts, and manioc in
the New World; rice, yams, taro, and sugar-
cane in Asia and the South Pacific; dates
and figs in the Mediterranean basin; various
fruits and vegetables in Persia and in South-

[Vol. 69

eastern Asia — all had been brought to the
service of man before records in writing
were available. Our modern developments
in agriculture have improved existing crops,
but have not added a single species to those
won from nature by our prehistoric ancestors.
Not only did they cultivate these basic food
crops, but in tobacco, tea, and coconuts they
provided non-essentials which contributed to
the pleasures of life.

As man gained mastery over plants, so like-
wise did his constant attack upon animals
bear surprising results. It was in the Neo-
lithic Age that man tamed the dog, the
sheep, the pig, the cow and the horse. We
will never know how the first domestication
took place; perhaps some hunter brought
home cubs or kittens as pets for his children,
or perhaps it was a dog that attached it-
self to a hunter. Such incidents must have
happened time after time, but in some way
animals began to breed in captivity, con-
trolled by man. I have mentioned only the
mammals that belonged to the Eurasiatic-
North African area; but elsewhere in the
Neolithic Age man domesticated the ele-
phant, the camel, the yak, the water buffalo,
the donkey, as well as various species of
chickens and ducks and the New World tur-
key. From among the insects, the silkworm
and the bee were drawn into human service.

As with plants, the domestication of ani-
mals did not occur at one time or in one
place. We of today owe to these Neolithic
hunters the beginnings of domestication, in
fact no animal has been added to the list
since the dawn of history. The modern
breeder has improved and modified strains,
but he has not added a single species to the
total of those domesticated before history
began.

The process of domestication had far-reach-
ing effects both upon man and the animals
themselves. Generations of living under un-
natural biological conditions has turned the
cow into a creature which can give abnormal-
ly large quantities of milk; the hen into an
egg-laying machine of amazing productivity,
and the horse into varied specialized types
suited to the race course or the plough. Still
more modified has been the dog. The pe-
culiar conditions of domestication have pro-
duced the asthmatic bulldog, the almost hair-
less chihuahua, and the poodle with excess
hair hanging over its eyes. If the ancestors
of any of these animals, the wild cow, the
jungle fowl, the desert stallion, the wolf or

July-Sept. 1955]

the fox, could look at the biologically dis-
torted animals of today, one might imagine
them saying that their descendents had been
contaminated by too long and too close an
association with mankind.

As man has modified animals by domestica-
tion, so, too, have the domesticated animals
affected human culture. Not only has man
had a stable food supply, but he has utilized
the ox for pulling the plough, the horse and
the camel as beasts of burden and for riding,
and the sheep and the silkworm as producers
of materials for clothing. Truly, man’s way
of life has been profoundly modified by his
domesticated animals. In fact, they have
freguently become his masters. The farmer
of today may “own” a cow, but this owner-
ship compels him to milk his animal twice
daily throughout the year. We may speak of
the cow as the servant of man, but we forget
that frequently man is the slave of the cow.

If one thinks of the relationship of man to
animals in the broadest perspective as a
struggle, it may serve to explain some of the
attitudes towards animals found widely in
many parts of the world. Sometimes there has
been absolute veneration, as shown in the
animal cults of Egypt, of India, or of Mexico.
Although animal deities are relatively rare
throughout the world, an attitude of respect
is very widely held — the commonest ex-
amples being the practice of totemism, and
the supernatural strength of animals, shown
so:commonly in myth and legend. Surely
such attitudes owe their beginnings to the
varied powers possessed by animals, powers
which impressed man as an attacker. But
once man had conquered, often-times he dis-
played his ruthlessness. ‘Woe to the van-
quished” was shown to human prisoners, and
likewise man exulted in his triumph over
mammals and showed himself callous to
their sufferings. The bullfight, the combats
of fighting cocks, bear baiting and the kick-
ing of hedgehogs or badgers are practices
well known in European history. Perhaps
the confinement of parrots, or the zoological
gardens of the last century, are relics of the
same attitude of control. So too is the cruel-
ty shown by the modern Eskimo to the
wounded seal, or the wholesale slaughter of
antelopes by some African tribes. Venera-
tion and cruelty are not incompatible if
viewed in the perspective of an age-long
struggle.

Man has many sides to his character. The
ruthlessness of the conqueror gives place to

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 73

the concepts of charity and of kindness.
Tolerance and forbearance were among the
precepts of Jesus, and later of St. Francis of
Assisi. Today the sentiments of protection
and charity are shown in the growth of the
Humane Society, the Audubon Society, and
in legislation for the protection of animals.
Man, as conqueror, has begun to feel ethical
responsibilities.

We have come a long way from the Palaeo-
lithic hunter defending himself against
stronger animals with the aid of fire and of
crude tools; cr even of his Neolithic des-
cendants boldly attacking nature with their
puny axes and arrows. Today we have sub-
jugated most animals and plants, and even
the inorganic world of metallic ores and clays
are made by man into tools to further his
conquest of the world of which he and they
are part.

Man the Controller

We can now look to the future. With .
modern machinery it is possible to change
the course of rivers, to clear forests, to
destroy whole species of animals. It goes
without saying that we have not used our
powers wisely. The clearing of the forests
from the mountains of Greece, to build ves-
sels of war, led to erosion and the decline
of what was once a rich agricultural area.
Such too is the history of Asia Minor, but per-
haps we forget the more modern examples
of the dust-bowl of Oklahoma, the drying up
of parts of southern Saskatchewan and, in-
deed, the sweeping away of far too much of
the fertile topsoil of southern Ontario.

I do not think it is an exaggeration to say
that with our increasing capacities for de:
struction — and we are on the threshold
of the use of nuclear power, there is a far
greater responsibility upon our generation
than upon any that has gone before. We
have profited from the attainments of un-
known Neolithic hunters and farmers; we
have the power to continue and improve
upon their work. Have we the wisdom to
do so? Time alone will tell, but truly it is
an obligation upon all of us, and particularly
on those who enjoy the out-of-doors, to
realize our responsibility and to plan for the
future, so that our children and grand-
children will be enabled to enjoy some of
the trees, the plants and wild life which are:
part of the world in which we have our being.
Indeed we must learn to live with other
forms of life or perish, victims of our own
powers of destruction.

74

PRESIDENTS OF

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Inaugural,
1880-1883
1883-1885
1885-1836
1886-1887
1837-189
1889-1892
1392-1895
1895-1897
1897-1899
1899-1901
1901-1903
1803-1905
1905-1906
1906-1908
1808-1910
1920-1911
1911-1912
1912-1914
1914-1916
1916-1918
1918-1919
1919-1920
1920-1922

1922-April,

March 19, 1879 Lt. Col. Wm. White
James Fletcher

Dr. H. Beaumont Small

W. H. Harrington

James Macoun

R. B. Whyte

R. W. Ells

Geo. M. Dawson
Dr. F. T. Shutt

Prof. E. E. Prince
Dr. H. M. Ami
Robert Bell

W. T. Macoun

S. B. Sinclair

W. J. Wilson

A. E. Attwood
Andrew Halkett
Alexander McNeill
L. H. Newman
Arthur Gibson
Harlan I. Smith
C. Gordon Hewitt
M. Y. Williams

R. M. Anderson
1925 Hoyes Lloyd

April 1925-December 1925 G. A. Miller

1925-1927
1927-1928
1928-1929
1929-1931
1931-1933
1933-1935
1935-1937
1937-1938
1933-1940
1940-1942
1942-1944
1944-1946
1946-1948
1948-1950
1950-1952
1952-1954
1954-

Norman Criddle
Dr. E. M. Kindle
E. F. G. White
Dr. Harrison F. Lewis
C. M. Sternberg
Dr. M. E. Wilson
Herbert Groh

P. A. Taverner

A. E. Porsild

H. G. Crawford
Douglas Leechman
Rev. F. E. Banim
W. H. Lanceley
Dr. Pauline Snure
Dr. J. W. Groves
Rowley Frith

W. K. W. Baldwin

[Vol. 69

* are addresses

July-Sept. 1955]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 75

“LET US NOW PRAISE FAMOUS MEN’?

HERBERT GROH
Ottawa, Ontario

N 75 years an institution like the Ottawa

Field-Naturalists’ Club is bound to have
gathered about it some history. Those who
were with it from the first have passed on,
although it was not until as lately as 1949
that Dr. Small, the last of the founding group,
was lost to us. At least three close links
with those founders remain in the persons of
Dr. Gibson, Mr. White and Mr. Attwood.
While two of these are no longer in Ottawa,
and are now in impaired health, it would be
an inspiration to us of the present if we could
have a message from them out of the past.

My own membership began just before the
first break by death in the original ranks.
James Fletcher who had been a prime moving
spirit among those early enthusiasts, was the
first to go. This was on November 8, 1908, a
few months after he had enticed me to come
to his slender staff. He had met me the year
before as a Senior at Guelph when I ap-
proached him regarding a weed, Eruca sativa,
which just then was making its appearance
widely across Canada. His request that I
record my observations in the Ottawa Natu-
ralist was thus my initiation into Club activi-
ties.

Through the years Dr. Fletcher had con-
tributed much of the dynamic behind the
Club’s amazing progress. Although my
association with him was so brief I had al-
ready learned to appreciate his sterling
qualities. His stature as an inspiring leader
is preserved to us in a memorial issue of
the Naturalist for January, 1909, in which
by representative members
delivered at a gathering in his memory. A
fountain, the work of his sculptor friend,
Tait McKenzie, also stands at the Experi-
mental Farm.

My own tribute may well have reference
to his kindly welcome on my arrival, his
introductions all around and his concern to
get me comfortably settled in a city then
disturbingly strange to me. My first meal
was with the Fletchers in their home on the
Farm still standing alongside the Chemistry
Laboratory. My first Saturday afternoon
was spent, by invitation, with W. Hague
Harrington, a fellow officer of the club, and
himself in cruising about Dow’s Lake. They

1) Received for publication November 15, 1954.

were in search of aquatic life, some of it,
like wild rice, previously “planted” there by
themselves. My presence could have been
in no way essential but was purely in the
line of their generous thoughtfulness. Mr.
Harrington was a senior official in the Post
Office Department, a founder and fourth
Club President, and had Entomology as his
absorbing interest.

Dr. H. Beaumont Small, already named
above, reached the advanced age of 94, had
been a prominent physician and the third
President. As late as 1936 he showed his
continuing interest in the Club by appearing
at a meeting in the Carnegie Library lecture
room at which I was the speaker, and joined
in the discussion following. Earlier, on the
occasion of the fiftieth anniversary of the
Club’s founding, when eleven surviving mem-
bers of that period were invited as dinner
guests, he was one of two to be there.

Not by death, but by departure before my
time, one member of the original Committee,
Joseph Martin, had left a place vacant. He
reached eventually a seat for East St. Pan-
cras in the British House of Commons.

The first President for one year before Dr.
Fletcher held the post for three years was
Lt.-Col. William White. I remember him in
advanced years, and his sons George R. and
E.F.G. White, both keen observers and col-
lectors of birds, particularly waterfowl.
George was a member of Council at the time
of his death in 1927, and his brother also
until, for health reasons, he removed to the
Pacific Coast. When the Club observed its
fiftieth birthday the latter was drafted for a
year as President in recognition of his fa-
ther’s first incumbency.

Hoyes Lloyd has reported once asking
George White how boys so long ago became
interested in natural history and was told
“We had a good father’. Apropos to this, it
was at a Council meeting in the White home
that I once proposed some provision for the
encouragement of such junior naturalists.
Years afterwards “Bill” Baldwin, a product
of such encouragement elsewhere, made a
similar proposal and, what is more, did
something about it — witness the Macoun
Field Club of today.

76 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

The Macoun Club was named in honour of
Prof. John Macoun the fifth President of the
senior body who, with his sons, James M.
and William T., were another notable trio.
James was a botanist along with his father
and a former Editor of the Naturalist. Wil-
liam was a Treasurer and then President,
1903 to 1905. While I was yet new in Ottawa
and so soon bereft of Dr. Fletcher’s guidance
in botany I had much occasion to impose on
the good nature of Professor and James
Macoun in their offices in the old Geological
Survey building on Sussex Street. In sum-
mer both were away on field survey, but in
winter I would find them immersed in work
on their specimens. The Professor was giving
a set time each day to bringing to near com-
pletion a Flora of the Ottawa District, en-
larging upon Fletcher’s Flora Ottawaensis
which had run through early issues of the
Club publication. He enlisted my help to
provide citations from the collections in our
custody at the Farm. This monumental work,
alas, is still unpublished.

I came to know all three Macouns in Coun-
cil meetings and in the old Botanical Branch
of the Club which gathered regularly in the
homes of members. At the latter, particular-
ly, the Professor contributed zest to the dis-
cussions. He was positive in his opinions and
in his expression of them. He had a faculty,
being Irish I suppose, for finding his way to
the contrary side of any issue.

Macoun and Fletcher, I understood, had al-
ways been somewhat opposites. They were
unlike temperamentally, and may have felt a
certain rivalry through their parallel roles in
botany within one city. Both were natu-
ralists of the old school and knew full well
the forte for which they were equipped. As
Macoun expressed it in his eulogy of Flet-
cher later, “he was a naturalist of the school
of Gilbert White of Selborne’; and in his
dogmatic fashion he added, “‘the last we were
likely to see as the modern atmosphere was
fatal to the growth of this devoted all-round
type’. Of course we younger workers have
our merits too; but if he seemed at times to
disparage these he certainly did not hold
himself aloof. It seemed a pleasure to him,
and others like him, to impart to a disciple
the experience and contagious enthusiasms
they possessed. I well recall being taken
down river some distance to see the type
localities of some of the new violets offered
to science by the Macouns.

[Vol. 69

R.B. Whyte, the first Secretary of the new
society and its sixth President, continued still
as one of its most earnest members and
Councillors down to my time. He worked
closely with Fletcher in botany and horti-
culture, which fascinated both. He had large
business interests which continue under
the firm name of James G. Whyte & Son (he
being the son) to the fourth generation now.
These cares were not however allowed to
monopolize his time. Ottawa and provincial
horticultural organizations received his coun-
sel and honoured him with office. One of his
later contributions was through a_ district
Boys’ Potato Growing Contest. He was the
originator of the well-known Herbert rasp-
berry. At one of the Botanical Branch ses-
sions held at his home, in November 1909,
we were so absorbed in his experiments with
seedling gooseberries that little else was dis-
cussed. I am not aware that these repeated
for him the success of his famous raspberry.

A colourful figure among the fathers of the
Club was Dr. H.M. Ami, President in 1899-
1901. He had been on the Geological Survey
staff but when I knew him was working
independently, having private means. He
conducted expeditions to southern France in
exploration of cave remains of early man.
In his last years he set up an exhibit of his
finds in an up-town building to which I was
invited to come but had failed to do so at
the time of his death.

Several other of the early Presidents be-
came known to me but others I never met.
Els, Bell and Dawson, and probably Sinclair,
I must have known only by reputation. Prof.
E. E. Prince and W. J. Wilson I remember in
Council meetings. Dr. F.T. Shutt, presiding
in 1895-1897, was better known to me at the
Experimental Farm than through any further
part in Club activities. W.D. Le Sueur, W.R.
Billings and W.P. Anderson of the original
officers were living but I have no recollect-
ion of them except that Le Sueur was one
of those that I must have heard at the Flet-
cher memorial gathering. Lt.-Col. White, as
first President, was again in the Chair for
this meeting.

A long-time member who was on the Coun-
cil was Dr. Mark G. McElhinney. Older mem-
bers will recall his familiar advertisement in
the Naturalist as, ‘Dentist to certain of the
Cognoscenti”, by which was meant, I believe,
Vice-Royalty among others. He was a motor-
boat enthusiast on the Rideau, his last vessel
being so fitted out with every convenience

July-Sept. 1955]

that he lived in it often the year round. One
of his delights was to take a party of Field-
Naturalists aboard for a trip to Black Rapids.
At the age of 71, while occupying his house-
boat on Dow’s Lake, along with his brother,
he was found drowned nearby.

A.G. Kingston, Treasurer about 1890-1896,
from the beginning an active leader in Orni-
thology, was an officer in the Public Works
Department with over 60 years’ service at
retirement. He served on the Council until
his death in 1934, and was long one of the
auditors. He was esteemed for his constant
and unassuming helpfulness.

Not of the original coterie but by some ten
years antedating me was Arthur Gibson with
whom I was teamed under Dr. Fletcher, and
with whom I shared duties until our new
Chiefs arrived late in the next year. Until
this separation of Entomology and Botany,
Fletcher had attended also to anything
coming up in the fields of forage crops, fibre,
bees and bacteriology, all now under separate
heads.

Gibson, while carrying his share of the
above load, was Treasurer of the Club for
some years until that office was turned over
to me to release him for duty as Editor of
the Naturalist. He later succeeded Dr. C. Gor-
don Hewitt as head of Entomology and after
retirement still did a good stint of writing.
In the Club he served a term as President
and until recently remained on the Reserve
Fund Committee. Having removed from Ot-
tawa he is not as well known to recent mem-
bers as he should be.

Fletcher’s earlier assistant, J.A. Guignard,
had also been active in the Club, for a brief
period as Editor of the publication. He was
an elderly Swiss gentleman who departed, to
my regret, before I could make his acquaint-
ance.

The officers during my first year in Otta-
wa were already a stage removed from
pioneer days but include names which are al-
ready becoming memories. As _ President,
A.E. Attwood, Principal of Osgoode St.
School, did the honours acceptably. He still
lives here, long retired but with an active
mind keeping check of what goes on. His
Vice-President, Andrew Halkett, stepped up
when the time came but for one year only.
He was a capable and conscientious student
of Ichthyology, but less at ease in the Chair.
We have had few more earnest leaders on
excursions. I have seen him trailing along
when so frail that he had to be assisted.

Tar CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 77

The Second Vice-President was Rev. G.
Eifrig, Lutheran Minister and, in his time,
one also of our leading authorities on the
Ottawa birds. I well remember an excursion
to Beaver Meadows which was then bordered
by stately trees where now are dwellings.
One of the discoveries of the day was a hawk’s
nest of special interest to him far aloft in a
tree, presumably with eggs. He drew me
aside to ask if I would come back with him
another day. This I did, climbing the tree
for him and securing the coveted clutch of
eggs — about the only birdsnesting I ever did
before or since. Lutheran colleges in the
United States claimed his services, and his
death has been reported recently.

The Secretary for 1909 was T. E. Clarke, a
teacher who later went to London Normal
School. He was succeeded by John J. Carter,
also a teacher; and I became Treasurer for
one year. Our association, begun here, was
continued in other congenial ways more or
less through life. He died in 1950 at the age
of 76. a

At that time the Club boasted a Librarian
and something of a library. The office was
held by Chas. H. Young, an Entomologist of
rare skill in the collecting, rearing and
mounting of microlepidoptera. After 1906
he worked closely with Macoun in collecting
and preparing zoological and other specimens.
Deafness was a handicap to social intercourse
but it did not spoil his humour and cheerful-
ness among friends.

The Committee (not yet known as Coun-
cil), consisted at the time of J.M. Macoun;
Alex McNeil, Chief of the Fruit Division;
E.E. Lemieux; L.H. Newman, Secretary,
Canadian Seed Growers’ Association, later
Cereal Husbandman at the Farm and now
retired to his own farm; H.H. Pitts and three
ladies, the Misses A. Jackson, E.E. Curry and
M.B. Williams. Several of these I scarcely
knew personally but Newman had been with
me in college and McNeil I soon came to
hold in high regard. Miss Williams, at that
time in the National Parks Branch, was a
charming writer and is reported still active in
London, Ont.

James Macoun, retiring as Editor about
this time, had a distinguished corps of As-
sociate Editors, i.e. Dr. H.M. Ami, Geology;
Dr. J.F. Whiteaves, Palaeontology; Dr. James
Fletcher, Botany and Nature Study; Hon.:
F.R. Latchford, Conchology; Mr. W. H. Har-
rington, Entomology; Rev. G. Ejifrig, Orni-
thology; Prof. E.E. Prince, Zoology; Dr.

78 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Otto Klotz, Meteorology. Since Dr. Klotz, then
Dominion Astronomer, there appears to have
been but little emphasis on matters astro-
nomical.

A sidelight on the membership of the time
is shed by letters received by me as 1910
Treasurer. Included are those of Hon. Syd-
ney A. Fisher, as the Minister of Agriculture
my ultimate Chief; Hon. Chas. Fitzpatrick,
Cabinet Minister and later Lieutenant-Gov-
ernor of Quebec; George Harcourt, Deputy
Minister of Agriculture, Alberta; Hon. F.R.
Latchford, Chief Justice, Ontario Supreme
Court; Dr. James W. Robertson, distinguished
pioneer in many agricultural, educational
and other movements; Dr. E.M. Walker,
Toronto naturalist, still active; J.W. Gibson,
educationist of Ottawa and Victoria, B.C.,
and father of the present Dean of Arts in
Carleton College; Dr. John Brittain, Prof. of
Nature Study, Macdonald College and father
of the Principal of that College now; Chas.
W. Nash, Biologist of the old Provincial
Museum, Toronto; Dre Lawrence M. Lambe,
Geological Survey, Ottawa; Dr. M.O. Malte,
then recently from Sweden and after a move
or two becoming Botanist of the National
Museum; T.N. Willing, a pioneer in the West
in my own field of weed investigation; E.P.
Venables, a valued correspondent in the
West of Dr. Fletcher, as was also F.H. Wol-
ley-Dod; James Murray, Superintendent,
Brandon Experimental Farm; Chas. Mac-
namara, a keen naturalist at Arnprior; Rev.
W.A. Mcliroy, Minister, Stewarton Church,
Ottawa; T.W.E. Sowter, local naturalist; and
others including such as have figured already
in this account.

One is tempted at times to envy the drawing
power of the Club in those days, forgetting
that names now accepted as a matter of
course may be glamorous too for the mem-
bers of another generation. There has never
been, nor is there now, any lack of good

[Vol]. 69

executive and field leadership. Then, as now,
some names may have been chiefly window-
dressing, but they probably did represent real
interest and good will.

I have by no means exhausted my subject,
however much I may have wearied my
readers. It only remains to be shown yet
why I, and not some others, should have as-
sumed to chronicle a period as much theirs
as mine. Could it be for this reason: the term
of my Presidency, 1936-1937, in one respect
at least marked the end of an era?

In the past there had been in the Club a
degree of social conformity somewhat slipping
now. Many members had been in the staid
old Arts and Letters Club, where public
meetings were held with officers in formal
dress. This was also true here up to my
time, and I confess that my immediate pre-
decessor, Dr. Morley Wilson, in that regalia
looked the part. When it came my turn thus
to appear at an annual meeting I had qualms,
but my Mentor in the matter was adamant;
it could not be otherwise. So for the first
time in his life this ‘‘rube” donned the “duds”
— and lived through it. The thing that has
continued to rankle in my mind is the
thought that I was the last President thus to
conform. True, under the patronage and
presence of Vice-Royalty dress is still im-
perative. It was my fate to undergo this
ordeal too, tails and all when, in my second
year, together with the Secretary, Miss Peggy
Whitehurst, Lord Tweedsmuir had to be met
at the door and engaged in conversation until
the lecture commenced. With the help of his
kindly understanding it passed off pleasant-
ly enough. My earlier initiation undoubtedly
helped too. Nonetheless I could have coveted
the distinction which remained to my succes-
sor, P.A. Taverner, of being the instrument
to end the era of formal finery at annual
meetings.

75th ANNIVERSARY
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

HE SEVENTY-FIFTH ANNIVERSARY of
the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club was
celebrated during 1955 with a number of
special events.
The chief event was a banquet held on No-
vember 8, 1955 at the Assembly Hall, Lans-
downe Park, Ottawa and attended by over

100 members and friends of the Club. A
splendid address, “The relation of man to
nature through the ages’, was delivered by
Professor T. F. MclIlwraith, Head of the De-
partment of Anthropology of the University
of Toronto. This is reproduced elsewhere in
this issue of the Canadian Field-Naturalist.

July-Sept. 1955]

Honorary memberships in the Club were
conferred on Dr. Alice Wilson and Mr. Her-
bert Groh.

Murphy-Gamble’s Department store put one
of their display windows at the disposal of
the Club for the period from November 1st
to 6th. There, an excellent display, in the
main ornithological, was made. There were
also many exhibits on the ground floor of
the store.

The Newsletter, organ of the local mem-
bership, gave considerable space to the

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 79

Anniversary. All the newspapers of the
Capital area and the Canadian Press were
given material concerning the Club and its
activities. The newspapers were most gener-
ous of space, and the public of Ottawa was
given several excellent accounts of the Club
and its work.

The arrangements for the celebration of
the 75th Anniversary were made by a Special
Committee under the Chairmanship of Rev.
Father F. E. Banim.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC SURVEY OF JAMES FLETCHER’S
FLORA OTTAWAENSIS *?

B. Botvin and W. J. Copy

Botany and Plant Pathology Division,
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Canada.

HREE ENUMERATIONS of the vascular

plants of the Ottawa District have been
published in the past, in 1867, 1880, and 1888-
93 respectively. The first was presumably
prepared by B. Billings and appeared as the
liminary paper of the Transactions of the
Ottawa Natural History Society, 1: 1-16. 1867
(?) under the title “List of Plants Collected
by Mr. B. Billings in the vicinity of the City
of Ottawa, during the summer of 1866”. It
is a mere listing of plants with dates of col-
lection but without localities or habitats. A
few additions made in 1867 are listed at the
end. There is some doubt as to the exact
date of publication of Billing’s list.

The second and third enumerations were
published in parts by James Fletcher over a
period of 14 years. A detailed bibliography
of these papers is given below.

A fourth enumeration was undertaken by
John Macoun, but was not published. The
manuscript, which is preserved at the National
Museum of Canada, is in Macoun’s handwrit-
ing. It is complete from Actaea to Isoetes,
and lists 1126 taxa for the Ottawa District.
The author mentions in each case whether the
plant occurs on the Quebee or Ontario side
of the river, or both. The manuscript is 45
pages long and is entitled “List of Ottawa
Plants”.

The manuscript enumeration left by Macoun
was the basis for successive revisions by M.O.
i) Heceived” for publication February 16, 1954.

2) Contribution No. 1374 from the Botany and Plant

Pathology Division, Science Service, Department of
Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada.

Malte. The last and most complete of these
redrafts is a fat manuscript of about 671
pages, some of which are missing. It is largely
typewritten and is entitled “The Ottawa Flora’.
This last text includes extensive keys, descrip-
tions, synonomy, local distribution and nume-
rous references to individual collections.

James Fletcher ?, the author of the second
and third enumerations, was born in 1852
and was one of the founders of the Ottawa
Field-Naturalists’ Club. Prior to the organiza-
tion of the Dominion Experimental Farms he
acted as Dominion Entomologist to the De-
partment of Agriculture, a title conferred on
him in 1884. On July 1, 1887, he was appointed
Entomologist and Botanist to the Dominion
Experimental Farms and was transferred from
the Library of Parliament to the Staff of the
Farms, and up to the spring of 1895, he had
charge of the Arboretum and Botanic Garden
at the Central Experimental Farm.

It is during that period of time that, under
the collective title of “Flora Ottawaensis” and
its variants, James Fletcher published some
29 articles on the flora of the Ottawa District,
comprising two successive enumerations
of the vascular plants and Sphagna of the
area plus miscellaneous notes and additions.

Unfortunately many of these papers are
affected by bibliographic irregularities. The
paging of one of these papers was incorrect
(see entry number 21) 4, three were reprinted
with a change of paging and quite a few

3) See James Fletcher Memorial Number, Ott. Nat. 22:
189-234. 1909.

80 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

others were issued with a separate paging as
a supplement to the Ottawa Naturalis‘. For
convenience we have numbered these papers
in sequence as published. No such numbers
appear on the originals.

Many of the papers listed below were pub-
lished without clear indication of authorship.
In the absence of any evidence to the con-
trary; we have assumed that all were prepared
by James Fletcher, except entries 10 and 24.
The latter two include some mosses and we
have assumed that these lists of bryophytes
were prepared by John Macoun. Names of
presumed authors have been set off in [square
brackets] in the following enumeration.

1—Fletcher, James, FLORA OTTWAENSIS,
Ott. Field-Nat. Club, Trans. 1 (vol. 1 no. 1);
48-61. 1880. An enumeration of all the vascu-
lar plants of the Ottawa District; total 800
entities, a few unnamed. No comments or
localities. The names in italics appear to
indicate introduced plants. The Candollean
order is apparently followed. This is the first
edition of the Flora Ottawaensis.

2—[Fletcher, James], FLORA OTTAWAEN-
SIS. ADDITIONS TO LIST OF 1879-1880, Ott.
Field-Nat. Club, Trans. 2 (vol. 1, no. 2): 41.
1881. A list of additions to the previous list
(entry no. 1) without annotations or localities.

3—[Fletcher, James], ERRATA — FLORA
OTTAWAENSIS, Page 41, Ott. Field-Nat. Club,
Trans. 2 (vol. 1, no. 2): 41, 1881. This con-
sists of a half-page of corrections pasted in
opposite page 41. The errata refer to entry
no. 2.

4—[Fletcher, James], APPENDIX. FLORA
OTTAWAENSIS; ADDITIONS TO PREVIOUS
LISTS, Ott. Field-Nat. Club, Trans. 3 (vol. 1,
no. 3): 23. 1882. A half-page list of additions,
without localities or annotations. This was
published as an appendix to the Report of the
Botanical Branch for the Season of 1881, by
B. Small and R. B. Whyte.

- 5_[Fletcher, James], APPENDIX. FLORA
OTTAWAENSIS; ADDITION TO PREVIOUS-
LY PUBLISHED LISTS, Ott. Field-Nat. Club,
Trans. 4 (vol. 1, no. 4): 73. 1883. A full page
of additions with dates and names of col-
lectors. Published as an appendix to the
Report of the Botanical Branch for the Sea-
son of 1882, by R.B. Whyte & B. Small.

A) For other i-regularities in paging of the same
journal, see W. J. Cody and B. Boivin, The Canadian
Field-Naturalist and its Predecessors. Can. Field-
Nat. 68 (3): 127-132. 1954.

[Vol. 69

6—Fletcher, James, NOTES ON THE FLO-
RA OTTAWAENSIS, WITH SPECIAL REFER-
ENCE TO THE INTRODUCED PLANTS, Ott.
Field-Nat. Club, Trans. 5 (vol. 2, no. 1): 29-37.
1884. This paper starts with a discussion of
the previously published lists and additions
of the Flora Ottawaensis. The Ottawa District
is defined for the purpose of the Flora Otta-
waensis as being an area of 12 miles radius
with the city as its centre. Five entities are
subtracted from the previous lists and a few
others are discussed. The adventive vegetation
is reviewed. A list of 194 introduced plants

is given; they are in order of aggressiveness

and the names in italics indicate entities that
are considered to exist in the area both as
native and introduced plants.

7—[Fletcher, James], FLORA OTTAWAEN-
SIS. (ADDITIONS MADE IN 1883), Ott. Field-
Nat. Club, Trans. 5 (vol. 2, no. 1): 126-7. 1884.
Additions with locality, date, and collector.
Follows the Report of the Botanical Branch,
by J. Macoun, R. B. Whyte and J. Fletcher
and preceeds Appendix A of the same report.

8—[Fletcher, James], FLORA OTTAWAEN-
SIS. ADDITIONS, 1885, Ott. Field-Nat. Club,

‘Trans. 7 (vol. 2, no. 3): 363. 1887. Additions

with locality, date and collector. Follows the
Report of the Botanical Branch, by R. B.
Whyte, J. Macoun and B. Small and like pre-
vious similar entries no. 4, 5 and 7, appears to
be part of the report.

9—[Fletcher, James], ADDITIONS TO THE
“FLORA OTTAWAENSIS”, Ott. Nat. 1: 77.
1887. A short note giving six additions with
locality, date, and collector. Follows the Re-
port of the Botanical Branch, by R.B. Whyte,
S. Woods and H.B. Small. Like the preceed-
ing, appears to be part of the report.

10—[Fletcher, J. & J. Macoun] FLORA
OTTAWAENSIS. (ADDITIONS MADE IN
1887.), Ott. Nat. 2: 26. 1888. A full page of
additions with locality and collector, including
eight mosses collected by “Prof. Macoun’”,
which leads us to believe that John Macoun
was co-author of the paper. Follows the Re-
port of the Botanical Branch for the Season
of 1887.

11—Fletcher, James, FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS, Ott. Nat. 2: 28-32. 1888. This is the
second edition of the Flora Ottawaensis. It
begins with a two page justification of the
opus and continues with an enumeration of
the flora, starting with Clematis through
Actaea. The order followed is that of J.

July-Sept. 1955]

Macoun, Cat. Can. Pl. 2 vols. in 5 parts, 1883-
1890. The numbers used for species are also
those of Macoun. Under each taxon is men-
tioned one or more vernacular or Benthamian
names, the habitat and main flowering period
(in quarters of a month). The letter (B)
indicates entities previously mentioned by [B.
Billings], List of Plants Collected by Mr. B.
Billings in the vicinity of the City of Ottawa
during the Summer of 1866, Trans. Ott. Nat.
Hist. Soe. 1: 1-16. 1867 (?). Frequency of
occurrence and localities are given for all
species that are not common. Collectors are
mentioned when others than J. Fletcher him-
self. Introduced plants are set off by italics.
An asterisk (*) designates the first collection
for the District. For the purpose of this se-
cond edition, the Ottawa District has been
redefined as an area of “about 30 miles so
as to include Casselman on the one side, and
Wakefield on the other; and up the river
as far as Chats Rapids and down to Bucking-
ham.

12—[Fletcher, James], (FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS. — CONTINUED FROM PAGE 32.),
Ott. Nat. 2: 61-4. 1888. Continuation of the
preceding from Menispermum through Car-
damine. See entry 11.

13—[Fletcher, James], (FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS. — CONTINUED FROM PAGE 64.),
Ott. Nat. 2: 77-80. 1888. Continuation of the
preceding installment from Cardamine
through Lychnis. See entry 12.

14—[Fletcher, James], FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS, Ott. Nat. 2: 104. 1888. A short quarter
page note which reads as follows: “It has been
decided by Council to reprint the 13 pages
of the “Flora Ottawaensis” which have so
far appeared, and for the future to keep a
separate pagination for that part of the
Ottawa Naturalist. This is done to meet the
wishes of several of the members who have
expressed a desire to have these pages printed
in such a manner that they may be separated
from the monthly numbers without injuring
the rest of the volume”. The reprint pro-
mised did not appear until fascicle 12 of
volume 2. See entry 18. The paging, however,
was modified at once and the next installment
of the Flora Ottawaensis, entry 15, occurs
immediately after page 104, but is paged 14
to 21. The separate paging thus given to the
Flora Ottawaensis has resulted in a certain
amount of duplication in paging in vols. 2, 3,
4 and 7

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 81

15—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 2: 14-21.
1888. No title. Continuation, from Saponaria
to Apios, of previous installment, see entry
14, and of reprinted text, see entry 18. The
paging runs from 14 to 21 and is continuous
from the text of the reprint published more
than six months later, see entry 18. This
installment was published somewhat as a
supplement to the regular issue but was of
one fascicle with the preceding text and was
meant to be cut off by those interested, as
explained under entry 14. The latter remark
also applies to entries 16, 17 and 23.

16—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 2: 22-41.
1889. No title. Printed consecutively after
page 116. Continuation, from Amphicarpaea
to Aster, of previous installment, see entry 15.

17—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 2: 42-45.
1889. No title. Printed consecutively after
page 144. Continuation from Aster to Senecio,
of previous installment, see entry 16.

18—[Fletcher, James], FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS, Ott. Nat. 2: 1-13. 1889. With unnum-
bered title-page. This is a reprint, in a
slightly modified form, of entries 11, 12 and
13. The text is substantially identical, but has
been reset so that the paging is slightly
modified. A title page has been added.
Printed as a separate fascicle sewn in at
the end of issue no. 12, where it follows page
157 and page ii of the index. See entry 14
for the explanation of this reprint and entry
15 for continuation of the text.

19—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 3: 46-49.
1889. No title. Printed on a single sheet of
paper, folded to form 4 pages and issued
lightly glued in after page 44. Continuation,
from Senecio to Andromeda, of previous
installment, see entry 17.

20—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 3: 50-61.
1889. No title. Printed as two fascicles in-
serted loose after page 80. Other install-
ments similarly printed as loose fascicles are
21, 22, 26, 27, 28. Continuation, from Kalmia
to Melampyrum, of previous installment, see
entry 19.

21—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 3: 62-69.
1889. No title. Incorrectly paged 121-8. Is-
sued as a loose fascicle inserted after page
116. Continuation, from Epiphagus to Poly-
gonum, of previous installment, see entry 20.

22—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 3: 70-73.
1890. No title. Issued as a loose fascicle in-
serted after p. 160. Continuation from Poly-
gonum to Daphne, of previous installment,
see entry 21.

82 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

23—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 4: 74-77.
1890. No title. Printed consecutively after
page 40 as part of the same fascicle as the
rest of issue 2. Continuation, from Dzirca to
Alnus, of previous installment, see entry 22.

24—[Fletcher, J. & J. Macoun], FLORA
OTTAWAENSIS, Ott. Nat. 5: 82-84. 1891.
This paper is a list of additions published
immediately after the Report of the Botanical
Branch, 1890, by J. Fletcher, R.B. Whyte
and W. Scott. Entry 24 comprises first a
three-quarter-page list of additions, with loca-
lity, date and collector, presumably prepared
by James Fletcher. This is immediately fol-
lowed by a list of Sphagna under the sub-
title “LIST OF THE SPECIES OF THE GE-
NUS SPHAGNUM FOUND AT OTTAWA”
and presumably prepared by John Macoun.
This and entry 10 are the only two parts of
the Flora Ottawaensis which actually list
mosses. Otherwise the bryophytes of the
Ottawa District were dealt with mainly in
two lists published, the first one as a single
paper in Trans. 7: (vol. 2, no. 3), the second
one in installments beginning with Ott. Nat.
11: 129. 1897 & sequ.

25—[Fletcher, James], FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS. ADDITIONS MADE SINCE LAST
REPORT, Ott. Nat. 5: 204. 1892. A half-page
of additions with locality and collector. Fol-
lows the Report of the Botanical Section,
1891, by J. Fletcher, W. Scott and R.H. Cowley.

[Vol. 69

26—Fletcher, James, FLORA OTTAWA-
ENSIS, Ott. Nat. 7: 67. 1893. A short note
explaining the reasons for the delay in com-
pleting the Flora Ottawaensis. Also explains
for the new readers how this flora is being
published as a supplement to the Ottawa
Naturalist.

27—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 7: 78-85.
1893. No title. Issued as a loose fascicle
inserted after page 68. Continuation, from
Alnus to Spiranthes, of previous installment,
see entry 23.

28—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 7: 86-93.
1893. No title. Issued as a loose fascicle in-
serted after page 84. Continuation, from
Spiranthes to Sparganium, of previous in-
stallment, see entry 27.

29—[Fletcher, James], Ott. Nat. 7: 94-101.
1893. No title. Issued as a loose fascicle in-
serted after page 100. Continuation, from
Arisaema to Scirpus, of previous installment,
see entry 28.

Another 25 pages or so and the Flora
Ottawaensis would have been completed. But
it never was. Fletcher died in 1908 and in
the Memorial Number, Ott. Nat. 22: 206. 1909,
we read, concerning the Flora Ottawaensis:
“His great regret was that his official duties
prevented him from finishing that work’’.

For a general bibliography of Dr. Fletcher’s
writings see A. Gibson and H. Groh, The
published writings of Dr. Fletcher, Ott. Nat.
22: 227-234. 1909.

FIRST RECORDS OF EIGHT SPECIES OF FISHES
IN SASKATCHEWAN '

F. M. AtTTon and R. P. JoHNSON
Saskatchewan Fisheries Laboratory, Saskatoon, Sask.

IELDWORK for projects of the Saskatche-

wan Fisheries Laboratory has provided
many opportunities for the collection of
fishes in the province. Several of the collec-
tions merit published record because they
represent major extensions of known ranges.
None of these species are listed by Rawson
(1949) in his checklist, while other references
to distribution either do not mention Sas-
katchewan waters or tend to make vague
generalizations concerning western distribu-

1) Received for publication November 8, 1954.

tion. This list adds two families and five
genera to the fish fauna of this province and
suggests that further ichthyological collect-
ing throughout Saskatchewan would be worth
while. Collecting has been done by the
authors, and specimens have been contributed
by H. S. Swallow and P. H. Edwards. Dr.
W. B. Scott has identified all species except
the carp, brown bullhead, and sheepshead,
and the collections which he has examined
have been retained in the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology at Toronto.

July-Sept. 1955]

Tite CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 83

1s
i
|

QU'APPELLE RiveR

Figure 1.

Map of Southern Saskatchewan. The numbers indicate the localities in which the species listed

have been collected.

The Hudson Bay drainage system has two
natural sections which together comprise the
larger part of Saskatchewan. The Churchill
River system drains the northern forested
zone, much of it Precambrian in character.
The prairie zone is drained by the Saskatche-
wan Rivers and other streams tributary to
Lake Winnipeg. Figure 1 is a map of this
southern section showing the localities in
which the following species have been collect-
ed. The new records are all in the eastern
and southern parts of this area.

1. Moxostoma anisurum (Rafinesque)—Sil-
ver redhorse.

This species was collected in the South
Saskatchewan River at Saskatoon on October
25, 1952. Previous records by Dymond (1947)
and Bajkov (1928) report this species from
the Hudson Bay drainage of Manitoba. It is
commonly taken by seining along with the
quillback sucker Carpiodes cyprinus and the
northern redhorse Mozostoma aureolum.

2. Cyprinus carpio Linnaeus — Carp.

Numbers of young-of-the-year specimens
were found at Kamsack in November, 1953.
These were in pools that had been formed
by the spring overflow of the Assiniboine
River. Carp were also collected in the Qu’Ap-
pelle River in August, 1954. The spread of
the carp in North America has been rapid.
Brought to the eastern part of this continent
about 1877, this species was introduced into
the Mississippi River in Minnesota in 1883.
In 1938 it appeared in the Red River in Mani-
toba near the boundary at Lockport. By 1943
the carp had entered Lake Winnipeg and
moved north as far as the mouth of the
Winnipeg River. In 1953 it had ascended
the Assiniboine River to Saskatchewan.

3. Notemigonus crysoleucas (Rafinesque) —.
Golden shiner.

A collection in the Souris River at Oxbow

on July 27, 1954 yielded several specimens

84 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

of this fish. The distribution previously re-
ported has been from northeastern Lake Win-
nipeg (Keleher, 1952) southward through
Manitoba, North Dakota and Wyoming (Hubbs
and Lagler, 1947).

4. Notropis cornutus (Mitchill) — Common
shiner.

The distribution of this species is given in
very general terms in all references available,
e.g. “from Saskatchewan to Quebec” (Hubbs
and Lagler, 1947). A personal communica-
tion from Dr. W. B. Scott, Toronto indicates
that there are Manitoba records but none
from Saskatchewan in the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology and Paleontology collec-
tions. There are no specimens in the Uni-
versity of Saskatchewan collections. A single
large individual was obtained from the White-
sand River at Canora on June 16, 1954 and
a number of smaller specimens were collected
in the Souris River at Oxbow on July 27, 1954.

5. Notropis deliciosus (Girard)—Sand shiner.

This species was collected by seining in the
Souris River at Oxbow on May 16, 1953. Hubbs
and Lagler (1947) list this fish from Lake of
the Woods, and Hinks (1943) states that it
is not known from Manitoba. The Saskatche-
wan record therefore extends its western
distribution considerably.

6. Ameiurus nebulosus (Le Sueur) — Brown
bullhead.

A single live specimen was submitted from
the Whitesand River at Canora on October 5,
1954. Keleher (1952) records that this spe-
cies is common at Victoria Beach, Lake Win-
nipeg, and Eddy and Surber (1947) note its
occurrence in North Dakota but that it is
not in the Lake Superior drainage. It seems
likely the introduction to Manitoba has been
through the Red River system, and thus it is
found in its tributary, the Whitesand-Assini-
boine drainage in Saskatchewan.

7. Hadropterus maculatus (Girard) — Black-
side darter.

Specimens were collected by seining in the
Souris River at Oxbow on July 21, 1953.
Dymond (1947) gives the known western dis-
tribution as the Red and Assiniboine Rivers
in Manitoba. Hubbs and Lagler (1947) men-
tion its occurrence in North Dakota. Since
the Souris River is a tributary of the Red
River, it is not surprising that this species has
now been collected somewhat further west.

[Vol. 69

8. Aplodinotus grunniens
Fresh-water sheepshead.

Two dead specimens were found on the
bank of Swiftcurrent Creek at Swift Current
on June 12, 1953. The northern distribution
of this species does not seem to be clear,
some references stating that it is in part of
the Hudson Bay drainage of Manitoba, and
others omitting any mention of these waters.
Hubbs and Lagler (1947) note that it is
found in the Mississippi lowlands in Montana.
Rostlund (1952) mentions an early record
from the Milk River. Hinks (1943) records its
occurrence in the Red and Assiniboine Rivers,
Lake Winnipeg and rarely in Lake Mani-
toba. Reports of the occurrence of this fish
in the Qu’Appelle River in Saskatchewan have
never been verified. The present record is
the more surprising because Swiftcurrent
Creek is a tributary of the South Saskatche-
wan River. The northwestern distribution of
this species is thus extended into a drainage
only remotely connected with that from which
it was previously reported.

Rafinesque —

LITERATURE CITED

Bajkov, A. 1928. A preliminary report on the
fishes of the Hudson Bay drainage sys-
tem. Can. Field-Nat. 42: 96-99.

Dymond, J. R. 1947. A list of the freshwater
fishes of Canada east of the Rocky Moun-
tains with keys. Misc. Publ. No. 1. Roy.
Ont. Mus. of Zool.

Eddy, S. and T. Surber. 1947. Northern
fishes. University of Minnesota Press,
Minneapolis, Minn.

Hinks, D. 1943. The fishes of Manitoba. Dept.
of Mines and Natural Resources, Prov-
ince of Manitoba.

Hubbs, C. L. and K. F. Lagler. 1947. Fishes
of the Great Lakes region. Cranbrook
Inst. Sci., Bull., No. 26.

Keleher, J. J. 1952. Notes on fishes collected
from Lake Winnipeg region. Can. Field-
Nat. 66: 170-173.

Rawson, D. S. 1949. The fishes of Saskatche-
wan. Dept. of Natural Resources and
Industrial Development, Regina.

Rostlund, E. 1952. Freshwater fish and fish-
ing in native North America. Univ. Calif.
Pub. Geog. 9: 1-314.

July-Sept. 1955]

THE. CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 85

PLANTS OF CUNNINGHAM ISLAND, OTTAWA, ONTARIO *

HERBERT GROH
Ottawa, Ontario

HIS SURVEY was prompted by the re-

covery recently, in files of a quarter
century ago, of a list of plants made then
on Cunningham Island.

In 1927 the new Champlain Bridge had
first made possible easy access to the three
islands of the Remic Rapids in the Ottawa
River a few miles above the city of Ottawa.
The prospect loomed that natural conditions
would thus be disturbed, as was soon enough
realized on the third, or Bate Island. In order
to preserve some record of the existing flora
a survey, all too hurried, was made of the
second, known as Cunningham Island. No
collections were made.

This, like its sister islands, is a low emer-
gence above water, changing in area with the
seasonal flow. It may be as little as three
acres at floodtime, or as much as five acres
in late summer. There are times, indeed,
when it is possible to pass dry-shod between
it and the adjacent islands. There is only a
shallow soil over strata of Ottawa limestone,
shown in a map of 1938 as Pamelia. This is
exposed around the shore at low water, ex-
cept at the lower end where alluvial deposits
have somewhat extended the area lying above
water after late spring.

The island cover may be described as
deciduous woodland with an under-storey of
shrubbery, the latter most pronounced at the
lower end. Away from the denuded shore-
line there is almost everywhere more or less
of a turf and only a rather limited true wood-
land flora. In the interstices of rock shelving
exposed at low water a surprising number of
species. maintain themselves. Water vegeta-
tion is limited, no doubt by the velocity of
the current at flood time.

Excluding Bate Island, which has been con-
verted to picnic use, the islands have not
undergone much apparent change. Park
management has kept the bottom cleared of
debris and has removed trees as they became
decadent. There is no evidence of undue
public vandalism. Absence of hepatica, dog-
tooth violet, trillium and the like, is as likely
as not ecologically conditioned, since they
had not earlier been observed.

1) Received for publication May 25, 1954.

Notwithstanding impressions it was felt
that the existence of a 1927 list of close to
150 species, warranted a new survey to check
against it. This was undertaken in 1953
with more thoroughness, and with collection
of specimens throughout the summer as near-
ly as possible at flowering or fruiting. The
area was visited weekly as a rule by the
writer, except during six weeks absence when
others filled the breach. Some publicity had
been given earlier to the 1927 list in Field-
Naturalist and Macoun Field Club circles with
resulting interest of members, which is ap-
preciated. Special thanks are due for col-
lecting to Miss Ruth Horner, Dr. C. Frankton
and Mr. Leslie Jenkins. In _ identification
later of more critical groups valuable help
was given by Dr. W.G. Dore, Mr. J.A. Calder,
Dr. J.M. Gillett, Dr. B. Boivin and other
members of the Division of Botany staff.

Plants ordinarily were collected in tripli-
cate. One set is deposited in the National
Herbarium (Nat.). A partial set, including a
few plants not available to complete the first,
is in the herbarium of the Division of Botany
(DAO), and a third, incomplete, is at Carle-
ton College, Ottawa.

The list, following, is complete of plants
found on Cunningham Island by the several
collectors. When collected only by others
than the writer the collector is indicated;
thus Jenkins, or Horner & Frankton (H. &
F.). Other collections are all by the writer;
often repeated by one or both of the other
teams. (With L. Jenkins was sometimes as-
sociated W. Ilman, and with H. Groh often
D. C. Maddox). Plants in this table not in
the 1927 list are preceded by an asterisk.
They form quite an imposing array. Nomen-
clature is according to Gray’s Manual, Eighth
Ed.

Planis of Cunningham Island, 1953

EQUISETACEAE
EQUISETUM ARVENSE L. Common Horse-
tail
Sparingly on shores.
*E. PALUSTRE L. Marsh Horsetail
Jenkins specimen in DAO.

86 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

OSMUNDACEAE

*QSMUNDA REGALIS L. Royal Fern
Under cover of thicket at lower end.

POLYPODIACEAE
-ONOCLEA SENSIBILIS L. Sensitive Fern

Shores.

*ANTHYRIUM FILIX-FEMINA
Lady Fern
Moist soil under shrubbery.
specimen in DAO.

PINACEAE

THUJA OCCIDENTALIS L. White Cedar
A few in main area.

(L.) ROTH

Jenkins

ZOSTERACEAE

*POTAMOGETON GRAMINEUS L. Pondweed
In water at a few locations.

HYDROCHARITACEAE

*ELODEA CANADENSIS MICHX. Water-
weed
Jenkins specimen, DAO.

GRAMINEAE

POA COMPRESSA L. Canada Bluegrass
Frequent in main area.

P. PRATENSIS L. Kentucky Bluegrass
Common, forming turf.

*P, PALUSTRIS L. Fowl Meadow Grass
Common in the grass cover.
*GLYCERIA GRANDIS S. WATS.

Meadow Grass
From near shore on low ground. Horner
& Frankton.

DACTYLIS GLOMERATA L. Orchard Grass
General in shade.
*ERAGROSTIS POAEOIDES BEAUV. Love
Grass
In shade of bridge.
*AGROPYRON REPENS (L.) BEAUYV. Love
Grass
Quite common.
*ELYMUS VIRGINICUS L. Lyme Grass
Common.
*SPHENOPHOLIS INTERMEDIA RYDB.
Wedge Grass
Little noticed.

*CALAMAGROSTIS CANADENSIS (MICHX.)
NUTT. Blue Joint
Abundant along shores.

*AGROSTIS GIGANTEA ROTH. Black Bent
A few noticed.

Reed

[Vol. 69

*A, ALBA L. VAR. PALUSTRIS (HUDS.)
PERS. Creeping Bent Grass
Low shores.
*A, SCABRA WILLD. Hair Grass
Mostly near shores.
*A, PERENNANS (WALT.) TUCKERM. Up-
land Bent Grass
Abundant.
PHLEUM PRATENSE L. Timothy
Common on main area.
*ALOPECURUS AEQUALIS SOBOL. Foxtail
One collection by Jenkins, DAO.
*MUHLENBERGIA MEXICANA (L.) TRIN.
f. SETIGLUMIS (S. WATS.) FERN. Drop-
seed
Abundant along shores.
*SPARTINA PECTINATA LINK. Cord Grass
Infrequent, at shores.
*DIGITARIA SANGUINALIS (L.) SCOP.
Crab Grass
Infrequent, at shores.
*PANICUM CAPILLARE L. Old Witch Grass
Common along shores.
*P, LANUGINOSUM ELL. Panic Grass
Common. Shores.
*SETARIA GLAUCA (L.) BEAUV. Yellow
Foxtail
Infrequent. Bridge area.
*ANDROPOGON GERARDII VITMAN. Beard
Grass
Occasional at lower end.

CYPERACEAE

*“CYPERUS STRIGOSUS L. Galingale
One collection by Jenkins, DAO.
on Riopelle Island.

*KLEOCHARIS CALVA TORR. (probably)

*E. SMALLII BRITT. Spike Rush
Mud at lower end.

*K. COMPRESSA SULLIV.

Mud at lower end.

*FIMBRISTYLIS AUTUMNALIS (L.) R. & S.
A colony on mud at lower end. An
earlier specimen in DAO from Britan-
nia, Ont., and one in Nat. Herb. from
Quyon, Que., just outside the Ottawa
District, are the nearest local collections
found.

*SCIRPUS ACUTUS MUHL. Bulrush
Common on muddy lower end.

*§. CYPERINUS (L.) KUNTH. VAR. PELIUS

FERN. Wool Grass
Mud at lower end. ~

*S. ATROTINCTUS FERN.

One collection by Jenkins, DAO.

More

July-Sept. 1955]

*CAREX ROSEA SCHKUHR. Sedge (as also
others below).

This and the others generally on main
area away from shore.

*C. CEPHALOIDEA DEWEY.

*C, SPARGANIOIDES MUHL.

*C, ALOPECOIDEA TUCKERM.

*C. VULPINOIDEA MICHX. Jenkins, DAO.

*C. TRIBULOIDES WAHLENB.

=C. TENERA DEWEY.

*“C, LENTICULARIS MICHX.

*C. PECKIT HOWE

“C. LANUGINOSA MICHX.

*C. GRACILLIMA SCHWEIN. Jenkins, DAO.

*C, ARCTATA BOOTT

*C, SPRENGELIIL DEWEY

*C. BLANDA DEWEY

*C. VIRIDULA MICHX.

*C. RETRORSA SCHKUHR

*“C, VESICARIA L.

*C. sp. (Sect. LAXIFLORAE)

*C. sp. (probably Sect. BRACTEATAE)

ARACEAE

ARISAEMA ATRORUBENS (AIT.) BLUME.
Jack-in-the-Pulpit
A few in parts of main area.

JUNCACEAE

*JUNCUS NODOSUS L. Rush
Common at muddy lower end.

LILIACEAE

SMILACINA RACEMOSA (L.) DESF.
False Spikenard
A few clumps in main area.
POLYGONATUM PUBESCENS (WILLD.)
PURSH. Solomon’s Seal
Frequent in main area.
SMILAX HERBACEA L. Carrion-flower
Abundant, mostly in shrubbery of main
area.

IRIDACEAE

*SISYRINCHIUM MONTANUM GREENE.
Blue-eyed Grass
One collection H. & F. 33.
*S. ANGUSTIFOLIUM MILL. Blue-eyed
Grass
Common on main area.

IRIS VERSICOLOR L. Blue Flag
Rocky shores. Frequent.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 87

SALICACEAE
“SALIX NIGRA MARSH. Black Willow
*S. SERISSIMA (BAILEY) FERN.
“S$. INTERIOR ROWLEE.
*S. DISCOLOR MUHL. Pussy Willow
*S. PETIOLARIS SM.
All willows sparingly along shores.
POPULUS TREMULOIDES MICHX. Aspen
Poplar
Occasional on main area.
P. BALSAMIFERA L. Balsam Poplar
A few at lower end.

MYRICACEAE

“WYRICA GALE L. Sweet Gale
Abundant at lower end in mud and into
water.

JUGLANDACEAE
CARYA CORDIFORMIS (WANG.) K. KOCH.
Bitternut Hickory
Occasional on main area.

CORYLACEAE i
OSTRYA VIRGINIANA (MILL.) K. KOCH.
Ironwood
Common on main area.
CARPINUS CAROLINIANA WALT. Blue
Beech
Mostly at lower end with other trees
and shrubs.
*ALNUS RUGOSA (DuROI) SPRENG.
Speckled Alder
Rocky shore of lower end.

FAGACEAE
QUERCUS MACROCARPA MICHX. Mossy-
cup Oak
Common on main area.
Q@. RUBRA L. Red Oak.
Common on main area.

ULMACEAE
“ULMUS RUBRA MUHL. Slippery Elm
Rather common formerly; only hollow
stumps now, with sprouts from the live
circumference to provide identification.
U. AMERICANA L. American Elm
Common throughout main area.

URTICACEAE
*PILEA PUMILA (L.) GRAY. Clearweed
In shade of bridge.
BOEHMERIA CYLINDRICA (L.) SW. Bog
Hemp.
One collection near bridge.

88 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

POLYGONACEAE

RUMEX CRISPUS L. Curled Dock
Mostly near shore.

*“R, SP. A swamp dock ?

POLYGONUM AVICULARE L. Knotweed
In thin sod at base of trees, main area.

*P, AMPHIBIUM L. Water Smartweed
Main area and in shade of bridge.

P. PERSICARIA L. Lady’s Thumb
Main area or near shore.

P. CONVOLVULUS L. Wild Buckwheat
One collection near bridge.

CHENOPODIACEAE

*CHENOPODIUM HYBRIDUM L. VAR. GI-
GANTOSPERMUM (AELLEN) ROU-
LEAU. Maple-leaved Goosefoot

Main area near bridge.
C. ALBUM L. Lamb’s Quarters
Near bridge sparingly.

C. CAPITATUM (L.) ASCHERS.

berry-blite
Young leaf rosettes only, on shore at
bridge.

CARYOPHYLLACEAE
ARENARIA LATERIFLORA L. Sandwort

Main area near shore. Frequent.

STELLARIA GRAMINEA L. Common Stitch-
wort
Occasional near shore.

Straw-

CERASTIUM VULGATUM L. Common
Mouse-ear Chickweed
Seen sparingly on main area.
SILENE CUCUBALUS WIBEL. Bladder

Campion
Mostly near bridge.
SILENE NOCTIFLORA L. Night-flowering
Catchfly
Occasional on main area.

RANUNCULACEAE

*RANUNCULUS REPTANS L.
Spearwort
Alluvial deposits off lower end at low
water.
R. ABORTIVUS L. Small-flowered Butter-
cup
Frequent on main area.
R. ACRIS L. Tall Buttercup
Common on main area.
THALICTRUM POLYGAMUM MUHL. Tall
Meadow-rue
Near shores occasionally.

Creeping

[Vol. 69

*ANEMONE RIPARIA FERN. Thimbleweed
Frequent on main area.
A. CANADENSIS L. Canada Anemone
A few patches on main area.
ACTAEA RUBRA (AIT.) WILLD. Red
Baneberry
One colony on main area to west.

CRUCIFERAE

BRASSICA KABER (D.C.) L.C. WHEELER
VAR. PINNATIFIDA (STOKES) L.C.
WHEELER. Wild Mustard

Very little, in shade of bridge.

ERYSIMUM CHEIRANTHOIDES L. Worm-

seed Mustard
Around trees near bridge.

BARBAREA VULGARIS’ RBR.
Cress
Occasional on main area.

*CARDAMINE PENSYLVANICA MUHL.
Bitter Cress

Fairly common, mostly near shores.

SAXIFRAGACEAE

RIBES AMERICANUM MILL. Wild Black
Currant
Occasional on main area.
ROSACEAE

*PYRUS SP. Apple? Immature.
Main area in a few locations.

Winter

*AMELANCHIER SANGUINEA (PURSH)
D.C. Juneberry
Sparingly, on main area.

CRATAEGUS SP. Hawthorn. Immature.

Occasional on main area.
FRAGARIA VIRGINIANA DUCHESNE.
Wild Strawberry
Common on main area.
F. VESCA L. VAR. AMERICANA PORTER.
Woodland Strawberry
Less common on main area.
*POTENTILLA ARGENTEA L. Silvery Cin-
quefoil
Sparingly at upper end on dry shallow
soil.
GEUM CANADENSE JACQ. White Avens
Occasional, in shaded main area.
*G. ALLEPICUM JACQ. VAR. STRICTUM
(AIT.) FERN. Yellow Avens.
Occasional on main area.
*RUBUS ODORATUS L. Purple Flowering
Raspberry
Sparingly on main area.

July-Sept. 1955]

R. IDAEUS L. VAR. STRIGOSUS (MICHX.)
MAXIM. Wild Red Raspberry
Fairly common on main area.
*R. OCCIDENTALIS L. Black Raspberry
One collection so identified.
R. SP. Immature. Blackberry
*AGRIMONIA GRYPOSEPALA WALLR.
Agrimony
A few near bridge.
*ROSA ACICULARIS LINDL. Wild Rose
Sparingly near shore.
R. BLANDA AIT. Early Wild Rose
Sparingly near shore.
*“PRUNUS PENSYLVANICA L. f. Bird (Pin)
Cherry
Occasional on main area.
P. VIRGINIANA L. Choke Cherry
Occasional on main area.

LEGUMINOSAE

TRIFOLIUM REPENS L. White Clover
Common on main area.

T. HYBRIDUM L. Alsike Clover
Common on main area.

T. AGRARIUM L. Hop Clover
Common on main area.

*MELILOTUS ALBA DESR. White Sweet

Clover
Occasional, especially near bridge.

*MEDICAGO SATIVA L. Alfalfa
One collection by H. & F.

M. LUPULINA L. Black Medick
Common on main area.

VICIA CRACCA L. Tufted Vetch
Occasional on main area.

*V. AMERICANA MUHL. American Vetch
One collection. Search of Nat. and DAO
Herb. failed to find another Ottawa Dis-
trict specimen.

*LATHYRUS PALUSTRIS L. Vetchling
One collection on main area.

*APIOS AMERICANA MEDIC. Groundnut
On shores at a few points.

AMPHICARPA BRACTEATA
Hog-peanut
On shores at a few points.

OXALIDACEAE
OXALIS EUROPAEA JORD. Wood Sorrel
Frequent on main area.
RUTACEAE

XANTHOXYLUM AMERICANUM MILL.
Prickly Ash
Abundant on parts of main area.

(L.) FERN.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 89
EUPHORBIACEAE
*MERCURIALIS ANNUA lL. Three-seeded
Mercury
Sparingly on shore.
ANACARDIACEAE

RHUS TYPHINA L. Staghorn Sumac

One location only, on main area.
RHUS RADICANS L. Poison Ivy

Common on various parts of main area.

CELASTRACEAE

CELASTRUS SCANDENS L. Climbing Bit-
tersweet
Common on main area with shrubbery.

ACERACEAE

ACER RUBRUM L. Red Maple
Occasional on main area.

RHAMNACEAE
*“RHAMNUS CATHARTICA L. Common
Buckthorn
One specimen near each end of main
area.
R. FRANGULA L. Alder Buckthorn
On main area, forming thickets near
lower end.

VITACEAE
PARTHENOCISSUS QUINQUEFOLIA (L.)
PLANCH. Virginia Creeper
Occasional on main area.

VITIS RIPARIA MICHX. River-bank Grape
On shores with shrubbery.

TILIACEAE

TILIA AMERICANA L. Basswood
Common on main area.

GUTTIFERAE
HYPERICUM PERFORATUM L. Common
St. John’s-wort

Frequent on main area.

*“H. ELLIPTICUM HOOK. St. John’s-wort
Muddy lower end.

*“H. MAJUS (GRAY) BRITT. St. John’swort
Muddy lower end.

VIOLACEAE

*VIOLA NEPHROPHYLLA GREENE. Stem-
less Blue Violet
A few colonies on main area.
*V. SEPTENTRIONALIS GREENE. Stemless
Blue Violet
One location on main area,
found.

not since

90 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

*V, PENSYLVANICA MICHX. Smooth Yel-
low Violet
Abundant on main area.

*V, CONSPERSA REICHENB. Leafy Blue
Violet
Occasional on main area.

ONAGRACEAE
OENOTHERA BIENNIS L. Evening Prim-
rose
Occasional on main area.
CIRCAEA QUADRISULCATA (MAXIM.)
FRANCH. & SAV. VAR. CANADENSIS
(L.) HARA. Enchanter’s Nightshade.

HALORAGIDACEAE

*MYRIOPHYLLUM ALTERNIFLORUM D.C.
Water Milfoil
Off-shore water.

UMBELLIFERAE
*SANICULA GREGARIA BICKN. Black
Snakeroot
Occasional on main area.
OSMORHIZA CLAYTONI (MICHX.) C. B.
CLARKE. Sweet Cicely
Occasional on main area.
SIUM SUAVE WALT. Water Parsnip
Abundant on shores at low water.

CORNACEAE
CORNUS STOLONIFERA MICHX. Red
Osier Dogwood
Common, mostly near shores.
*C. OBLIQUA RAF. Silky Dogwood
A few colonies on rocky shores.
*C. RACEMOSA LAM. Racemose Dogwood
On a rocky shore.

PRIMULACEAE

*“LYSIMACHIA TERRESTRIS
Yellow Loosestrife

Abundant on shores.

L. NUMMULARIA L. Moneywort
Common creeper on moister parts of
main area.

L. CILIATA L. Fringed Loosestrife
Common on shores.

OLEACEAE

FRAXINUS PENNSYLVANICA MARSH.
Red Ash
One of the commoner trees on main
area.
F. AMERICANA L.
White Ash.
One seen.

(L.) B.S.P.

[Vol. 69

APOCYNACEAE

APOCYNUM SIBIRICUM JACQ.
Hemp

Abundant on shores.

Indian

ASCLEPIADACEAE

*“ASCLEPIAS INCARNATA L. Swamp Milk-
weed
One collection near shore by H. & F.

A. SYRIACA L. Common Milkweed.
Occasional on main area

BORAGINACEAE

LITHOSPERMUM OFFICINALE L. Common
Gromwell
Common on main area.

LABIATAE

*SCUTELLARIA LATERIFLORA L. Mad-dog
Skulleap
Along shores.

*S. PARVULA MICHX. Small Skullcap
Near shores.

NEPETA CATARIA L. Catnip
A few clumps in shade of bridge.

*PRUNELLA VULGARIS L. Selfheal
Occasional on main area.

*“LEONURUS CARDIACA L. Motherwort
A collection near bridge.

*LYCOPUS UNIFLORUS MICHX.
weed
Along shore.

L. AMERICANUS MUHL. Bugleweed
Common along shores.

MENTHA ARVENSIS L. VAR. VILLOSA
(BENTH.) S. R. STEWART. Canada Mint
Common along shores.

SOLANACEAE

*SOLANUM AMERICANUM MILL. Night-
shade
A little, in shade of bridge.

Bugle-

SCROPHULARIACEAE
*LINARIA VULGARIS HILL. Butter and
Eggs; Toadflax

Common on main area.

*“MIMULUS RINGENS L. Monkey-flower
Occasional on shores.

“VERONICA SERPYLLIFOLIA L. Thyme-
leaved Speedwell
Sparingly on main area.

*V, SCUTELLATA L. Marsh Speedwell
Frequent on shore at low water.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST OL
PLANTAGINACEAE *S. CANADENSIS L. Canada Goldenrod
PLANTAGO RUGELII DCNE. Rugel’s Plan- On main area.
tain *S. LEPIDA D.C. Goldenrod
Common, especially on shores. ~ On main area.
RUBIACEAE S. GRAMINIFOLIA (L.) SALISB. Narrow-

*GALIUM APARINE L. Cleavers.
Mostly on main area near bridge.
G. TRIFLORUM MICHX. Sweet-scented
Bedstraw
Common on main area.
G. PALUSTRE L. Marsh Bedstraw
Moister parts of main area.

*CEPHALANTHUS OCCIDENTALIS L. But-
tonbush
Covering much of lower end of island.

CAPRIFOLIACEAE

*LONICERA TATARICA L. Tartarian Honey-
suckle
Freely scattered over entire main area.
In pink and white forms.
*L. DIOICA L. Honeysuckle
Occasional in main area.
*VIBURNUM LENTAGO L. Nannyberry
Occasional in main area.
V. RAFINESQUIANUM SCHULTES. Downy
Arrow-wood
Occasional in main area.
*V.» TRILOBUM MARSH. Highbush Cran-
berry
A few shrubs on ledge above west shore
— also on Lower Island.
SAMBUCUS PUBENS MICHX. Red-berried
Elder.
Occasional in main area.
*LOBELIA CARDINALIS L. Cardinal-flower
Frequent on shore at low water.
*L. INFLATA L. Indian Tobacco
Occasional in main area.

COMPOSITAE

EUPATORIUM MACULATUM L. Joe-Pye-
weed
Abundant on shores at low water.
*K, PERFOLIATUM L. Boneset
Occasional on main area.
E. RUGOSUM Houtt. White Snakeroot
Mostly in shade of bridge.

*SOLIDAGO CAESIA L. Blue-stem Goldenrod
On main area.

*§. SQUARROSA MUHL. Stout Ragged
Goldenrod
Scattered on main area.

leaved Goldenrod
Occasional on main area.
*ASTER CORDIFOLIUS L. Heart-leaved As-
ter
On main area.
*A. LATERIFLORUS (L.) BRITT. Aster
On main area.
*A. ONTARIONIS WIEG. Ontario Aster
Abundant on main area.
ERIGERON PHILADELPHICUS L. Phila-
delphia Fleabane
Occasional on main area.
E. ANNUUS (L.) PERS. Daisy Fleabane
Sparingly on main area.

E. CANADENSIS L. Canada Fleabane
Sparingly on main area. ;
ANTENNARIA PETALOIDEA FERN. Ever-

lasting
One colony at upper end above shore-
line. More on Riopelle Island.
*AMBROSIA ARTEMISIIFOLIA L. Common
Ragweed

A few plants only on main area near
bridge.

*BIDENS VULGATA GREENE. Beggar-ticks

A few plants beneath bridge.

*“GALINSOGA CILIATA (RAF.) BLAKE
A few plants beneath bridge.
ACHILLEA MILLEFOLIUM lL.
Yarrow
Common on main area.

CHRYSANTHEMUM LEUCANTHEMUM L.
VAR. PINNATIFIDUM LECOQ. & LA-
MOTTE. Ox-eye Daisy

Sparingly, mostly near bridge.

ARTEMISIA VULGARIS L. Common Mug-

wort
A few plants, mostly near bridge.

ARCTIUM MINUS (HILL) BERNH. Com-

mon Burdock
A few plants, mostly near bridge.

CIRSIUM VULGARE (SAVI) TENORE.

Bull Thistle
A few in leaf-rosette stage only. On
shore at bridge.

C. ARVENSE (L.) SCOP. Canada Thistle
Occasional.

Common

92: THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

TARAXACUM OFFICINALE WEBER. Com-
mon Dandelion
Common on main area.
SONCHUS ASPER (L.) HILL. Spiny An-
nual Sow Thistle
Sparingly near bridge.
LACTUCA SCARIOLA L. Prickly Lettuce
Only in disturbed bridge area.
*HIERACIUM FLORENTINUM ALL. King
Devil
Common at upper end of main area.

Plants on Adjacent Riopelle and Lower
Island (here so named) and not seen
on Cunningham Island

EQUISITUM FLUVIATILE L. Pipes

Lower Island.

DRYOPTERIS THELYPTERIS (L.) GRAY
VAR. PUBESCENS (LAWSON) NAKAI
Marsh Fern.

Riopelle Island.

PINUS STROBUS L. White Pine
Riopelle Island.

TYPHA LATIFOLIA L. Cat-tail
Riopelle Island.

POTAMOGETON SPIRILLUS TUCKERM.
Pondweed

Riopelle Island.

SAGITTARIA LATIFOLIA WILLD. f. GRA-

CILIS (PURSH) ROBINSON
Riopelle Island.

POPULUS DELTOIDES MARSH. Cotton-

wood
Riopelle Island.

BETULA PAPYRIFERA Marsh.

Birch
Riopelle Island.

LYTHRUM SALICARIA L. Purple Loose-

strife
Lower Island.
EPILOBIUM GLANDULOSUM LEHM. VAR.

ADENOCAULON (HAUSSK.) FERN.
Riopelle Island. In crevice of bridge
wall.

CONVOLVULUS SEPIUM L. Wild Morning-
glory
Lower Island.
CHELONE GLABRA L. Turtlehead
Riopelle Island.
TRIOSTEUM AURANTIACUM BICKN.

Feverwort
Riopelle Island. In 1927 reported on
Cunningham Island.

White

[Vol. 69

HELENIUM AUTUMNALE lL. Sneezeweed
Lower Island.

Plants of Cunningham Island, 1927.
Occurrence not substantiatetd in 1953.
BOTRYCHIUM SP. Grape Fern.

TAXUS CANADENSIS MARSH. Ground

Hemlock.

BROMUS SP. Brome Grass.

URTICA PROCERA MUHL. Slender Nettle.
RUMEX ACETOSELLA L. Sheep Sorrel.
ATRIPLEX SP. Orach.

STELLARIA MEDIA (L) CYRILL. Common

Chickweed.

THALICTRUM DIOICUM L. Early Meadow-
rue.
MENISPERMUM CANADENSE L. Canada

Moonseed.

CORYDALIS AUREA WILLD. Golden Co-
rydalis.

FUMARIA OFFICINALIS L. Common Fu-
mitory

SISYMBRIUM OFFICINALIS (L.) SCOP.

Hedge Mustard.

CAPSELLA BURSA-PASTORIS (L.) MEDIC.

Shepherd’s Purse.

PENTHORUM SEDOIDES L. Ditch Stone-
crop.

POTENTILLA NORVEGICA L. Rough Cin-
quefoil.

TRIFOLIUM PRATENSE L. Red Clover.

DESMODIUM SP. Tick Trefoil.

IMPATIENS CAPENSIS MEERB. Spotted

Touch-me-not.

VIOLA CANADENSIS L. Canada Violet.

EPILOBIUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM L. Fire-
weed.

LAPPULA SP. Bluebur.

VERBASCUM THAPSUS L. Common Mul-
lein.

PLANTAGO MAJOR L. Common Plantain.

TRIOSTEUM AURANTIACUM BICKN.

Feverwort.

SYMPHORICARPUS ALBUS (L.) BLAKE.

Snowberry.

ANAPHALIS MARGARITACEA (L.)
BENTH. VAR. INTERCEDENS HARA.
Pearly Everlasting.

SENECIO SP. Ragwort.

TARAXACUM ERYTHROSPERMUM ;
ANDRZ. . Red-seeded Dandelion.

PRENANTHES SP. Rattlesnake-root.

July-Sept. 1955]

The second list, plants seen only on adja-
cent islands, is reasonably supplementary to
the main list since absence from it can be
little more than fortuitous. For plants occur-
ring on each, as the majority do, there are
differences of incidence but not such as to
suggest dissimilar ecology.

The third list is of plants recorded in
1927 but not again found on Cunningham
Island. They may be casualties of the inter-
val as, for instance, Corydalis and Fumaria,
which have also failed to be found where
they had been known on the mainland nearby.
Triosteum may have been on both islands
formerly. With more careful separation from
the species found Common Plantain and
Red-seeded Dandelion could perhaps have
been shown still present. Misidentifications
cannot be ruled out entirely and seem a
probability in the case of Melilotus which
had been listed before, no doubt without
benefit of flowers, as the yellow species.

Summary
Plants distinguished (with a few ex-
ceptions) to the species — 232, as against

140 in 1927.
Plants seen on the two adjacent islands

only would, if included, bring the total to
246.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 93

More critical collection of some genera,
i.e. Salix, Rubus and among the grasses and
sedges, could very well extend the list, and
is a challenge to workers in such groups.

Plants in the 1927 list not again accounted
for number 30. This, together with the
lengthened list of 1953 indicates, undoubted-
ly, some actual losses and gains of species
but it would not be easy to say how much,
particularly of gain, in view of unequal close-
ness of survey at the two dates.

One of the interesting outcomes of the
project is its demonstration of how extensive
an association of plants is possible on so
few acres.

A rough breakdown of the flora to its main
habitats is about as follows:

Main dry area of island ........ 55%
Rocky shoreline 23%
Sediment of lower end 11%
Modified environs of bridge .. 8%
Water “off-shore .6...5..4..4..4.... 3%

It appears that trees and shrubs, in similar
number of species, form nearly one fifth of
the list. Grasses and sedges, also about
equally divided, form another fifth. Com-
positae to the number of 30, are somewhat
short of one fifth. Thus these three groups
alone comprise more than half of all species.

BIRD OBSERVATIONS FROM SOUTHERN KEEWATIN
AND THE
INTERIOR OF NORTHERN MANITOBA’

FARLEY M. Mowat and ANDREW H. LAWRIE
Toronto, Ont.

URING the years 1947 to 1949 the authors
spent a substantial period in the interior
of southern and central Keewatin District
and in adjacent areas of northern Manitoba.
The bird observations made during these
years are presented here as a contribution to
the rather meagre knowledge of the avifauna
of these regions.
During 1947, observations were made by
Mowat in the vicinity of Nueltin Lake; on
the Thlewiaza River; and on th canoe routes

1 Received for publication July 24, 1954.

from Nueltin Lake south to Brochet on Rein-
deer Lake. During 1948, both authors worked
together at Nueltin Lake and in the vicinity
of Angikuni Lake, while Lawrie spent some
time alone at Nueltin in late autumn, and
Mowat spent a similar length of time alone
at Brochet. In 1949, Lawrie, accompanied by
D. Peterson, made observations at Beverly
Lake, Nueltin Lake and Baker Lake. Table
1 gives a chronological chart showing the
locations of the observers for specific dates.

04 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

' [Vol. 69

Table 1. LOCATIONS OF OBSERVERS

Year Observer Localities Period
1947 Mowat Churchill May 20 — May 31
ss Nueltin Lake May 31— July 8
bY Nueltin Lake to Brochet July 8&8— Aug. 4
se Nueltin Lake Aug. 4 — Aug. 14
ss Nueltin Lake to Eskimo
Point Aug. 14 — Sept. 3
1948 Lawrie-Mowat Churchill May 20 — May 23
Oe ss Nueltin Lake May 23 — July 20
ih ss Angikuni Lake July 20 — Aug. 15
cs Nueltin Lake Aug. 15 — Oct. 14
Mowat Brochet Oct. 15 — Jan. 5 (1949)
Lawrie Nueltin Lake Oct. 15 — Dec. 10
1949 Lawrie Hudson Bay Railway Jan. 10— May 16
a Baker Lake May 17 — June 1
H Beverly Lake June 1— Aug. 2
> Nueltin Lake Aug. 2 — Aug. 27

Previous Work

Relatively little bird work has been done
in the area under discussion. Clarke (1940.
Nat.Mus.Can.Bull. No. 96) has summarized
what was known of the avifauna of the The-
lon River system and adjacent areas up until
1938. Clarke’s study includes references to
the fragmentary information available from
A.E. Porsild and from the 5th Thule Expedi-
tion records, both from the areas of Yathkyed
Lake and the lower Kazan River. T.H. Man-
ning (1948. Can. Field-Nat. Vol. 62, pp. 1-28)
published an account of observations made at
a number of briefly visited stations running
nearly parallel to our main stations, but
located roughly one hundred miles eastward.
Francis Harper made collections at Nueltin
Lake in 1947 and has reported on his work
in The American Midland Naturalist, 1953,
Vol. 49, pp. 1-116.

To the south, in the adjacent areas of in-
terior Manitoba there is a similar paucity of
published information. The only available
reports seem to be those of Angus Buchanan
(1920. Wild Life in Canada, Toronto). In the
coastal regions about Churchill a great deal
of excellent work has been done, notably by
Taverner and Sutton, but Churchill and the
coastal area is not included in our study area,
except incidentally.

Method of Presentation

The following annotated list represents
the observations of the authors, with occa-
sional inclusions of reports, previously un-
published, from focal sources. No attempt
has been made to draw comparisons with in-
formation contained in other’ published
works. Since most of our data are based on
visual observations, rather than on collections,
no attempt has been made to allot subspeci-
fic status to most species. Where specimens
were taken, brief reference is usually made
to this fact. All specimens taken by Mowat
are at present in the Royal Ontario Museum
of Zoology and Palaeontology at Toronto, On-
tario. Species which are included in the list
on the basis of local reports only, are shown
as hypothetical unless the occurrence of these
species has been otherwise confirmed.

Acknowledgments

Our thanks are due to Messrs. C. Schweder
of Churchill; G. Lush of Thlewiaza River; C.
Russell of Eskimo Point and Sandy Lunan of
Baker Lake, for information covering periods
of the year when we were not able to make
observations at these points. The invaluable
co-operation of Mr. W.E. Godfrey of the
National Museum of Canada has been of great
help in the final preparation of this manu-
script.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Q HESTERFIELD INLET

4

QUBAWNT
LAKE
! YATHKYED
LAKE
ANGIKUNI
LAKE
om
oa ZY
©8& = Sma epizs
\ A
SS 2 HUDSON
. 1
se ra
w , 2b
\ U <
\ ’ 1 BAY
INS >:
ff '
a Ue ‘x
Reiss ~~ Sig 0 es
mele
Sia ae
' KEEWATIN __, SS oC ees R

MANITOBA

-~~=TIMBER LINE
sesee AREAS OF STUDY

. CHURCHILL

~ |
-
~ as

Map. 1. Southern Keewatin and northern Manitoba.

BROCHET
2. COCHRANE RIVER
2: STY LAKE
AS RIVER
5. KASMERE LAKE
6. WINDY BAY BASE CAMP
7. HICKS LAKE
8. KOGNAC RIVER POST
9. THLEWIAZA RIVER
10. EDEHON LAKE
11. GEORGE LUSH CABIN
12, ESKIMO POINT
13. KAMILUKUAK LAKE
14. ANGIKUNI BASE CAMP
15. BAKER LAKE POST
6, BEVERLY LAKE BASE CAMP

26

+

96 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Due to the absence of Lawrie as this manu-
script was being completed, Mowat accepts
all responsibility for any errors or omissions
which may exist.

Description of Localities

Windy Bay and the Nueltin Lake Area

Windy Bay is the extreme northwestern
extremity of Nueltin Lake and lies 280 miles
northwest of Churchill and 200 miles inland
from Hudson Bay. Our base camp during the
three seasons we were in the area, was at the
mouth of Windy River but our observations
covered most of Nueltin Lake proper, as well
as a good deal of the adjoining interior region.

Windy Bay was of particular interest since
it lies in the Transition zone between boreal
forest and relatively open tundra. Timber-
line (here defined as the limit of continuous
tree cover) crosses Nueltin Lake some thirty
miles south of Windy Bay. Trees occur north-
ward in varying sized stands which rapidly
diminish in size and number.

There is great variety in the terrain and
cover. The western shores of the lake, below
Windy Bay contain extensive ranges of hills
that are so heavily overlaid with glacial rock
fragments that they are nearly impassable.
Some low-lying valleys in these ranges are
traversed by sandy eskers where ‘oases’ of
much more southerly flora exist.

Windy River, flowing roughly east and
west, provides a boundary between the rocky
hills and the gently undulating tundra plains
to the north, where drumlinoid formations,
eskers, and low eroded ridges provide the
high ground between areas of bog and in-
numerable small lakes and ponds.

Plant cover ranges from sparse lichens and
mosses on the hill crests, through scanty
stands of sedges, bunch grasses, bearberry,
arctic cranberry, labrador tea and dwarf
birch on the more protected slopes of both
the interior hills, and the tundra ridges. In
the protected valley bottoms, sedge meadows
are often bounded by dwarf willow clumps,
and grassy swales are fairly numerous and
vigorous in growth. The trees, occupying
favourable sites in the hill valleys and along
Windy River, or in very protected hollows
on the open plains, are largely black spruce.
In the best positions, white spruce and tama-
rack are also found, together with small
stands of birch and poplar. Tree size ranges
from a single white spruce that measured
20" in diameter and stood 60’ high in a

[Vol. 69

sheltered hill valley, to wind stunted black
spruce on the open tundra that barely at-
tains a height of two feet. In general, the
tree cover north of Windy River does not ex-
ceed two percent of the land area.

Windy Bay to Brochet, Reindeer Lake

The canoe route from Windy Bay to Brochet
was traversed in both directions by Mowat in
1947. Brochet lies 225 air miles south of
Windy River and close to the borders of
Manitoba and Saskatchewan.

The canoe route begins at the south end
of Nueltin and follows the Kasmere and
Cochrane Rivers through forested country.
From Nueltin to the height of land between
the Cochrane and the Kasmere, the land is
low, muskegy and the major forest cover is
black spruce and tamarack with some poplar
and birch. From the height of land south
down the Cochrane, the surrounding area is
more rolling and dry and the dominant tree
is Jack pine. The many lakes and rivers are
clean bottomed and although spruce bogs are
numerous, there are few swamp or marsh
areas in this typical boreal forest region.

Windy Bay to Eskimo Point, Hudson Bay

The route followed by Mowat in 1947 was
along the Thlewiaza River. Stretching east-
ward from north Nueltin Lake for the first
90 air miles, the country is high plateau tun-
dra similar to that found at Windy Bay. At
Edehon Lake a loop of timber line crosses
the river route but quickly withdraws again.
From Edehon eastward to the coast of Hud-
son Bay the land slopes steeply and is al-
most devoid of ridges or highlands. It is
extremely wet, and sedge meadows or ex-
tensive bog areas increase in area steadily
toward the coastal plain.

Angikuni Lake Area

In 1948 the authors travelled widely by
canoe in this area. Angikuni itself lies 320
miles northwest of Churchill and 100 miles
north of Windy Bay. To the north of the
lake the land rises in a succession of massive
ridges to a high and rolling plateau. Many
of the hills are drumlinoid in form, and rock
outcrops are common. The plateau tundra is
much drier than at Nueltin Lake. There are
few ponds in this highland, and sedge mea-
dows are scarce. On the dry ridges bunch
grasses grow sparsely among the almost pros-
trate mats of cranberry, crowberry, Lapland
rhododendron, Labrador tea and dwarf birch
and these in turn cover the ubiquitous lichens

July-Sept. 1955]

and mosses. Dwarf willows are found grow-
ing luxuriantly to a height of seven or eight
feet in the swales along the few streams
flowing to the lake. A single grove of black
spruce, less than half an acre in extent, com-
posed of gnarled and stunted trees, huddles
under the southern face of a ridge.

Westward to Kamilikuak Lake the high pla-
teau gives way to a flat and water saturated
plain of nigger-head tundra. About the south
end of Kamilikuak the hills rise again in a
broken and rugged range reminiscent of the
Windy Hills at Nueltin. Here, on the more
sheltered slopes there are a few oases of
spruce, mostly black, but some white spruce,
several acres in extent. The largest single
tree was 40 feet high and measured 16 inches
in diameter at breast height.

Beverly Lake

Beverly lies 450 miles north of Churchill
and about 300 miles west of the mouth of
Chesterfield Inlet on the Hudson Bay coast.
The area investigated lies on the south shore
of the lake, and is rolling tundra with ex-
tensive wet sedge meadows lying between
ridges of sand and gravel. The vegetation
cover much resembles that at Angikuni Lake
with extensive thickets of low dwarf birch
along the banks of streams. On the drier
sites, these shrubs are wholely prostrate. Cer-
tain elements of arctic flora, not found at the
southern stations, were found here, notably
Cassiope tetragona, Papaver radicatum, and
Armeria labradorica. Some of these may
have occurred at Angikuni Lake, but could
easily have been overlooked by us in the
post-flowering season. Spruce was found in
a single locality, a deep-sided stream valley
cut into the drift. Most of the trees were
stunted, but a few reached a height of 20
feet with a diameter at breast level of 8
inches.

Annotated List

1. Common Loon, Gavia immer
Arrival dates: Windy River — June 7, 1947;
June 3, 1948.

N.Manitoba: Common on Reindeer Lake
and along the Cochrane, but becoming scar-
cer on the Kasmere River and not seen on
the open parts of Nueltin Lake.

Windy River: From June 7-12, 1947; 7 in-
dividuals were seen, but none were recorded
after these dates. In 1948 there were 6
records between June 3 and July 5, but none
were certainly identified after July 5.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 97

Angikuni Lake: While no Common Loons
were definitely identified in this area, it is
possible that the species was present.- All
certain identifications were of the following
species, and it was particularly noted that the
similarity of certain call notes between the
two species made ‘voice’ identification ex-
tremely unreliable.

A common summer resident well inside
timberline but becoming much rarer toward
the edge of forested country. It is our belief
that the species is hardly more than a rare
straggler in the open plains of southern and
central Keewatin. However a single specimen
was collected at Baker Lake in the summer
of 1924 by A. Bangstead (see Clarke, loc.
cit.) while T.H. Manning records the species
just south of Baker Lake in 1945.

2. Yellow-billed Loon, Gavia adamsii

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 14, 1947.
Beverly Lake — June 14, 1949.

Windy River: A male collected by Schweder
on June 14 and a pair seen on Aug. 10 consti-
tute the only 1947 records. A single bird,
probably of this species was seen on June 19,
1948.

Angikuni Lake: At least four pairs were
resident in the area and a pair of adults
encountered on Angikuni Lake, Aug. 10,
1948, were accompanied by a young bird still
in natal down though nearly two thirds grown.

Beverly Lake: From June 14 to July 1, 1
to 8 birds were seen daily. Few were seen
thereafter but this may well be due to nesting
dispersal.

Rare to accidental south from Nueltin, but
from Windy Bay northward it evidently re-
places the foregoing species, being most
numerous north of Angikuni. It was not
recorded on the Thlewiaza River and there
was no positive evidence of its occurrence
eastward to the coast.

3. Pacific Loon, Gavia arctica

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 5, 1947;
June 4, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 9, 1949.

N. Manitoba: Evenly distributed and fairly
common on Reindeer Lake and on the
Cochrane, Kasmere systems, and on Nueltin
Lake. One to 5 birds seen daily July 9 to
Aug. 4, 1947.

Windy River: Flocks of up to 12 were seen
daily from June 6 to June 12, 1947 with
single birds and pairs recorded daily after
these dates. In 1948 the species appeared

98 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

much less abundant and only 5 were seen,
the last being on Sept. 13.

Angikuni Lake: Common through the area
with 2-16 seen daily. Many were paired and
undoubtedly breeding locally.

Thlewiaza River: Becoming increasingly
common east from Nueltin toward the coast;
running from 2 daily to a maximum of 20-24
a day in the immediate vicinity of Hudson
Bay. Flightless young were found on Edehon
Lake and adults carrying fish from the sea
to muskeg ponds were noted as late as Aug.
24, 1947.

Beverly Lake: 1-4 seen daily from June 9
to July 1, 1949; after which the species was
seen infrequently.

The commonest and most evenly distributed
loon throughout the area. The mounting
abundance eastward toward the coast appears
noteworthy in the light of the apparent rarity,
or absence, of members of the other three
species, on the Thlewiaza River.

4. Red-throated Loon, Gavia stellata

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 7, 1947;
May 26, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 19, 1949.

N. Manitoba: Rarer than the Pacific Loon.
There were 8 records on the Kasmere River,
but none were seen below the height of land
on the Cochrane River nor on Reindeer
Lake.

Windy River: Uncommon from June 7 to
Jvne 11, 1947 and only 2 records thereafter
in 1947. About the same abundance in 1948
until June 20, after which the species was
rarely seen. Last seen Sept. 29, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Uncommon, with 7 records.

Thlewiaza River: Rare in the interior and
not recorded within 50 miles of the coast.

Beverly Lake: Considerably rarer than the
Pacific Loon, with not more than 2 records
daily, most of which were referable to a
single breeding pair. The nest was on the
edge of a tundra pond within 6 feet of the
water. It contained 2 eggs on July 3, 1949.
A second nest in a similar location contained
1 egg on July 12, 1949.

Pehaps most common at, and just south of
timberline but absent farther south. Widely
distributed in small numbers on the tundra
to the north.

5. Horned Grebe, Colymbus auritus

We identified a single bird at Churchill on
May 19, 1948. C. Schweder reports having

_[Vol. 69

shot one at Windy River in 1946 and having
seen an adult with young nearby, later that
year.

6: [Great Blue Heron. Ardea herodias

Charles and Frederick Schweder reported
seeing a single bird at the south end of Nuel-
tin Lake in June, 1942.]

7. American Bittern, Botaurus lentiginosus

The Schweder brothers saw one bird in a
marsh area near the south end of Nueltin in
1946. Mowat recorded a single bird on Misty
Lake, Cochrane River July 15, 1947.

8. Whistling Swan, Cygnus columbianus

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 30, 1947;
May 21, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 9, 1949.

Windy River: C. Schweder reported 3 on
Oct. 15, 1947, and 60 in September of 1944.

Thlewiaza River: George Lush, at the
mouth of the river, reported this species rare
in spring migration, but not uncommon in
the fall, along the coast.

Beverly Lake: 3 seen on June 9, and 5 on
June 11, 1949 constituting the only records.

Athough seen by us in 1947 and 1948 in
small numbers at Churchill, the species ap-
pears rare to accidental in spring migration
through the southern interior of Keewatin,
and only slightly — if at all — more numer-
ous in fall.

9. Canada Goose, Branta canadensis

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 30, 1947;
May 19, 1948. Ilford, Manitoba — April 28,
1949. Windy River — June 6. 1947; June 5,
1948. Beverly Lake — June 2, 1949.

Windy River: Small flocks were seen until
June 13, 1947, after which only pairs and
single birds were noted. No_ subspecific
identification was attempted. In 1948 small
flocks were recorded until June 23, and no
others were observed until Sept. 13 when
approximately a hundred birds were seen in
one flight. No direct’ evidence of breeding
was discovered but Schweder believed that a
pair nested each year on the upper Windy
River.

Angikuni Lake: 6 flightless adults were
seen Aug. 6, 1948 and a pair of adults with
4 young on Aug. 10, 1948.

Thlewiaza River: From Aug. 21 on the
species became rapidly more numerous as the
coast of Hudson Bay was neared. More than
300 were seen daily Aug. 26-Aug. 28, 1947.

July-Sept. 1955]

Beverly Lake: June 2 to June 25, 1949, from
8-150 seen daily. Thereafter average daily
records show 6-12 birds. It is probable that
much larger numbers were present on the
sandy islets far out in the lake, and the cries
of many geese could be heard on still eve-
nings from these islets. After June 15, 1949,
two races were to be found; the smaller
being half to two-thirds the size of the larger
subspecies and making up about one third of
the population.

A large race was fairly numerous and well
distributed throughout the plains, being most
numerous as a summer resident in the Bever-
ly Lake area, and as a migrant, in the coastal
region. A small race was definitely present
as a summer resident at Beverly Lake, and
was not recognized south of that point.

10. American Brant, Branta bernicla

On June 4, 1947, a pair appeared with a
flock of Herring Gulls on the ice near camp
at Windy River. They were watched through
binoculars at a range of 60 yards. One bird
was later wounded but escaped. On June 9,
1947, a single bird was seen with pintails and
mallards and was observed in flight at 100
feet. The record appears to be accidental.

11. White-fronted Goose, Anser albifrons

On June 6, 1947 a single bird was seen on
Windy River and on June 9, a male was col-
lected by Mowat from a flock of five at this
location. In 1948 a pair with 6 flightless
young was found on the Kazan River near
Angikuni Lake. George Lush reported the
species as rare in migration at the mouth of
Thlewiaza River.

At Beverly Lake the species arrived June
2, 1949 and thereafter from 6-40 were seen
daily until June 26. Occasional birds were
heard until July 17 and 3 adults, still flying,
were found with 9 downy young on July 23.

The relative abundance of the species at
Beverly makes its apparent rarity as a
migrant south through Keewatin notable. See
distributional notes under Snow Goose.

12. Snow Goose, Chen hyperborea

Arrival date: Beverly Lake — June 3, 1949.

Windy River: C. Schweder shot one near
Windy Bay in late summer of 1941. The speci-
men was emaciated and may have been dis-
eased.

Thlewiaza River: A flock of 170 at Eskimo
Point on Aug. 28, 1947. George Lush reported
the. species as a common migrant, spring and
fall, at the mouth of Thlewiaza River.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 99

Beverly Lake: From June 3, 1949 until
June 24 from 4-100 seen daily. Some were
observed far out on the lake, on sandy islets,
until July 14, but none were seen thereafter.
Some individuals were conspicuously larger
than the majority seen, but this may have
been due to sexual dimorphism.

The breeding concentration of geese — at
Beverly Lake and northward (Peter Scott,
Wild Geese and Eskimos, London, 1951), con-
trasted with the relative scarcity in migra-
tion through the interior of Keewatin, and
considered in conjunction with the large
number of migrants along the coast of Hud-
son Bay, seems important. Our data indicate
that Canada and Snow Geese may reach the
main breeding grounds in the north of Kee-
watin by a Hudson Bay West Coast flyway;
while White-fronted Geese appear to reach
this breeding area from the west, via a cen-
tral flyway.

13. Blue Goose, Chen caerulescens

On May 20, 1948, a single bird leading a
small flock of Canada Geese was seen at
Churchill. This appears to be one of the few
Churchill records for the species.

At Beverly Lake 5 birds were seen on June
11, 1949; and 3 on June 15.

The species appears accidental on the Hud-
son Bay West Coast Flyway, and at least very
rare in the interior north as far as Beverly
Lake.

14. Common Mallard, Anas platyrhynchos

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 9, 1947;
June 2, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Common on the Cochrane
River but much less numerous north along
the Kasmere River. On July 25, 1947, 2
broods were seen. The young numbered 8
and 6, and were about ten days old.

Windy River: A female on June 9, 1947
and 5 males on June 11. In 1948 a single
female was seen on June 2. On Aug. 14, 1947,
a female was found on Simon’s Lake near
Windy Bay, acting as if she had young. C.
Schweder reported that the species bred
regularly on this lake.

Common in the Reindeer Lake area and

becoming scarce to timberline, beyond which
the species does not appear to go.

15. Black Duck, Anas rubripes

On June 30, 1947 a single bird at Windy
River and on July 13, 1947, a pair on the
south end of Nueltin Lake. On Aug. 31,

100

1948, Lawrie observed 5 birds at Windy
Bay but was not able to establish positive
identification. Two other birds on July 24,
1948, at Angikuni Lake were probably of
this species.

The absence of this species south of tim-
berline to Brochet perhaps indicates that the
birds seen were from the south east. The
species is rare, but probably of regular
occurrence in the southern part of the Kee-
watin plains area.

16. American Pintail, Anas acuta

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 20, 1947.
Windy River — June 3, 1947; May 23, 1948.
Beverly Lake — June 11, 1949.

N. Manitoba: Rare on the Cochrane and
only slightly more numerous north along
the Kasmere River with a total of 7 records.

Windy River: Flocks of up to 100 were
seen daily in 1947 from June 4 to June 15,
after which the species was not much in
evidence though possibly breeding locally in
small numbers. In the spring of 1948 it was
much less numerous in migration and was
not seen after June 20. In 1949 occasional
birds were seen along Windy River, August
2 to August 15, and a flock of 20 was seen
at Simon’s Lake, August 20.

Beverly Lake: From June 2, 1949 until
the end of that month from 4 to 20 seen
daily. It was less in evidence thereafter
though breeding locally.

The apparent absence of this species at
Angikuni Lake and along the Thlewiaza
River may be due to seasonal dispersal.
Certainly the species was fairly common in
spring migration at timberline, and un-
undoubtedly breeds across the entire area
under study.

17. Green-winged Teal, Anas carolinensis

Arrival dates: Ilford, Man. — May 3, 1949.
Windy River — June 7, 1947; June 3, 1948.

Five were seen at Windy Bay in 1947 and
two pairs in 1948. A pair on the Cochrane
River near Misty Lake on July 23, 1947.
Evidently an uncommon but regular summer
resident at and below timberline.

18. Baldpate, Mareca americana

On June 6, 1947, a male was collected from
a pair seen at Simon’s Lake. A second pair
on Windy River July 7, 1947 and a single
bird on the Kasmere River, July 29, 1947,
constitute the only other records.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

19. [Shoveller, Spatula clypeata

C. Schweder reported having shot a pair at
Windy Bay in June, 1945.]

20. Greater Scaup Duck, Aythya marila

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 21, 1947.
Windy River — June 7, 1947; May 24, 1948.
Beverly Lake — June 11, 1949.

Windy River: One or two recorded almost
daily in 1947 and 1948. Breeding locally.

Angikuni Lake: A flock of 10 males on
July 24, 1948.

Thlewiaza River: One bird on Aug. 22, 1947.

Beverly Lake: A pair on June 11, 1949.

Sparsely distributed over the entire area
north of timberline. All specimens taken
were of the present species, and no field
records for Aythya affinis were made though
a particular search was instituted.

21. American Golden-eye, Bucephala

clangula
Arrival dates: Windy River — June 6, 1947;
May 26, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Not 'much in evidence but
probably fairly common through the area.

Windy River: Only occasional birds were
seen on Windy Bay, but a small lake sur-
rounded by a heavy stand of spruce and
hidden in the hills south of camp had a large
population. On July 6, 1947 almost a hundred
birds were seen in this area and on June 25,
1948, a flock of 30 males was found there.

Thlewiaza River: rare and only seen where
areas of timber approached the river.

The localized abundance at Windy River
is probably due to non-breeding, or post-
breeding flocks of males from farther south.
The species is not normally a summer resi-
dent north of timberline.

22. Buffle-head, Bucephalas albeola

A pair spent two days (June 7-8, 1947) at
the mouth of Windy River. Evidently acci-
dental.

23. Old Squaw, Clangula hyemalis

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 21, 1948.
Windy River — June 5, 1947; June 10, 1948.
Beverly Lake — June 9, 1949.

Windy River: Ice conditions kept. most
species of waterfowl in congested areas until
June 13, 1947. The present species was seen
in numbers averaging 30 a day, until this
date. They were scarce afterwards and only
occasional birds were seen. A nest on July
1, 1947 contained 6 fresh eggs and was

July-Sept. 1955]

located on a small, treeless islet. In 1948
occasional pairs were seen until June 20.
Angikuni Lake: Recorded 5 times from
July 25 to Aug. 8, 1949. A pair with 3 young,
two-third grown, were found on a tundra
pond on the later date.
Thlewiaza River: Only 3 records east to
Hudson Bay, but common at the coast.
Beverly Lake: The most common duck in
the area with from 12 to 35 seen daily.
Sparsely dispersed through the southern
interior regions but common at the coast, at
least in fall migration, and at Beverly Lake
during the breeding season.

24. King Eider, Somateria spectabilis

Schweder informed the authors that he
had shot a male of this species near Windy
Bay on September 17, 1947. The specimen
is in the possession of F. Harper. Certainly
an accidental record at this locality.

25. White-winged Scoter, Melanitta deglandi

One record for June 30, 1947 at Windy
Bay. A female with 7 young near the mouth
of the bay on Aug. 15, 1947 and 3 adults at
the south end of Nueltin Lake, July 12, 1947.

Timberline appears to mark the northern
limit of this species in this area.

26. Surf Scoter, Melanitta perspicillata

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 22, 1947.
Windy River — June 6, 1947; June 3, 1948.

N. Manitoba: 2 seen on Kasmere River
near Fort Hall Lake, July 16, 1947.

Windy River: Uncommon in both 1947 and
1948 and not recorded after the spring
migration of ducks ended.

Thlewiaza River: Seen only at the coast,
but then in flocks of up to 300 birds daily.

Rare in the interior and there were no
indications that the species summered north
of timberline in the area studied:

27. American Scoter, Oidemia americana

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 6, 1947;
May 30, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Seen south as far as Misty
Lake but most numerous on the Kasmere
River where flocks of up to 16 were seen
daily in late July, 1947.

Windy River: Fairly common in both 1947
and 1948, with 1 to 5 birds seen daily. A
nest on a barren islet contained 8 slightly
incubated eggs on July 9, 1947. Last seen
on Sept. 25, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: A single female on Aug.
5, 1948. ;

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

101

Thlewiaza River: 5 records on the river
and several small flocks on Hudson Bay
near Eskimo Point, Aug. 27, 1947.

Fairly common along the northern forest
limits and probably common southward. Un-
common to rare on the open interior plains,
though present in some numbers at the coast.

28. Hooded Merganser, Lophodytes

cucullatus
Five eclipse birds were seen at Misty
Lake, July 25, 1947. Schweder_ reports

having taken two from fish nets in the
Windy River in the autumn of 1947. Proba-
bly not uncommon south of timberline, but
accidental northward.

29. American Merganser, Mergus
merganser

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 6, 1947;
May 23, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Fairly common and evenly
distributed along the Cochrane and Kasmere
Rivers. Congregating, in eclipse plumage,
with the following species at all rapids.

Windy River: Fairly common in 1947 and
slightly more abundant in 1948. Young still
unable to fly were seen Sept. 15, 1948, and
the species was last seen on Oct. 5, 1948.

Fairly common through timber country
and to Windy River, but not certainly identi-
fied north or east of here, and definitely
not seen at Beverly Lake. It would appear
that the distribution of this species is more
southerly than for the following species, at
least in the area studied.

30. Red-breasted Merganser, Mergus
serrator

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 6, 1947;
June 8, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 19, 1949.

N. Manitoba: Common to abundant on the
major rivers with from 50 to 300 individuals
seen daily. Most birds were in eclipse and
were congregated at the foot of rapids. On
Aug. 1, 1947 three broods, none of the young
being more than a week old, were found on
the Kasmere River.

Windy River: Almost, if not quite, as
numerous as the preceding species. A nest
with 9 fresh eggs was found July 1, 1947. An-
other nest on July 5, 1947 held 5 fresh eggs,
while a nest on July 12 had 8 slightly in-
cubated eggs. All nests were on islets. Oct.
3, 1948, was the latest date for the species.

Angikuni Lake: Slightly more common
than at Windy River with from 7 to 8 seen

102

daily, most of these being in eclipse. Two
recently hatched young were found on Aug.
10, 1948.

Thlewiaza River: Fairly common, and be-
coming commoner down river to a point
fifty miles from the coast. None were seen
beyond this point. Broods of 13, 6, and 3
young were seen on Aug. 14, 1947, and none
appeared more than a week old. From Aug.
17 to Aug. 20, 1947, an average of 100 adults
daily, mostly in eclipse and concentrated at
rapids.

Brochet: A flight of 30 on Nov. 1, 1948.

- Beverly Lake: Uncommon with only 11
individuals recorded.

The commonest duck in the wooded areas
below timberline and fairly common north
to Angikuni Lake. Sparsely distributed from
there north to Beverly Lake.

31. Goshawk, Accipiter gentilis

Windy River: In the fall of both 1947 and
1948 an influx of birds, mainly juveniles,
was recorded. In 1948 there were 21 records
between Sept. 10 and Oct. 27. One flock
contained 5 juveniles. Only five of the above
records were for adults but there was evi-
dence that a pair nested near Windy Bay in
1948.

Brochet: A single juvenile on Nov. 18, 1948.

Probably breeding through the northern
forests to timberline and wandering north
in fall, perhaps some distance into the open
plains.

32. Broad-winged Hawk, Buteo platypterus

A single record, July 16, 1947, on the
portage between the Cochrane and Kasmere
Rivers.

33. American Rough-legged Hawk, Buteo
lagopus

Arrival dates: Ilford — April 19, 1949.
Churchill — May 19, 1948. Windy River —
June 2, 1947; June 2, 1948. Beverly Lake —
June 2, 1949.

Windy River: Not common in 1947, though
one or two, probably members of the same
pair, were seen almost daily. Three nests
were examined but none was occupied. In
1948 the species was rare with only 2
records for spring and summer, and 14 for
fall — the last on Oct. 29. C. Schweder re-
ports that some years many individuals
winter in the plains north of Windy River.
Abundance appeared directly related to the
local lemming cycle. 1946 was a peak year
while almost no lemmings were present in

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

1947, and very few in 1948. The one-year
lag in predator cycles would seem to explain
the rarity of this species during 1947 and
1948.

Angikuni Lake: Not uncommon, 1 or 2
being seen daily. A nest with 5 young about
2 weeks old, on a rock in a small tundra
pond was found July 21, 1948. Lemmings
were fairly numerous here suggesting, to-
gether with the larger hawk population, a
time differential between small mammal
peaks at Angikuni and Windy River.

Thlewiaza River: Uncommon, with 5 rec-
ords.

Beverly Lake: In 1949 the lemming popu-
lation here was high. There were 15 records
for Rough-legged Hawks with 1 or 2 seen
daily. An occupied nest was found on July
11, 1949, but not investigated.

There appears to be considerable local
variation in abundance, directly related to
local variations in the time of peak lemming
eycles. However, the species is well dis-
tributed in summer throughout the plains
area. In 1947 the relationships of light to
dark phase birds in the southern areas was
almost exactly 50-50. At Beverly Lake the
majority were light phase birds.

34. Golden Eagle, Aquila chrysaétos

An immature bird was seen on July 6, 1947
at Windy River and an adult on Aug. 1, 1947
on the Kasmere River.

Rare, north of timberline and uncommon
south of it.

35. Bald Eagle, Haliaeetus leucocephalus

Two adults were seen on the Cochrane
River July 21, 23, 1947 and one adult at the
south end of Nueltin Lake Aug. 3, 1947.
None recorded north of timberline.

36. Marsh Hawk, Circus cyaneus

An immature female was collected at
Windy River Aug. 18, 1948 and six addi-
tional immatures were seen between Aug.
16 and Sept. 8, 1948. A single immature on
Aug. 21, 1949. The appearance of this spe-
cies appears to be due to a northward mi-
gration of immature birds in late summer
and early autumn.

37. Osprey, Pandion haliaetus

A single record. for La Pensie Lake on
the Cochrane River, July 22, 1947.

38. Gyrfaleon, Falco rusticolus

Windy River: A very dark and probably
immature bird was seen on August 15, 1947.

July-Sept. 1955]

A second bird, unsuccessfully attacking a
raven, was observed November 23, 1948.

Brochet: On Dec. 11 and 12, 1949, a very
light phase bird hunted ptarmigan in the
vicinity of the settlement.

Thlewiaza River: George Lush reported
finding a nest of this species on a cliff
near Edehon Lake; and that he saw six or
seven individuals each year near the mouth
of Thlewiaza River.

Angikuni Lake: A _ brownish individual
seen twice on July 23, 1948, and another
single bird recorded on July 28.

Beverly Lake: One record; July 7, 1949.

The scarcity of cliff-faces in the interior
plains is probably the limiting population
factor. It seems certain that, while the spe-
cies appears rare, it is distributed over the
whole Barrens section of the study area as
a summer resident.

39. Duck Hawk, Falco peregrinus

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 4, 1947.
Churchill — May 25, 1947. Beverly Lake —
June 2, 1949.

Windy River: A pair nested on a cliff near
camp in 1947 but after a single egg had
been laid, the nest was deserted. The nest
was not used in 1948 but two juveniles were
seen in late September. A pair was evident-
ly nesting at Big Point on Nueltin Lake in
1947.

Thlewiaza River: One recorded; Aug. 25,
1947, at the coast.

Angikuni Lake: A nest containing 3 well-
grown young on a high cliff near Kamilu-
kuak Lake on Aug. 2, 1948. No others were
seen except in the vicinity of this nest.

Beverly Lake: Six records between June 2,
1949 and June 29, 1949.

Widely distributed over the plains area
and nesting wherever suitable sites are avail-
able.

40. Pigeon Hawk, Falco columbarius

N. Manitoba: 4 adults seen on the Cochrane
and Kasmere Rivers in July, 1947. On July
27, a nest was found in a Jack pine, which
contained 2 well-grown young, within a few
days of leaving the nest.

Windy River: In 1947 a single record, but
during June of 1948, 4 adults were seen.
Between Sept. 1-6, 1948, 3 juveniles. One
juvenile on Aug. 19, 1949. C. Schweder re-
ported finding a nest in a spruce ‘oasis’ on
the Kazan River near Ennadai Lake in July,
1943.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

103

Not uncommon breeding north to timber-
line, and for some distance into the plains
where suitable nesting sites are to be found.

41. Spruce Grouse, Canachites canadensis

N. Manitoba and Brochet: Several were
seen along the Cochrane and Kasmere Rivers.
in July, 1947. The species was common at
Brochet during the winter 1948-49 where the
Indians killed large numbers for the pot.

Windy River: A female was collected June
8, 1947. A family including 8 downy young,
about a week old, was found in late July,
1947. In 1948, 4 adults, of 8 seen, were shot.
in various spruce thickets. C. Schweder re-
ported that he had found isolated indi-
viduals in spruce stands for fifty miles to
the north of Windy River.

Fairly common north as far as satisfactory
tree cover is available.

42. Ruffed Grouse, Bonasa umbellus

Accidentals stray north to Brochet but the
north limit of the range seems to reach
about half way up Reindeer Lake. This spe-
cies was almost as numerous as the Spruce
Grouse at the south end of Reindeer in 1948.

43. Willow Ptarmigan, Lagopus lagopus

Windy River: Abundant in spring and fall
migration. Heavy spring movement seemed
to begin about mid-May and until the end
of the month enormous flocks moved
through the area. From May 31 to June 2,
1947, as many as 2000 individuals were seen.
daily. However this was an unusually late
season and in 1948 the bulk of the migrants
had passed by the time we arrived on May
23. Most birds were paired by June 5, 1948.
and residents were in occupation of all suit-
able territories by that date. On July 8,
1948, newly hatched young were found. Fall
migration began about Oct. 10, 1948 and
between Oct. 11 and Oct. 12 about 1000 mi-
grants were seen. The migration reached
its peak by Oct. 24 after which date an aver-
age of 10-25 were seen daily until Dec. 9,
probably representing winter resident birds.
The summer range extended south to Big
Point on Nueltin Lake where at least one
pair was breeding in 1947.

Angikuni Lake: It was difficult to assess
the relative numbers of this and the follow-
ing species, but ptarmigan were numerous
in the area. Twenty family groups were
seen with from 2 to 12 young, and an aver-
age of 6 per family. Breeding population

104

was about twice that at Windy River. By
Aug. 11, 1948, flocking had begun and fami-
lies were grouping into larger units of 20
to 50 individuals.

Thlewiaza River: Ptanmigan were very
scarce east from Nueltin to Hudson Bay and
only 2 birds, probably of this species, were
seen inland from the coast.

Brochet: First migrants arrived Oct. 20,
1948 — about ten days after the major mi-
grant wave began to pass Windy River.
The species did not become numerous until
Nov. 15. The majority of the flocks moved
_south of Brochet and appeared to be most
abundant as winter residents at the south
end of Reindeer Lake. By Dec. 1 the popula-
tion was fairly well stabilized at Brochet with
from 50 to 300 birds seen daily. Northward
from a point 130 miles south of Churchill
on the H.B. Railway, the species was com-
mon during the winter 1948-49.

Beverly Lake: Ptarmigan arrived here on
June 3, 1949. From this date 1 to 6 were
seen daily and a nest with 7 eggs was found
on June 25, 1949. No certain identification
of the following species was made and all
ptarmigan seen were referred to the present
species.

Willow Ptarmigan bred commonly north
from timberline but the boundary where this
species began to overlap the range of the
Rock Ptarmigan was not determined. It is
perhaps somewhere near the axis Eskimo
Point-Angikuni Lake.

44. Rock Ptarmigan, Lagopus mutus

Windy River: The only certain records are
for two dead birds and a live individual
seen at the end of May, 1947. Not found in
summer and rare in migration at this point.
On Nov. 10, 1948, 2 were seen at Kognac
River amongst 50 Willow Ptarmigan. A total
of 12 were seen in this general area on Nov.
14.

Angikuni Lake: A small percentage of the
ptarmigan seen were probably of this spe-
cies but there was no confirmation through
specimens.

Brochet and N. Manitoba: A single bird,
probably the same one, on Dec. 11 and Dec.
14, 1947, in company with a large flock of
Willow Ptarmigan.

The rarity of this species in winter when
sight identification is easier seems to in-
dicate a small interior population, relative
to the preceding species, in the study area.
It is our opinion that the species does not

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

occur regularly as a summer resident south
of Angikuni Lake.

45. Sharp-tailed Grouse, Pedioecetes
phasianellus

A flock of 7 wintered at Brochet, 1948-49,
and other small flocks were reported to the
south. There is some possibility it breeds
farther south, and moves north for some
distance in the winter.

46. Little Brown Crane, Grus canadensis

Windy Bay: On June 9, 1947, a flock of 6
was seen moving north over camp and on
May 15 Fred Schweder reported 3 flocks of
8, 12, and 6, respectively over the south end
of Nueltin. Lawrie saw 2 migrating south
near camp on Sept. 7, 1948.

George Lush reported a nest with 2 eggs
about 60 miles west of the mouth of Thle-
wiaza River in 1938 and flightless young
from the same area in 1940. He also re-
ported heavy spring and fall migration along
the coast. Combined with our observations
this indicates that the balance of the high
arctic birds migrate along the coast in prefer-
ence to the interior, in the manner we
have already suggested for certain of the
geese. Lawrie found the species fairly com-
mon at Beverly Lake with from 1 to 6 seen
daily after the arrival date of June 2, 1949,
and the birds were almost certainly breed-
ing locally. In the interior south of Beverly
Lake the species was rare both as a migrant,
and aS a summer resident.

47. [Whooping Crane, Grus americana

On April 9, 1947, C. Schweder saw two
white cranes circling the mouth of Putahow
River at the south end of Nueltin Lake.
The birds circled for nearly an hour, evi-
dently wishing to land on the only exposed
ground in the area — a snow-free sand
ridge where the Schweders had their tent.
The birds passed over the tent once at an
altitude of about 50 feet and there seems no
reasonable grounds for doubting the au-
thenticity of the record.]

48. Semipalmated Plover, Charadrius
hiaticula
Arrival dates: Churchill — May 20,-: 1947.
Windy River — June 5, 1947; May 23, 1948.
Beverly Lake — June 5, 1949.

N. Manitoba: A pair on July 30, 1947, near
Kasmere Lake acting as if they had a nest.
A single on Aug. 1, 1947 on Kasmere River.

July-Sept. 1955]

Windy River: Widely distributed locally.
Two nests, July 1 and July 4, 1947, on a
high stony ridge held 2 and 4 fresh eggs.
After early August in 1947 and 1948, no
birds were seen. Aug. 1 was the last date,
in any year, when the species was observed
in the interior from Nueltin to Beverly Lake.

Angikuni Lake: A single record, July 23,
1948.

Thlewiaza River: None in the interior
but from 2 to 5 daily on the coast in late
August.

Probabaly summering in the interior from
timberline and a short way south of it, north
to Beverly Lake where from 1 to 4 were
seen daily from June 5 to July 22, 1949.
Though fairly numerous at both Windy
River and Beverly, the species appeared
absent in the intervening area.

49. Killdeer, Charadrius vociferus

Arrival date: Ilford, Man. — April 29,
1949. Churchill — May 20, 1948.

June 9, 1947, a single bird near Windy
River camp. Probably the same bird seen
again the following day. Accidental north
of timberline.

50. American Golden Plover, Pluvialis
dominica

Arrival date: Beverly Lake — June 2, 1949.

Three were seen July 29, 1948, at Angi-
kuni Lake. At Beverly Lake from June 2 to
14, 1949, 4 to 30 seen daily with an average
of 15 per day. None were seen thereafter
until July 22 when 4 were observed. There
was no evidence of breeding.

Very rare in the area studied north to
Beverly Lake and probably only a migrant
there.

51. Black-bellied Plover, Squatarola
squatarola

One at Eskimo Point, Aug. 27; 1947. First
seen at Beverly Lake June 4, 1949. 5 records
during the first two weeks in June, and not
seen thereafter.

A rare migrant at Beverly Lake, and acci-
dental in the interior to the south. It ap-
pears that this and the preceding species do
not normally migrate through the interior of
Keewatin.

52. Ruddy Turnstone, Arenaria interpres

A flock of 29 at Windy River June 5, 1947
and one collected June 15, 1947. On Aug. 27,
1947, 4 were seen at Eskimo Point. First

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

105

arrival at Beverly Lake was June 13, 1949
and from June 13 to June 19, one or two
were seen daily.

A rare migrant in the study area, slightly
more numerous about Beverly Lake than
elsewhere.

53. Wilson’s Snipe, Capella gallinago

Arrival dates: Ilford, Man.—April 29, 1949.
Windy River — June 5, 1947; May 28, 1948.

Fairly common at Windy River and present
southward to Brochet. Mating flights began
on June 10, 1947 and June 7, 1948. Last
record at Windy River July 10, 1947; July
6, 1948.

54. Hudsonian Curlew, Numenius phaeopus

One on June 6, 1947, at Windy River. A
flock of 50 at Eskimo Point on Aug. 28,
1947. The absence of this species at Beverly
Lake and elsewhere inland indicates that it
is accidental or at least very rare in the
interior of the study area, even as a migrant.

55. Spotted Sandpiper, Actitis macularia

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 29, 1947.
Windy River — June 4, 1947; May 31, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Common on the Cochrane
and Kasmere Rivers with an average of ten
records a day. Week-old young were found
near Lac du Brochet on July 17, 1947, and a
nest with 4 well incubated eggs on the up-
per Kasmere River, July 27, 1947. °

Windy River: Fairly common in 1947,
1948, and 1949, with 2 to 4 seen daily. The
local distribution was limited to the shores
of Windy and Little Rivers where there
were stands of spruce upon both banks. Last
seen Aug. 14, 1947; Aug. 15, 1948; Aug. 16,
1949. Common in the forested sections of
the area north to Windy River but not rec-
orded eastward toward Hudson Bay.

56. Solitary Sandpiper, Tringa solitaria

Two records, July 23, 28, 1947, on the
Cochrane River below Lac du Brochet. Ac-
cidental northward.

57. Greater Yellow-legs, Totanus
melanoleucus

Arrival dates: Ilford, Man. — April 29,
1949. Windy River — May 29, 1948.

Occasional individuals in company with |
the next species were seen at Windy River
in spring. One record for 1947; and 4 for
1948 between May 29 and June 1. Probably
rare to accidental north of timberline.

106

58. Lesser Yellow-legs, Totanus flavipes

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 20, 1947.
Windy River — June 4, 1947; May 23, 1948.

N. Manitoba: 5 records along Cochrane
and Kasmere Rivers in July, 1947. A pair
with 2 young, about ten days old, on
Cochrane River July 27, 1947.

Windy River: Uncommon summer resident
with flocks numbering up to 12 in spring
migration. 3 to 5 pairs summering in the
wooded areas. Not present after Aug. 10,
1947; Aug. 15, 1948; Aug. 17, 1949.

Angikuni Lake: Fairly numerous but in
small flocks of 3 to 8 indicating that these
were non-breeding birds. Not seen after
Aug. 3, 1948.

Since the species was not recorded at
Beverly and there was no breeding evidence
at Angikuni, it appears that the breeding
range terminated a short distance north of
timber-line while the range of non-breeding
summer migrants normally does not extend
far north of Angikuni Lake.

59. American Knot, Calidris canutus

Two were seen on Aug. 2, 1948, near Angi-
kuni Lake and a flock of 12 on Aug. 11 in
the same area; 4 at Eskimo Point on Aug.
26, 1947. Occurrence in the interior is pro-
bably limited to ranging flocks of non-breed-
ing birds during the summer.

60. Pectoral Sandpiper, Erolia melanotos

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 29, 1947;
May 21, 1948. Windy River — June 5, 1947;
May 25, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 2, 1949.

Windy River: An uncommon spring mi-
grant in 1947 wth 8 records to June 13. A
single record in spring 1948 and 3 fall rec-
ords, the last being on Sept. 19.

Angikuni Lake: 3 records between July 23
and Aug. 3, 1948.

Thlewiaza River: 2 records on the river
proper but large numbers seen along the
coast to Eskimo Point with flocks of 25 or
more seen frequently.

Beverly Lake: From June 2 to June 21,
1949, 6 to 25 daily. Male courting on June
20. Single birds seen until July 3.

The rarity of most shorebirds in migra-
tions at Windy River, Angikuni Lake, and
along the Thlewiaza River suggests that the
bulk of the species which breed north of
the Thelon River — Chesterfield Inlet axis
must migrate either along the Hudson Bay
west coast, or up a more western flyway.
They then spread west, or east as the case

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

may be, into the breeding areas. It seems
certain that very few pass through the south-
central Keewatin highlands. This fact sup-
ports the hypothesis made earlier in this
paper, in regard to certain ducks and geese.

61. White-rumped Sandpiper, Erolia fuscicollis

On June 7, 1948, one was seen with a flock
of Semipalmated Sandpipers at Windy River.
At Beverly Lake 7 were seen on June 19, 20,
1949. As with most shorebirds, very rare in
the interior of the study area, south of Be-
verly Lake where it may be an uncommon,
but regular migrant.

62. Baird’s Sandpiper, Erolia bairdi

Ten records, including a specimen at
Windy River, between June 5 and June 17,
1947 — but none seen at Windy in 1948.
Sixteen were seen along the Thlewiaza River,
with most of these being recorded near the
coast. In 1948, at Angikuni Lake, flocks to-
talling 12 birds were seen on three occa-
sions. There was only a single record from
Beverly Lake, June 5, 1949. Probably the
interior birds were summer vagrants.

63. Least Sandpiper, Erolia minutilla

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 21, 1947.
Windy River — June 5, 1947; June 7, 1948.

Windy River: This and the Semipalmated
Sandpiper appeared equally common and
both species bred locally. A nest of the
present species found on June 22, 1947, con-
tained 4 fresh eggs. The last adults seen in
fall migration were on Aug. 15, 1947.

Angikuni Lake: 5 individuals in 1948.
Thlewiaza River: 7 records in 1947.

This species was not certainly identified
at Beverly Lake. At other points it ranged
contemporaneously with the Semipalmated
Sandpiper and at Windy River was as numer-
ous, though at all other localities it was
greatly inferior in numbers.

64. Red-backed Sandpiper, Erolia alpina

The only record for the interior south of
Beverly Lake is a single bird shot by Eski-
mos on the middle Kazan River on July 1,
1947. At Beverly Lake the species arrived
on June 12, 1949, and six were seen before
the species disappeared on June 15. Evi-
dently this species follows the pattern al-
ready postulated for the migration of most
shore birds in this area. However it seems
to be even more of a maritime migrant,
following the west shore of Hudson Bay in
large numbers in spring at least.

July-Sept. 1955]

65. Stilt Sandpiper, Micropalama
himantopus
Arrival dates: Churchill — May 21, 1948.
Windy River — June 4, 1947. Beverly Lake
— June 20, 1949.

Fairly common at Windy River between
June 4 and June 14, 1947 (56 records), but
completely absent in 1948. The only interior
record in 1948 was ‘for 3 seen near Angi-
kuni Lake on July 27, and these were pro-
bably mid-season wanderers from other
areas. At Beverly Lake in 1949, 13 were
seen between June 20 and June 22, but there
was no evidence of summer residents there-
after.

The apparent abundance at Windy River in
1947 was probably accidental and due to the
unusual weather conditions that year. The
species is very rare generally in migration
and probably does not breed in the study
area.

66. Semipalmated Sandpiper, Ereunetes
pusillus

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 5, 1947;
May 24, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 2, 1949.

Fairly common at Windy River. A nest
with 3 slightly incubated eggs on June 29,
1947. A second nest with 4 fresh eggs on
June 8, 1948. Rare along the Thlewiaza
River, but by the time this journey was
made, migration would have been well ad-
vanced for most shorebirds. It was com-
mon in the Angikuni area where flying
juveniles were seen on July 28, 1948. It was
last seen in the Angikuni area on Aug. 9. At
Windy River fall migration was well in
progress by Aug. 15, 1948. At Beverly Lake
this was the common sandpiper with from
6 to 30 seen daily until June 25, 1949. A
nest on July 13, contained 4 eggs and, on
the following day, these eggs had hatched.

One of the few shorebirds that was well
distributed, and breeding, through the Bar-
rens section of the study area.

67. Sanderling, Crocethia alba

A single record from Brochet, Oct. 25,
1948, was almost certainly an accidental
stray. The only other records are from
Beverly Lake where 4 were seen between
June 14 and June 20, 1949. This species is
not found even as a migrant in the interior
of the study area and its occurrence south
of Beverly Lake in the interior plains is
evidently only accidental.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

107

68. Red Phalarope, Phalaropus fulicarius

Three were seen with a flock of Northern
Phalaropes near Eskimo Point, Aug. 27,
1947. Entirely maritime as far as the study
area is concerned.

69. Northern Phalarope, Lobipes lobatus

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 3,
1948. Beverly Lake — June 10, 1949.

None at Windy River in 1947, but not un-
common from June 3 to June 10 in 1948,
after which none were seen. At Angikuni
Lake the species was fairly common and
young were seen on July 23, 1948. The last
record for this area was Aug. 4. Along the
coast of Hudson Bay, Aug. 26 to 28, 1947,
the species was abundant with flocks of 300
or more individuals frequently seen. At
Beverly Lake it was common, probably
breeding although the last record was for
July 22, 1949.

Probably a scarce migrant through the in-
terior (in comparison with coastal numbers)
but well distributed and breeding through
the Barrens proper.

70. Pomarine Jaeger, Stercorarius pomarinus

A single dark phase bird at Beverly Lake,
June 21, 1949. Rare to accidental in the in-
terior of the study area.

71. Parasitic Jaeger, Stercorarius parasiticus

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 25, 1947.
Windy River — June 4, 1947; June 7, 1948.

Windy River: The nine records for 1947
probably all concern a single pair which may
have nested locally. The pair was seen at-
tacking a wounded Ring-billed Gull on June
24, first driving it from a rock into the river,
then repeatedly striking it about the head.
The 1948 records for Windy River show a
Single bird seen on June 7.

Angikuni Lake: Common, breeding in some
numbers. On Aug. 5 a pair was found with
one well-grown young that could make a fairly
sustained flight. The nest was near a small
tundra pond. At Angikuni, individuals were
several times observed attacking Duck
Hawks and evidently coming close enough
to strike.

Thlewiaza River: Fairly common along
the whole river and at the coast. A flock of
16 was found near Edehon Lake on Aug. 22,
1947.

Beverly Lake: Rare in this area. 5 rec-
ords, all between July 20 and July 22, and

108

perhaps attributable to only one or two
individuals.

This species appears to range commonly
and to breed locally throughout the southern
section of the plains area, but to become
rare to the north at least near Beverly Lake.

72. Long-tailed Jaeger, Stercorarius
longicaudus

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 5, 1947;
June 10, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 7, 1949.

Windy River: One or two pairs summered
in the area in both 1947 and 1948.

Angikuni Lake: At least as common as the
preceding species and undoubtedly breed-
ing. Many territorial displays were noted.

Thlewiaza River: None were seen on the
river proper but two pairs were noted at
the coast.

Beverly Lake: Very common with from 1
to 25 seen daily and an average of 12 per
day. A nest being built was found June 25,
1949. Another nest, unlined, on a sandy
patch of ground contained 2 eggs on July 3.
By July 15 there was a newly hatched young
bird in this nest. It was noted here that this
species when defending territory would at-
tack and actually strike not only hawks and
gulls, but even caribou and men as well.

The distribution of this species appears
similar to that of the preceding species in
the plains area from Angikuni Lake to the
south. To the north it appears much more
abundant and almost replaces the Parasitic
Jaeger in the Beverly Lake region.

73. [Great Black-backed Gull, Larus
marinus

On May 25, 1947, at Churchill, a single
bird was seen with a flock of Herring Gulls
at a range of 200 yds, with binoculars. It
was observed both in flight and at rest. The
following day a single bird, no doubt the
same one, was seen for several minutes in
flight. Accidental in this area.]

74. Herring Gull, Larus argentatus

N. Manitoba: Common and breeding along
the Cochrane and Kasmere Rivers in 1947.

Windy River: Common in flocks of 30 to
100 until the ice left the major lakes and
rivers after which the flocks dispersed, though
the species remained common. The vulture-
role of these gulls appears most important. It
was noted that they would gather in large
numbers remarkably soon after a shot was
fired at caribou. In 1948 they were observed
to almost completely strip a fresh caribou

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

carcass in less than 24 hours. The same
observation was repeated at Beverly Lake in
1949. As scavengers during the spring, sum-
mer and early fall, they probably account
for the utilization of a very large percentage
of available carrion. In early spring num-
bers of them are caught in fox traps as they
attempt to scavenge the meat baits.

On July 1, 1947, a nest with 3 slightly in-
cubated eggs was found. The following year,
on June 6, 3 fresh eggs were found in the
same nest. The last adults were seen on
Sept. 20, 1948, and the last juveniles on
Sept. 27. ;

Angikuni Lake: Common. Swimming
young were found on a tundra pond on July
23, 1948. On Aug. 10, young almost ready
to fly were seen.

Thlewiaza River: Fairly common on the
river and abundant at the coast. Flightless,
but well grown young were seen near
Edehon Lake on Aug. 17, 1947.

Beverly Lake: Common, undoubtedly
breeding, with about 25 records a day
throughout the observation period.

Universally common and well distributed
over the entire area, breeding where found
in summer.

75. Ring-billed Gull, Larus delawarensis

A wounded bird being attacked by Jaegers
was found at Windy River, June 24, 1947.
Three days later the bird was collected. Ac-
cidental in this area.

76. Bonaparte’s Gull, Larus philadelphia

Scarce but evenly distributed south along
the Cochrane and Kasmere River systems in
1947. The only northern record was for 4
seen at Windy River on June 13, 1947.

77. Common Tern, Sterna hirundo

Terns were common along the Cochrane
and Kasmere Rivers in 1947 but no speci-
mens were taken in the area where this
and the following species probably overlap.
At Windy River, where specimens were col-
lected, the Arctic Tern appeared to be the
dominant species. A colony of about 100
pairs on Kasmere Lake appeared to include
both species with the Common Tern the
most abundant. 40 nests were examined here
on July 31, 1947, and their contents ranged
from fresh laid eggs to half-grown young.
The present species probably does not ex-
tend far into the open plains as a breeding
species.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN

78. Arctic Tern, Sterna paradisaea

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 11,
1947; June 13, 1948. Beverly Lake — June
21, 1949.

Windy River: Uncommon to fairly com-
mon in local areas. No large breeding groups
— most appearing to breed in groups of one
or two pairs on gravel reefs. A nest on July
8, 1947, contained 2 quarter-incubated eggs.
Last seen Aug. 15, 1948 and Aug. 16, 1949.

Angikuni Lake: Common, with many fly-
ing juveniles seen from Aug. 10, 1948, on-
ward.

Thlewiaza River:
and on the coast.

Beverly Lake: Common, seen daily in
groups of 10 to 20, and no doubt breeding
locally.

Common and well distributed as a breed-
ing species north from Nueltin Lake. South
of Nueltin its range fades into that of the
preceding species.

Common on the river

79. Brunnich’s Murre, Uria lomvia

An emaciated specimen was collected near
Edehon Lake on Aug. 17, 1947. The bird was
unable to fly and was evidently in a starving
condition. Accidental.

80. Mourning Dove, Zenaidura macroura

At Brochet, on Nov. 10, 1948, a single indi-
vidual appeared at the settlement and, in
company with some ptarmigan, spent two
days on a small strip of sand kept snow-free
by the wind. The bird appeared weak and
eventually was killed by dogs. Undoubtedly
an accidental stray.

81. Great Horned Owl, Bubo virginianus

During the winter of 1943, C. Schweder
reported an invasion of this species near
Windy River. Seven were caught in fox
traps set out into the Barrens as far as
Kazan River. During the same winter Geor-
ge Lush saw three horned owls near the
mouth of Thlewiaza River. In December,
1948, Mowat saw two at Brochet.

This species breeds north to timberline
and in exceptional years may range far to
the north. In 1943 the northward trend was
probably in search of ptarmigan, many of
which wintered at or near timberline in that
year.

82. Snowy Owl, Nyctea nyctea

Although present in fair numbers at
Churchill in May of 1947 and 1948, none
was seen alive at Windy River where it

FIELD-NATURALIST

109

is found in winter. Pellets indicated that
at times the local winter population near
Windy River may be large. Schweder re-
ported large numbers wintering there, but
with irregular and marked fluctuations that
do not appear to conform to the usual cyclic
pattern.

We saw two birds in the Angikuni Lake
area but found no evidence of breeding.
None were seen at Beverly Lake in 1949, but
Lawrie saw a single bird near Kognac River
on Nov. 14, 1948.

The lemming population was very low
during both 1947 and 1948 but neither white
foxes nor Rough-legged Hawks showed a
numerical decrease to compare with the
virtual absence of Snowy Owls in the entire .
study area. It is possible this species is only
a rare summer resident south of Beverly
Lake, even when lemming populations are
high.

83. Hawk Owl, Surnia ulula

On June 4, 1947, 2 were seen in flight at
Windy River. On June 10, 1947, C. Schweder
shot at a bird feeding on a caribou carcass,
and he identified it as this species. On Oct.
17, 1948, Lawrie saw a bird in flight, by
moonlight, which was probably of this spe-
cies.

The species has been recorded from Bro-
chet and probably ranges north to timber-
line at Windy River, though rarely.

84. Short-eared Owl, Asio flammeus

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 20, 1948.
Windy River — June 4, 1947; May 31, 1948.

In 1947 it was uncommon at Windy River
with about 2 pairs resident in the area. It
was even less numerous in 1948 and the last
date for that year was Sept. 23. At Angi-
kuni Lake it was fairly common and was
recorded 13 times. At Beverly Lake it was
rare, with a single record on July 3, 1949,

The commonest summer owl in the in-
terior plains south of Angikuni Lake, and
distributed north at least to Beverly Lake.

85. Nighthawk, Chordeiles minor
Fairly common along the Cochrane River
in July, 1947, north to Lae du Brochet. Not
recorded farther north.
86. Belted Kingfisher, Megaceryle alcyon
A single record from Fort Hall Lake, Kas-
mere River, July 28, 1947.
87. Flicker, Colaptes auratus
Arrival date: Ilford, Man. — April 29, 1949.

110 THE CANADIAN

N. Manitoba: Fairly common along the
Cochrane and Kasmere Rivers to the south
end of Nueltin Lake with two to six seen
daily in July, 1947. On July 15 a nest was
found with 8 eggs and the female was still
incubating on July 28.

Windy River: A single record from 1947
— July 1. In 1948 six records between June
27 and Sept. 18. Probably breeding in the
spruce thickets south of the river.

Fairly common to timberline and possibly
straying farther north into isolated spruce
stands.

88. Hairy Woodpecker, Dendrocopos villosus

C. Schweder reported one wintering at
Windy River 1946-47. Mowat recorded one
on Kasmere River, July 14, 1947; and a
second at Brochet on Nov. 18, 1948. It is
unlikely that the species is much more than
a rarity north of Reindeer Lake.

89. American Three-toed Woodpecker,
Picoides tridactylus

A single female at Brochet on Nov. 26,
1948. Rare to accidental north of Reindeer
Lake.

90. Horned Lark, Eremophila alpestris

Horned larks were present at Churchill
and Windy River before our arrival. How-
ever they were first seen at Beverly Lake on
June 2, 1949. The migration peak at Chur-
chill was reached by May 25, 1947.

Windy River: Migration peaks here were
June 2, 1947 and May 26, 1948. The northern
race E.a.alpestris reached its peak well ahead
of E.a.hoyti. These two races were identified
from specimens. By July 1, 1947, eggs were
well incubated and flying juveniles were
observed as of July 20. Horned Larks were
amongst the commonest breeding species
here, with E.a.alpestris greatly outnumbering
E.a.hoyti.

Angikuni Lake: Common throughout this
area. Juveniles were flying from July 23,
1949, onward.

Thlewiaza River: Only three records, pro-
bably because fall migration had already
cleared this area.

Beverly Lake: Migration peak here was
reached on June 14, 1949, and by June 30
only one or two birds were to be seen
daily. The species was not nearly so com-
mon as at Angikuni and Windy River. A
nest found on July 14 contained 2 newly
hatched young and 1 egg.

FieLD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69

Brochet: Not common in fall migration,
and the last record was for two individuals
on Oct. 20, 1948.

Horned Larks of two subspecies are pro-
bably the commonest and most widely dis-
tributed birds in the plains area from Angi-
kuni Lake southward. To the north there
appears to be a marked dropping off in
numbers as indicated by the scarcity at Be-
verly Lake.

91. Tree Swallow, Iridoprocne bicolor

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 26, 1947;
May 24, 1948.

The only inland records were for two
seen at Windy River, June 15 and July 1,
1947. Timberline appears to mark the ex-
treme northern limits in this area.

92. Cliff Swallow, Petrochelidon pyrrhonota

A large colony (perhaps 250 pairs) was
found nesting on a cliff face at Big Point
on Nueltin Lake, July 12, 1947. The only
additional records are for two birds seen on
the upper Kasmere River in July of that
year.

93. Canada Jay, Perisoreus canadensis

N. Manitoba: Common on the Kasmere
and Cochrane Rivers in July 1947, with many
juveniles seen in family groups. At Brochet
it was common during the winter 1948-49.
At Ilford, adults were seen carrying food on
April 6, 1949, and flying young were seen
on April 28.

Windy River: A single record in 1947, for
an adult shot on Aug. 10. During 1948 a

family group was seen on July 5. That
autumn the species was fairly common
with several birds seen daily. How-

ever none were recorded north of this point.
It is probable that they nest north to Windy
River in small numbers but that northern
autumnal migration swells the population
until early winter, when a reverse southward
movement takes place.

94. Raven, Corvus corax

N. Manitoba: Common in summer along
both the Kasmere and Cochrane Rivers. A
nest with one young, ready to leave, was
found at La Pensie Lake, July 18, 1947.
By July 25, 1947, flocking had begun.
Fluctuating greatly in winter numbers at
Brochet.

Windy River: Slightly less common in
summer than in the forests with from one
to three seen almost daily in 1947 and 1948.

July-Sept. 1955]

This population was swelled abruptly in the
fall, almost certainly by an influx from the
north. The high level was maintained at
least until Dec. 10, 1948 but the species
was absent from the open plains to the north
during both November and December of
that year. The earliest flying juveniles ob-
served here were seen July 26, 1947.

Angikuni Lake: Uncommon, with only 7
records. These were all single birds and no
juveniles were seen in 1948.

Thlewiaza River: Almost absent with only
a single record, from Edehon Lake, in late
summer of 1947.

Beverly Lake:
from June 2 to June 22,
thereafter.

The heaviest breeding population was
south of timberline with a marked falling-off
in summer residents to the north. How-
ever the Barrens population, though scanty,
appeared fairly evenly distributed.

The late summer, autumnal and winter
movements of the Barrens birds appear to
be definitely correlated with the movements
of the caribou herds. There is a steady
southward drift of adults, in small numbers,
during August and September to the general
vicinity of timberline. However the juve-
niles, often in very large flocks, appear to
move directly with the southward-bound cari-
bou herds. In the late fall of 1948 Lawrie
noted a marked increase in the numbers of
ravens coincidental with the arrival of the
major caribou herds. In the same year,
Mowat at Brochet, observed that the Raven
pepulation swelled suddenly by several
hundred percent with the arrival there of
the same caribou herds, on Noy. 10. At that
time flocks of up to 30 Ravens appeared and
were seen to be moving in the same di-
rection as the herds — not always north-
south, but varying from day to day. There
may be two distinct populations. A semi-
static one inside timberline, and a very mi-
gratory one in the plains country which
(except of course during the breeding sea-
son) closely follows the movements of the
deer.

Not common. 11 records
1949, and none

95. Crow, Corvus brachyrhynchos

Arrival date: Churchill — May 20, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Fairly common on _ the
Cochrane River and less common north on
the Kasmere River in 1947.

Windy River: Two were seen in late June,
1947. During October and early December

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

111

of 1948, Lawrie saw 4 birds probably of this
species aithough distance made identification
uncertain.

The species breeds north to timberline
and perhaps individuals may wander some
distance northward, particularly in autumn.

96. [American Magpie, Pica pica

C. Schweder took one from a fox trap
in December of 1944.]

97. Hudsonian Chickadee, Parus hudsonicus

C. Schweder reported a few seen some
winters, with numbers fluctuating greatly,
winter by winter. In January of 1947 he
noted a fairly heavy influx at Windy River.

There was only a single record from Bro-
chet, for Nov. 8, 1948. They were regular
residents at Ilford during the winter 1948-
49 and Lawrie saw two at Big Sand Lake in
N. Manitoba on Feb. 13, 1949. George Lush
reported occasional ‘invasions’ to Edehon
Lake on Thlewiaza River, but that the spe-
cies was absent most winters. The main
breeding range probably stops short of Rein-
deer Lake but an erratic northern movement
to timberline appears to take place in some
years.

98. Robin, Turdus migratorius

Arrival dates: Ilford, Man. — April 29,
1949. Churchill — May 22, 1947; May 21,
1948. Windy River — June 3, 1947; May 23,
1948.

N. Manitoba: Common along the Kasmere
and Cochrane Rivers in 1947.

Windy River: Common in 1947 with from
6 to 7 seen daily, but slightly less common
in 1948. A nest on June 22, 1947, contained
3 fresh eggs. Other nests were found on the
ground in areas without suitable tree cover
and the species seemed to have no particular
preference between spruce bush and open
country. The last fall date was Oct. 7, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Not common, but widely
distributed.

Thlewiaza River: Only 2 records, but this
may have been due to the lateness of the
season.

The breeding population evidently extends
to some point north of Angikuni Lake, and
south of Beverly Lake where the species was
rot present in 1949. It is most abundant at
and below timberline, but the willingness
to accept normally unsuitable territory in
the very open plains near Angikuni Lake is
interesting.

112

99. Olive-backed Thrush, Hylocichla ustulata

Six records along the Cochrane River in
July, 1947, and a single record for the upper
Kasmere River. None were found north of
Kasmere Lake.

100. Gray-cheeked Thrush, Hylocichla
minima

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 4,
1947; June 1, 1948.

N. Manitoba: There seemed to be little if
any overlap with the range of the preceding
species. The only records in 1947 were 2
birds on the Kasmere River, north of Kas-
mere Lake.

Windy River: Common and slightly more
abundant than the Robin but — in this area
— more restricted to tree cover and much
less common in the dwarf birch stands on
the open plains. On June 30, 1947 a nest
with 4 fresh eggs and on July 1, 1947, 2
further nests each with 4 fresh eggs. These
nests were all located about 4 feet from the
ground in spruce thickets. One or two later
nests were found on the ground in dwarf
birch scrub.

Angikuni Lake: Common though mostly
concentrated in willow swales and dwarf
birch scrub. Flying juveniles were seen on
July 21, 1947.

Thlewiaza River: Only 3 records, but this
species is an early migrant and in other
parts of the study area had vanished by
Aug. 20.

The breeding range seems to begin at
timberline and to extend northward past
Angikuni Lake, but not as far as Beverly
Lake where none were seen in 1949. The
heaviest population seems to be in that part
of the plains where ground cover is fairly
dense.

101. Mountain Bluebird, Sialia currucoides

A pair with a nest and 2 incubated eggs
was found on a portage at Kasmere Lake on
July 27, 1947. Since the birds were breeding
they cannot be considered accidental despite
the fact that there are no other known rec-
ords for adjacent areas.

102. American Pipit, Anthus spinoletta
Arrival dates: Churchill — May 21, 1947.
Windy River — June 5. 1947; May 23, 1948.
Beverly Lake — June 11, 1949.
N. Manitoba: A pair feeding young was
found at the south end of Nueltin Lake on
Aug. 4, 1947.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69.

Windy River: Not very common, but wide-
ly distributed in the broken hill -country.
On July 2, 1947, a nest under a ledge of rock
contained 6 partly incubated eggs. By Sept.
8, 1948, there was a notable increase in num-
bers, and flocking had begun. The last date
was Oct. 10, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Slightly more numerous
than at Windy River with from 5 to 7 seen
on most days. Fledglings were observed by
July 23, 1949, and small flocks were forming
on Aug. 12.

Thlewiaza River: About as common as at

_ Angikuni Lake, as far as the coast and to

Eskimo Point.

Beverly Lake: 8 were seen between June
11 and June 21, 1949, but none thereafter
and there was no evidence of breeding.

The species breeds north from timberline
in increasing numbers to at least Angikuni
Lake. Beyond that the population appears to
diminish rapidly.

103. Bohemian Waxwing, Bombycilla
garrula

Two pairs and a single bird were seen on
the Cochrane River in late July, 1947. Not
recorded to the north.

104. Northern Shrike, Lanius excubitor

One was seen at the south end of Nueltin
Lake on Aug. 4, 1947. There were single
records for Windy River on Aug. 13, 1947;
Sept. 23, 1948 and Aug. 17, 1949. There was
some evidence of at least one pair having
bred near the mouth of Windy River. In
general the species probably ranges sparing-
ly north to timberline.

105. Myrtle Warbler, Dendroica coronata

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 6, 1947;
June 2, 1948.

Only observed at Windy River with 4
records in 1947 and 5 in 1948. None was
seen after June 25 in either year. It is pro-
bably more numerous in the forested areas
to the south.

106. Black-poll Warbler, Dendroica striata

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 6, 1947;
June 1, 1948.

This species appeared to be common along
the Cochrane and Kasmere Rivers. Fledg-
lings were seen on July 31, 1947. At Windy
River it was also common, but restricted to
fairly heavy spruce woods. There was a
single record for Angikuni Lake.

Breeding commonly north to timberline
and accidental to the north.

July-Sept. 1955]

107. Northern Water-thrush, Seiwrus
noveboracensis

Arrival date: June 2, 1948.

Although it was only twice recorded on
the Cochrane River in 1947, it was probably
commoner than records indicated. At Windy
Bay there were 5 records for 1947 and 6 for
1948. There was also a single record from
Angikuni Lake.

Range and distribution appeared similar
to that of the preceding species, but the
Water-thrush was much less abundant.

108. Rusty Blackbird, Ewphagus carolinus

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 20, 1948.
liford — April 29, 1949. Windy River —
June 4, 1947; May 23, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Fairly common on the Kas-
mere River but rapidly decreasing in num-
bers on the Cochrane, and rare in the sum-
mer of 1947 at Brochet. On July 25 many
flocks of up to 30 individuals, mostly in rusty
plumage, on the lower Kasmere River.

Windy River: Fairly common with from 3
to 8 seen daily in both 1947 and 1948. A
nest with 4 well incubated eggs was found
on June 30, 1947. Flocking had begun by
Aug. 30, 1948. The last bird seen was on
Oct. 14, 1948, but the bulk of the migrants
had left by the third week in September.

Timberline marked a clear-cut range limit
and there were no records to the north.
The heaviest population appeared to be
across a belt, about a hundred miles broad,
running south of timberline.

109. Purple Finch, Carpodacus purpureus

On June 5, 1947, a pair was found ac-
companying a small flock of redpolls near
Windy River. This species is probably acci-
dental this far north.

110. Pine Grosbeak, Pinicola enucleator

A female on June 7, 1947 and a male and
female on Sept. 23, 1948, all in the Windy
River area, constitute the only records. It
may be slightly more common southward to
Brochet.

111. Hoary Redpoll, Acanthis hornemanni
Rather rare at Windy River with 12 rec-

ords in 1947 and 6 in 1948. Two were seen
at Beverly Lake on June 21, 1949.
112. Common Redpoll, Acanthis flammea
Arrival dates: Windy River — June 2,
1947. Beverly Lake — June 13, 1949.
N. Manitoba: Fairly common and evenly
distributed south from timberline to Bro-
chet in summer.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

113

Windy River: Common in large flocks
until June 8, 1947, and until May 31, 1948.
After these dates small flocks of up to 10
individuals were noted throughout the breed-
ing season, as well as a small number of
individuals and paired birds. After June 25,
most of the flocks consisted entirely of
males. Last seen on Oct. 31, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Fairly common, but in
small groups — mostly males and showing

distinct preference for willow swales and
spruce clumps.
Thlewiaza River: Observed regularly,

though in small numbers, almost to the coast.

Beverly Lake: From one to six seen on
most days in 1949.

The heaviest breeding population was
evidently at and below timberline with the
population declining — though not sharply
— north to Beverly Lake. Roving flocks of
males and non-breeding females made it ra-
ther difficult to assess local resident popula-
tions accurately.

113. Savannah Sparrow, Passerculus
sandwichensis

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 5, 1947;
May 24, 1948. Beverly Lake — June 19, 1949.

N. Manitoba: Fairly common in grassy
areas along both the Cochrane and Kasmere
Rivers south to Brochet, in the summer of
1947.

Windy River: Common. Each small mus-
keg supported a large population sometimes
as high as 6 pairs to the acre. But although
preference was shown for wet, grassy areas,
individual territories included all types of
terrain including high, rocky tundra. A nest
just completed was found on June 18, 1947
and by June 25 contained 5 fresh eggs. The
last date in 1948 was Sept. 18.

Angikuni Lake: As common and as widely
distributed as at Windy River with from 8
to 10 pairs seen daily near camp. Flying
juveniles were found on July 23, 1949, and
flocking had begun by Aug. 12.

Thlewiaza River: Fairly common, despite
the lateness of the season, along the entire
route from Nueltin Lake to Eskimo Point.

Beverly Lake: Common and with much
the same density and distribution as at
other stations in the study area. Migration
peak was noted here as being reached on
June 21, 1949. A nest with 4 eggs was found
on July 3 and the young hatched about July ©
14.

Common and very evenly distributed
throughout the entire area.

114

114. Slate-coloured Junco, Junco hyemalis

Arrival dates: Churchill — May 21, 1947.
Ilford — April 6, 1949. Windy River — June
3, 1947; May 27, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Although only 4 were seen
in the summer of 1947, the population was
orobably much larger. Flightless young were
found at the south end of Nueltin Lake, on
Aug. 3, 1947.

Windy River: Uncommon in spring migra-
tion and as a summer resident with per-
haps 4 pairs breeding in the immediate
vicinity. However during the fall the popu-
lation rose sharply, particularly in early
September. This influx was probably from
the south. The last date was Oct. 9, 1943.

There were no records from Angikuni or
Beverly Lakes. The small spring migration,
coupled with the lack of breeding birds to
the north, seems to indicate a northern migra-
tion of juveniles in autumn at least to tim-
berline.

115. Eastern Tree Sparrow, Spizella arborea

Arrival dates: Ilford — April 28, 1949.
Beverly Lake — June 19, 1949.

N. Manitoba: Uncommon to rare along the
Cochrane and Kasmere Rivers proceeding
south. Most abundant at the south end of
Nueltin Lake.

Windy River: The most abundant sparrow
and one of the commonest birds. Population
density was as high as 10 pairs to the acre
in some particularly suitable areas. Spruce
woods, dwarf birch draws, and open hill
sides were all utilized as breeding territory.
Two nests, each with five eggs, found on
July 3, 1947, were about half incubated.
The last date was Oct. 9, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Slightly less numerous than
at Windy River, but still very common and
breeding in all types of habitat. Flying juve-
niles were seen on July 25, 1949 and flocking
had begun by Aug. 10.

Thlewiaza River: Fairly common along the
river route and at Eskimo Point.

Beverly Lake: Migration peak was reached
by June 22, 1949, and the species remained
common thereafter, although not as com-
mon as at the southern stations, nor as
numerous as the Savannah Sparrow.

The most abundant and best distributed
bird in the area from timberline north to
Angikuni Lake. Almost absent inside the
forests, and less numerous north of Angi-
kuni.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

116. Harris’s Sparrow, Zonotrichia querula

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 4, 1947;
May 23, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Fairly numerous south to
Brochet. A pair feeding young was seen on
Aug. 1, 1947.

Windy River: Common, with from 8 to 12
seen almost daily in the immediate vicinity
of camp. The density of breeding birds in
the spruce woods was high — sometimes 12
pairs to the square mile. Most nests were
located in open areas under dwarf birch
scrub and often on ridges or otherwise ex-
posed slopes, with spruce woods on both
sides. No nests were found in spruce
thickets. A total of nine nests with eggs
were examined and the usual clutch was 5,
occasionally 4. Early nest dates were June
24, 1947 — 5 fresh eggs, and June 19, 1948,
with 4 fresh eggs. Flocking had begun by
Aug. 30, 1948. Last seen Sept. 27, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Not common, with only
17 records in 1949. Flying juveniles were
seen on July 26. The local distribution
seemed restricted to the immediate vicinity
of willow swales.

Thlewiaza River: Only 6 records for the
entire route.

Beverly Lake: A single bird was seen on
July 5 and probably the same bird on the
two succeeding days.

Breeding from well south of timberline
north to Angikuni Lake with by far the
heaviest population at, or near timberline.
Probably accidental at Beverly Lake.

117. White-crowned Sparrow, Zonotrichia
leucophrys

Arrival dates: Windy River — June 4, 1947;
June 1, 1948.

N. Manitoba: Fairly common and more
numerous than the preceding species, south
to Brochet. A nest with 5 well incubated
eggs was found at Misty Lake on July 25,
1947.

Windy River: Up to 20 were seen daily
until June 5, 1947, but after this date the
species became scarce and only 9 other rec-
ords were obtained. The following year it
was much more abundant with several seen
daily during the breeding season and a
breeding density of about 6 pairs to the
square mile in the spruce woods. Last seen
on Sept. 23, 1948.

Fairly common in the forested areas and
at timberline, but not found to the north.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN
118. White-throated Sparrow, Zonotrichia
albicollis
A male was collected at Churchill on May
_ 29, 1947. Probably accidental in the entire
study area.

119. Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca

Arrival dates: Ilford — April 28, 1949.
Windy River — June 3, 1947; May 28, 1948.

Fairly common in the forested areas south
to Brochet and flying juveniles were seen on
the Kasmere River, Aug. 1, 1947.

At Windy River it was rather rare and
found only in the spruce woods. It was last
seen Sept. 19, 1948.

Timberline marks the northern range limit
in this area.

120. Lincoln’s Sparrow, Melospiza lincolnii

Three records along the Cochrane and
Kasmere Rivers in 1947, and two for Windy
River in early June, 1947. Probably an un-
common summer resident about Reindeer
Lake, and rare to accidental north of there.

121. Song Sparrow, Melospiza melodia

A pair was found at Brochet in late July,
1947. They appeared to be nesting in a grass
swale near the settlement. The species is
probably rare to accidental this far north.

122. Lapland Longspur, Calcarius
lapponicus

Windy River: Very common during late
May and the first two weeks in June after
which it was not so much in evidence and
almost no males were seen. Breeding areas
were restricted to open country and included
high, rocky ridges and low peat bogs. A nest
in construction was found June 13, 1947.
Fledglings were first seen on July 21, 1948.
Small groups of juveniles were still present
in October and the last date for the species
was Oct. 16, 1948.

Angikuni Lake: Abundant in this area with
flocks, composed largely of juveniles, already
forming by July 23, 1949.

Thlewiaza River: Common, with flocks of
up to 200 seen from Aug. 20, 1947, until Aug.
29. A marked rise in population was noted
as the coastal plains were approached.

Brochet: Common in fall migration 1948.
Last seen Oct. 21.

Beverly Lake: The most abundant small
bird in this area. First recorded June 2,
1949. On July 7 two nests were found, one
with 5 eggs and one with 4. On July 13, a

FIELD-NATURALIST

EUS:

nest contained 3 young. By July 22, young
birds had left some of the nests and flocks
of juveniles appeared by the end of the
month.

This species appears to be one of the com-
monest breeding birds on the plains, but its
abundance increases with the distance north
from timberline, reaching a peak about Be-
verly Lake.

123. Smith’s Longspur, Calcarius pictus

In 1947, 8 pairs were located on open
plains country near Windy River, and several
specimens were collected. However in 1948
only a single male was seen in this area, and
there were no records from Angikuni Lake
in 1948, or from Beverly Lake in the suc-
ceeding year. At least in 1947 the species
was not uncommon at timberline but sub-
sequently it disappeared and was not found
anywhere in the open Barrens. The writers
can offer no explanation of this phenomenon.

124. Snow Bunting, Plectrophenax nivalis

Arrival dates: Ilford — April 19, 1949.
Churchill — April 25, 1949. Beverly Lake —
June 3, 1949.

The movement of this species through
Churchill exhibited an interesting example
of ‘horde’ phenomena. In 1947 the first birds
evidently arrived at Churchill in early May
but the species was not yet numerous by
May 21. Then the population suddenly in-
creased to horde proportions with the peak
being reached on May 25 when flocks of up
to a thousand individuals were common,
and the daily total was in the tens of thou-
sands. But by May 30 this vast movement
had dwindled until only a few small flocks
were to be seen. In 1948 this same pattern
was repeated at Churchill but about a week
earlier. It was obvious that the vast majority
of the migrants passed through Churchill in
a two or three day period.

At Windy Bay we were too late to catch
this peak wave in spring, and only stragglers
were present in 1947 while none were seen
in the spring of 1948. There is a distinct
possibility that there is no heavy spring
migration in the interior area, but that most
of the migrants follow the coast.

Fall migration at Windy River began on
Sept. 30, 1948 and within three days had
reached a peak with plus 3000 birds recorded
daily. The peak dropped off abruptly and
by Oct. 6 we were only recording 50-60 birds
a day.

116 THE CANADIAN

At Brochet the peak wave arrived on Oct.
8, 1948 and the numbers seen approximated
those observed at Windy River. The last
individual records were: Windy River
Oct. 31, 1948; Brochet— Nov. 8, 1948.

The only summer record from Angikuni
Lake was a Single bird moving with a flock
of Lapland Longspurs on July 29, 1948.

At Beverly Lake the horde phenomenon
was not in evidence. From June 2 until June

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69
10, 1949 the species was present in moderate
numbers. From June 19 until July 14, there
was a Steady decrease and none was seen
after the later date.

The species does not breed in the study
area but is common to very common in mi-
gration — at least in fall. There is a possi-
bility that it may be much less common in
the interior during spring migration.

BOTANICAL INVESTIGATIONS ON COASTAL SOUTHERN
CORNWALLIS ISLAND, FRANKLIN DISTRICT, N.W.T.”?

W. B. ScHOoFIELD ? and W. J. Copy #

12 1949 the senior author made a botanical
survey of Resolute Bay and the adjoining
Allen and Assistance Bays, on the south
shore of Cornwallis Island. This survey was
sponsored jointly by the Canada Depart-
ment of Agriculture and the Defence Re-
search Board of the Canada Department of
National Defence.

A considerable quantity of plant material
resulted from this survey. Of this, the
mosses have already been treated by W.C.
Steere (1951). The purpose of the present
paper is to bring together the knowledge
of the phanerogamic flora of Cornwallis
Island, and in particular to describe the
plant communities of the areas adjacent to
Assistance, Resolute and Allen Bays.

Cornwallis Island is located in the Can-
adian Arctic Archipelago in the midst of
the larger islands of Devon on the north
and east, Bathurst on the west, and Somerset
and Prince of Wales on the south.

A preliminary paper on the geology of
Cornwallis Island has been prepared by
Thorsteinsson and Fortier (1954); also, a
journal of the 1950 geological expedition to
Cornwallis Island has been published by
Harwood (1951). The island is composed
almost entirely of Paleozoic sedimentary
formations, with the exception of the Intre-
pid Bay Formation which is Cretaceous or
Tertiary (?) in age. Assistance Bay lies
wholly within the Read Bay Formation

Received for publication September 22, 1954.
Contribution No. 1411, from the Botany and Plant
Pathology Division, Science Service, Canada De-
partment of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

Survey Assistant.
Assistant Botanist.

is}
~~

~

which is of Ordovician and Silurian age:
this formation is comprised of limestones,
shales, sandstones, and siltstones. The west
side of Resolute Bay and Cape Martyr also
belong to this formation. The strata in the
vicinity of Allen Bay and along the east side
of Resolute Bay are composed of Ordovician
(?) and Silurian dolomites and limestones
of the Allen Bay Formation.

Polunin (1940) reviewed the history of
exploration in the Canadian Eastern Arctic,
and Thorsteinsson and Fortier (1954), that
of Cornwallis Island in particular.

The largest and most important early plant
collection was that of Dr. Peter C. Suther-
land (1852). His specimens were collected
in 1851 at Assistance Bay, the place where
the ships Lady Franklin and Sophia over-
wintered.

Also in 1851, a small collection was made
by Charles Ede, assistant surgeon on H.M.S.
Assistance, but the exact localities where
his specimens were taken are unknown.
Assistance Bay was named after the ship,
H.M.S Assistance and it is possible that
Ede’s specimens came from that locality.
They could, however, have come from al-
most any locality along the south coast of
Cornwallis Island, for the ships under Cap-
tain Austin, of which the Assistance was
one, wintered off Griffith Island, and
numerous excursions were made between
them and those wintering at Assistance Bay,
in addition to the investigations made along
the coast in search of traces of the Franklin
expedition.

A single specimen, Arenaria rossii, was
collected by Admiral Sir Leopold McClin-

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 117
a Gt 412
ISLAND 8 ) 8
MILES
MAURY CHANNEL :
b)
LITTLE 4
CORNWALLIS
1SLAN 3
(
ONECV O-X~
=
bed
z
= (
< N W
Ghio! RO NowieAy De Pals a ane
1)
— —_—
oS PES sl Aza ND
D 15
=z
°
—
Oo
/ =z
iG
|
2
e ta
yer = z 4 il
4 Oo
~
< Pop
os ?
BARROW Se RYAN nF
Map. 1. Comwallis Island showing locations of Allen, Resolute and Assistance Bays; the area indicated

by the rectangle is shown in Map 2.

tock on Cornwallis Island (McClintock ex
Markham 1909, p. 245). This was recorded

by Polunin (1940), as “opposite Browne
Island”.
The Ede specimens and some of the

Sutherland specimens are preserved in a
“Botanical Scrapbook” assembled by Mr.
Adam White (Polunin 1936) and now pre-
served in the Herbarium of the University
of Toronto. As a frontispiece to this volume,

there is a coloured plate entitled “Part of
the view represents Assistance Harbour, with
three cairns’. Below this legend is a list
of the species depicted in the foreground.
Oxyria reniformis, Saxifraga nivalis, Draba
alpina, Dryas integrifolia, Parrya arctica,
Saxifraga flagellaris, Saxifraga oppositifolia,
Polygonum viviparum, Alopecurus alpinus,
Papaver nudicaule, Cerastium alpinum,
Cochlearia fenestralis and Ranunculus frigi-
dus are shown in brilliant colour (although

118

not very accurately); the water and sur-
rounding hills of Assistance Bay form the
background. This plate is extracted from
opposite page 137 of Volume II of Suther-
land’s Journal (1852). A list of the “Plants
collected during voyage and named by Sir
W.J. Hooker, K.H., D.C.L., F.R.A., and L.S.”
is included as an appendix to Sutherland’s
Journal. All of the species depicted on the
plate but not all the species in the “Bota-
nical Scrapbook” are listed in the appendix,
and there is no indication, as pointed out by
Polunin (1936), that Hooker saw _ these
plants at any time.

Since the recent construction of the air-
strip at Resolute Bay a number of col-
lections have been made in that area. The
junior author has studied several of these
collections, but that made by the senior
author is the most complete. Other workers
who have made small collections are W.C.
Wonders (specimens at Department of Agri-
culture, Ottawa), Major Hugh Miller (speci-
mens at Defence Research Northern Labora-
tory, Ft. Churchill), D. MacClement (speci-
mens at McMaster University), Jean Michea
and S.M. Pady (specimens at Montreal Bo-
tanical Garden), H.B. Collins Jr. (speci-
mens at National Museum of Canada and
Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.),
H.H. Aime (specimens at National Museum
of Canada) and N.C. Polunin. Not all of
these collections have been seen, but no
additions to the senior author’s list have
been found in those examined.

ALLEN BAY, the westernmost of the
three bays studied, is separated from Reso-
lute Bay by Cape Martyr, a 600 foot hill
which rises slowly out of the undulating
fjaeldmark.

The beach lines of the bay are not well
defined and maintain a relatively small
flora when contrasted with that of Resolute
Bay described below. Beyond the slope
leading down to the bay, the land is quite
barren. Its flora is limited to an occasional
small plot of Parrya arctica, Saxifraga oppo-
sitifolia, Draba alpina, moss or lichen. Ponds
in this area, if they are even semi-permanent,
usually have well vegetated margins; Alo-
pecurus alpinus and Salix arctica together
form the bulk of this vegetation.

Beyond the coastal slope the land flattens
out somewhat, then breaks into low un-
dulating hills. Here are scattered ponds
and streamlets. These streamlets, which

THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

seem to rise from nowhere and disappear
just as abruptly are evidently neither per-
manent nor recurrent, for their margins are
usually devoid of vegetation.

At Allen Bay, however, besides a few
deep-valleyed temporary streams, there are
two large streams with perpendicular-walled
gorges through which water rushes to the
sea in mid-July. Flowing into these gorges
are occasional snow-melt tributaries, and
here, along their margins and near their
snow-bank sources are small meadows. The
major elements of these meadows are: Alo-
pecurus alpinus, Eriophorum angustifolium,
E. scheuchzeri, Draba fladnizensis, D. alpi-
na, Ranunculus sulphureus, and numerous
rich yellow-green mosses. Saxifraga oppo-
sitifolia, S. hirculus and Eutrema edwardsii
also occur occasionally.

Near the coast, beyond a large fresh-water
lake, are a number of large damp meadows
that yield not only an abundance of Salix
arctica and Eriophorum angustifolium, but
also Polygonum viviparum and Dryas inte-
grifolia. Muskoxen had found good grazing
here and had cropped the vegetation close-
ly, leaving for example, only a small frag-
ment of a culm of Alopecurus, a grass which
was in great abundance.

A lowland barren dominated by Sazifraga
oppositifolia was observed to the west of the
second gorge. Here also was seen the lar-
gest of Allen Bay’s lakes, its water appa-
rently draining directly into the bay by a
short stream. Unfortunately this area could
not be reached.

CAPE MARTYR rises by a number of
obscure beach lines from the strait dividing
Cornwallis from Griffith Island. Its sides
are sterile and of inhospitable jagged rocks.
On top of the cape there is little vegetation.
Saxifraga oppositifolia and the ever-present
Draba alpina are here, but there is little
else other than lichens and a few sterile
mosses.

Below Cape Martyr are a number of long-
abandoned Eskimo houses, built of stone,
sod and whale-bone. In and around these
houses, and bordering the adjacent small
transient streamlets, is found a vegetation
far advanced in its development beyond that
of the surrounding areas. Here were found
the earliest flowering representatives of a
number of species, among them Draba alpi-
na, Saxifraga flagellaris, Polygonum vivipa-

119

punyjs]

AVS

31N10S3¥

e
‘&®

see ee

FIELD-NATURALIST

*, 008 0
JONVSSIYNNODTY : *

THE CANADIAN

JITIW '

July-Sept. 1955]

5 WYId

sy[DMuIoD ‘pein Ang ajnjosey

°% doy

VALS

Baron kde

ae

VE

Td ¥): ‘

Pz} all

120

rum, Oxyria digyna, and Alopecurus alpinus.
Two factors had no doubt aided in advancing
the stage of growth: the shelter of Cape
Martyr, and presence of nitrogenous wastes
around the ruins.

The shore of RESOLUTE BAY rises
gradually by eight distinct beach-lines, be-
hind each of which, particularly those to-
ward Cape Martyr, are a number of per-
manent or temporary oval ponds.

Beyond the beach lines is a broad, un-
dulating fjaeldmark dotted with small ponds
and lakes and an occasional lichen-en-
crusted igneous erratic. Beyond this fjaeld-
mark rise high hills which continue as far
inland as one can see. Snow clings to the
bases of these hills until the middle of
August. —

The large lakes of Resolute Bay have little
vegetation on their margins. This barren
condition is, at least in part, the result of
slow-melting ice being pushed up on the
shores by the wind, thus denuding them of
vegetation.

The largest river is just east of camp,
beyond Reconnaissance Peak. This river,
like the others, has its water supply
governed by snow-melt. It is completely
devoid of phanerogamic water plants. The
water is alternately clear then somewhat
milky, dependent upon the temperature of
the day and the amount of snow remaining
in the hills.

The shores of the bay are completely bar-
ren, and are subjected to constant abrasion
by ice. Some marine algae are washed in
after the break-up; a number of specimens
of Agarum, Fucus, Laminaria and _ several
Rhodophyceae were collected here.

Since the vegetation is confined to rela-
tively specialized habitats it is perhaps ad-
visable to define these habitats and to de-
scribe their phanerogamic vegetation.

A. FJAELDMARK

The fjaeldmark is that dry, nearly desert,
area composed of broken limestone rock,
with small areas of caked limestone dust,
or “soil”. For the most part it is hilly and
exposed. It supports the following phanero-
gamic plants:

1. Completely exposed rocky area: Saxifraga
oppositifolia (d)5, Papaver radicatum (a),
Draba alpina (c), Arenaria rubella (d), Ce-
rastium alpinum (0).

THE. CANADIAN. . FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

2. Depressions with disintegrated limestone,
a powdery “soil” when broken: Salix arcti-
ca (d), Saxifraga caespitosa (c). These
plants appear to take root among mosses
that have previously established themselves,
and in time they crowd them out.

3. Bases or south sides of hills, or some-
what sheltered areas: Dryas integrifolia (a).

B. ISLETS OF SOIL

In the fjaeldmark, isolated vegetated plots
surrounding vacated lemming dens are occa-
sionally found. These islets, which rarely
occupy more than a few square feet, main-
tain a rich moss flora and, usually, a good
phanerogamic flora. The phanerogamic
vegetation of three islets is given below:

ISLET 1. Alopecurus alpinus (d), Papaver
radicatum (0), Draba alpina (f), Cardamine
bellidifolia (0), Saxifraga nivalis (f), S. cer-
nua (f), Salix arctica (r), Cerastiwm regelii
(r), Stellaria monantha (0), and Draba sub-
capitata (r).

ISLET 2. Parrya arctica (f), Draba alpina
(0), Papaver radicatwum (d), Cardamine
bellidifolia (r), Cerastium alpinum (r), C. re-
gelii (f£), Alopecurus alpinus (a), Saxifraga
cernua (r), Stellaria monantha (a), and Jun-
cus biglumis (r).

ISLET 3. Draba alpina (f), Ranunculus sul-
phureus (f{), Papaver radicatum (a), Saxi-
fraga cernua (f), S. caespitosa (0), S. oppo-
sitifolia (0), S. nivalis (0), Juncus biglumis
(f), Draba subcapitata (0), Luzula nivalis
(d), Alopecurus alpinus (f), Stellaria monan-
tha (0), Cerastium regelii (0), Poa abbre-
viata (0), and Arenaria rubella (r).

From an-examination of the composition
of these three islets, it can be seen that
there is no apparent succession in species;
the dominance or rarity of any one species
depends more on which was _ established
first.

C. DAMP BORDERS OF PONDS

As the snow melts, it forms numerous
ponds, temporary or permanent, around
which vegetation is often found. The plants
most often found in such habitats are: Sazi-
fraga oppositifolia (0), S. flagellaris (f),
S. caespitosa (0), S. nivalis (o-r), Braya pur-
purascens (r), Papaver radicatum (a), Ra-
nunculus sulphureus (f), Polygonum vivi-

a=abundant,
r=rare.

d=dominant,
o=occasional,

5) Key to abbreviations.
c=common, f=frequent,

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN
parum. (0), Lychnis apetala (0), Arenaria
rossii (0), Cerastium regelit (f£), Luzula ni-
valis (a), Juncus biglumis (a), Pleuropogon
sabinei (f), Alopecurus alpinus (d), and
Braya purpurascens (0-a).

D. SNOW-MELT MEADOWS

These meadows are formed by the seepage
of snow-melt water: from the bases of the
hills where snow persists late in the season.
They are dominated by Alopecurus alpinus
with the following plants in comparative
abundance: Equisetum variegatum (0),
Phippsia prope concinna (0), Arctagrostis
latifolia (0), Pleuropogon sabinei (0), Du-
pontia fisheri (0), Eriophorum scheuchzeri
(0), E. angustifolium (f), Carex aquatilis
(a), Luzula nivalis (c), Juncus biglumis (c),
Salix arctica (c), Polygonum viviparwm (c),
Lychnis apetala (c), Cerastium alpinum
(0), Arenaria rossii (r), Ranunculus sulphu-
reus (a), R. hyperboreus (0), Papaver radi-
catum (r), Cochlearia officinalis (0), Eu-
trema edwardsii (r), Cardamine bellidifo-
lia (0), Draba alpina (r), D. fladnizensis
(ec), Parrya arctica (0), Saxifraga caespitosa
(r), S. stellaris (0), S. nivalis (0), S. hircu-
lus (f), S. oppositifolia (r), and Dryas inte-
grifolia (0). It can easily be seen from this
list, that the snow-melt meadow is one of
the most verdant habitats in the area.

E. BEACH LINE HOLLOWS

The luxuriance of the vegetation in this
habitat is largely the result of two factors
that have helped build up a substrate: re-
fuse left by the Eskimo some four hundred
or more years ago, and the decay of marine
algae that have been washed up on the
shore. These beach lines may be divided
into two classes (1) damp beach lines, in
which mosses play a very important part in
the vegetation, and (2) drier, more exposed,
rocky beach lines. The main phanerogamic
plants are:

1. DAMP HOLLOWS OF BEACH LINES —

Alopecurus alpinus (a-d), Luzula nivalis (r),
Cerastium alpinum (f), C. regeli (f£), Stel-
laria monantha (0), Arenaria rubella (0),
Ranunculus sulphureus (ce), Papaver radica-
tum (r), Cochlearia officinalis (0), Cardami-
ne bellidifolia (o-r), Draba alpina (a), Par-
rya arctica (0), Saxifraga caespitosa (0), S.
nivalis (o-r), S. flagellaris (o-r), and S. op-
positifolia (0).

FIELD-NATURALIST

121

2. DRIER, EXPOSED, ROCKY BEACH LI-
NES — Poa abbreviata (a), Salix arctica (0),.
Oxyria digyna (0), Cerastium alpinum (f),
C. regeli (f), Stellaria laeta (0), Arenaria
rubella (f), Papaver radicatum (f), Draba
alpina (f), Parrya arctica (f), Saxifraga cer-
nua (0), S. caespitosa (c), S. oppositifolia
(d), and Dryas integrifolia (0).

F. MARSHY MEADOWS

Meadows near lakes and ponds show muck
the same vegetation as do the snow-melt
deltas. The conditions in these two habitats
are much the same, except that the former
are somewhat wetter. Phippsia prope con-
cinna (0) and Cardamine pratensis (r) were
found here in addition to the species listed
in D. Their presence is probably related to
the greater amount of water.

G. ESKIMO HOUSES

The houses of stone, sods, and bone, con-
tain the richest soil found in the entire
area. This soil is the result of rubbish and
nitrogenous waste left by the Eskimo who
formerly occupied them.

These houses are often situated on damp
shores of lakes, and consequently have the
same flora as habitats D and F with the
addition of Chrysosplenium tetrandrum (0),
and strangely the exclusion of Lychnis ape-
tala, Polygonum viviparum and Eutrema
edwardsii. In spite of the favourability for
its growth Cardamine pratensis in this ha-
bitat is very rare. Alopecurus alpinus, Lu-
zula nivalis, Poa abbreviata, and Juncus bi-
glwmis usually are dominant on the sods
of the house itself with scattered plants of
Puccinellia angustata, Arenaria rubella, Pa-
paver radicatum, Saxifraga oppositifolia, S.
flagellaris, S. nivalis, S. cernua and Ceras-
tium alpinum.

The houses on the dry exposed beach lines
bear the same vegetation as E 2, but the
plants are possibly in greater abundance on
the ruins than on the adjacent beach.

H. BRACKISH PONDS

Behind the present beach are ponds with
a remarkably small flora, for only Cochlea-
ria officinalis and sterile Puccinellia phry-
ganodes occur in any abundance on their
margins. The ponds have a green scum of
brackish-water algae, and the Puccinellia
often grows into the water; otherwise, they
are barren.

422 THE CANADIAN
The country inland from Resolute Bay is
not remarkably different from the sea-beach
coast. No glacial erratics were seen, but
a few outcrops were observed. The terrain
is made up mostly of broken rock of the
same type as that of the coastal fjaeldmark.
In the hollows the moss vegetation was, for
the most part, abundant, but few species
were represented. On the whole, except for
the mosses, the vegetation was disappointing.
Alopecurus alpinus was abundant in the
snow-melt meadows and the ever present
Saxifraga oppositifolia was found on the
hills. Also noted were Draba alpina, Arcta-
grostis latifolia, Saxifraga hirculus, Luzula
nivalis, Phippsia prope concinna, Parrya
arctica, and rarely, Dryas integrifolia.

ASSISTANCE BAY was but briefly ob-
served. On the whole, the bay seems well
sheltered by high, fairly abrupt hills. Its
rivers, which cut through steep gorges, ap-
pear to flow the year round. There was
considerably more limestone mud here than
at Resolute Bay.

The lowland barrens supported a com-
paratively flourishing vegetation, including
Dryas integrifolia (d), Saxifraga oppositi-
folia (f), Draba alpina (f), Parrya arctica
(f), Salix arctica (0), Papaver radicatum
(a). In the damp meadows surrounding
temporary or permanent ponds, a luxuriant
vegetation was found, including Salix arc-
tica (0), Draba fladnizensis (ec), Cochlearia
officinalis (ce), Cardamine bellidifolia (0),
Lychnis apetala (0), Arctagrostis latifolia
(0), Dupontia fisheri (0), Alopecurus alpi-
nus (d), Eriophorum angustifolium (a),
Juncus biglumis (0), Saxifraga cernua (0),
S. oppositifolia (0), Papaver radicatum (0),
Luzula nivalis (f£), Carex aquatilis (f), Ce-
rastium regeli (0), and Ranunculus sulphu-
reus (0).

CATALOGUE OF SPECIES

Polunin (1940) records 111 species plus 5
species of doubtful occurrence for his Dis-
trict 2 in the Canadian Eastern Arctic
(Devon, Cornwallis and Somerset Islands).
Of this number twenty are definitely rec-
orded for Cornwallis Island, three are
queried for some reason, and thirteen are
recorded as “c. everywhere numerous
collections from almost all localities’, but
no citations for the Island are given. Of this
latter thirteen, seven species are to be found

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69
in the Herbarium of the Universty of To-
ronto, the remaining six may possibly be
found at either Kew or British Museum.
Also of these thirteen only three, Poa arc-
tica, Saxifraga tricuspidata and Cassiope te-
tragona were not found by the senior au-
thor. Of the three that were queried, only
one, Vaccinium uliginosum was not found.

The present paper records 47, plus 4
doubtful species for Cornwallis Island; 19
are new or apparently new to the known
flora of Cornwallis Island; 3 are new to
District 2 as defined by Polunin (1940).

The known flora of the island is thus very
small, much smaller than that of Devon
island to the east, and Ellesmere Island to
the north. No Gamopetalae were collected,
and only two species, Cassiope tetragona and
Vaccinium uliginosum, are doubtfully rec-
orded in the list.

In the following list the numbers in italics
are the senior author’s collection numbers;
specimens are preserved in the Herbarium of
the Botany and Plant Pathology Division,
Science Service, Department of Agriculture,
Ottawa (DAO).

EQUISETACEAE

EQUISETUM VARIEGATUM Schleich. —
sterile; abundant in snow-melt meadows
among the mosses or in meadows of brooks
that drained snow-melt lakes; inconspicuous,
rarely exceeding 5 cm. in height; RESOLUTE

BAY: 279. New to the flora of Cornwallis

Island and District 2 of Polunin.
GRAMINEAE

ALOPECURUS ALPINUS Sm. — certainly

the most abundant grass in Southern Corn-
wallis Island; it is most luxuriant in snow-
melt and pond-margin meadows, but reaches
its greatest height (about 6 inches) on the
Eskimo house ruins; RESOLUTE BAY: 272.
ASSISTANCE BAY: Polunin (1940, p. 46)
records this species in District 2 as “ce. al-
most everywhere — fourteen records from
thirteen localities’, but does not cite a
Cornwallis Island specimen. There is a
Sutherland specimen in the Herbarium of
the University of Toronto labelled ‘“As-
sistance Bay, Lat. 74°40'N, Long. 94°16’'W,
July 24th 1851, from a small patch of vege-
tation at the foot of an accumulation of loose
rock top of Prospect Hill, Elevation 400
feet”.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN
ARCTAGROSTIS LATIFOLIA (R.Br.) Gri-
seb. — occasional in snow-melt and lakeside
meadows; RESOLUTE BAY: 614. New to
the flora of Cornwallis Island.

PHIPPSIA prope CONCINNA (Fries) Lin-
deb. — occasional in marshy snow-melt and
lakeside meadows; RESOLUTE BAY: 436
and 507; ASSISTANCE BAY: Polunin
(1940, ». 63), records a specimen under
Catabrosa algida as: “Sutherland (K)® as
Phippsia ‘monandra veg. only’. The speci-
mens at hand differ from Phippsia algida in
usually having only one stamen, anthers lar-
ger (0.6 to 0.8 mm. when wet), seed slight-
ly broader below the middle, and lemmas
pubescent on the back and measuring up to
2 mm. in length, hence appearing to be close
to P. concinna. No typical material of P.
concinna from Spitzbergen has been seen
however, so our specimens are but tentative-
ly referred here. The Assistance Bay speci-
men cited by Polunin is sterile and could
not be placed with either P. algida or the
series discussed here with any degree of
surety.

PLEUROPOGON SABINEI R.Br. — octa-
sional around damp borders of ponds and in
marshy snow-melt meadows; RESOLUTE
BAY: 430. New to the flora of Cornwallis
Island.

POA ABBREVIATA R.Br. — in sandy spots
and on dry islets of soil on the fjaeldmark;
RESOLUTE BAY: 278, 306, 327, and 369;
ASSISTANCE BAY: Polunin (1940, p. 65)
records this species as: “Sutherland 1851
(T) as “P. brevifolia?” and (K) as “P. ce-
nisia””. The Sutherland specimen in the
Herbarium of the University of Toronto is
labelled ‘Assistance Bay, Lat.: 74°40’N,
Long.: 94°16’W, July 24th 1851. From
around the Bay at various elevations — 30
to 300 feet, in grassy tufts where the dung
of foxes, ptarmigan and the owl accumulates
and where spiders and other insects
abound”.

POA ARCTICA R.Br. — Polunin (1940, p.
72) records this species for District 2 as
“e. everywhere — numerous records from
almost all localities’, but does not cite a
Cornwallis Island specimen. Apparently ab-
sent, there are neither Ede or Sutherland
6) Abbreviations of herbaria cited by Polunin: T—To-

ronto University, Toronto, Ont.; K—Kew, Royal Bo-

tanic Gardens; B—British Museum of Natural His-
tory, London.

FIELD-NATURALIST

123:

specimens of this species in the Herbarium
of the University of Toronto, nor is it rec-
orded by Sutherland (1852).

DUPONTIA FISHERI R.Br. — occasional
around borders of ponds and in damp snow-
melt meadows; RESOLUTE BAY: 311. New
to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

PUCCINELLIA PHRYGANODES (Trin.)
Scribn. & Merrill — sterile; on margins of
brackish pool behind tidal ridge; RESO-
LUTE BAY. 432. New to the flora of Corn-
wallis Island.

PUCCINELLIA ANGUSTATA R.Br. — in
clumps in bog and around Eskimo house
ruins; RESOLUTE BAY: 444 and 581A.
New to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

FESTUCA BAFFINENSIS Polunin — dry
islets of soil surrounding limestone boulder
in fjaeldmark; rare; RESOLUTE BAY:
339. New to the flora of Cornwallis Island
and District 2 of Polunin.

CYPERACEAE

ERIOPHORUM SCHEUCHZERI Hoppe —
occasional in snow-melt meadows and around
boggy margins of pools; RESOLUTE BAY:
503. New to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

ERIOPHORUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM Honcke-
ney var. TRISTE Th. Fries — occasional in
moist meadows; RESOLUTE BAY: 486. Po-
lunin (1940), p. 104) records E. angustifo-
lum in District 2 as “ec. everywhere —
numerous records from almost all locali-
ties” but does not cite a Cornwallis Island
specimen. There are no Ede or Sutherland
collections of this species from Cornwallis
Island in the Herbarium of the University
of Toronto. The record of E. polystachum
(Sutherland 1852. 2: elxxxix) probably be-
longs here, so that E. angustifolium cannot
be recorded as new to the flora of Corn-
wallis Island.

CAREX MISANDRA R.Br. — occasional on
damp margins of bog near the brook east.
of Ptarmigan River; RESOLUTE BAY: 505.
New to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

CAREX AQUATILIS Wahl. — frequent in
damp meadows; RESOLUTE BAY: 612.
New to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

JUNCACEAE

LUZULA NIVALIS’ (Laest) Beurl. —
abundant on hummocks in wet muskeg and

124 THE CANADIAN
occasional on damp islets of soil on the
fjaeldmark; sometimes dominant on the
sods of ancient Eskimo houses; RESOLUTE
BAY: 273, 312, and 372. New to WE flora of
Cornwallis Island.

JUNCUS BIGLUMIS L. — rare to frequent
on islets of soil in the fjaeldmark; in wet
snow-melt meadows it is quite common
while it is sometimes dominant on the sods
of ancient Eskimo houses; RESOLUTE
BAY: 304, 310, 371, and 530; ASSISTANCE
BAY: 268; recorded by Polunin (1940, p.
146), as “Sutherland 1851 (T, K) as “J. triglu-
mis” ”. Sutherland’s collection in the Herba-
rium of the University of Toronto has the
following data: “Assistance Bay, Lat. 74°
40'N, Long. 94°16’W. August 7th 1851. From
a soft and moist grassy plot. Elevation 30
feet”.

SALICACEAE

SALIX ARCTICA Pall. — margins of lakes
and ponds, in hummocky meadows, exposed
rocky areas and rarely on islets of soil in
the fjaeldmark; RESOLUTE BAY: 274 and
438; ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by Polu-
nin (1940, p. 158) as “Sutherland 1851 (K)
as “S. cordifolia”’’”’. There is a Sutherland
specimen in the Herbarium of the University
of Toronto labelled: ‘Assistance Bay, Lat.
74°40'N, Long. 94°16’W. July 24th 1851.

From the side of Prospect Hill. Southern
exposure”’.

POLYGONACEAE
OXYRIA DIGYNA (L.) Hill — _ locally

abundant in damp sandy soil of beach line
and with Alopecurus on humus among KEski-
mo house ruins; RESOLUTE BAY: 84 and
276. Polunin (1940, p. 176) records this spe-
cies in District 2 as “ce. everywhere —
numerous records from almost all locali-
ties” but does not cite a Cornwallis Island
specimen. There are no Ede or Sutherland
collections from Cornwallis Island in the
Herbarium of the University of Toronto.
Recorded by Sutherland (1852. 2: clxxxix)
as O. reniformis; specimens are probably at
either Kew or British Museum.

POLYGONUM VIVIPARUM L. — common
in snow-melt meadows, and around damp
borders of ponds; RESOLUTE BAY: 175
and 301; ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by
Polunin (1940, p. 178) as “Sutherland 1851
(T, K)”. Three Sutherland specimens in the
Herbarium of the University of Toronto are
jJabelled ‘“‘Assistance Bay, Lat. 74°40'N,

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Long. 94°16’W. From an elevation of at
least 350 to 400 feet. W.N.W. of Kate Aus-
tin’s Lake, over a chain of lakes. July 24th,
1851 [2] and July 26th, 1851”.

CARYOPHYLLACEAE

LYCHNIS APETALA lL. var. ARCTICA
(Th. Fries) Cody (L. apetala var. nutans
Boivin, L. apetala sensu Polunin (1940) ) —
common in snow-melt meadows, and around
damp borders of ponds; RESOLUTE BAY:
303; ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by Polu-
nin (1940, p. 185) as L. apetala “Sutherland
1851 (K)”.

CERASTIUM ALPINUM L. — occasional on
exposed rocky areas and on dry islets of
soil in the fjaeldmark; frequent on the drier
exposed rocky beach lines with scattered
plants being found on the sods of the an-
cient Eskimo dwellings; RESOLUTE BAY:
106, 205, 224, 299, 366, 409; ALLEN BAY:
200; ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by Polu-
nin (1940, p. 187) as “ce. everywhere —
numerous records from almost all localities
incl. “Cornwallis Island, Assistance Bay,
(Sutherland 1852, II p. clxxxix, sub nom.
var. ‘glabatum’)””. There are two col-
lections from Assistance Bay identified by
Hooker (Sutherland 1852), one as C. alpi-
num, and the other as C. alpinum var. gla-
batum. The record of var. glabatum is pro-
bably referable to the C. regelz, for Polu-
nin (1940, p. 190) records both the Uni-
versity of Toronto and Kew specimens la-
belled as “C. alpinum var. glabratum”, under
that species. The glabatum used by Suther-
land is obviously a mis-spelling of glabra-
tum.

CERASTIUM REGELII Ostenfeld — fre-
quent on islets of soil on the fjaeldmark,
damp borders of ponds and in beach line
hollows; RESOLUTE BAY: 437, 490, 509,
529, 546, and 592; all of these collections
are non-flowering but some have vegetative
buds in the axils of a few of the leaves;
ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by Polunin
(1940, p. 190) as ‘‘? Assistance Bay, Suther-
land 1851 (T, K) as “C. alpinum var. glabra-
tum” ”. The specimen in the Herbarium of
the University of Toronto and Schofield 529
from Resolute Bay are atypical, approaching
some forms of C. alpinum.

STELLARIA LAETA Richardson (S. longi-
pes sensu Polunin pro parte) — abundant
locally on ruins of an old Eskimo habitation;
RESOLUTE BAY: 576. ASSISTANCE

July-Sept. 1955]

BAY ?: the specimen collected by Ede pre-
served in the Herbarium of the University
of Toronto is a scrap without flowers, but
leaf shape and pubescence of the upper
internodes refer it here, rather than to the
following species; it is recorded by Polunin
(1940, p. 193) under S. longipes as “Corn-
wallis Island, Ede 1851 (T) f. humilis”.

STELLARIA MONANTHA Hultén var. MO-
NANTHA (8S. longipes sensu Polunin pro
parte) — occasional in moist islets of soil
of limestone fjaeldmark; RESOLUTE BAY:
333. New to the flora of Cornwallis Island
and District 2 of Polunin.

ARENARIA RUBELLA (Wahl.) Sm. — ex-
posed rocky areas and islets of soil on the
fjaeldmark and occasional in both damp and
drier hollows of beach lines: RESOLUTE
BAY: 108, 275, 439, 545, 549, and 577; Allen
Bay: 172; ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by
Polunin (1940, p. 200) as “Sutherland 1851
CKON:

ARENARIA ROSSII R.Br. — in drier spots
of boggy area surrounding Eskimo house
ruins near Foot Lake; RESOLUTE BAY:
446; ASSISTANCE BAY: recorded by Po-
lunin (1940, p. 202), as “Assistance Bay,
Sutherland 1851 (K)” and also ‘“ ‘Opposite
Browne Island’ (McClintock ex Markham
1909, p. 245)”. The petals of No. 446 are
definitely longer than the calyx and would
seem to be referable to what Polunin has
described as var. daethiana (1940, p. 201).
Bruggemann and Calder (1953) have, how-
ever, Shown that this is the typical phase of
A. rossi and that var. daethiana should be
included in the synonomy of that species.

RANUNCULACEAE

RANUNCULUS HYPERBOREUS Rottb. —
in water of lake by the Eskimo house ruins
on the 8th beach line; sterile; RESOLUTE
BAY. 575. New to the flora of Cornwallis
Island.

RANUNCULUS SULPHUREUS Soland. —
common in the beach-line hollows and in
snow-melt meadows; frequent around the
damp borders of ponds and on islets of soil
on the fjaeldmark; RESOLUTE BAY 85,
86, 215 and 611; ALLEN BAY. 201; AS-
SISTANCE BAY: Polunin (1940, p. 217)
records this species from Assistance Bay as
“Sutherland 1851 (T) as “R. glacialis” and
“R. frigidus’”. There are two specimens
collected by Sutherland preserved in the

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

125

Herbarium of the University of Toronto,
with essentially the same label data ‘“‘As-
sistance Bay, Lat. 74°40'N, Long. 94°16’W.
Elevation twenty to thirty feet. From moist
localities, taking root in a deposit of peat
or humus among the loose shingle. July
S0thyeteoilee

PAPAVERACEAE

PAPAVER RADICATUM Rottb. — abundant
on islets of soil in the fjaeldmark and
around the damp borders of ponds; scat-
tered along the beach lines and on the
ancient Eskimo houses; rare in wetter
localities such as the snow-melt meadows;
RESOLUTE BAY: 90, 216, 222, 281, 295, 326,
355 and 410. ASSISTANCE BAY: Polunin
(1940, p. 224) records this species in Dis-
trict 2. as “ec. everywhere — numerous rec-
ords from almost all localities’ but does
not cite a Cornwallis Island specimen. There
is a Sutherland specimen in the Herbarium
of the University of Toronto labelled ‘As-
sistance Bay, Lat. 74°40'N, Long. 94°16'’W,
July 23rd 1851. Penny’s Voyage” as well as
an Ede collection labelled ‘Cornwallis
Island’. Recorded as P. nudicale in Suther-
land (1852. 2: eclxxxix).

CRUCIFERAE

COCHLEARIA OFFICINALIS UL. var.
GROENLANDICA (L.) Gelert — damp
meadows in the lowland fjaeldmark, damp
hollows of beach lines and around the brack-
ish ponds behind the present beach; RESO-
LUTE BAY: 87 and 445; ASSISTANCE
BAY: 262; recorded by Polunin (1940, p.
227) under C. officinalis as “Sutherland 1851
(T) as “C. fenestrata””. The Sutherland
specimen in the Herbarium of the University
of Toronto is labelled “Assistance Bay, Lat.
74°40'N, Long. 94°16’W, July 24th 1851.
Southern exposure, elevation 400 feet. N.W.
side of Bay”.

EUTREMA EDWARDSII R.Br. — occasional
in snow-melt meadows and similar habitats;
RESOLUTE BAY 506; ALLEN BAY: 176.
New to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

CARDAMINE BELLIDIFOLIA L. — occea-
sional in snow-melt meadows and less fre-
quently in the damp hollows of beach lines
and in islets of soil on the fjaeldmark; RESO-
LUTE BAY, 89, 286, 359 and 443; AS-
SISTANCE BAY: recorded by Polunin (1940,
p. 229) “Sutherland 1851 (T, K) inel. f.
laxa”’. The Sutherland specimen in the

126 THE CANADIAN
Herbarium of the University of Toronto is
labelled “Assistance Bay, Lat. 74°40’N,
Long. 94°16’W, July 23rd, 1851. Finely di-
vided soil’.

CARDAMINE PRATENSIS L. — rare in wet
boggy area at margin of pond east of Recon-
naissance Peak and in similar habitats else-
where; plants non-flowering; RESOLUTE
BAY: 434. New to the flora of Cornwallis
Island.

DRABA ALPINA L. — found in a variety
of habitats: islets of soil on barren _hill-
sides; dry gravelly southern slopes; dry
sandy soil of lowlands; drier hummocks of
shingly beaches; damp mossy tussocks near
lake; wet boggy edge of small lake; and
damp peaty soil near riverbank. 15 col-
lections of this very variable species were
made: 11 from RESOLUTE BAY, 2 from
ALLEN BAY, and 2 from ASSISTANCE
BAY. Polunin (1940, p. 235) records this
species from Assistance Bay as “(Suther-
land 1852 II p. 189, sub nom. D. glacialis)”.
There is a Sutherland specimen in the
Herbarium of the University of Toronto
labelled ‘“‘Assistance Bay, Lat. 74°40’N, Long.
94°16'W, July 21st 1851. Dry localities”.

DRABA SUBCAPITATA Simmons — islets
of soil on the limestone fjaeldmark and on
the beach lines and ancient Eskimo dwell-
ings; RESOLUTE BAY: 74, 107 and 204.
New to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

DRABA FLADNIZENSIS Wulfen — scat-
tered on hummocks in snow-melt meadows
and in similar habitats; RESOLUTE BAY:
433; ALLEN BAY: 173; ASSISTANCE
BAY: recorded by Polunin (1940, p. 237) as
“Sutherland 1851 (T, K) as “D. glacialis
var.” and “D. rupestris””. There are two
Sutherland specimens from Assistance Bay,
Lat. 74°40’N, Long. 94°16’W in the Herba-
rium of the University of Toronto: (1) Au-
gust 7, 1851. Elevation 30 feet above the
level of the sea, dry soil; and (2) July 23,
1851, S.E. side of Bay, Southern and South-
western exposure.

BRAYA PURPURASCENS (R.Br.) Bunge
var. DUBIA (R.Br.) O.E. Schultz—abundant
in more or less muddy depressions in fjaeld-
mark, and borders of small lakes; RESO-
LUTE BAY. 340 and 613; ASSISTANCE
BAY: recorded by Polunin (1940, p. 250) as
“Cornwallis Island, Ede 1851 (T) as “B. gla-
bella”; Assistance Bay, Sutherland 1851

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

(K, B) var. dubia as “B. glabella””’. The Ede
collection bears no further information than
that given by Polunin.

PARRYA ARCTICA R.Br. — this species
grows luxuriantly as rounded deep-rooted
clusters by rivers and snow-melt areas in
moist soil otherwise bare of vegetation; it is
however found in every habitat, including
the highest of the hills (800 feet). The rich
purple flowers somewhat replace those of
Saxifraga oppositifolia which almost finishes.
blooming by the time it begins. Scanty fruit
was set in 1949: a raceme of 6-8 flowers
usually produced only one or at most, two
silicles. RESOLUTE BAY: 82, 293, 370, 501,
and 582; ASSISTANCE BAY: 264; recorded
by Polunin (1940, p. 251) as “Assistance Bay,
Sutherland 1851 (T, B, K) as Platypetalum.
purpurascens’. There are three Sutherland
specimens in the Herbarium of the Uni-
versity of Toronto from Assistance Bay, Lat.
74°40'N, Long. 94°16’W.: (1) and (2) from
finely divided soil; elevation 30 feet, S.E.
side of the bay (no date), and (3) July 19th
1851; northwest side of the bay; moist soil.

PARRYA ARCTICA R.Br. f. ALBIFLORA
Boivin — occasional, occurring with the
typical form; RESOLUTE BAY: 88. New
to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

SAXIFRAGACEAE

SAXIFRAGA CERNUA L. — occasional in
wet mossy meadow areas bordering some of
the ponds and their drainage brooks, on
islets of soil on the fjaeldmark, on drier
beach lines and ancient Eskimo dwellings;
RESOLUTE BAY: 271; ASSISTANCE BAY:
Polunin (1940, p. 255) records this species
in District 2 as “ce. everywhere — numerous
records from almost all localities” but does
not cite a Cornwallis Island specimen. There
are two specimens in the Herbarium of the
University of Toronto: one is labelled “Corn-
wallis Island. 1851. C. Ede RN”; the other,
a Sutherland collection, is labelled ‘‘As-
sistance Bay, Lat. 74°40'N, Long. 94°16’W.
July 12th 1851. Wet localities. In deposits
of peat (humus)”.

SAXIFRAGA CAESPITOSA L. — common
to occasional along the beach lines and the
associated ancient Eskimo dwellings, in
damp snow-melt and lakeside meadows, and
on islets of soil in the fjaeldmark; RESO-
LUTE BAY: 324; ASSISTANCE BAY: Po-
lunin (1940, p. 257) records this species as

July-Sept. 1955]

“e. everywhere — numerous records from al-
most all localities’, but does not cite a
Cornwallis Island specimen. There is a
Sutherland specimen in the Herbarium of
the University of Toronto labelled ‘“As-
sistance Bay, Lat. 74°40’N, Long. 94°16’W,
July 23rd 1851. Dry localities.”

SAXIFRAGA STELLARIS L. var. COMOSA
Retz. — occasional at the base of tussocks
with Alopecurus alpinus and Eriophorum
angustifolium in wet snow-melt and pond-
margin meadows. With one exception, all
plants seen in the field belonged to forma
asexualis Engler and Irmischer, the one ex-
ception being a plant with a single white
bud that had not yet burst by August 6;
RESOLUTE BAY: 405. New to the flora of
Cornwallis Island.

SAXIFRAGA NIVALIS L. — occasional to
rare on dry islets of soil on the barren hills,
in frost polygon cracks with Alopecurus
alpinus, Eriophorum angustifolium and Saxi-
fraga hirculus, on damp borders of ponds,
snow-melt meadows, and damp beach lines
and their associated ancient Eskimo dwell-
ings; RESOLUTE BAY: 203, 289, 325 and
583. ASSISTANCE BAY: Polunin (1940, p.
261), records this species in District 2 as “‘.
everywhere — numerous records from al-
most all localities” but does not cite a speci-
men from Cornwallis Island. There are two
specimens in the Herbarium of the Uni-
versity of Toronto: one is labelled “Corn-
wallis Island. 1851. C. Ede RN”; the other
is a Sutherland specimen labelled ‘“As-
sistance Bay, Lat. 74°40’N, Long. 94°16'’W.
Aug. 7th 1851. Moist locations. Elevation
30 feet.”

SAXIFRAGA TRICUSPIDATA Rottb. — Po-
lunin (1940, p. 264) records this species for
District 2 as “ce. everywhere — numerous
records from almost all localities”. Appa-
rently absent, there is no Sutherland or
Ede collection of this species in the Herba-
rium of the University of Toronto, nor is
this species represented in any of the other
collections studied.

SAXIFRAGA FLAGELLARIS Willd. — occa-
sional to rare around moist borders of per-
manent or temporary ponds, and in the damp
hollows of the beach lines and on their
associated ancient Eskimo dwellings grow-
ing among mosses or grasses, or often, on
the damp muddy limestone soil; RESO-
LUTE BAY: 168 and 202; ASSISTANCE

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

127

BAY: recorded by Polunin (1940, p. 265) as
“Sutherland 1851 (T, K)”. There are three
Sutherland specimens in the Herbarium of
the University of Toronto, the one with the
most complete data is labelled “Assistance
Bay, Lat. 74°40’N, Long. 94°16’W. July 24,
1851. Occurring at various heights, from
30 to 300 and 400 feet, in flower earliest at
the lowest height. Localities moist early in
the season, but dry generally towards the
end of July and the beginning of August.”

SAXIFRAGA HIRCULUS L. — frequent in
snow-melt and lakeside meadows; RESO-
LUTE BAY. 270. Polunin (1940, p. 266)
records this species as ‘ec. everywhere —
numerous records from almost all localities’,
but does not cite a Cornwallis Island speci-
men. There are no Sutherland or Ede col-
lections of this species in the Herbarium of .
the University of Toronto. Apparently new
to the flora of Cornwallis Island.

SAXIFRAGA OPPOSITIFOLIA L. — this
species is found in almost all the habitats
of southern Cornwallis Island from com-
pletely rocky exposed areas to hummocks
in the wet snow-melt and lakeside meadows.
It is one of the most conspicuous flowers in
the region; RESOLUTE BAY: 69, 71, 73, 79,
80 and 81; ASSISTANCE BAY: 263; Po-
lunin (1940, p. 269) records this species in
District 2 as ‘‘ec. everywhere — numerous
records from almost all localities’, but
does not cite a Cornwallis Island specimen.
There are two specimens from Cornwallis
Island in the Herbarium of the University
of Toronto: one is labelled “C. Ede RN
1851. Cornwallis Island”, the other is a
Sutherland collection labelled “Assistance
Bay, Lat. 74°40'N, Long. 94°16’W, July 15th
1851. Flowering. In fruit in the season, but
always varying in this respect according to
the elevation and exposure as well as the
[location ?]”’.

The material in the senior author’s col-
lection is extremely variable: No. 80 is a
double-flowered form; No. 73 is a narrow-
petaled form with petals measuring only 34
mm. in width, as compared to other speci-
mens from the area which measure 5-8 mm.
in width, thus approaching an entity de-
scribed by Hayek from the Alps as subvar.
stenopetala; No. 79 has the petals light
mauve, rather than the typical purple, and
is thus intermediate to the white or cream-
eoloured flowers of Nos. 71 and 91 which
have been described as forma albiflora

128

(Lange) Fern. This white-flowered form
has apparently been recorded from the Can-
adian Eastern Arctic from only Southamp-
ton Island (Cody 1951).

CHRYSOSPLENIUM TETRANDRUM (Lund)
Th. Fries (C. alternifolium L. var. tetran-
drum Lund)—wet depressions of the swampy
area surrounding the Eskimo house ruins at
Foot Lake: RESOLUTE BAY: 435. New to
the flora of Cornwallis Island.

ROSACEAE

DRYAS INTEGRIFOLIA M. Vahl—abundant
at the bases or south sides of hills, and in
‘somewhat sheltered areas on the fjaeldmark
and occasional in snow-melt meadows and
drier exposed rocky beach lines; RESO-
LUTE BAY: 174 and 302; ASSISTANCE
-BAY: Polunin (1940, p. 287) records this
species in District 2 as ‘“‘ec. everywhere —
numerous records from almost all locali-
ties” but does not cite a Cornwallis Island
specimen. There is a Sutherland collection
in the Herbarium of the University of To-
ronto labelled “Assistance Bay, Lat. 74°40’N,
Long. 94°16’W. July 19th 1851. Dry soil’.

ERICACEAE

CASSIOPE TETRAGONA (L.) D. Don —
Polunin (1940, p. 311) records this species
in District 2 as “c. everywhere — numerous
records from almost all localities’, but does
not cite a Cornwallis Island specimen. Ap-
parently absent, there are no Ede or
Sutherland specimens of this species from
Cornwallis Island in the Herbarium of the
University of Toronto. It is not recorded
from Assistance Bay by Sutherland (1852).

VACCINIUM ULIGINOSUM L. — Polunin
(1940, p. 316) records this species as “?
Cornwallis Island, Assistance Bay, Suther-
land (K)”. Apparently absent, there are no
Ede of Sutherland specimens of this spe-
cies from Cornwallis Island in the Herba-
rium of the University of Toronto. It is not
recorded from Assistance Bay by Sutherland
(1852).

Acknowledgements

The junior author would like to thank
the following for their kindness in making
collections available for study: Dr. J. H.
Soper, University of Toronto for the “Bota-
nical Scrapbook” compiled by Mr. Adam
White; Dr. N.W. Radforth, McMaster Uni-
versity for the collections of Dr. W.D. Mac-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Clement, and Miss D. Brown, Defence Re-
search Northern Laboratory, Fort Churchill,
Man., for the collections of Major Hugh Mil-
ler. The senior author would also like to
thank the following for their interest and
encouragement during the survey: E.H.N.
Smith and W. Butler, Entomology Division,
Science Service, Canada Department of Agri-
culture, Dr. H.B. Collins Jr. of the Smith-
sonian Institute, Washington, D.C., Jean
Michea of the National Museum of Canada
and R.C.M.P. Constable H.H. Aime. The
assistance of the Canada Defence Research
Board, RCAF, USAF, and Canada Depart-
ment of Transport, without which this work
could not have been accomplished, is also
gratefully acknowledged.

References

Bruggemann, P.F. and J.A. Calder (1953):
Botanical investigations in northeast
Ellesmere Island, 1951. Can. Field-Nat.
67:157-174.

Cody, W.J. (1951): Additions and annota-
tions to the flora of Southampton Island,
Northwest Territories, Canada. Can.
Field-Nat. 65:140-143.

Harwood, T. (1951): Voyage around Corn-
wallis Island. Arctic Circular. 4:18-29.

Markham, Sir C.R. (1909): Life of Admiral
Sir Leopold McClintock. London. 1-139.

Polunin, N. (1936): A botanical scrapbook.
Rhodora 38:409-413.

——(1940): Botany of the Canadian Eastern
Arctic. Pt. 1. Pteridophyta and Sperma-
tophyta. Nat. Mus. Can. Bull. 92 (Biol.
Ser. 24) 1-408.

Steere, W.C. (1951): Bryophyta of Arctic
America. IV. The mosses of Cornwallis
Island. Bryologist. 54:181-202.

Sutherland, Peter C. (1852): Journal of a
voyage in Baffin’s Bay and Barrow
Straits, in the year 1850-1851, performed
by H.M. Ships ‘Lady Franklin’ and ‘So-
phia’, under the command of Mr. William
Penny, in search of the missing crews
of H.M. Ships Erebus and Terror. Lon-
don. 1:1-506; 2:1-363 and appendix pp.
i-Ccxxxiili.

Thorsteinsson, R. and Y.O. Fortier (1954):
Report of progress on the geology of
Cornwallis Island, Arctic Archipelago,
Northwest Territories. Geol. Surv. Can-
ada. Paper 53-24: 1-25 and map.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

129

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF YARMOUTH COUNTY,
NOVA SCOTIA?

W. L. KLAWwE
Atlantic Biological Station, St. Andrews, New Brunswick.

URING the summer cf 1953 a small col-

lection of vascular plants was made in
Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia. Most of the
collecting was carried out at Wedgeport and
its immediate vicinity. The collection has
been placed at the Herbarium of Vascular
Plants, University of Toronto. A few of the
findings appear worthy of record. Listed
plants are first findings for the County un-
less otherwise indicated.

I am indebted to Mr. D. S. Erskine for his
examination of the collection and his continu-
ing advice.

Dennstaedtia punctilobula (Michx.) Moore.
Dense mixed woods, Wedgeport, July 5, 1953,
11112. Dry situation in coniferous woods,
Wedgeport, July 31, 1953, 1287.

Sagittaria cuneata Sheldon. Damp shore of
Tusket River, Tusket, July 12, 1953, 1179.

Corallorhiza maculata Raf. Dense conifer-
ous woods, Wedgeport, July 29, 1953, 1258.

Spiranthes romanzoffiana Cham. Exposed
barrens, Upper Wedgeport, July 26, 1953,
1235. Roadside in coniferous woods, sandy
soil, Wedgeport, July 29, 1953, 1255.

Rumex orbiculatus Gray. Damp shore of a
small creek, Wedgeport, July 18, 1953, 1155.

Salsola kali L. Gravelly sea-shore, Wedge-
port, June 14, 1953, 936.

Cerastium biebersteinii DC. Waste place,
dry situation, Wedgeport, June 16, 1953, 942.
This plant is commonly planted and occa-
sional escapes were observed.

Sarracenia purpurea L. forma plena. D. S.
Erskine forma nov. Planta staminibus car-
pellisque in petalibus totius transformatis.
Sphagnum bog, Wedgeport, July 1, 1953,

1) Received for publication November 22,
2) Collector’s rumber.

1954,

1049. One individual with petal-like struc-
tures arranged to form a rosulate flower;
stamens and pistils not developed.

Oenothera biennis L. var. hirsutissima Gray.
Open roadside, dry situation, Tusket, July
12, 1953, 1190. This plant was previously
reported from Kings County and Guys-
borough County. See D. S. Erskine, Rhodora
53: 264-270, 1951.

Monotropa hypopithys L. Dense coniferous
woods, Upper Wedgeport, July 26, 1953,
1232.

Gerardia maritima Raf. forma alba. D. S.
Erskine forma nov. Planta epurpurata co-
rollis albis. Salt-marsh, Wedgeport, July 30,
19538, 1276. This white flowering form is not
uncommon and grows with the purple flower-
ing form.

Plantago oliganthos R. & S.
Wedgeport, July 4, 1953, 1082.

Salt-marsh,

Lobelia spicata Lam. Dry pasture, Wedge-
port, August 3, 1953, 1300. Only previous
record for the province from the top of
Cape Blomidon in Kings County.

Galium aparine L. Rocky sea-shore, Wedge-
port, September 7, 1953, 1329.

Eupatorium perfoliatum L. Wet shore of
Tusket River, Tusket, July 12, 1953, sighted
only.

Aster ericoides L. Dry meadow, Wedge-
port, July 30, 1953, 1272. There is no pub-
lished record of this species for the pro-
vince but it has been previously collected
in Hants County by J. S. Erskine.

Hypochoeris radicata L. Dry pasture,
Wedgeport, July 5, 1953, 1104. This col-
lection indicates that the plant is spreading
from Yarmouth, its station of introduction.

130 THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris), breed-
ing in Saguenay County, Quebec. — During
the period July 5 to September 20, 1950, the
writer operated a banding station at Baie
Johan Beetz, Saguenay County, Quebec. The
station was first set up by the Northeastern
Wildlife Station in 1947, and since 1950 has
been operated by the Canadian Wildlife Ser-
vice. Trapping is undertaken at Lac Salé,
three miles inland from Baie Johan Beetz.
Lac Salé is one of a chain of small water
bodies which are found at the base of an
escarpment running from Havre St. Pierre
to Natashquan (70 miles). Black duck (Anas
rubripes), Pintail (Anas acuta), and Green-
winged Teal (Anas carolinensis) concentrate
on those lakes each fall, the feeding areas
serving as an effective check to migration.

On August 30, 1950, the writer trapped
two downy young Ring-necks, a male and
a female, on the Piashti River, six miles in-
land from Baie Johan Beetz. The birds were
approximately two-thirds grown and were
part of a brood of four. The male was shot
on October 20, 1950, at Little Otter Creek,
Addison County, Vermont. As far as the
writer knows, these birds constitute the first
breeding record from the north shore of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence in the Anticosti Island
region.

Wright (1948, Trans. 13th N.A. Wildlife
Conf., 356-365) reported that a survey made
by him had failed to note any breeding
Ring-necked Ducks north of the Maritime
Provinces. In 1949, Charles Bartlett, of the
Northeastern Wildlife Station, Fredericton,
New Brunswick, made the first captures of
Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris) at the
banding site. The fact that he banded as
many as 88 of these birds was one of several
evidences that in recent years the species
has greatly expanded its range in the north-
east. Springer (Auk. 66:200, 1949) reported
an adult male banded at Orland Refuge, IIli-
nois on March 23, 1945, and shot on October
27, 1945, at Mingan, 80 miles west of Baie
Johan Beetz. Tuck (Can. Field-Nat.,64 (5):
200-201, 1950) reported the first breeding
records from Newfoundland, and since that
time an increasing number has been noted in
the Gander area. Hewitt (Can. Field-Nat.
64 (1):52-53, 1950) reported the birds breed-
ing at Lochaber Bay, Labelle County, Quebec.
— GRAHAM COOCH, Canadian Wildlife Ser-
vice, Ottawa, Ontario.

A dark specimen of the giant slug, Limax
maximus L., collected at London, Ontario. —
On June 27, 1953, Mr. H. J. Wheaton was
engaged in sorting out an accumulation of
old lumber, which had been undisturbed for
several years, beneath the verandah of a
house in London, Ontario. In the course of
this activity he found a large slug on a piece
of the lumber and turned it over to the
writer for examination. The slug was kept
in a jar and died after a few days. While
alive and in active movement the slug ex-
tended to a length of about five inches and
when dead and preserved in fluid was three
and five-sixteenth inches long. The whole of
the upper surface and the sides of the body
were uniformly dark gray, verging on black,
except for a few small dots of white on the
anterior end of the mantle. The foot of the
animal was dull white. Dr. J. Oughton,
Ontario Agricultural College, Guelph, On-
tario, examined the specimen, including the
features of its alimentary tract and repro-
ductive system, and identified it as a dark
example of the giant slug, Limax maximus
L. The dissected specimen, preserved in
fluid, is deposited in the collection of the
Department of Zoology, University of West-
ern Ontario.

Limax maximus L., introduced from Eu-
rope, has been reported in Ontario by La-
rocque (1938, 1948, 1953) and Oughton
(1948) from Ottawa and Toronto where it
occurs mainly in the vicinity of human habi-
tations and in greenhouses. In its typical
form (Pilsbry, 1948) this slug is light in co-
lour with the mantle spotted with black and
the back streaked with black bands usually
broken into spots. Pilsbry reports further
that “rarely it is uniform pale, without mark-
ings, or sometimes suffused with blackish
throughout”. The specimen collected by Mr.
Wheaton at London was in this latter cate-
gory for the dark gray colour of the whole
upper portion of the body masked any pat-
tern of black spots or bands on its surface.

LITERATURE CITED

Larocque, A. 1938. Further additions to the
Ottawa list of Mollusca. Can. Field-
Nat., 52: 106-108.

1948. Distributional notes on
Can. Field-Nat.,

Larocque, A.
Canadian Mollusca.
62: 36-37.

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN

Larocque, A. 1953. Catalogue of the recent
Mollusca of Canada. Natnl. Mus. Can-
ada, Bull. 129.

‘Oughton, J. 1948. A zoogeographical study
of the land snails of Ontario. Univ.
Tcronto Studies, Biol. Series, No. 57.

Pilsbry, H. A. 1948. Land Mollusca of North
America (north of Mexico). Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philadelphia, Monogr. 3, vol. 2, part
2

W. W. JUDD,

Department of Zoology,
University of Western Ontario,
London, Ontario.

Torilis japonica in the Ottawa District. —
An extensive colony of a white-flowered Um-
bellifer beside Route 11 at Ironside, three
miles north of Hull, P.Q., attracted my at-
tention on August 14, 1954, on my return
from a cycling trip in the Gatineau. The
fragment taken was sufficient to identify it
as Torilis japonica (Houtt.) DC., a Eurasiatic
species introduced in North America at
widely scattered points. As this material was
inadequate for a herbarium voucher and
duplicates, material for the Department of
Agriculture Herbarium was taken on the
19th by I. J. Bassett and G. A. Mulligan of
the Weeds Section as their number 3212.
The following data were recorded: Four to
five acre infestation along roadside bank
and in old pasture field particularly in the
shade of sugar maples, in clay loam soil. Al-
though quite near a farmhouse, there was
no evidence of intentional introduction, and
the station seemed old.

No other Canadian specimens were then
in the Departmental herbarium, but one ar-
rived on exchange from Ontario Agricultural
College. Professor F. H. Montgomery, of the
Department of Botany, had the following
records, which he most kindly permits me to
publish: ONTARIO. Wentworth Co.: Glanford
Township, Mount Hope, growing along a
hedge, located here for years but not spread-
ing; not apparently planted, Aug. 16, 1954,
D. R. Sands 1426, (OAC, DAO); Kent Co.:
Chatham, Sept. 1, 1946, Donald Young (OAC).
— DAVID ERSKINE.1
1 Dept. of Geography, University of Toronto, and Sur-

vey assistant (1954) with Botany and Plant Pathology

Division, Canada Department of Agriculture, Science
Service, Ottawa.

FIELD-NATURALIST

131

Notes on the Black Swift and Vaux Swift
at their Nesting Sites in Central British Co-
Yumbia. — The black Swift, Cypseloides niger
borealis (Kennerly), and the Vaux Swift,
Chaetura vauxi vauxi (Townsend) are the
only two species of swift to be found in the
central interior of British Columbia. These
birds are not numerous in this part of British
Columbia and very little is known regarding
their habits in general. No nesting site of
the Black Swift has been found in Canada
heretofore.

In July, 1934, I located my first nesting
colony of Black Swifts at the end of North
Arm of Quesnel Lake, B.C. The birds were
nesting on a very high cliff surrounded by
several miles of swampy terrain. The cliff
was inaccessible. I noticed the swifts in
general were flying low to gather insects
from the swamp during cloudy days; during
clear days they would fly fairly high until
late in the afternoon. In general, from 10
a.m. until 2 p.m. very few birds were to be
seen. The nesting site of Black Swifts is a
very busy and noisy place, otherwise I never
heard any sound from them.

On June 28, 1954, I collected one male
Black Swift from a flock of sixteen. This
bird was in good condition, total length
170 mm., testes 12 mm., brood patch. Be-
tween July 6, 1954 and July 11, 1954, I
located the nesting site on a high cliff, just
below the snow line, in the vicinity of a
small unnamed lake. This lake is surrounded
with many acres of shallow water. Approxi-
mate location of the nesting site was six
miles northwest of Kleena Kleene Post Of-
fice. B.C. About fifty birds were going to
and from the swamp and above the jack pine
forest gathering insects. Specimens were
taken above the swamp and the forest. Only
one female was secured and one juvenal
bird of the year. It would appear that the
females stay on the nest more than the males.
Measurements of some specimens taken at
this location are as follows: Male, length 175
mm., testes 10 mm., wing spread 427 mm.
Female, length 160 mm., one ovary 3 mm.
Juvenal, length 150 mm. The contents of
each stomach examined were about the same
— aquatic insects, green beetles, blue beetles,
small flying black ants. Each adult bird col-
lected had a pronounced brood patch. The
spring migration of the Black Swift in this
part of British Columbia appears to be from
the last week in May to the first week in

132 THE CANADIAN
June; the fall migration from the last week
in August to the first week in September.

On July 21, 1954, at. the north end of
Antoine Lake, Horsefly Post Office, B.C., I
collected my first Vaux Swift. This was an
adult female, with a total length of 114 mm.,
a wing spread of 278 mm., and with brood
patch. This bird had a large lump under the
bill and part of the throat about the size of
a medium marble. This little pouch was
packed with insects and the stomach contents
were aquatic insects, little brown beetles, and
little black flying ants. Some males and one
juvenal were also taken. The males had no
brood patch. Flying among the Vaux Swifts
were 8 Black Swifts. They were feeding
above a very shallow part of the lake. The
Vaux Swifts were flying to and from a small
grove of large dead cottonwoods about 300
yards west of the lakeshore where they were
feeding the young.

The Black Swifts were flying to and from
a northern direction to the vicinity of Quesnel
Lake. It would appear that both species are
getting along very well. One adult female
Black Swift was collected (total length 160
mm.) with under parts marked with white
feather tips. The stomach contents of this
bird were the same as the Vaux Swifts. I
believe that this is the first colony of Vaux
Swifts recorded from this part of British Co-
lumbia. — LEO JOBIN, Kelowna, B.C.

The Columnar Form of the Western Red
Cedar — an Environmental Modification 1. —
A columnar form of the western red cedar,
Thuja plicata D. Don was reported to occur
at Kilgard, B.C., by R. Glendenning in The
Canadian Field-Naturalist 62: 39-40. 1948.

During my visit to British Columbia in
1954 my attention was drawn to this variation
by Mr. W. Winson of Huntingdon and Mr.
Milton Jack of Hatzic. Both of these men
had transplanted small specimens of this
form to their gardens only to find that the
plants reverted to the common form within
a few years. Later Mr. J. H. Eddie, manager
of the nursery firm of H. M. Eddie and
Sons, informed me by correspondence that
when young trees of the form were propa-
gated in the nursery the dwarf, compact habit
was lost, and that his experience had been
much the same as that of Mr. Glendenning
and Mr. Winson. The form was pointed out
| Gonnignins No. 1448 from the Botany and Plant

Pathology Division, Science Service, Dept. of Agri-
culture, Ottawa.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69
to Mr. Glendenning by Mr. Eddie’s brother,
now deceased.

On investigating the site where the co-
lumnar trees were located I found that their
occurrence is restricted to an open area
within a few hundred yards of the Kilgard
brick works. With one exception all the
younger trees of the species within the area
are modified to the columnar form. The ex-
ceptional tree is a specimen 40 to 50 feet high
with a diameter at breast height of about.
12 inches. The only explanation I can give
for its occurrence with the other trees is that
this tree must be genetically an extremely
vigorous plant. Mature trees up to several
hundred years of age showed no suppression
of the main branches, but the young branch-
lets were more irregular and tufted than
usual. No other species of plant in the area
showed any distinct sign of a dwarfing effect.
There was a deposit of clay dust on the
vegetation in the area, especially in the im-
mediate vicinity of the brick works.

After considering various possible explana-
tions of the phenomenon, I decided that
clay dust in the atmosphere is probably re-
sponsible for the columnar effect. I could
find no evidence to suggest that the form had
existed before the arrival of white men, and
the brick works appeared to be almost cer-
tainly associated with the cause of deformity
in these young trees. Possibly the clay dust,
by irritating the naked growing points of the
branches, causes the apical meristem to divide
more frequently than is normal in the growth
of this species. More probably the cause is
related to inhibition of growth, either by the
introduction of a toxic substance to the me-
ristematic cells, or by interference with CO2
intake through the stomata.

The spire-like appearance of the leaders
of the younger of the affected trees, similar
to that of subalpine and boreal conifers, puz-
zled me for some time, and after a second
visit to the area, its cause was explained to
me by Mr. C. Brayshaw, one of three botanists
who accompanied me. The spire-like form in
subalpine and boreal conifers is considered
to be essentially the result of a suppression
of growth brought about by adverse conditions.
If in trees growing at high altitudes or in
northerly regions dwarfing on the side branch-
es is relatively greater than on the leader,
the ratio of height to spread is increased.
Apparently such a correlation of growth oc-
curs in some species under adverse conditions.
This explanation suggests that the modific-

July-Sept. 1955] THE CANADIAN
ation observed in the cedars near Kilgard is
due to an environmental factor that causes
the plants to be dwarfed. — H. L. J. RHODES,

FIELD-NATURALIST

133

Botany and Plant Pathology Laboratory, Ca-
nada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa,
Ontario.

REVIEWS

Mark Trail’s Book of North American Mam-
mals. By Ed. Dodd, McClelland and Stewart
Ltd., Toronto. 242 pp. 1955. $2.35.

The author-artist of a well-known daily
newspaper strip has produced a delightful
little book profusely illustrating nearly all
the larger and a few small mammals of North
America. It is in no sense a complete field
guide, but it will certainly serve to introduce
the uninitiated to most of our more conspicu-
ous mammals. There is a brief text for each
treated species, filling the spaces between
the sketches. Each species is drawn in many
poses and the tracks are illustrated. The
beaver and porcupine are the only rodents
dealt with, and all lagomorphs, bats and
shrews are omitted.

“In general the information is factual and
interesting. The purist might quibble over
some statements, but very few can be con-
sidered seriously misleading. The statement
that “the mountain goat is closely related to
the pronghorn, for he is an antelope and not
a goat” is unfortunate; for he is properly
neither a goat nor one of the great old-world
assemblage loosely termed antelopes, al-
though in the same family as both. The
unique pronghorn is in a family of its own.

The most surprising statement in the book
is that in British Columbia the black bear is
snowy white. I shudder to think of countless
hunters streaming into British Columbia to
collect snowy white hearth rugs without all
the difficulties attendant on shooting a polar
bear, unaware that the nearly white phase
is restricted to Gribbell Island. In British
Columbia at large the black phase is pre-
dominant, although cinnamons occur in some
areas.

Despite these few faults and its incomplete
coverage this book is excellent value and
will appeal widely to hunters and all in-
terested in wildlife. The text is simple
enough to be readily understood by a young-
ster. — D. B. O. SAVILE.

Mitteilungen. Institut fiir Auslandsbeziehun-
gen. (Proceedings. Institute for Foreign
Relations. Stuttgart, West German Republic).

We have received for review the March-
April, 1955 number of the Proceedings of the
Institute for Foreign Relations, Stuttgart,
Germany. This is a special number devoted
to the listing and the review of the cultural
periodicals of the world. Approximately 900
periodicals of 72 countries are included. For
almost all publications are given the name of
the publisher and a brief description of the
field of learning covered. The question of
deciding which publications are to be classed
as “cultural” is understandably troublesome.
A wide variety of journals is listed here —
those dealing with national literature, history,
archeology, philosophy, current affairs and
politics, art, music, the theatre, modern lan-
guage and science reviews, natural history
and even “Punch” and “The New Yorker’.

It will readily be appreciated that a listing
of all the cultural publications of the world
would be an enormous task, and — as the
editors point out — this listing is by no means
complete. Information about the literature of
certain countries was not available and the
listing for countries included is not necessarily
complete. Unfortunately, French language
literature of Canada is not covered. The goal
of the editors has been to make this number
“like a burning glass in which are collected
spiritual beams from all corners of the earth
in order to kindle a flame in the innermost
soul of the nations”. This number contains
a collection of information probably unique of
its kind. Even a glance over the publications
listed for a country does indeed furnish an
impression of the cultural interests of the
people.

The Institute for Foreign Relations was
founded in 1917 and is devoted to the “further-
ing of spiritual exchanges between nations’.
An extensive library and archives containing

134 THE CANADIAN
foreign books, periodicals, newspapers, re-
verts and manuscripts is maintained. Three
periodicals are published in co-operation with
cther educational institutes. The Institute ap-
pears to be a well-established and influential
cultural organization. Its goal is most praise-
worthy, for surely an understanding of the
daily interests and outlook of our international
neighbours is basic to the sorely-needed dis-
solution of national jealousies and suspicions.

R. J. MOORE.

Field Book of American Wild Flowers.
F. Schuyler Mathews, revised and edited by
Norman Taylor. Published by G. P. Put-
nam’s Sons, New York, and concurrently in
Canada by Thomas Allen, Ltd., Toronto,
June 1955. XXIX plus 601 pages, 305 plates
of line drawings and 30 in colour, size 17.5
x 11 x 3.5 cm., weight 17 oz., cloth. $5.00.

Fully revised and brought into line with
current botanical nomenclature, this new
edition of Mathews’ Field Book should now
regain much of its former popularity. In-
deed, it can now be recommended without
hesitation to the acute naturalist seeking
the correct names and general details for
most wild flowers he is likely to encounter
in Eastern Canada. About 850 species are
given separate attention; approximately
two-thirds of them occurring within the area
from southern Ontario to the Maritimes, —
a rather satisfactory proportion for a manual
covering all of eastern and central North
America. The book is not suitable for use
in Western Canada or in the North.

The species are treated in a sequence fol-
lowing the conventional “natural order”
from cat-tails to composites, rather than
alphabetically or according to flower color
— an advance over other hand-guides. There
is, however, no detailed key for identifica-
tion. It is intended that the user will simply
flip the pages to locate the picture of the
specimen at hand and then check its parts
with the description opposite. The right-
hand page has been reserved for the draw-
ings and, with familiarity, it should be
possible to make field identifications quite
quickly and accurately by this method. All
species having distinctive form are _ illus-
trated in good line-drawings and others
closely related to them are mentioned in
the text. The colour plates grouped together

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69
at the end will probably prove of little use;
their quality is of minor artistic merit.

In “wild flowers” are included, besides
the showy native species, such garden
flowers as Day Lily, Celandine and Purple
Loosetrife gone wild, and most of the
brighter weeds of foreign origin. No trees,
grasses, sedges, or species with inconspicu-
ous flowers are included, and it is mainly
in this way that the total number of some
4 or 5 thousand species has been effectively
reduced to a workable size.— W. G. DORE.

An introduction to Ornithology. By George
J. Wallace. 1955. The Macmillan Company,
New York and Toronto. Pp. I-XII, 1-443
($8.00 in Canada).

This book is aimed at meeting the critical
need for an introductory text in ornithology.
Doubtless it will be highly successful in
filling that need. The essential principles
of most aspects of ornithology are brought
together and are explained simply yet aca-
demically. Although it is designed primarily
for students in colleges and schools, it is
written in such non-technical language that
anyone desirous of improving his general
knowledge of birds can read it easily or use
it for reference. .

The history and current status of bird
study are taken up in the first of the 16
chapters that make up the text. Succeeding

chapters explain the origin of birds; their
external features and adaptations; their
internal features and functions; the sense

organs and behavior; their annual cycle
(4 chapters). Then follow treatments of
migration, distribution, food habits, econo-
mic relations, conservation, classification,
and nomenclature. The fossil record of birds
is interestingly developed in another chap-
ter and then follows a good elementary ac-
count of ornithological methods.

A feature of the book is the wealth of
well-selected references to literature for
use by those wishing to pursue any aspect
of bird study in greater detail. These are
placed at the end of each chapter and also
there is a good bibliography at the end of
the book. The large amount of material in
the text is logically arranged and well in-
dexed for easy reference. It is well illus-
trated by many half-tones and line draw-
ings. — W. EARL GODFREY.

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY

OF MANITOBA —
OFFICERS FOR 1953-54 i
President Emeritus: C. W. LOWE; Hon. President: A.
G. LAWRENCE; President R. K. STEWART-HAY; Vice-
ye . TILLENIUS, Mrs. W. A. CARTWRIGHT;
; . MOSSOP; Asst. Treasurers: Miss W.
EES J. J. MOTT; Gen. Secretary: J. J. McDONALD;

_ Exec. are ary: Mrs. G. I KEITH; Social Convenor:
_ Mrs. A. A. STEEL; Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT.

ie)
tt}

airm., Mrs. P.
Botany: Chairm. J. S.
Miss E. O. BURDENY; Entomology:

PRENTICE, Sec. J. A. DROUIN; Geology: Chairm. E.
a I. LEITH, "Sec. Mrs. A. C. CRANSTONE; pao ieleays
a i Se ae =a, = ae

ROWE, Sec.
Chairm. R. M.

ua Chairm. C. |
; wick; Omithology: Chairm. Jj. J.
. KEMP.

Lectures on the first and third Monday evenings of

each month will be held in the 4th floor Board Room
of the Free Press.
held in Room 204 of the University Extension Service,
_ Memorial Boulevard, The meetings open at 8.00 ea “A
: _ the lectures ‘commencing at 8.15 p.m.

HISTORY OF CANADA
OFFICERS FOR 1955

_ President: T. J. A. HUNTER; Ist ears JA
_ BIGONESSE; 2nd Vice-President: J. Secretary-
peeonntee Geo. A. Le CLERC; Cuiet Scientific Sect.: Dr.
_D. A. DERY; Chief-Protection Sect.: Napoleon BEAUDET:
_ Chief-Propaganda Sect.: Be G. COOTE; Chief-Informa-
tion Sect.: Frs. HAMEL. O at froade ir e O. MARCEAU,
RR. MEREDITH, J. C. PRICE, . ROSS, Jos. MORIN,
Dr V. PLAMONDON.

‘ peecrotarys address: Geo. A. a CLERC, 300 Fraser St.,
_ Quebec, P.Q.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
cus

’

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

president : : A. A, OUTRAM; Vice-President: J. L
BAILLIE; Secretary-Treasurer: MRS. J. B. STEWART,
21 Millwood Rd., Toronto; President of Junior Club:
| MRS. J. MURRAY SPEIRS; Vice-President of Junior Club:
MRS. L. E. JAQUITH. Executive Council: G. M. BART-
MAN, J. ‘BARNETT, MRS. N. BROWN, ALFRED BUNKER,
MISS F. BURGESS, ALEXANDER CAMERON, MISS VERA
_ CLARK, MISS B. DOUGLAS, PROF. T. W. DWIGHT, DR.
M. FRITZ, W. W. H. GUNN, DR. L. E. JAQUITH, MRS.
J. D. KETCHUM, MISS V. KOHLER, MRS. H. H. MARSH,
C. S. McKEE, D. S. MILLER, JOHN MITCHELE, R. M.
SAUNDERS, EARL STARK, H. H. SOUTHAM. Ex. Officio:
8, Se Fae FEENEY Cc. A. te aaa T. F. MclIL-
; WRAITH.

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on ihe first Monday ot
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
_ Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
held during the spring and autumn and on the second
Saturday of each month during the Vda

H. STOKES; Sec. Mrs.
Miss W. L.

bers: of Executive: Dr. V. C. BRINK, Dr. M. Y.

Friday evening lectures will be

AFFILIATED. SOCIETIES

_ VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
‘SOCIETY

OFFICERS 1955-56.

Hon. President: Dr. N. A. M. MACKENZIE; Past President:

F. WAUGH; President: A. R. WOOTTON; Vice President:
J. J. PLOMMER; Hon. Secretary: C. B. W. ROGERS; Re-

cording Secretary: Mrs. Augusta MARTIN; Programme

Secretary: J. GARDNER; Hon. Treasurer: F. SANFORD:
Librarian: Mrs. Dorothy BRADLEY; Editor of Sl a

N. PURSSELL; Chairmen on Sections: Botany-Dr. T. Cc.

TAYLOR; Segue bear J. E. ARMSTRONG; Enicuiclaaee
Prof. G. J. SPENCER; Ornithology—W. HUGHES; Mam-
mology—Dr r McT. COWAN; mine Biology—Mrs. M.
L. McLUCKIE; Photography—B. GLEIG; Junior Section—
PEARSON; Getoley De R. STACE-SMITH;
Audubon Screen Tours—S. BRADLEY; Additional Mem-

WILLIAMS

All meetings at 8 p.m. Room 100, Applied Science
Building, University of British Columbia, unless other-
wise announced.

‘McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB

LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1955

Past President: Mrs. G. CUMMINGS, R.R. #4, gape
President: Mr. F. Howard iat 44 Graydon 5St., Lon-
don; Vice-President: Dr. W. JUDD, 685 Strathmeyer
St., London; Recording Secien Miss M. J. HEIGHWAY,
66 Ciliftonvale Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr. J.
art Ey ae #4, London; Corresponding Secretary:

Mrs, , 301 Oxford St., Renders) ioe
pen Secretary: Mr. J. LEACH, Platts Lane, R.R. #3,
ondon,

Meetings are held at 8.30 p.m. in the Public Library
building on the second monde of each month from
September to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1954-1955

President: Dr. M. J. aaa ee ee
ANGLIN; Vice-President: J. L. VAN CAMP;

W. H. RAWLINGS; Secretary: Miss R. s.
166 Senneville Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE
hig le - ABBOTT, retary ae ABBOTT, J. P. ANGLIN,
ERTRAM, Miss BLANCHARD, Miss S.
Pieion Ow BOULAY, D. CLEGHORN,
BAR, D. G.

J.
Dr. ELLIOT, Mrs, he G. ELLIOT,
DeLISLE aan G. HARPER S. HAR
. R. LEPINGWELL, TAN McLAREN

1: Pp,
Treasurer:
ABBOTT,

Do jon: SUMMERBY, J. L. VAN CAMP.

Meeting held the second Monday of the month except
during summer, Field Trips held in spring and autumn.

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY

President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-Prseident: H. M.
LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. es

Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B.

CALGARY NATURALISTS’ CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1954

Miss JULIE HRAPKO; Vice-President:
DT; Secretary-Treasurer: Miss MAR
COPE, 1719 — 13th Ave. W., Calgary, Alta.

President: J.
RNHAR ARET

i Sr hsaa ine 1955

ee. CANA

75th ANNIVERSARY ISSUE

Contents
» On the spring flight of Blue and Snow Geese across Northern Ona

a a By LeU ha TEIN GY dae acces een AEs!) he Galli pea eae es 4) Ata 135

i New outlines on comparative eae |

iy P Biv snpbrernety ay Cle c manee ses coet sua noite 1 i et MR IOS SRE DL VaGte LOE OS 140
a Food habits of marten (Martes americana) in northern British Columbia.

r By pilordce Ne Oiick lr ewe ae eh ACTA AGAR DIR RIOT CERN 4 1 MORI 144
Observations on a second colony of the land snail Cepaea nemoralis (L. ) at London,
ae Ontario with a consideration of the banding patterns in the two colonies.

REED Von VSP INN NCLCA, ok Fen eT ore REL Sonar MU AGEL ia. (chau t aA ay Mamet cL eas as 148
"i Two red algae new to Nova Scotia.
q r TEMW ABE Rica! p1OTe) 01 (coud Mats Fees eee Vitra ee Ree EE ot Ree OMe PEGN ARLE Co aR SO 150
_ The rearing of a grey seal in captivity.

esas CES aR es Hk SS TE ER Ae TOR el pie Se cig oe ee 151
© Plant collections from Matthews and Muskox Lakes, Mackenzie District, N.W.T.
4 LE Sto ie DLO ora he AT Ca Bgl CHL ol A Pofay 1 RO acne ah RSE ESR OER EZ, ANT 153
_ Natural history survey of Coppermine, Northwest Territories, 1951.

Dany tol 20 AR WLS oa RNR RR ADs Deri CP REE ich APR Oy a EAU DS i OR 162
Notes and Observations - -

© Notes on the four-toed salamander in the Province of Quebec.
. ; By Stanley rem GrOk anime Desa ee Ck ween ee Ly alt MMO sl 167
a Observations on the habitat and food of the Queen snake, Natrix septem-

= vittata, at London, Ontario.

q 13 8e VAMP) WG Es Dis ieraiz te Met Fem iho be Sno eae SNe RR 167
a ~ Ruff and White Pelican at Fort Severn.
a Dei Lily CG AUST ra T%a Fe A a a IC AS i AAR OR ve i as DV 168
a The Laysan Albatross off the British Columbia coast.

aaa Lay Ferris Ta SEERA GRE SENG eo ee COIR UPA Tie eicer Pau DKA EH 168
(ARSE EOE ie REY See SU UN cM ie NEE RE A RAR Be 169
4 "Index Pe icayerinre 5) Jay! 1 OS OR Ga ce ea MRR 172

z | : Published by the
4g OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB
i Authorized as second class mail, Post Office Department, Ottawa.

‘ vad ele
\ hath

_ Patron : is Lis Reeth aN

1st Vice-President: Dr. L. S. ell

Treasurer: RAYMOND Moore, J i
Division of Botany, — cement (seal Museum
Science Service, Dept. of . a) - Ottawa. a
Agriculture, Ottawa. ! een SR

Additional Members of Counci: Mrs. if Ww. nana ‘Mrs. Howe te
Brown, Miss RutH Horner, Miss VIOLET HUMPHREYS, Miss VERNA
LINE cha Miss Ss STUART, THE REVEREND FATHER ES E. Bani

iB: A. RUDDELL, D. B. O. SAVILE, Ey A: “Soa v. iE ogy Rae E: AT

Auditors: ie L. CONNERS, Cy FRANKTON.

Editor:
Dr. H. A. SENN,

Division of Botany, :
"Science Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa,

; Associate Editors: ae
W.GIBDORE tt kbshiiar’ | papel Botany — R. M. ANDERSON ..........

A. LaRocgue ........ ACLU a an Conchology A. G. HuNTSMAN .............. Marine |
HvGoCRAWEORD! ie wed es Entomology W. E. GopFREY ......... tee
EP VAT COCK: OMAN A NG NE a Rte a, Geology SW AS TBEI En ee ane
SHERMAN BLEAKNEY .............. Herpetology § J. R. Dymonp

Business Manager:
W. J. Copy, ©
Division of Botany,
Science oaee, et of Agriculture, Ottawa.

issued since 1879. The first were The Transactions of the pre Field-N
Club, 1879-1886, two volumes; the next, The Ottawa Naturalist, 1886- ye
two volumes: and these have been continued Py The Canadian i

ai

ae the results of original research in all departments of iNateral ay
Price of this volume (4 numbers ) $3. 00; Single copies 90e each,

Subscription ($3.00 a year) should be forwarded to Dr. R : a Moore,

Vol. 69

The Canadian Field-Naturalisti

MUO. GUN. LUUL

LIBRARY
JAN 2 1957

OTTAWA, CANADA, OCTOBER-DECEMBER, 1955 No. 4

“ON THE SPRING FLIGHT OF BLUE AND SNOW GEESE ACROSS
NORTHERN ONTARIO*

James L. BAILLIE
Royal Ontario Museum, Toronto

OPER (1942) has stated with reference to

the Blue Goose, Chen caerulescens, (Lin-
naeus) that ‘The detailed character and
exact route of the great flight of these geese
from Manitoba to James Bay, remains one
of the outstanding unsolved questions of
their life-history. Practically nothing is
known about it.’ They leave their southern
Manitoba gathering places west of Winni-
peg on the average about May 6th and mi-
grate up both coasts of Hudson Bay.

Bremner (1949) has provided some _ ink-
ling of the route taken by these and Snow
Geese, Chen hyperborea (Pallas), on spring
migration across northern Ontario. He
watched a flock of 200 (15% Blues) passing
in a northeasterly direction over Casummit
Lake (mark 1 on map) on May 15, 1947 and
was told that ‘white wavies’ had been seen
by local residents for about a week or ten
days prior to that date.

A keen observer of birds with whom I
have had an interesting interview, Mr. Cla-
rence Watson, told me that he had notes on
this subject gathered while he was stationed
for five years (193843) at Rat Rapids (mark
2 on map) in the Lake St. Joseph area of
Ontario as Superintendent in the employ of
the Hydro-Electric Power Commission of
Ontario. He promised to produce these notes
for publication, and the significant parts of
his communication follow:

“Some time prior to the Spring of 1937,
the writer had heard or read, that the exact
spring route of the Blue and Lesser Snow
Geese from their resting place in southern
Manitoba to James Bay was unknown, but
was supposed to be along the English River,
Lake St. Joseph, and Albany River to James
Bay...

1) Received for publication July 23, 1954.

“So it was with some eagerness, on the
writer’s arrival at Rat Rapids... on Lake St.
Joseph in June of 1937, that enquiries were
made about the abundance of these geese
at that place during the spring flight. The
results were a bit disappointing. Yes, a few
flocks of ‘wavies’ were seen usually each
spring, but only a few, and it seemed that
these few seen had passed over in a direction
and location not corresponding to the general
direction of the Albany River whose begin-
ning is in Lake St. Joseph.

“The writer’s stay in Rat Rapids in 1937
was from June to October. He arrived too
late to observe any spring flight, and no
Blues or Snows were seen that fall.

“In June of 1938 the writer returned to
Rat Rapids but this time he remained there
for five years, until June of 1943. [It might
be recalled that on June 16, 1938, Mr. Wat-
son collected the first eggs of the Bona-
parte’s Gull to be found in Ontario at Rat
Rapids (Dear, 1939)].

“In view of later observations made at Rat
Rapids, the geographical location of the
place should be understood. Lake St. Joseph
is about 65 miles long and averages about
two miles wide, with large and deep bays
along its north shore. The lake lies ap-
proximately east and west, and is in the
form of a long boot with the boot at the
eastern end and the toe pointing towards
the north. The eastern end of the lake is
formed by an island six miles long from
north to south. The water outflows from the
lake at the north end of this island at Rat
Rapids, and at the southern end of the
island by Cedars Channel. The H.E.P.C. of
Ontario have a generating station at Rat
Rapids, and the controlling dam for the
lake at Cedars Channel. The beginning of
the Albany River is at Rat Rapids and

Vol. 69, No. 3, July-September, 1955, was issued April 27, 1956.

— 135 —

136

Cedars Channel. It is important to keep in
mind that Rat Rapids is six miles north of
Cedars Channel.

“During the six autumns, 1937-42, no Blues
or Snows were seen in flight by the writer
at Rat Rapids. But it was obvious that some
of these geese passed through that locality
each fall, since the Indians would regularly
bring in about three to six geese along with
each fall’s bag of ducks. These geese were
always plucked when seen by the writer so
could not be identified as to Blues or Snows
but their size would indicate one or the
other. It should also be noted that, from
enquiries, these geese were always taken,
while resting or feeding, east of Lake St.
Joseph on the Albany River. In contrast to
this, only very occasionally have the Indians
reported ‘wavies’ in the immediate vicinity
of the Upper Albany River in the spring.

“Fach spring the Blues and Snows passed
over Rat Rapids, usually rather low,-.in
flocks of from 40 to 150 birds. Always, as
memory serves, there were both Snows and
Blues in each flock, about 10 to 25 per cent
being Snows. The direction was always
approximately the same, northeast by east
(notes were kept on all flocks seen but these
Rat Rapids notes were lost in a fire).

“Rrom two to four flocks each day for a
week would be seen passing over, and about
an equal number appeared to pass over at
night. That week would be at the height of
the flight, usually commencing about the end
of April, right at the time of the break-up.
The flight seemed to come full force all at
once but straggling flocks would be seen
during the second week. It is unfortunate
that the notes were lost since a check might
have been made on the possible bearing
that weather conditions might have had on
these’ flights from Manitoba. However, it
appeared that the geese preferred travelling
in clear and calm weather.

“It was noted by the writer from the first
spring that more flocks were seen to the
north than to the south of Rat Rapids, al-
though no significance was given the fact
at the time. Also it seemed odd that the
flocks came from the southwest by west,
across country north of the main body of
Lake St. Joseph and on across country to
the northeast by east without deviating to
follow the Albany River and its accompany-
ing string of lakes which lies in a south-

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

easterly direction for about twenty miles
below Rat Rapids. From enquiries of the
Indians and scow crews it did not appear
that geese were any more numerous at the
west end of Lake St. Joseph than at Rat
Rapids. .

“Such were the observations made at Rat
Rapids; let us see what was happening at
Cedars Channel, only six miles to the south
of Rat Rapids.

“The first spring, 1939, that the writer
was at Rat Rapids, precise instructions were
given the two watchmen at Cedars Channel
as to the observations to be made on passing
Blue and Snow Geese. Writing material was
provided for notes. High hopes were enter-
tained for a lot of interesting reading since
Cedars Channel would be directly in the
line of flight of geese following the length
of Lake St. Joseph and down the Albany
River.

“The result of those observations were al-
together different to that expected. That
first spring one small flock of seven was
seen, and these [geese] were found early
one morning swimming around in the quiet
water above the dam. In only one other
spring can it be recalled that the watchmen
saw geese, and that one was a comparatively
small flock going northeast. The percentage
of Blues and Snows in the two flocks was
not noted.

“The above were the results of observa-
tions taken at Rat Rapids and Cedars Chan-
nel until the spring of 1942.

“On May 1, 1942, the writer, as one of a
small party of prospectors, left Rat Rapids
by canoe for the Forester Lake gold country
on the Williams River... 85 air miles
straight north of Rat Rapids, or 65 miles
straight north of Pickle Lake [mark 3 on
map]. Pickle Lake is the airplane landing
for the Central Patricia and Pickle Crow
Gold Mines.... Word had been received from
the Indians that the lakes in the north were
clear of ice and most of the snow gone from
the ground.

“The weather for the day or two previous
to May 1 was threatening. On the morning
of May 1 it started to rain with an east
wind. By evening it had started to snow
with wind and lowering temperature. All
night and next day it blew almost a bliz-
zard, real winter weather. The party re-
mained at Central Patricia the evening of

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

137

Direction followed by Blue and Snow Goose in spring migration across
northwestern Ontario. Localities are identified in the text.

May 1 and [all of] May 2. On the morning
of May 3, the snow had stopped falling, the
wind had abated, and the temperature was
already above freezing. Clouds remained
heavy and low all day and into the night.

“A start was made on the evening of May
3 down the Crow River and camp was made
about a mile below Central Patricia. The
morning of May 4 was clear and frosty, and
proved to be the first day of a stretch of

three weeks of fine weather with warm days
and frosty nights with only occasional short
lapses of cloud and light snow flurries.

“Kicker trouble prevented much progress
on May 4 and camp was made that night in
the heavy spruce swamp on the shore of the
Crow River about three miles north of the
Pickle Crow Gold Mines.

“The first geese seen or heard was a
flock of about 120 that passed directly over-

138

head and high at about 6.15 p.m. travelling
NE by E. About ten per cent of this flock
were Snows. A few minutes after this flock
another passed out of sight to the south.
(The tall spruce trees all around this camp
made it far from ideal as an observation
post). Then commenced a fairly continuous
clamour of passing geese for the rest of the
evening and all through the night until about
three hours after daylight on the morning
of May 5. Those geese that passed in view
were high and travelling a little north of
east. The geese passed apparently in equal
numbers both to the north and south of the
camp. Their noise prevented much sleep.

“At about three hours after daylight the
number of flocks seemed to taper off, al-
though this was probably due in large to
the restricted range of view between the
trees on the banks of the stream and the
noise of the kicker preventing hearing them
until they were close overhead. This view
would seem to be substantiated by the fact
that the presence of the geese was more in
evidence on the portages...

“As soon as the party entered the sizea-
ble Mud Lake, at about 2.30 p.m. (May 5),
with its less restricted view, at once flocks
of geese were seen and continued to be
seen at short intervals sometimes more than
one flock in view at the same time. This
condition held throughout the four hours
spent in traversing Mud Lake and the
broad mouth of the Spruce River. The flocks
were all of the familiar pattern. They con-
tained from 75 to 200 birds. All appeared
to be travelling NE or NE by E. Those close
enough were observed to consist of from 10
to 20 per cent of Snows and the rest Blues.

“Although Mud Lake would appear to be
an ideal resting and feeding place, being
extensive and consistently shallow and with
plenty of plant life both in the water and
on the low marshy shores, no geese were
seen at rest. All seen were passing straight
over and high.

“Tt was on Mud Lake, on this afternoon
of May 5, that the largest and most numer-
ous flocks were seen. It seems worth
mentioning here the circumstances under
which the largest flock, by far, was seen
over this lake. As the writer’s party ap-
proached the mouth of the Spruce River in
the late afternoon, with the lake calm and
the sun warm, a group of tents was seen on

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

a point. This called for a short visit. It
proved to be Chief James Meskias’ camp
and accompanying families who were
making their leisurely way from their win-
ter trapping in the north to Osnaburgh
House on Lake St. Joseph for the Treaty
that was to be held at that post on about
July 1.

“Concerning this camp, the writer’s notes
state: ‘Chief James Meskias’ camp at mouth
of Spruce River; ten tents, mostly new and
white, and three wigwams; all tall, fine-
looking men; squaws and babies well-
dressed and fat; many rabbit-skin blankets
hanging on the trees, airing; lots of ducks
and fish hanging up; many guns stacked
against the tree trunks; good canoes, some
very large freighters; several kickers.’
Some of the men were painting and repair-
ing canoes. Others were whittling out pad-
dles with that strange all-important tool of
the north bush, the canoe knife. The rest
of the men lolled down to the shore to look
over the visitors’ outfit and to listen to the
conversation. The women nursed their ba-
bies, poked about the supper fires, or just
sat in the warm sun and watched. It was a
scene of wilderness, prosperity and care-
freeness.

“In this pleasing setting suddenly all
eyes turned upwards and there were awed
exclamations of ‘weewik’ (from which the
universal northern name of ‘wavie’ is de-
rived. Indians of Lake St. Joseph refer to
both Blues and Snows as ‘wavies’). There,
almost overhead, and coming straight for
us, was the forefront of a flock or system
of flocks of geese that seemed to extend
back for a great distance. They had ap-
proached unheard but when nearly over-
head broke out in a tremendous clamour.
Even the Indians appeared awed by the
sight.

“The writer does not think he exaggerates
when he says that he was literally spell-
bound. All duties as an observer were for-
gotten until a decided cramp in the neck,
from gazing straight overhead, brought him
to his senses. Even then it required a force
of will to take his mind off the feast to the
eyes and to concentrate on estimating the
numbers of the geese. But by then the head
of the flock had passed so far from over-
head that individuals were lost in undula-
ting lines of beating wings. Straggling
flocks, though part of the main body, fol-

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THe CANADIAN
lowing after the main body, were still pas-
sing as we pulled away in our canoes.

“Concerning this flock the notes say: ‘At
4.00 p.m. one flock, estimated 2,000 geese,
8 or 10 per cent Snows, going north of east,
very high’. It might be noted here that in
all cases of estimations of numbers in flocks
a conservative policy was followed.

“About an hour after the passing of the
large flock, two other flocks of considerable
size were seen. To quote the notes: ‘At 5.10
p.m. at mouth of the Spruce River, two
flocks estimated at 500 each, travelling high
and close together, north of east, about 10
per cent Snows and rest Blues’.

“Other small flocks were seen while pass-
ing up the broad mouth of the Spruce
River until the stream narrowed and view
was restricted. These flocks averaged about
100 individuals, about 10 per cent Snows,
flying high and NE by E.

“Camp was made that night at the Falls
that is the first portage on the Spruce about
a mile and a half from the mouth. The
weather continued clear, calm, and frosty.
All that night the cries of passing geese
were heard above the noise of the falls and
again the writer had sleep only in spots.

“Next morning, May 6, for about two miles
above the camp, several flocks of about a
hundred each, all following the usual pat-
tern as to species and direction, were seen.
Then suddenly the absence of geese was
noted.

“At 11.45 a.m. a flock of 250 was seen,
going in the usual direction and consisting
of about 15 per cent Snows. This flock might
be considered the last of the main flight.
No more geese were seen on... May 6, nor
were any heard on any night after that.

FIELD-N ATURALIST

139

“Tt should be understood that the Crow
River, from Central Patricia to the mouth
of the Spruce River flows in a direction
practically paralleling the observed flight of
the geese. From the mouth of the Spruce
River to Spruce Lake, a distance of about
40 miles, the Spruce River flows almost
straight south, so that in passing up the
Spruce River we were cutting the line of
flight almost at right angles.

“The few flocks noted after May 6 may
be quoted from the notes: ‘May 7, at 6.00
a.m., on Upper Spruce River, one flock of
about 75, all Blues, at medium height,
passed overhead going north of east; May
7, at 7.00 p.m., one flock of 100, almost
overhead, all Blues, going north of east;
May 14, at sundown, in camp of George Por-
ter’s claims on Obuskantaga Lake on Wil-
liams River [mark 4 on map], one flock of
about 75, all Snows, low and close by, going
northeast; May 16, at 6.45 a.m., same place,
one flock of about 75 geese going northeast,
could not identify in mist if Blues or Snows’.

“The entry of May 16 was of the last
geese seen. Throughout the trip no resting
geese were seen. All flocks observed along
the main fly-way were at least of consider-
able height, by far the most of them could
be called high. The consistency of the di-
rection followed by all observed seemed
remarkable. Most flocks were mixed, only
two batches were entirely Blues and one
entirely Snows.”

LITERATURE CITED
Bremner, R.M., Can. Field-Nat., vol. 63, no.

4, Jul.-Aug., 1949, pp. 161-2.

Dear, L.S., Auk, vol. 56, no. 2, Apr., 1939,
p. 186.

Soper, J. Dewey, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,
vol. 42, no. 2, Nov. 1942, p. 192.

140

THE CANADIAN’ FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

NEW OUTLINES ON COMPARATIVE ODONTOLOGY *

L. BERNER
Marseilles, France

1

VOLUTIONISTS commonly suppose,
though, erroneously, that the complex
forms of dentition among mammals are de-
rived from “simpler” ones still in existence.

If the canine of an adult man is compared
with the open conical tooth of a full grown
specimen of Pagrus vulgaris C.V., for in-
stance, there are so many differences in
structure, attachment, function, etc. that
one is inclined to attribute them to evolution
from the “primitive” forms seen in recent
fishes which are the “lowest” classes of
vertebrates and to suppose that the human
tooth has resulted from a process of evolu-
tion extending from the fishes right up to
the highly specialized dentition of man.

However if the primary canine of an in-
fant of ten months is used for the com-
parison rather than the tooth of an adult,
many analogies appear and it would seem
that the teeth of present-day bony fishes
are merely arrested in development, whilst
those of the human baby have continued to
develop according to the general constitu-
tion of “higher” vertebrates. For example
all bones in the piscine skull and especially
the dentaries jaws remain separate, whilst
they become ankylosed in mammals. In this
case there are similar differences in both
attachment and function of teeth carried
thereon. Thus we become aware that there
is no “evolution” but only an arresting of
development in teeth we mention.

In all vertebrates the size of a tooth corre-
sponds with the general growth of the ani-
mal and the respective class to which it
belongs. There is a distinct similarity in
the dental development of all vertebrates
whilst their dentine also corresponds, but
the morphology and the enamel (where it
exists) differ according to the species con-
cerned. A similar difference exists in the
respective circulation, respiration and di-
gestive systems, the degree of development
varying in conformity with the respective
type of constitution though without evolu-
tion in the living forms themselves. In fact
in recent dentitions degrees of complexity
correspond with the type concerned.

1) Received for publication August 30, 1954.

The plan of dentition is the same whether
seen in mammals or the bony fishes. Al-
though more complex in the “higher” verte-
brates, even the sperm whale (Physeter
catodon L.) has but one kind of conical
tooth whilst some living fishes such as
Hybodus possess complex tubercular teeth
and Cochliodus contortus folded teeth. In
Diodon, Triodon and Tetrodon there are
compound teeth, built up of lamellae of
dentine and osteodentine. In short we may
see single teeth both in mammals and
fishes, as well as complex ones.

2

There is no strict relationship between
tooth structure and feeding habits but there
is such a relationship between the teeth and
the general constitution or the diet and the
digestive system. The otter (Lutra lutra
L.) and the seal (Phoca vitulina L.) live both
principally on fish, but their teeth are dis-
similar, one being an Arctoide and the other
a Pinniped, though both belong to the Car-
nivora.

The flying fox (Pteropus edulis E. Geof.)
is frugivorous but has some carnassial type
of teeth. Therefore they must be related
rather to the specific constitution of that
animal than to the diet. Besides such a
feature is seen even more clearly in Ungu-
lata. For instance oxen (Bos taurus L.) or
sheep (Ovis aries L.) have no maxillary in-
cisors and their lips are believed to be spe-
cially suited to replace them, even though
horses (Equus caballus L.) have such similar
lips but are provided with incisors in the
maxilla and both oxen, sheep and horses
have cheek teeth in accordance with their
herbivorous diet. Nevertheless their di-
gestive systems differ as do other parts of
their bodies, the former animals being
Artiodactyles and Ruminants whilst horses
are Perissodactyles and belong to a distinct
Phylum. Thus teeth vary with the species
rather than with the diet.

In order to ascertain an animal’s diet one
must examine the stomach contents rather
than the teeth, as well as their function. In
spite of their sectorial teeth, sharks swallow
their food whole. They do not cut up their
food into portions, but if they seize some

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

complex object, they pull it off rapidly or
turn the object quickly about until it is
free. Evidently when seizing brutally,
their teeth cut off portions, but sharks never
act in a manner as do animals slashing a
prey. Besides there is no purpose for it as
their powerful digestive system rapidly dis-
solves whole food swallowed without any
dental activity.

A single use for an organ may help in the
development, even as disuse may lead to
atrophy but it does not suffice to explain
its presence. Furthermore variation in diet
never produces a change in dentition which
invariably corresponds with that being com-
mon to a species.

So the brown bear (Ursus arctos L.) has
teeth suited to its mixed diet, for it is mostly
herbivorous in early life and largely car-
nivorous in later life. In return the polar
bear (Thalarctos maritimus Phipps) is en-
tirely carnivorous but its cheek teeth retain
their broad top character throughout life as
do those of the brown bear.

The fox (Vulpes vulpes L.) is omnivorous
but not so much so as the hedgehog (Erina-
ceus europaeus L.). In this case, there is
no relationship between dentition and diet,
but the teeth are of the carnivorous type
like Canidae on the one hand and Insectivo-
rae on the other — two distinct groups of
living mammals.

Whatever the diet, the dentition agrees
with the general structure of an animal’s
body and a creature must either feed itself
on what food is available and / or suitable
to its digestive system or pass out of exist-
ence. That is why animals with varied denti-
tions often choose the same diet whilst
others with similar teeth eat quite different
food.

3

As a general rule throughout the verte-
brates a tooth arises in a specific manner
from the enamel organ and dentin germ,
the activity of them depending on the
general growth of the animal. According to
WILLIAMS, human dental morphology con-
forms to the type of skeleton and shape of
cranium; for instance, the oval incisors
correspond with the oval face, etc. These
are individual rather than specific varieties.

Sexual differences are never prominent in
primary teeth. There is a relationship be-

THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

141

tween size and shape of teeth and sex and
maturity irrespective of diet, but feeding
habits will correspond with the develop-
ment. Likewise a young eel (Anguilla vul-
garis Turt.) has few cilliform teeth in its
Leptocephalus stage of development, whilst
after its metamorphosis it has numerous lit-
tle sharp teeth and its diet changes with its
age and size. As rays approach maturity
most of them reveal sexual characteristics in
their teeth. The bony fish: Aphya pellucida
Nardo has a primary and an adult dentition
whilst the spawning male has a dentition
distinct from that of the female. The male
of another fish Cristallogobius linearis Diib.
& Kor. possesses teeth, but the female is
edentulous. The male of narwhal (Mono-
don monoceros L.) is edentulous in the man-
dible but has two incisors in the maxilla.
In his female both these teeth are unerupted.
In the male the right tooth is usually like
those of the female in shape whilst the left
one extends in a spiral form from the jaw
by persistent growth, once it has reached
maturity. Of course all those dental differ-
ences have no influence on the diet; male and
female feed in perfectly the same manner.

There is a difference between the denti-
tion of a stallion and a mare; the latter has
no canines and none develop when a colt
has been castrated in youth.

Thus glandular secretion controls the
development of teeth mentioned, as it in-
fluences tooth replacement where the re-
placing teeth are always proportionally
greater than those which are replaced, the
volume of a replacing tooth being complete
before the bone to which it will become
attached has reached its full size for such
attachment to take place. On further de-
velopment each of them remains stationary.
An erupted tooth does not increase in size
unless there is a persistent pulp.?

In short: glandular and growth’s stimulus
to the whole body also affects the tooth
germs. Remind: baby’s first dentition is
already formed in foetal stage; the infant’s
second one—in full size conformable to ulti-
mate growth—will arise just before reaching
maturity, i.e. before the skeleton is com-
pletely formed. In consequence there must

2) Ie. in such teeth there is a secondary ascending
growth; nevertheless they do not differ anymore in
shape, but are stimulated by internal glands to
progress. Thus the canines of the wild boar (Sus
scrofa L.) are of persistent growth only during
sexual period, and arrested in an old male of no
more sexual function.

142 THE CANADIAN
be a gradual axillar internal stimulus for
proportional regulation of what it will be-
come subsequently for future equilibrium.

4

All teeth are ‘‘deciduous” and it is incor-
rect to speak of a deciduous or a permanent
dentition. The duration of a tooth’s function
depends on its variable activity and specific
constitution but its use may vary in course
of time. Various sets of teeth may some-
times function at the same time though
teeth with persistent pulp differ.

As a rule teeth erupt, replace others or
are buried in accordance with the develop-
ment of the body or the growth in equili-
brium with the whole organism. Their shape
rather conforms to the species however and
due consideration must be paid to the phy-
siology. Many animals grow rapidly but
their life-span varies. Thus two years is as
good an age for a mouse, as fifteen is for a
dog, etc. but those two years on the one
side equal these fifteen ones on the other
side, only the vital intensity varies con-
formably to life-time, as all phenomena ac-
cord with it. That is to say: the physiological
development as regards foetal life, youth,
maturity and natural death are similar even
though periods vary.

Growth in many bony fishes is unlimited
before death and their teeth are always re-
placed when shed, for fishes are polyphyo-
dont. In reptiles — except in crocodiles —
succession of the teeth often stops at ma-
turity, while growth is limited and their
teeth are replaced in quite an irregular man-
ner. In mammals growth is limited but
corresponds with function throughout life.
Here dentitions are limited too; they appear,
succeed or are suppressed in accordance
with the species’ constitution. Thus edentu-
lous mammals posséss tooth germs at first
but either they do not develop into teeth
or the teeth are not calcified or even may
remain unerupted. The disappearance of
teeth or the reduction in number is an onto-
genic process. This means that when a
character develops the more and more later,
it finally will be lost, unless being rudi-
mentary, whereas a character which de-
velops the more and more earlier, becomes
subsequently preeminent. Thus if disap-
pearance of teeth occurs by elimination,
such as seen in Cetacea, no further succession
takes place.

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

In another type of tooth of persistent
growth, for instance the prismatic incisor
of rodents, the root is eliminated, whereas
the hypsodont tooth of the horse becomes
rooted after its long use. In this case the
relation between teeth and the animal’s
growth is obvious, because only in youth
i.e. during growth the horse’s tooth in-
creases and afterwards the whole (skeleton,
body and teeth) is arrested. In other species
erupted teeth do not increase; they are
shed off for not being more in equilibrium
with the organism and replaced or not.

As the internal glands influence the
growth or the development of teeth, so they
influence their replacement; therefore
“primary” and “secondary” dentitions
should be spoken of rather than ‘“‘deciduous”
and “permanent”, although primary and
secondary dentitions sometimes overlap — of
course being faced only two sets of mamma-
lian dentitions, possibly there are more.

In Ungulata, Carnivora, Insectivora vera
and Primates the two dentitions alternate.
Cheiroptera and Soricidae are losing the
primary dentition, whilst rodents have near-
ly lost it entirely. In marsupials the primary
dentition possibly functions through life and
the secondary does not erupt any more than
the secondary cheek teeth in Proboscidea.
In the mature Castor brewer (Castor fiber
L.) all the teeth except the premolars be-
long to the primary set. Thus so called
“deciduous” teeth become ‘permanent’.
Likewise the expression ‘milk’ teeth in
bony fishes is inequitable, although they
possess both primary and secondary denti-
tions. Here the teeth are never permanent
for fishes are polyphyodont. In old men
often teeth are worn off by age, as well as
sometimes a “milk” tooth becomes per-
manent; we are even told that occasionally
in very old age a man had a third dentition.
Any way it is more logical to give up “de-
ciduous”’, “permanent” and “milk” teeth.

5

It is generally believed that hairs and
teeth correspond but neither their origin
nor development are alike. Both come from
ectodermal cells like still other formations
but the morphology and growth differ even
if there is convergence in design.

Hairs are always attached obliquely and
formed in situ by papillae, becoming rooted
in the course of growth though the ex-

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

tremity is immediately free. There is an
ascending growth and, after eruption, the
hairs continue growing and sometimes curl.
When stabilized they attain to full size;
then, when lost, they are replaced by an-
other one which arises from the follical di-
rectly.

On the contrary teeth always arise from
dental germs. The crown is moulded first
and calcified; the enamel organ’s activity is
moulding the top into shape. Then the tooth
grows towards the root by dentine germ’s
activity and thus descending growth results
in it attaining full size. It may afterwards
erupt for use being previously socketed or
otherwise attached. The pulp cavity may
contract in due course, but the shape of the
tooth never alters.? The teeth last so through-
out life unless lost, being always propor-
tionate with the whole body.

This process occurs everywhere in all
vertebrates, but true hairs are found only
among mammals. For such reason a tooth is
an unique organ in the body.

6

First of all a tooth is a typical character
of species or genus. But often a tooth is
besides an organic device for easy use too
when required; when it functions there is
naturally an “instinct” to account for it,
although its use may not always be evident
as the non-poisonous fangs of the false
viper, the stunted cheek teeth of the vampire
bat (Desmodus rufus Wied) lapping blood
from victims with its tongue only, etc. The
utility of teeth in a fish which swallows its
food whole, or of the rudimentary teeth of
the humpback whale (Megaptera boops L.)
with its balloon plates retaining food, is
clearly less evident than the tusks in ele-
phants by porterage. In Babirussa babi-
russa L. and allied animals canines become
sexual weapons, but they are real hyperte-
lical organs, causing restraints.

In fact, the formation of teeth is an in-
tegral part of general development. In such
a way there is no end into their coming to
use and their special purpose may not al-
ways be evident whilst disuse does not ever
cause their disappearance. Canines and
caniniform incisors as well as premolars in
the camel (Camelus dromadarius L.) are

3( However there is an ascending growth too in teeth
with persistent pulp as told before, after formation
by descending growth.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

143

organs of importance without obvious use
under present conditions. We may especial-
ly mention the Manidae having no func-
tional teeth at all, though being termite-
eaters, whereas bats (Microchiropterae)
feeding exclusively on insects have sharp
pointed teeth. The salamanders have teeth
on each jaw; the frog only on upper jaw,
while the toads are generally edentulous,
but all are feeding nearly in the same man-
ner, swallowing whole small food they ob-
tain. Thus we cannot see directly any rela-
tionship between their teeth and diet, but
we are perfectly aware that there is one
between them and their constitution, each
phylum having a particular dental system,
for instance the unerupted teeth of the
python, or much better the rudimentary
teeth in rachiodon (Dasypeltis scabra L.) a
snake which feeds on eggs swallowed whole,
but broken by an enamelled prolongation of
the thoracic vertebra bone, without any
dental function. What may be the use of
the sole two teeth only apparent in Hype-
roodon’s lower jaw, whereas all the others
are buried into its gum? But those teeth
remain nevertheless into the general dental
system of Cetacea.

7

Teeth have often but one function al-
though they show a complexity in infinity
whereas their fundamental structure is the
same throughout all vertebrates, only de-
tails varying with the species, used or not.

Any modification in a tooth is reflected
in the specific constitution. It is an integral
part of the whole animal. Teeth arise in
the course of growth in a species and may
finally disappear but they have no evolution
in themselves. Nor do they possess an
adaptive modification unless the species
varies too. So they have the same degree
of complexity as the whole body.

So as species become more complicated
their teeth similarly assume a more com-
plex form, without fundamental change in
their structure. With increased develop-
ment, such as seen in tusks, or suppression
due to internal secretion there is no known
reason to account for either. But always
growth of the whole body is reflected in the
teeth’s development and their replacement.
Unlimited growth corresponds to unlimited
replacement of teeth, while limited growth
is met in limited dental succession.

144 THE CANADIAN

In crocodiles the number of teeth never
varies throughout life; however the size of
individual teeth is always proportional to the
extent of the animal’s body. As an erupted
tooth with closed pulp never increases, it is
shed off for not more fitted with the jaws’
growing, then being directly replaced by
another one more voluminous. In due course
each set succeeds from birth to death in order
to maintain an equilibrium between the
body and teeth. Thus the growth of the cro-
codile involves dental renewal, just as the
teeth of bony fishes are always replaced,
whether injured or not, if their body in-
creases. Therefore a tooth from a sixty cm.
crocodile might well be measured and com-
pared with that of a three meter one, as it
never changes in shape, only the volumne
remains proportional to the whole body, al-

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

though some of the teeth in activity may not
be equal among themselves in the same
animal. In rodents the incisors get longer,
but without changing the shape, their size
being continually changed by wear.

8

We conclude that teeth are rather a fact
of development than a result for a purpose,
as they have no general meanings, though
they can get a use, but never a role in all
vertebrates. In reality they constitute a
specific character similar to any others in
the animal kingdom.

Teeth are used on account of their dis-
position, but they are not always disposed
in such a manner that they may be used, if
there is a reason for it.

FOOD HABITS OF MARTEN (Martes americana)
IN NORTHERN BRITISH COLUMBIA!

Horace F. Quick

University

ARTEN food habits have not been ade-

quately described although several stu-
dies have presented information pertaining
to seasonal food habits in specific localities
(Cowan, 1950), (Marshall, 1946). Only a
few food habits have included appraisals of
food availability which are essential if the
effects of predation on population variations
are to be properly interpreted.

An analysis of marten food habits was
made to evaluate the relationship of this
mammal to the carrying capacity of its food
base. This study was part of a fur resource
survey conducted in northern British Co-
lumbia which also included an appraisal of
small mammal populations (Quick, 1954).
These collections and studies were made
during the trapping seasons of 1947-48 and
1948-49 in the region of Fort Nelson, B.C.

A description of the food items selected
by marten was obtained by an examination
of the alimentary tracts of specimens col-
lected from trappers. Winter food habits
were determined by the analysis of 250 speci-
mens and 68 scats. This adds to the informa-
tion obtained in southern British Columbia
by Cowan (1950) from three stomachs and

1) Received for publication November 9, 1954.

of Maine

112 scats collected during several summer
periods.

Most animals are trapped because of hun-
ger. The stomachs of such animals are there-
fore usually empty and provide no data about
food habits but sometimes useful informa-
tion can be obtained from other parts of the
alimentary tracts. Evidence of food-item
selection was classified according to the
quality of the information which could be
obtained from the specimens. Specimens
fell into six groups as shown in Table 1.

In the separate collections representing
two different winter periods the same pro-
portion (59%) of the specimens were found
to have empty alimentary tracts (Table 1).
This indicates the degree of difficulty of
obtaining information on food habits from
trapped specimens. Data obtained from Class
1 specimens were most productive and that
from Class 2 next. A comparison of these
two classes combined shows a notable simi-
larity for each of the two years indicated.
In 1947, for example, about 14% of the
marten had food in their stomachs from a
recent meal at the time they were trapped
and the same proportion had empty stomachs
but food in the intestines or recta represent-
ing food ingested a day or two prior to being

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

145

Table 1. EVALUATION OF FOOD HABITS MATERIALS

1947-48 1948-49
Class 1: stomach and rectum yielding data oo... ccccceesseeeeeeees 14.2% 9.7%
Classi228 rectum. only/"yielding ‘data yee 00... ie ae eke nn ss eeteeens 14.2% 17.2%
Class 3: stomach only yielding data ...............ccccssessssssesscssscsscseeeseeeees 11.0% 10.5%
Class 4: scats adhering to CarcaSs-fur ...........e eee ceeeeeeeeeceecreceeseeseeees 0 1.7%
Class}/5> Jbaitiandistomach Wee G ee) FOS SBOE. Ok. OI 1.6% 1.7%
Class 6: alimentary tract empty or containing only debris ................ 59.0% 59.3%
Not¥ol specimens, G2 k8.. 228 eee... Bh eee ee 127 123

trapped. In the following year these two having occurred with a frequency of about

classes of data, combined, were equivalent
to that of the previous year but separately
Class 1 data (animals with food in stomachs)
had fallen about 5%. This might have been
caused by the somewhat colder weather in
the latter year which would make hunting
difficult and delay feeding thus increasing
the proportion of specimens trapped with
empty stomachs. The collections for the two
years are comparable in number and about
40% of the specimens from each collection
yielded some kind of usable information.
Although these specimens probably were
hungry when trapped the contents of their
alimentary tracts represent the natural food
habits of this species.

Food items selected by marten during
winter are listed in Table 2 for each of two
winters. Some distinct differences in dietary
selection are shown but the frequency of
red-backed voles, Clethrionomys gapperi, in
both groups of material was about equal.
Despite an increase of about 300% in small
rodent populations during 1948 voles ap-
peared to be as important in 1947 as in 1948

40% in both groups of specimens. The
balance of the food items in 1947 appeared
to consist mostly of birds while in 1948 it
was made up of small rodents other than
voles such as deer mice, Peromyscus mani-
culatus, red squirrels, Sciurus hudsonicus,
snowshoe rabbits, Lepus americanus, and
shrews, Sorex sp.

The greater diversity of food material
(eight species) which appeared in the
dietary of 1948 was probably caused by the
colder weather. Small mammals usually are
not as active during extreme cold periods
and are therefore more difficult to find.
Larger predators must travel farther in
order to find prey. The chances are in-
creased in this way of encountering a greater
variety of prey, depending of course, on
relative population levels.

Investigations by Craighead (1950) have
illustrated the function of prey population
in diet item selection by raptorial birds. The

present analysis of marten food habits part-
ly demonstrates this function of predator-
prey population relationships although posi-

Table 2. MARTEN FOOD HABITS BY EXAMINATION OF CARCASSES.

Food Item

red backed vole
deer mouse
shrew
red squirrel
snowshoe rabbit
bird (spp. unknown)
grouse
porcupine
grass
bait

snail

Frequency of occurrence in per cent

1947 1948
127 specimens 123 specimens

Pry 3 Frans 39.0 40.0
ATS: 0 16.4
iNOS ff) 5.5
Re eh ie 0 12.7
en oe 0 10.9
Ae aay 46.0 7.3
Nee pn a 7.5 5.5
PE ee fe, 0.7 0.8
Shea aythe 0.8 0
F Poets 1.6 1.6
va oe ER i a 0
eta 0 1.6

146 THE » CANADIAN
tive correlations are not clear. Grouse and
hares for example were more numerous in
1948 than in 1947 yet an increase in the use
of only hares was. noted while predation on
grouse actually was reduced. This can be
interpreted in terms of prey vulnerability
which also is a factor governing food item
selection. Grouse, for example, are capable
of eluding terrestrial predators more easily
than-are hares. More squirrels appeared in
the 1948 diet than in that of 1947 because
of the colder winter which induced the squir-
rels to remain in their sub-snow cone caches
where marten could find them. Increased
predation on squirrels occurred despite the
greater abundance of mice. The colder
weather caused mice to remain below snow
surface where they were proportionally less
vulnerable than either squirrels or hares.

Food-item selection appears to be governed
by a number of variable factors. The most
obvious of these are prey-predator popula-
tion ratios, prey habits (vulnerability) and
weather influences. These factors have the
effect of shifting the pressure of predation
from one species or group of species to an-
other. A predator population, such as the
marten is not entirely dependent of any one
food-item but in an unexploited population
probably is limited by the availability and
vulnerability of all forms of prey.

Analysis of scats

Cowan found that mice were more im-
portant in marten diets when hares were
scarce in southern British Columbia. He
shows that marten were devoting their for-
aging efforts to the hunting of mice rather
than hares. An examination of 61 scats found
at a den in the Fort Nelson region revealed
at least the local importance of hares in the
marten diet. The scats were definitely re-
lated to a period of time by the position
in which they were found in the snow.
These specimens could be dated as having
been deposited after the first snow fall.
They provide a good record of food-item
selection for a period of a month between
November 15 and December 15 when they
were collected.

Local conditions in this case were some-
what different than those found by Cowan.
All small mammals were becoming in-
creasingly abundant in the Fort Nelson
region. Hares were numerous in the im-
mediate home range of the marten repre-

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

sented by the scats considered here. Tracks
of this animal were observed within a half
mile radius of this den for a period of one
month immediately following the first snow
of November 15. Tracks of rabbits also were
numerous in the alder-willow-spruce thic-
kets surrounding the den. This marten was
eventually trapped near the den in late De-
cember. The scat collection yielded an
average of two per day. As very few scats
are found on marten trails in winter this
probably represents nearly 100% of the food
material which was consumed by this animal.

All of the scats contained a large quantity
of hair. Bone, teeth ‘and claws occurred in
75% of them. Only 19% contained vege-
table matter most of which was likely in-
gested as the stomach contents of prey ani-
mals. Most scats contained but one species
of prey item but combinations of red squir-
rel-vole, hare-vole and hare-mouse occurred
in 7% of the scats. The remains of hares
occurred in 86.5% of the scats collected at
the den. Despite an increase of red backed
voles in the fall of 1948 they occurred in
only 11.5% of this particular collection of
seats. When compared to the all-winter
stomach analysis of 123 specimens for this
same year which shows a 40% frequency of
these voles, it appears that the individual
marten represented by this scat collection
was, for the time period represented, ex-
ploiting a local hare population. Moose hair
found in one scat was no doubt obtained by
robbing trap baits which eventually led to
the marten’s death.

This analysis of scats shows that marten
are quite capable of killing hares. It indi-
cates that individual animals will concentrate
on a particular prey species even when other
species are more abundant and appear in
larger collections to be more frequently
taken by a predator population in general.

Trail scats

Very few scats were found on trails in
the Fort Nelson studies but these contribute
a little to the knowledge of marten food

habits. Seven scats revealed a similar se-
lection of prey items as found in the
stomach and den-scat analyses. Two ad-

ditional items, however, which did not ap-
pear in the other materials were found. A
single scat was composed entirely of the
remains of a chipmunk, Eutamias sp. This
scat was obtained in early fall, and most

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN
likely represents food item selection at a
period when . the chipmunk was not in
hibernation. This rodent is seasonally more
important in the marten dietary than is
shown in the analysis of material collected
in winter. Cowan found chipmunk in 3.5%
of the specimens he examined.

Several scats contained fruits of Vibur-
num cassinoides and some plant material
which appeared to be debris accidentally
ingested. Fruits are a class of food in the
marten diet which are not adequately re-
presented in a winter collection of speci-
mens. Cowan shows that berries constitute
about 5% of all food eaten by marten during
the summer period. —

Results of the analysis of scats found
along trails agreed favorably with an analy-
sis of material from other sources as well
as with Cowan’s findings. Rabbits appeared
to be somewhat more important at the time
of study in the northern British Columbia
material (during winter) than in Cowan’s
samples from southern British Columbia
(during. summer).

Seats representing summer food habits
added two items to the marten dietary list
which did not appear in winter collections
of materials. Both of these are obviously
only seasonally available but perhaps im-
portant in season. Cowan found red and fly-
ing squirrels in both summer and winter
diets but the ground squirrels and chip-
munks occurred only in materials found in
summer. He also noted berries to be used
in summer but not in winter. His work gives
a good description of the summer food habits
of marten, whereas the present study pro-
vides an appraisal of winter food habits.
These food habits studies agree that small
mammals are an important food base for
martens during all seasons of the year.

Summary

Marten are sufficiently versatile in their
hunting habits to glean a living despite ex-
treme changes in prey population levels.

FIELD-NATURALIST

147

Although mouse populations changed as
much as 300% in one year no difference
in the frequency of occurrence of these ani-
mals was noted in collections of comparable
size from one year to another. The pre-
dator-prey population information derived
in this study makes it appear that food
availability was not limiting marten popula-
tions at the time of the study.

Cowan has noted a lack of correlation be-
tween marten populations and cyclic hare
and grouse populations which reportedly
fluctuate with a ten year periodicity. From
the present study it appears that small ro-
dents are not a factor controlling marten
populations either. In fact, the proportion
of marten specimens containing vole re-
mains was the same during low vole popula-
tions as during high vole populations. This
food habits study reveals the ability of the
marten to adapt to drastic changes in prey
population levels by shifting to more avail-
able or more vulnerable species.

The important food base complex during
the most critical period of the year consists
of red backed voles, deer mice, red squirrels
and snowshoe hares. These animals vary in
abundance but low levels did not appear to
limit marten populations in northern British
Columbia during 1947-1949.

Literature cited

Craighead, Frank C. Jr. and John J. 1950.

The ecology of raptor predation. N. A.
Wildlife Conf. Trans., 15: 209-222.

Cowan, Ian McT. 1950. Food habits of the
marten in the Rocky Mountain Region of
Canada. Canadian Field-Naturalist, vol.
64, no. 3, pp. 100-104.

Marshall, Wm. 1946. The biology and
management of the pine marten in Idaho.
Unpublished thesis, Library, University
of Michigan.

Quick, Horace F. 1954. Small mammal popu-
lations in northern British Columbia.
Canadian Field-Naturalist, vol. 68, no. 3,
pp. 95-102.

148

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIS?

[Vol. 69

OBSERVATIONS ON A SECOND COLONY OF THE LAND SNAIL
CEPAEA NEMORALIS (L.) AT LONDON, ONTARIO WITH
A CONSIDERATION OF THE BANDING PATTERNS
IN THE TWO COLONIES *

W. W. Jupp

University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario.

T HE WRITER (Judd, 1953) reported upon
a colony of the snail, Cepaea nemoralis,
found on the outskirts of London in West-
minster Twp. in April, 1952. In the fall of
the same year a second well-established
colony was found within the city limits of
London, three miles to the north-east of the
first colony, in the “Morgan Gardens”, 986
Wellington Street, London. These gardens,
set in a residential section of London, com-
prise an area of about one-half a city block.
They are open to the public during the
growing season and display a considerable
variety of trees, hedges and herbaceous
plants. Throughout the warm months of
the year live Cepaea nemoralis are commonly
seen on the soil of the flower beds, resting
on the leaves of plants and climbing over the
trunks and foliage of the trees; and the old,
empty shells are frequently turned up with
the soil. Mr. A. J. Morgan, proprietor of
the gardens, reports that the snails have
been present in the gardens since at least
as early as 1920. In the course of stocking
the gardens plants had been imported from
England, Holland, Belgium and other Euro-
pean countries, and the likelihood is that
C. nemoralis was imported with these plants.

On September 5, 1952 one thousand living
snails were collected in the gardens. The
weather was cool and at first only a few
snails could be found in the open. It was
then discovered that they were concentrated
particularly about plants of the day lily,
Hemerocallis sp., the leaves of which were
still green but drooping against the ground.
A few snails were clinging to the under sides
of the leaves but the majority were in a
quiescent state, clustered between the bases
of the leaves at ground level. In each snail
the mouth of the shell was closed by a mem-
branous epiphragm. The clustered snails
were invisible if the plant was examined
casually, even though two or three dozen
snails might be present at the base of the
plant, and it was necessary to part the leaves
close to the ground in order to extricate the

1) Received for publication December 6, 1954.

closely crowded specimens. A _ few live
snails were found on plants of peony, iris and
phlox.

The banding patterns of the one thousand
snails were studied and the frequencies of
the variations in pattern were recorded. The
same band formula as used by Judd (1953)
was used as the frequencies were recorded.
The five bands on the shell are numbered
from the top down: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and a pattern
of five separate bands is represented by the
formula 12345. Where a band is missing it is
replaced by ‘0”, e.g. where bands 1 and 2
are missing the formula is 00345. If a band
is indistinct it is represented by a small figure
below the line, e.g. where band 4 is indis-
tinct the formula is 123,5. Where bands are
fused the criterion for fusion is that proposed
by Cain and Sheppard (1950) who recorded
fusion as occurring when bands are “fused
at and after a line drawn across the body-
whorl from the umbilicus at right angles to
the lower lip of the mouth’. Where com-
plete fusion occurs the bands involved are
enclosed in round brackets, e.g. where bands
3 and 4 are completely fused the formula is
123(45). Where incomplete fusion occurs
the bands are enclosed in square brackets,
e.g. 123[45]. The frequencies of the different
patterns occurring on the shells of the snails
from the Morgan Gardens (colony B) are
presented in Table 1 together with those
found in the colony from Westminster Twp.
(colony A) as previously reported by Judd
(1953).

The bandless pattern: 00000 did not occur
in the sample from either of the two colonies.
Stelfox (1918) showed that this pattern is
dominant over the banded, condition. It has
not turned up in the colonies at London but
would probably soon become prevalent when
once established.
dominant patterns are those in which all

bands are present, whether all separate,
12345, or fused in various combinations, e.g.
123(45), (12)3(45), (123)(45). Lack of

bands 1 and 2, e.g. in patterns 003(45) and

In both colonies the pre- |

|

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN

Pattern Frequency
Colony A Colony B
12345 353 104
123[45] 429 20
123 (45) 102 183
1(23) (45) 1 3
1(23) [45] 1 0
1[23]45 2 0
1(23)45 0 2
1[2345] 1 0
12(345) 1 4
(12)345 0 10
(12)3[45] 1 0
(12)3(45) 0 266
[12]3(45) 19 31
[12] (345) 0 2
[12]345 0 4
[12]3[45] 0 10
[123] [45] 1 2
[123] (45) 0 24
(123) (45) 0 59
[12345] 15 2
(12345) 0 1
12345 13 0
123[45] 19 0
123(45) 3 0
1,345 0 5
1,3(45) 0 3

003[45] is more prevalent in colony B than
in colony A, and the single-banded pattern
00300 occurs only in colony B. Cain and
Sheppard (1950) show that the more uniform
the background on which the snails live the
higher the number of unbanded shells. They
found the greatest concentration of unbanded
shells, almost 100 percent, in beech forests
where the ground was uniformly covered with
brown leaves, and the greatest concentration
of banded shells where the greatest diversity
of vegetation was present, as about hedge-
rows. In terrain of an intermediate nature
with an overgrowth of trees and green her-
bage below, the banded and unbanded condi-
tions were both well represented. The two
colonies at London are in terrain of a diver-
sified nature with trees and shrubs growing
above lawns and flower beds, and the banded
patterns predominate. The unbanded condi-
tion, 00000, has however, not appeared and

FIELD-NATURALIST

149

Table 1 — FREQUENCIES OF BANDING PATTERNS OCCURRING IN
1000 SHELLS FROM COLONY A AND COLONY B.

Pattern Frequency

Colony A Colony B
123,5 1 0
10345
10045
12045
(12)0(45)
[12]045
120[45]
12045
120[45]
12305
1,045
02345
0(23)45
023[45]
0(23) (45)
023 (45)
02(345)
020[45]
020(45)
003[45]
003 (45)
00345

00. (45)
00300
000(45)
TOTALS

=
eoqooeoworocoorqcoooeoreorF

—
ol
= oS Oo

49
2
1000

SOOCOCOCrFrRFFNOVUONFOOCOrFNFRNON OF

_
i=)
i=)
So

its likely proportion in the colonies, if it oc-
curred, cannot be assessed.

The ground-colour of the shells also varies
in Cepaea nemoralis. The colour varieties
have been given names (Pilsbry, 1939): e.g.
yellow -libellula, pink-rubella and _ pale
brown or fawn-petiveria. Cain and Shep-
pard (1950) studied the relation of ground-
colour of shells to the nature of the back-
ground and concluded that the proportion of
yellow shells increases as the amount of
green vegetation at ground level increases.
In the colonies at London the snails lived
on grassy lawns and green herbage and all
shells studied were of the yellow variety.

The problem of the occurrence of varia-
tions in populations of Cepaea nemoralis has
been discussed by various authors. Diver
(1940) considers that selective forces and
adaptive values have played little direct part

150

in production of variations in colonies, the
most probable general cause of variation
being random differentiation in small, iso-
lated populations, as by “genetic drift’ sug-
gested by Wright (1940). Cain and Shep-
pard (1950) and Sheppard (1951, 1952), how-
ever, demonstrate that the different ground-
colours have definite selective values, related
to the environment, and that the ratio of
genotypes in a breeding population is deter-
mined by two kinds of selection, one physio-
logical and the other due to selective elimi-
nation by predators. An important snail
predator in Europe is the song thrush, Tur-
dus ericetorum. Its effect as an agent of
natural selection has been studied by Shep-
pard (1951). This bird gathers the snails
and cracks them open on stones, known as
“thrush anvils’, and devours the contents
of the shells. The percentage of yellow
snails killed decreases from the middle of
April to the middle of May while the ¢olour
of the vegetation becomes greener during
this period. Thus the selective value of the
yellow phenotype varies with changes in the
background colour, being at a disadvantage
in the middle of April when the background
is relatively brown, becoming neutral later
in April and early May and advantageous by
the middle of May when the background is
green. In this way predation by the thrush
affects the number of yellow shells in the
breeding population. Cain and Sheppard
(1950) list also rats, grey squirrels, small
field rodents and rabbits as predators of the
snails. These various animals occur in the
vicinity of London and could act as selective
agents of the colonies of Cepaea nemoralis.
Sheppard (1952) does not, however, preclude
the possibility that small inbreeding communi-
ties might diverge to some extent as a result
of isolation by distance. He studied two colo-
nies, one mile apart, which showed differ-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

ences in shell colour. In the two colonies at
London, separated by three miles, there was
no difference in the ground-colour of the
shells, which were all yellow, but the pro-
portion of shells lacking one or more bands
was considerably greater in colony B than
in colony A.

LITERATURE CITED

Cain, A.J. and P.M. Sheppard 1950. Selection
in the polymorphic land snail Cepaea
nemoralis. Heredity, 4: 275-294.

Diver, C. 1940. The problem of closely re-
lated species living in the same area.
in Huxley, J. (ed.) The new systematics.
Clarendon Press, Oxford.

Judd, W.W. 1953. A colony of the land snail
Cepaea nemoralis (L.) (Helicidae) in
the vicinity of London, Ontario. Can.
Field-Nat., 67: 87-89.

Pilsbry, H.A. 1939. Land Mollusca of North
America (north of Mexico). Acad. Nat.
Sciences Philadelphia, Monogr. 3, vol. 1,
part 1.

Sheppard, P.M. 1951. Fluctuations in the
selective value of certain phenotypes in
the polymorphic land snail Cepaea ne-
moralis (L.). Heredity, 5: 125-134.

Sheppard, P.M. 1952. Natural selection in
two colonies of the polymorphic land -

snail Cepaea nemoralis. Heredity, 6:
233-238.
Stelfox, A.W. 1918. Researches into the

hereditary characters of some of our
British mollusca. Part 2. Helix aspersa
Mill. and H. nemoralis L. Jour. Con-
chol., 15: 268-275.

Wright, S. 1940. The statistical consequen-
ces of Mendelian heredity in relation to
speciation. zn Huxley, J. (ed.) The new
systematics. Clarendon Press, Oxford.

TWO RED ALGAE NEW TO NOVA SCOTIA *

DAvip ERSKINE

University of Toronto, Toronto.

HE BASIS of our knowledge of the marine
algae of the Maritimes, as appears from
Taylor’s bibliography (1937), is the survey
of Bell and Macfarlane (1933). All large
forms of red algae known in Nova Scotia are
recorded, but, as its economic bias made in-

1) Received for publication January 5, 1955.

evitable, the survey is incomplete for small,
easily overlooked filamentous forms determi-
nable only by microscopic examination. For
instance, there are present several species of
the unreported Acrochaetium, a genus of
minute epiphytes often restricted to a single
host.

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN

The following are definitely determined:

Acrochaetium Alariae (Jonsson) Bornet
(Kylinia Alariae (Jonsson) Kylin), an epi-
phyte restricted to the kelp Alaria, of cold
seas, was found on old blades of Alaria escu-
lenta growing on the lower, wave-beaten
boulders at Herring Cove, Halifax County,
in August 1949 (UC 1,019,879, Erskine). The
ragged distal parts of the blade were quite
pink with a “fur” of Acrochaetium. Original-
ly described from Iceland, this species was
known from Massachusetts to Maine in North
America.

In possessing a star-shaped chromatophore
in each cell, it falls within the genus Kyli-
nia Rosenv. as circumscribed by Papenfuss
(1947), and, in its single large basal attach-
ment cell, belongs to Kylinia as circum-
scribed by Kylin (1944). However, as the
two circumscriptions by no means coincide,
it seems wiser at present to retain the genus
Acrochaetium in a broad sense.

Trailliella intricata (J. Agardh) Batters
forms dense tufts about an inch high, and
is characterized by the small refractive
gland-cell associated wth each cell of the
filament. It was found floating in wash at
Bayfield beach, Antigonish County, in July
1948, (UC 1,019,880, Erskine) amid plenti-
ful Ceramium cf. diaphanum. At the time it
appeared to be a range-extension from Mas-

sachusetts; however, Stephenson and Ste-
phenson (1954) have reported it as an
abundant and characteristic epiphyte of

Chondrus (Irish moss) at Souris, P.E.I., in
1948. These two stations for the Maritimes
were both, expectably enough, in the warmer
waters of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. In view
of the temporary disappearance of this spe-
cies from the waters of Buzzards Bay, it
would be interesting to know whether it
shows the same behavior in the Gulf.

In North America this species is a recent
arrival, first recorded from Massachusetts in

FIELD-NATURALIST

151

1928. Its migration northwards on this coast
matches that made in Europe, where it
reached Britain in 1890. Long a genus of
uncertain position, it has been placed by
Feldmann and Feldmann (1942) as the sporo-
phyte of Bonnemaisonia hamifera Hariot
(Asparagopsis hamifera (Hariot) Okamura),
which has been extending its range simulta-
neously in a strikingly parallel fashion, ar-
riving, for instance, in the English Channel
about 1890 (reported, 1893) and in Masssa-
chusetts in 1927! However, it is still known
on this coast only from the Cape Cod region.

The specimens upon which these reports
are based are preserved in liquid at the
Department of Botany, University of Cali-
fornia, Berkeley, U.S.A.

LITERATURE CITED

Bell, H.P. & Constance Macfarlane. The
Marine Algae of the Maritime Provinces
— |. List of species with their distribu-
tion and prevalence. Can. Jour. Res. C,
9:265-279. 1933.

Feldmann, Jean & Genevieve Feldmann. Re-
cherches sur les Bonnemaisoniacées et
leur alternance de générations. Ann. Sci.
Nat., Bot., ser. 11, 3:75-175. 1942.

Kylin, Harald. Die Rhodophyceen der schwe-

dischen Westkiiste. Lunds Univ. Arsskr.
N.F. 40 (Avd. 2, N 2):1-104. 1944.

Papenfuss, G.F. Further contributions to an
understanding of the Acrochaetium-Rho-
dochorton complex. Univ. Calf. Publ.
Bot. 18:433 448. 1947.

Stephenson, T.A. & Anne Stephenson. Life
between tide-marks in North America —
IIIA: Nova Scotia and Prince Edward
Island: Description of the region. J.
Ecol. 42:14-45. 1954.

Taylor, W.R. Marine Algae of the Northeast-
ern Coast of North America. Univ. of
Mich. Press. 1937.

THE REARING OF A GREY SEAL IN CAPTIVITY *

BETTY JUNE MYERS

Institute of Parasitology, McGill University, Macdonald College, P.Q.

N FEBRUARY, 1954, Mr. Paul L. J. Mon-
treuil, Director of the Marine Biological
Station, Grindstone, Magdalen Islands, P.Q:
(in the Gulf of the St. Lawrence), captured

1) Received for publication February 6, 1955.

two grey seal pups (Halichoerus grypus (Fa-
bric.)). These pups were shipped by air to —
the Institute of Parasitology, Macdonald Col-
lege, Ste: Anne de Bellevue, and were re-
ceived during the last week of February.

152 THE CANADIAN
One died shortly after their arrival but the
other is thriving. So far as the author is
aware this is the first time that a seal of
this species has been reared in captivity in
North America. Until recently, the grey
seal was considered a rare animal along our
coasts although common in European wa-
ters. Recent investigations by Dr. H. D.
Fisher, Atlantic Biological Station, St. An-
drews, N.B., however, indicate that the North
American population of this seal is now
equal to if not greater than that in Europe.

Both pups were in birth pelage upon their
arrival at the Institute and were estimated
to be about two months old. They were
housed in a basement room where the
temperature was approximately the same as
that outside (average 32°F.). Snow was
shovelled into the pen daily to give the ani-
mals protection from the concrete floor. A
shallow porcelain-lined sink was filled daily
with fresh tap-water and was kept in the
wire-enclosed pen.

As the seals were not weaned upon arrival
several methods of feeding them were tried.
The least ineffective was to pour evaporated
milk, undiluted, and fortified with cod-liver
oil, on the back of each seal, and then to
induce them to suck the milk from the coat.
Although some milk was taken by each seal
in this manner it was insufficient to provide
adequate nourishment. In addition, as the
seals were almost ready to moult there was
a danger of their swallowing fur. The usual
bottle techniques were unsuccessful as was
pan-feeding — the latter because the seal
does not have a lapping tongue. After a
period of two weeks the smaller and weaker
of the two seals died.

The remaining seal was introduced to a
diet of small smelt by inducing it to bite
the fish. Once a taste for the fish had been
acquired the feeding problem was solved.
The amount of smelt fed and the number of
feedings in a day depended upon the seal’s
appetite. A cod-liver oil supplement was
added to the smelt diet. During this period
the seal was a very pampered animal and
the smelt were handed to it individually.
After a short time, however, it was able to
feed itself from a pan.

Early in April the seal began to shed its
coat profusely and also suffered from loss
of appetite. Sores began to appear on the
flippers, about the mouth, and the mucosal
linings of the nose and mouth. The eyes

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

became pale and there was a discharge of
matter from them. At first this condition
was thought to be related to the spring rise
in temperature and the poor ventilation in
the room. Accordingly, the seal was removed
to the outdoors where it was given a spa-
cious enclosure with a concrete “swimming
pool” (the latter was about five feet wide
by twenty-five feet long by a depth varying
from about three to five feet). A continuous
flow of fresh water was maintained in the
pool and during the spring the water in the
pool was changed completely twice a week.
With the approach of summer and higher
temperatures the water was changed more
often — almost daily in any heat wave. A
runway was constructed from the pool to
the ground surrounding it so that the seal
had liberty of movement.

Despite its new surroundings, the con-
dition of the seal continued to deteriorate. It
was then thought that the loss of appetite
and condition might be associated with a
vitamin deficiency — something akin to
Chastek paralysis in foxes due to a diet
of whole fish. Accordingly large doses of
thiamine? and ‘“Beminal’? tablets were
given to the seal. After two periods of
dosing, the seal’s appetite improved and it
has continued to eat all that it is given, The
vitamin supplements have been continued
from the time of their initiation.

The fur lost posterior to the shoulders
has not returned and while, anterior to the
shoulders, its pelt is normal, posteriorly the
animal appears to have only the short under-
growth.

Herring were gradually added in increas-
ing numbers to the seal’s diet and these fish
have been the sole diet since the beginning
of July. It takes about ten pounds of her-
ring at its single daily meal.

When the seal arrived at the Institute it
weighed about 25 lbs. and was about 3 ft.
long. Today it weighs nearly 150 lbs. and is
nearly 5 ft. long. j

The seal is fairly tame and liked the
constant stream of visitors — particularly
children — which it had all summer and fall.
When first placed out-of-doors it seemed to
spend more time out of its pool than in it;

2) 4 5-mg. tablets daily Thiamine hydrochloride.

3) Four tablets daily ‘’Beminal with C Fortis’’ (Ayerst
McKenna and Harrison). Each tablet contains:
Thiamine 2.5 mg., Riboflavin 12.5 mg., Niacinamide
100 mg., Calcium d-panthothenate 10 mg., ascorbic
acid 100 mg.

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN
the reverse was the case during the summer
months and it has continued to prefer to
be in the water. It will, however, climb out
of the pool when it sees its meal arriving
and will also “stand up” against the fence
at the edge of its enclosure when visitors
start to leave. If called by its name — Buster
— it will sometimes cross the enclosure to
where a person is standing.

The animal has almost outgrown its pre-
sent accommodation and even although it

FIELD-NATURALIST

153

might be possible to keep it out-of-doors
during the winter months, by spring it
would be too large to either retain or ship
elsewhere. (A fully grown grey seal may
weigh a 1,000 pounds.) Accordingly, arrange-
ments are being made to ship it to a zoo-
logical garden where it can be adequately

‘eared for. 4

4) Since this manuscript was prepared the seal has
been shipped to the Bronx Zoo, New York Zoo-
logical Society, New York.

(e |
PLANT COLLECTIONS FROM MATTHEWS AND MUSKOX LAKES,

MACKENZIE DISTRICT, N.W.T. *?
W. J. Copy? and J. G. Cumicorr 4

URING the summer of 1953, the junior

author, while taking part in the North-
ern Insect Survey, a co-operative project of
the Entomology Division of the Canada
Department of Agriculture, and the Canada
Defence Research Board, visited Matthews
and Muskox lakes in southeastern Mackenzie
District. He collected a representative set
of the plants of each area in addition to the
insect fauna.

Since little is known of the flora of south-
eastern Mackenzie District, the present pa-
per has been prepared. The descriptions of
the areas and the habitat notes are those
of the junior author; the determinations of
the specimens, notes on distribution of the
various species, and the history of previous
collecting in the region are the work of the
senior author.

Matthews Lake

Matthews Lake is located at 64°05’N, 111°
15'W, between Courageous and MacKay
lakes, about one hundred and fifty miles
northeast of Yellowknife, N.W.T. The small
mining settlement where camp was set up
from June 11 to July 8 was on the east shore.

The geology of the area is of particular
interest. A geologic fault runs the length of
Matthews Lake. Basic volcanic granite is
found on the west side of the lake, and slaty
sedimentary rock with some intrusions of
granite and acid volcanic rock is prevalent

Received for publication June 10, 1955.

Contribution No. 1465 from the Botany and Plant
Pathology Division and No. 3329 from the Entomo-
logy Division, Science Service, Canada Department
of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

Assistant Botanist. _
Assistant Entomologist.

—
~~

>

on the east. Vertical shear lines in the slate
run almost due north and south.

The striking geologic difference between
the two sides of the lake is reflected in
the vegetation. Several species such as
Juniperus communis, Anemone parviflora,
Rubus acaulis, Cassiope tetragona and Dryas
integrifolia were found only on the western
side. Their restricted occurrence may be
explained in part by the extra shelter pro-
vided by the high hills which rise up to
eighty feet above lake level, and by the
heavier spruce cover. Dryas and Cassiope
are, however, typical exposed tundra plants,
and their presence here cannot be explained
by the shelter provided by hills and trees.

Matthews Lake is at the northeastern limit
of trees in this area. No spruce trees were
seen or are reported from farther north.
On the west side of the lake, black spruce
is fairly common in sheltered valleys, and
sometimes attains a height of twenty feet.
However, most of the trees in rocky exposed
areas are severely twisted and stunted, and
have well-developed branches only on the
lower two feet of the trunk. Even in wet
valleys, there is considerable dwarfing. Here
the trees are well spaced, and numerous
dead stumps, some of them much larger
than the living trees, are scattered through-
out the stands.

On the east side of Matthews Lake, the
spruce trees are little more than shrubs,
rarely over two feet high, growing in com-
pact clumps along the edges of lakes and
ponds. These are apparently mature trees,

154

with dead spruce of similar size among them.
Some of these dwarfed spruce had a few
cones on the branches.

Heavy willow and birch thickets, with the
occasional alder tree among them are pres-
ent along drainage areas. These grow as
high as ten feet on the west shore, but rare-
ly over six feet on the east shore. In these
thickets, Ledum, Lycopodium and Polygo-
num viviparwm form a thick undergrowth.

Another outstanding feature of the area
is the occurrence of gravel eskers, rising to
thirty feet above ground level and general-
ly running northwest to southeast. One long
esker, about five miles to the east, had been
levelled off to form a landing strip for the
mining camp, but several portions of it still
remain undisturbed. Here Arctostaphylos
forms large mats, with large open areas
sparsely populated with Oxytropis viscida
var. hudsonica and Potentilla. On the slopes,
Betula glandulosa grows in open thickets.

The region is fairly free of glacially trans
ported rock. There are only _ scattered
boulders and no moraine fields. The soil is
gravelly and permafrost is on the average
at about 6 inches depth. The marshland is
hummocky, with niggerheads about a foot
apart. There is little sorting of particles on
the well-drained uplands, but in a few
partially drained areas, frost action has
opened crevices about two feet deep, block-
ing off large irregular polygons of heath
tundra. Frequently the small hummocks are
formed in a large ring ten to fifteen feet
across with a flat gravelly centre. In some
of the drier marshy areas frost action has
brought the finer particles together to form
little pockets of fine rich black soil about
eight inches in diameter extending down tq
permafrost level.

When work was begun in early June, snow-
drifts were present only in sheltered areas.
The ice on the lake was still solid and six

feet thick in places, but it had already lifted,.

and wide crevices were found along the
shore.

Arctostaphylos was already in bloom on
June 11. The larger bushes of Salix richard-
sonii and S. planifolia, and Oxytropis visci-
da var. hudsonica, Loiseleuria procumbens
and Rhododendron lapponicum were found
in bloom within the week.

A brief visit was made in~ mid-August.
The area was very dry. Even in localities
that were marshy in the spring the water

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

level was several inches below the surface.
Rubus chamaemorus and most of the sed-
ges and grasses were already in full fruit;
foliage was yellowed, or bright red in Arc-
tostaphylos.

Muskox Lake

Muskox Lake is a large lake situated at
approximately 64°38'N, 108°15’W, some 100
miles northeast of Matthews Lake. It is
drained by Back River. The area in which
most of the collecting was done is about
four miles north of the east end of the lake
and about four miles northwest of the
junction of Back and Contwoyto rivers, on
the shores of a small unnamed lake (64°
45'N, 108°10'W). A camp established a
number of years ago by a white trapper, M.
Murphy, was the base of operations from
July 9 to August 14.

This area is about 75 miles beyond the
tree-line, and there is no sign of even isolated
spruce in the vicinity. In the valleys, how-
ever, birch and willows grow six feet high
in dense thickets along the streams, and
there is sufficient brush in three valleys
near the camp to supply Mr. Murphy with
fuel the year round, without the need of
seriously depleting the stands. Permafrost
during the midsummer period was, on the
average, 6 to 8 inches below the surface.

Unlike Matthews Lake, the geology of the
region is more typical of the eastern Arc-
tic. Large transported boulders overlying a
gravelly soil occur over the entire area, and
boulder fields with very little vegetation are
found on the far side of Back River. Around
the camp, the upland areas are strewn with
many rocks, but in the lowland or marshy
areas the rocks are scarcer and well scat-
tered over the landscape.

There are few outcrops of the underlying
rock. To the east about five miles runs a
long line of hills of sedimentary rock. Here
the valleys are heavily rock-strewn. A mile
to the west and extending about a mile be-
yond is a small outcrop of similar type. In
the same region are several outcrops of rock
of high iron content and mounds of rust-
cemented soil.

The striking localization of certain plants
observed at Matthews Lake is not seen in
the Muskox Lake region. The species are
generally distributed throughout the area
and, with the one exception of Viola palus-
tris, may be found in almost any spot where
the habitat is suitable for their growth.

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN

The effect of the long-established camp on
the immediate area is striking. The fer-
tilizing effect of the dogyards has resulted
in especially lush vegetation, where grasses
and Evilobium angustifolium grow waist
high.

There was little sign of frost action at
Muskox Lake. None of the polygons and
few of the muck-pockets so common at Mat-
thews Lake were present. The niggerheads
were also less striking, and rarely arranged
so as to form rings with the flat centre such
as those observed at the tree-line camp.

On arrival on July 8th, it was noticed
that the vegetation was less than a week
behind that at Matthews Lake, although in
early June the break-up had been at least
two weeks behind that at Matthews Lake.

Previous Collecting in the Area

The area under consideration is of par-
ticular phytogeographic and floristic interest
since a number of southern species find their
northeastern limit, and some northern spe-
cies find their southern limit in eastern
Mackenzie District here. Few specimens
have previously been collected here, and of
these many bear no exact locality data. The
following are among the most important
earlier collections.

There is an appendix to Back’s Narrative
(1836) which lists plants collected by
Richard King during the expedition and
determined by Hooker. Localities are given
from Ft. William, Ontario, to the Arctic
coast, but few, if any, of the collections
came from our area.

In 1900, J.W. Tyrrell (1902) was in charge
of a party that traversed the country from
Great Slave Lake eastward through Artillery
Lake, Sifton Lake and Thelon River to
Chesterfield Inlet. A list of plants collected
during the expedition was prepared by John
Macoun and published as appendix No. 5 to
the separate of Tyrrell’s report. This list
has not been seen.

In 1924-25, a party under John Hornby
crossed the territory between Ft. Reliance,
at the east end of Great Slave Lake, and
Chesterfield, by way of the Thelon River.
A list of plants collected between Sifton
Lake and Aberdeen Lake is given by Crit-
chell-Bullock (1930-31), but no localities are
cited.

East of the Matthews and Muskox lakes
region, in the Thelon Game Sanctuary and
in central Keewatin District, C.H.D. Clarke

FIELD-NATURALIST

155

(1940), J.B. Tyrrell (1896), J.W. Tyrrell
(1897), and particularly A.E. Porsild have
made collections of plants. Porsild has made
extensive collections around Great Bear
Lake. H.M. Raup (1936) has studied the
vegetation of the Athabaska-Great Slave
Lake area, and has brought together the
work on that region. More recently, W.J.
Cody has also made some collections in this
latter area, as well as at Indin Lake (64°
17'N, 115°12'W), to the west.

Floristic Relationships

The present collections are of interest
since they were made at, and just beyond,
the northern limit of trees. A total of 84
species of phanerogamic plants are recorded
from the two localities: 51 from Matthews
Lake, and 62 from Muskox Lake.

A study of the known ranges of these
species shows that nearly half are apparent-
ly at or near their limit of distribution,
either northward or southward, and that this
distribution is apparently limited by factors
governing tree-line.

Only one species, Lychnis ostenfeldii, is
endemic to the area. Potentilla hookeriana
is a western species that is at its eastern
limit range here. Artemisia tilesit is also a
western species that finds its eastern limit
of distribution at James Bay.

The following nineteen species apparently
find their northeastern limit of range in
eastern Mackenzie District in this region:
Equisetum sylvaticum, E. fluviatile, Picea
mariana, Juniperus communis var. depres-
sa, Festuca saximontana, Calamagrostis ca-
nadensis, Scirpus caespitosus var. callosus,
Salix planifolia, S. arbusculoides, Parnassia
kotzebuei, Rubus acaulis, Epilobium angusti-
folium, Kalmia polifolia, Arctostaphylos uva-
ursi, Vaccinium microcarpum, Pinguicula
villosa, Galium trifidum and Petasites sagit-
tatus. Also included here is Viola palustris,
an isolated record of a species otherwise un-
known from north of Lake Athabaska.

Eighteen species apparently find their
southern limit in eastern Mackenzie District
in this region. These are Poa arctica, Hie-
rochloé alpina, Carex bigelowii, C. rotunda-
ta, C. membranacea, Luzula wahlenbergit,
L. confusa, Salix richardsonii, Draba ? niva-
lis, Oxytropis viscida var. hudsonica, O. may-
delliana, O. arctica, Cassiope tetragona, pe-
dicularis lapponica, P. flammea, Antennaria
angustata, A. isolepis and A. pygmaea.

The remainder of the flora consists of spe-
cies of wide range such as Equisetum arven-

156 THE CANADIAN
se, Poa glauca and Polygonum viviparum,
northern species such as Lycopodium selago,
Dryas integrifolia, Epilobium latifoliwm and
Rhododendron lapponicum that range
through the area at least as far south as
Great Slave Lake, and southern species such
as Anemone parviflora and Pedicularis la-
bradorica that extend northward some dis-
tance beyond it.

Lists of Plants Collected

The numbers throughout the list are the
collection numbers of the junior author.
The specimens have been preserved in the
Herbarium of the Botany and Plant Pathology
Division, Canada Department of Agriculture,
Ottawa, Ont. (DAO).

HEPATICAE
MARCHANTIA POLYMORPHA L. — MUSK-
OX LAKE: moist slope below dogyard, 181;
just a small patch; only place seen.

POLYPODIACEAE
DRYOPTERIS FRAGRANS (L.) Schott —
MATTHEWS LAKE: crevices of rock out-
crop % mile north of camp, 52. MUSKOX
LAKE: in cracks of rock cliff, 142 miles
southwest of camp, 133; of rare occurrence.

EQUISETACEAE
EQUISETUM ARVENSE L. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: wet marsh between hummocks, 64B.
EQUISETUM SYLVATICUM L. — MUSKOX

LAKE: wet willow-birch thickets along
stream, 1 mile south of camp, 129; very
common among willows. This collection

helps to complete the picture of the north-
eastern range of the species between Great
Bear Lake and the eastern end of Great
Slave Lake.

EQUISETUM FLUVIATILE L. — MUSKOX
LAKE: in deep water in slow moving stream
4 mile east of camp, 128; only place seen.
This collection helps to complete the picture
of the northeastern limit of the species, be-
tween Great Bear Lake and the eastern end
of Great Slave Lake. The species has ap-
parently not previously been reported from
beyond the limit of trees.

LYCOPODIACEAE

LYCOPODIUM SELAGO L. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: among high willows in valley due
west of camp, 1. MUSKOX LAKE: scattered
on south-facing slope at base of rock cliff
1% miles southwest of camp, 139; very rare
in this area.

LYCOPODIUM ANNOTINUM L. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: among willows and birches
on wet soil near pool, 7; common in Salix

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

and Betula thickets. MUSKOX LAKE: in
wet willow-birch thickets 1 mile south of
camp, 127; wet soil on slope in rocky val-
ley, 136; uncommon except in willow thic-
kets. These collections help complete the
known distribution of the species between
Great Bear Lake and the eastern end of
Great Slave Lake.

PINACEAE
PICEA MARIANA (Mill.) BSP. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: granite slopes on west side
of the lake growing to 10 ft. in height; on
the east side of the lake never attaining
more than 3 ft., and then only along stream-
banks or shores of small lakes. These latter
trees were of great age, one butt measuring
4 ft. in circumference.
JUNIPERUS COMMUNIS L. var. DEPRES-
SA Pursh — MATTHEWS LAKE: poor soil
on south side of igneous rock hill 1 mile
west of camp, 18; common on south side of
hill and among willows in valley; found only
on the west side of the lake. Apparently
the most northeasterly collection in eastern
Mackenzie District, it is a range extension
of some 100 miles from the nearest known
sites to the south at the eastern end of Great
Slave Lake.

GRAMINEAE
FESTUCA SAXIMONTANA Rydb. — MUSK-
OX LAKE: hummocks on upland slope, 162.
This collection is from near the northern
limit of range of the species in eastern Mac-
kenzie District. The nearest site known to
the authors is Ft. Reliance at the eastern
end of Great Slave Lake (Raup 1936).
POA PRATENSIS L. — MUSKOX LAKE:
quite common on rich uplands around camp,
145B.
POA ARCTICA R. Br. — MUSKOX LAKE:
dry gravelly patches on uplands, 175A.
POA GLAUCA Vahl — MUSKOX LAKE:
in hollow of boulder on top of hill, 157; dry
gravelly patches on uplands, 175B.
TRISETUM SPICATUM (L.) Richt—MUSK-
OX LAKE: dry gravelly ‘patches in uplands,
160. The specimens are much smaller than
the others seen from southern Mackenzie
District or even the Canadian Eastern Are-
tic, the culms at most only 9 cm in height,
the spikes but 15mm in length and 3 to 5
mm in diameter.
CALAMAGROSTIS CANADENSIS (Michx.)
Nutt. — MATTHEWS LAKE: dry heath slo-
pes and meadows, 67, 68. MUSKOX LAKE:
quite common on rich uplands around camp,
145A, 147.

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

HIEROCHLOE ALPINA (Sw.) Roem. &
Schult. — MUSKOX LAKE: gravelly patches
on dry uplands, 161. This collection helps
complete our knowledge of the southern limit
in eastern Mackenzie District between the
Thelon Game Sanctuary and Great Bear
Lake.
CYPERACEAE

ERIOPHORUM VAGINATUM L. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: wet hummocky marsh, 3
miles southeast of camp, 9. MUSKOX LAKE:
fairly common on hummocks in_ upland
meadow marsh, 109.

ERIOPHORUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM Honcke-
ney — MATTHEWS LAKE: between hum-
mocks in low marsh areas, 60.

SCIRPUS CAESPITOSUS lL. var. CALLO-
SUS Bigel. — MATTHEWS LAKE: as solid
clumps on dryish hummocks, 66A. This
species was noted in Flora Boreali-Ameri-
cana as occurring “Throughout Canada to
near the shores of the Arctic Sea’, but Raup
(1947) reported that he had seen no speci-
mens from north of Great Slave Lake. This
collection, then, is an extension of range of
some 100 miles north from Raup’s collection
sites at the east end of Great Slave Lake.
The specimen was heavily infected with the
smut Cintractia scirpi.

CAREX SCIRPOIDEA Michx—MATTHEWS
LAKE: on lichen hummocks in marsh land,
65.

CAREX GLACIALIS Mack. — MUSKOX
LAKE: fairly common on dry upland, 156.
CAREX BIGELOWII Torr. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: moist marshy soil, 59. MUSKOX
LAKE: wet hollows in hummocky marsh,
148, 169. These collections are from near
the southwestern limit of range of the spe-
cies in eastern Mackenzie District.

CAREX ROTUNDATA Wahl.—MATTHEWS
LAKE: moist soil between hummocks in
marsh, 58. MUSKOX LAKE: fairly common
in thickets along streams, wet hollows in
hummocky marshes, and hummocky upland
meadows, 149, 150, 158, 165, 179. This spe-
cies has apparently not been reported for
Mackenzie District, although recorded for
both Keewatin District and Alaska; possibly
some specimens recorded under C. mem-
branacea may be referred here.

CAREX MEMBRANACEA Hook. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: wet marsh land, 63, 64A.

JUNCACEAE
JUNCUS CASTANEUS J.E. Sm.

OX LAKE: hollows
151A.

— MUSK-
in hummocky marsh,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

157

LUZULA WAHLENBERGII Rupr.—MUSK-
OX LAKE: hollows in hummocky marsh,
151B. This species has apparently not pre-
viously been recorded between central Kee-
watin District and the Mackenzie Mountains.
LUZULA CONFUSA Lindb. — MUSKOX
LAKE: hollows in hummocky marsh, 152.
Artillery Lake, to the east of Great Slave
Lake, appears to be the southernmost limit
of distribution of the species in this region.
It has apparently not previously been rec-
orded in the area between there and Great
Bear Lake.

LILIACEAE
TOFIELDIA PUSILLA (Michx.) Pers. —
MATTHEWS LAKE: in rock crevice on east
side of granitic hill, 1 mile west of camp,
rare, 29; moist marsh, 56. MUSKOX LAKE:
fairly common among willows on moist slope,
12:

SALICACEAE
SALIX ARCTOPHILA Cock. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: low prostrate plant on dryish up-
lands, 1 mile east of camp, 34; marshy areas
near shore of lake, 1 mile west of camp, 31.
MUSKOX LAKE: in wet moss hummocks,
176.
SALIX GLAUCA L. — MATTHEWS LAKE:
dry uplands, 1 mile east of camp, 32. MUSK-
OX LAKE: a common willow in the area
both on dry rocky slopes and in moist ground
along streams, 134, 166, 167, 168, 170, 171,
174, 177, 178. These collections are apparent-
ly from near the northern limit of range of the
species in eastern Mackenzie District.

SALIX RICHARDSONII Hook. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: hummocky marshland, 10,
11; in valleys on south and east sides of
granitic hill, 1 mile west of camp, 19. These
collections are from near the southern limit
of the species in eastern Mackenzie District.
SALIX PLANIFOLIA Pursh — MATTHEWS
LAKE: wet marshy tundra, 4, 14; dry up-
lands in’ slate) country, 35, (36, 37, 38, 39.
MUSKOX LAKE: wet land along stream,
169. The map given by Raup (1947) shows
stations in the Thelon Game Sanctuary, at
Great Slave Lake and at Great Bear Lake.
These collections help complete the northern
limit of range in eastern Mackenzie District.
SALIX ARBUSCULOIDES Anders. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: dry gravelly upland patches
on tundra slope, 12. The map of the dis- |
tribution in Raup (1947) shows stations in
the Thelon Game Sanctuary, and south of a
line between the eastern end of Great Slave
Lake and Keith Arm, Great Bear Lake. This

158 THE CANADIAN
collection helps complete the northern limit
of range in eastern Mackenzie District.
; BETULACEAE
BETULA GLANDULOSA Michx. — MUSK-
OX LAKE: along stream, 172; generally
common; 2 to 4 feet in height in wet places,
prostrate on uplands.
ALNUS CRISPA (Ait.) Pursh—MATTHEWS
LAKE: shrubs 4 to 6 feet high on moist hill
slopes on granitic soil, 41; confined to west
side of bay, but fairly common there. This
station is between previously known sites
at the east end of Great Slave Lake and
Bathurst Inlet (Cody 1954).
POLYGONACEAE
POLYGONUM VIVIPARUM L. — MUSKOX
LAKE: fairly common along bank of stream
and among willows, 130.
CARYOPHYLLACEAE
STELLARIA LAETA Rich. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: as undergrowth in willow swamp
areas, 28; occasional only. The type of this
species was collected on the barren grounds
northeast of Great Bear Lake by Richardson.
STELLARIA MONANTHA Hulten — MUSK-
OX LAKE: common and widespread in dry
sandy soil, 1 mile south of camp, 111; general-
ly common in moist soil in deep grass around
camp, 182.
ARENARIA RUBELLA (Wahl.) J. E. Sm. —
MUSKOX LAKE: on high dry hillock, 1 mile
east of camp, 122; very inconspicuous, only
8 small plants seen.
LYCHNIS OSTENFELDII (A.E. Porsild)
Boivin — MUSKOX LAKE: at mouth of
ground squirrel burrow on high sandy hil-
lock, 1 mile north of camp, 126; previously
known only from pre-Cambrian rocks of the
east shores of Great Bear Lake.
‘RANUNCULACEAE
ANEMONE PARVIFLORA Michx. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: fairly common on slopes of
willow valleys around hill 1 mile west of
camp, 22; apparently not previously rec-
orded between the east end of Great Slave
Lake, and Great Bear Lake and the Arctic
coast to the north.
ANEMONE RICHARDSONII Hook. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: wet soil and marsh on slopes
of granitic hill, 1 mile west of camp, 27;
common in willow — birch marsh and rarer
on hill slopes. MUSKOX LAKE: common on
wet land at edge of stream among willows,
117, July 17, 1953; base of south-facing rock
cleft on edge of moist valley, 137, July 31,
1953, late flowering, and not usually seen
outside of willow thickets. The nearest pre-

FiELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69
viously known sites are some 250 miles to
the north along the shore of Coronation
Gulf, and northwest around Great Bear Lake;
south and east of this area known from Lake
Athabaska, Churchill, York Factory and
several stations in Ungava District, Quebec.
RANUNCULUS LAPPONICUS L. — MUSK-
OX LAKE: infrequent among willows in
wet ground at edge of stream, 115.
CRUCIFERAE
DRABA ? NIVALIS Liljebl. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: seen only in clumps of Silene acau-
lis on top of esker, 8. The plants collected
on June 18 and hence quite immature, are
tentatively assigned to D. nivalis. If correct,
this collection extends the range some 150
miles south from sites at Bathurst Inlet.
SAXIFRAGACEAE
SAXIFRAGA TRICUSPIDATA Rottb.
MATTHEWS LAKE: dry sandy mound on
edge of lake, 1 mile west of camp, 79; com-
mon in dry areas. _MUSKOX LAKE: dry
sandy hill 1 mile south of camp, 110; un-
common but widely distributed.
PARNASSIA KOTZEBUEI Cham. & Schl.—
MUSKOX LAKE: infrequent in wet soil
among willows along stream, 118. The rec-
ord helps complete the known eastern limit
of range in Mackenzie District between Coro-
nation Gulf and the east end of Great Slave
Lake.

ROSACEAE

RUBUS CHAMAEMORUS L. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: hummocks in willow marsh at stream
source, 1 mile west of camp, 46; heath hum-
mocks in wet marsh in valley, % mile east
of camp, 15; fairly common throughout the
country. MUSKOX LAKE: very common in
moist soil, 107. These collections help fill
out the northern range in eastern Mackenzie
District between Great Slave Lake, Great
Bear Lake and Coppermine.

RUBUS ACAULIS Michx. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: fairly common in moist willow thick-
ets, 1 mile west of camp, 45. MUSKOX
LAKE: common among willows in wet land
near stream, 116. These collections fill out
the northern range in eastern Mackenzie
District between Thelon Game Sanctuary and
Great Bear Lake.

POTENTILLA HOOKERIANA Lehm.
MATTHEWS LAKE: top of high esker, 2
miles north of settlement, 3; well-drained
soil on rock ledge on slopes of granitic hill,
1 mile west of camp, 25, 26; apparently
confined to such habitats). MUSKOX LAKE:
beside ground squirrel burrow on top of

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

sandy hill, 1 mile south of camp, 125; only
place seen. These collections are from near
the eastern limit of distribution as shown
by Hultén (1945). The Muskox Lake speci-
mens are considerably taller than those col-
lected at Matthews Lake. This increased
height may be due to fertilization by ground
squirrels and the fact that they were col-
lected at a later date.

POTENTILLA PALUSTRIS (L.) Scop. —
MUSKOX LAKE: among willows along
stream edge, 144: common generally. This
collection helps fill in the northern range
between the east end of Great Slave Lake
and Bathurst Inlet (Cody, 1954).

DRYAS INTEGRIFOLIA Vahl — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: well-drained soil and rock
crevices on slopes of hill on west shore of
lake, opposite camp, 24; common on high
areas, on west side of lake only. In Mac-
kenzie District this species extends as far
south as Great Slave Lake.

LEGUMINOSAE

ASTRAGALUS ALPINUS L. — MUSKOX
LAKE: common on gravelly mounds in moist
hummocky land, 103.
OXYTROPIS VISCIDA Nutt. var. HUDSO-
NICA (Greene) Barneby — MATTHEWS
LAKE: top of big esker, 2, occasional plants
on high hills, not common on esker or in
area. MUSKOX LAKE: common on dry
hummocks in moist soil, 104. These coi-
lections are perhaps the southernmost sites
for this species in eastern Mackenzie Dis-
trict.

OXYTROPIS MAYDELLIANA Trautv. —
MUSKOX LAKE: common on hummocks in
dryish upland marsh, 102. The map in Raup
(1947) shows stations in the Thelon Game
Sanctuary, at Bathurst Inlet, along Coro-
nation Gulf, and at Great Bear Lake. This
collection helps fill in southern limit of dis-
tribution in eastern Mackenzie District.

OXYTROPIS ARCTICA R. Br. — ‘MAT-
THEWS LAKE: well-drained gravelly soil
near top of granitic hill, 1 mile west of camp,
30; fairly common at this elevation. Bar-
neby (1952) records this species as follows:
“Arctic shores, inland in Alaska only, from
the south shore of Rae Isthmus at about
87°W., westward through coastal Mackenzie

and the islands of the Polar Sea to the up- ~

per Yukon and Seward Peninsula, Alaska’.
The fact that this species has not been re-
corded from inland in the Northwest Terri-
tories probably lies in the paucity of col-
lections from the area. Other inland col-

Tur CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

159

lections in the Divisional Herbarium are J.
Woodruff 67, southwest of head of Bathurst
Inlet, 66°04’N, 108°28’W and J. Woodruff
163, moraine east of Kigyik Lake, 67°03’N,
112°44’W.
EMPETRACEAE

EMPETRUM NIGRUM L. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: dry heath tundra along edge of lake,
16. MUSKOX LAKE: common on moist up-
lands, 1 mile east of camp, 121; generally
distributed.

VIOLACEAE

VIOLA PALUSTRIS L. — MUSKOX LAKE:
common among willows in wet soil along
stream, 118; previously unreported for
Mackenzie District and the Northwest Terri-
tories. Raup (1936) has the following dis-
cussion: ‘A specimen in Herb. G. is labelled
“Arctic Am. Back ? Syn. Fl. N. Am.” and
“Capt. Back Coll.”’; but it is difficult to
correlate it with any records in Back’s list.’
There is but one species of the violets col-
lected by Richard King, which are listed in
Appendix II of Back’s Narrative (1836),
with which this Gray Herbarium sheet could
possibly have been confused, and that is V.
blanda; the other three species, V. pubes-
cens, V. canadensis and V. muhlenbergiana,
are all caulescent. The specimen of V. blan-
da was collected at Ft. William, Ont. It is
possible that the Gray Herbarium specimen
did come from Mackenzie District but was
not seen by Hooker when he was compiling
the list of King’s collections.

ONAGRACEAE

EPILOBIUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM L.—MAT-
THEWS LAKE: scattered colonies in dry
disturbed soil about settlement, 62; MUSK-
OX LAKE: disturbed soil near buildings,
143; very common in this area only, grow-
ing up to 4 feet tall. The map in Raup
(1947) shows stations in the Thelon Game
Sanctuary, at Great Slave Lake, and at Great
Bear Lake. These collections help complete
the northern limit of range in eastern Mac-
kenzie District.

EPILOBIUM LATIFOLIUM L. — MUSKOX

LAKE: low damp riverbank, 140; only one
small colony found.
EPILOBIUM PALUSTRE L. — MUSKOX

LAKE: fairly common in wet marsh, 192.
PYROLACEAE
PYROLA GRANDIFLORA Radius — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: in moist willow thickets on
west side of lake, 1 mile west of camp, 42;
fairly common on west shore of lake.

160 THE CANADIAN
ERICACEAE

LEDUM PALUSTRE L. var. DECUMBENS
Ait—MATTHEWS LAKE: quite common on
dry uplands, 40, 54. MUSKOX LAKE: very
common on dry uplands, 101; wet ground
in shelter of rock ledge overhang, 135. This
latter collection, which is without flowers
or fruit, has some leaves, particularly those
remote from the growing tips of the branches,
flattened (measuring up to 0.5 mm in width)
and glabrate; some of these larger leaves
are infected with the rust Chrysomyxa ledi.
The infection and the abnormal leaf shape
are probably related to the moist protected
habitat in which the plant was found.
RHODODENDRON LAPPONICUM (L.)
Wahl. — MATTHEWS LAKE: fairly com-
mon, but usually dwarfed, on dry gravelly
patches in upland tundra, %4 mile east of
camp, 13; fairly common as bushes aver-
aging 1 ft. high in valleys and on slopes on
west shore of bay, 1 mile west of camp, 20.
MUSKOX LAKE: scattered on high dry up-
lands, 1 mile east of camp, 119; all plants
small. This is a northern species that in
eastern Mackenzie District is found as far
south as Great Slave Lake and Artillery
Lake.

LOISELEURIA PROCUMBENS (L.) Desv.
MATTHEWS LAKE: high barren gravelly
hill slopes, 1 mile east of camp, 5; generally
common on upland areas. MUSKOX LAKE:
fairly common on moist and dry meadow-
land and hill slopes, 1 mile east of camp,
123; at base of rock cliff in wet ground,
138. In eastern Mackenzie District the
southern limit of range of this species ap-
pears to be Artillery Lake.

KALMIA POLIFOLIA Wang.—MATTHEWS
LAKE: moist soil on edge of lake, 44; only
occasional on both sides of lake. Specimens
have been seen from the Thelon Game
Sanctuary, Gordon Lake and Great Bear
Lake (CAN). The present collection helps
complete the northern limit of distribution
in eastern Mackenzie District.

CASSIOPE TETRAGONA (L.) D. Don. —
MATTHEWS LAKE: dampish to wet soil on
lower slopes of granitic hill, 1 mile west
of camp, 21; fairly common here, but re-
stricted to the granitic west shore of the
lake.
foot of slope, 1 mile south of camp, 124.
These collections are from near the southern
limit in eastern Mackenzie District.
ANDROMEDA POLIFOLIA L. —
THEWS LAKE: quite

MAT-
common on wet

FIELD-NATURALIST

MUSKOX LAKE: fairly common at.

[Vol. 69

marshy hummocks, 33. MUSKOX LAKE:
common on moist hummocks in marsh, 106.
ARCTOSTAPHYLOS UVA-URSI (L.) Spreng.
MATTHEWS LAKE: rooted in rock crevices
on south side of hill of igneous rock, 1 mile
west of camp, 17. This collection helps to
complete the northeastern limit of range in
Mackenzie District. It is known from around
Great Slave Lake and western Great Bear
Lake, and the map in Raup (1947) also shows
a collection from the Mackenzie River Delta.
ARCTOSTAPHYLOS ALPINA (L.) Spreng.
— MATTHEWS LAKE: gravelly uplands, 1
mile east of camp, 6: common throughout
the area. MUSKOX LAKE: common on high
dry uplands, 120. These collections are ap-
parently from near the southern limit of
range in eastern Mackenzie District.
ARCTOSTAPHYLOS RUBRA (Rehder &
Wilson) Fern. — MUSKOX LAKE: a color
photograph taken on August 15, shows both
this species and A. alpina growing in close
proximity. Unfortunately, no specimens of
either species were obtained with mature
fruit.

VACCINIUM ULIGINOSUM lL. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: hummocky marsh, 51.
MUSKOX LAKE: common, generally in moist
locations, 108. :
VACCINIUM VITIS-IDAEA L. var. MINUS
Lodd. — MATTHEWS LAKE: marshy hum-
mocks in camp area, 53; very widespread.
MUSKOX LAKE: common on slopes of mo-
raine near camp, 109.
VACCINIUM MICROCARPUM (Turcz.)
Hook. f. — MATTHEWS LAKE: found as an
admixture in a collection of Scirpus caespi-
pitosus, 66B. This collection helps complete
the northern limit of range in eastern Mac-
kenzie District between Great Slave Lake
and Great Bear Lake.
SCROPHULARIACEAE
PEDICULARIS LAPPONICA L. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: wet marsh land, 1 mile west
of camp, 47; quite common on west shore of
lake. Porsild (1943) cites specimens of this
species from the Mackenzie River Delta,
Great Bear Lake and in central Keewatin
District. This collection helps complete the
picture of the southern extent in eastern
Mackenzie District.
PEDICULARIS LABRADORICA Wirsing —
MATTHEWS LAKE: moist hillocks in marsh
land, 1 mile west of camp, 93; not common,
apparently restricted to west shore of lake.
MUSKOX LAKE: common on moist hum-
mocks in marshy land, 105.

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

PEDICULARIS FLAMMEA L. — MAT-
THEWS LAKE: wet marsh, 1 mile west of
camp, 48; restricted to volcanic rock areas;
previously known in Mackenzie District from
around Great Bear Lake.
LENTIBULARIACEAE

PINGUICULA VILLOSA L. — MATTHEWS
LAKE: wet marsh hummocks, 50. This col-
lection helps fill in the northeastern limit of
distribution in eastern Mackenzie District
between the eastern end of Great Slave Lake
and Great Bear Lake.

RUBIACEAE
GALIUM TRIFIDUM L. — MUSKOX LAKE:
fairly common in wet stream bank among
willows and long grass, 141: This is a range
extension of some 330 miles northeast from
Fort Smith. It is also known in Mackenzie
District as far north along the Mackenzie
River as the Mackenzie River Delta, and at
Great Bear Lake.

COMPOSITAE
ANTENNARIA ANGUSTATA Greene —
MATTHEWS LAKE: common among willows
and alder on south slope of granitic hill on
west shore of lake opposite camp, 23. This
collection helps complete the known dis-
tribution of the species in eastern Mackenzie
District. Distribution maps of this and the
following species are given by Porsild (1950).
ANTENNARIA ISOLEPIS Greene — MUSK-
OX LAKE: common in moist willow thickets
along stream, 1 mile south of camp, 153;
found at this locality only.

ANTENNARIA PYGMAEA Fern.—MUSKOX
LAKE: moist slope near stream, 113; in-
frequent. This collection helps fill in a gap
in the known distribution between central
Keewatin District and the west side of Great
Bear Lake.

ARTEMISIA TILESII Ledeb. — MUSKOX
LAKE: moist willow thickets along stream,
1 mile south of camp, 159; common, but this
locale only. This collection is from near
the eastern limit of distribution in Macken-
zie District. To the southeast, it is known
from Churchill and southern James Bay.
PETASITES SAGITTATUS (Pursh) Gray —
MUSKOX LAKE: in wet areas along stream,
173; generally common. This collection
helps complete the northern limit of dis-
tribution between the Thelon River and Great
Bear Lake collections cited by Porsild
(1943).

ARNICA ATTENUATA Greene — MUSKOX
LAKE: common on moist slope near stream,

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

161

114; at base of south-facing rock wall, 1%
miles southwest of camp, 132.

TARAXACUM ? HYPERBOREUM Dahlst.—
MATTHEWS LAKE: in rock crevice, 1%
miles north of camp, 53. MUSKOX LAKE:
on rock ledge on south-facing slope of val-
ley, 131. These specimens, which are all im-
mature, are only tentatively referred here.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Back, G. (1836): Narrative of the Arctic land
expedition to the mouth of the Great
Fish River and along the shores of the
Arctic Ocean, in the years 1833, 1834,
and 1835. London.

Barneby, R.C. (1952). A revision of the
North American species of Oxytropis
DC. Proc. Cal. Acad. Se. 4th ser. 27(7):
177-312.

Critchell-Bullock, Capt. J.C. (1930-31): An
expedition to sub-Arctic Canada, 1924-
1925. Can. Field-Nat. 44:53-59 et seq.

Clarke, C.H.D. (1940): A biological investiga-
tion of the Thelon Game Sanctuary.
Nat. Mus. Can. Bull. 96.

Cody, W.J. (1954): New plant records from

Bathurst Inlet, N.W.T. Can. Field-
Nat. 68:40.
Hooker, W.J. (1829-1840): Flora Boreali-

Americana. London.
Hultén, E. (1945): Studies in the Potentilla
nivea group. Botaniska Notiser 2: 144.
Porsild, A.E. (1943): Materials for a flora of
the continental Northwest Territories

of Canada. Sargentia 4: 1-79.

——— (1950): The genus Antennaria in
northwestern Canada. Can. Field-Nat.
64: 1-25.

Raup, H.M. (1936): Phytogeographic studies
in the Athabaska-Great Slave Lake
Region. I. Catalogue of the vascular
plants. Jour. Arnold Arb. 17: 180-315.
(1947): The Botany of Southwestern
Mackenzie. Sargentia 6: 1-275.
Tyrrell, J.B. (1896) (1897-8) Report on the
Doobaunt, Kazan and Ferguson Rivers
and the Northwest Coast of Hudson
Bay; Geol. Surv., Canada. Ann. Rept.,
New Series vol. IX for 1896 printed
1897, pt. F. 1-218.

Tyrrell, J.W. (1897): Across the sub-Arctics
of Canada. Wm. Briggs, Toronto.
——— (1902) Exploratory Survey between
Great Slave Lake and Hudson Bay, ©
Districts of Mackenzie and Keewatin;
Ann. Rept. Dept. Int. Ottawa, 1-2 Ed-
ward VII, Sessional Paper No. 25 as

Appendix No. 26 to report of the Sur-
veyor-General: 98-155, 207-329. A sepa-
rate published 1902 contains an addi-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

tional appendix, No. 5, list of plants
by Prof. John Macoun. A later reprint
omits plates and appendices.

Neen > EEE

NATURAL HISTORY SURVEY OF COPPERMINE,

NORTHWEST TERRITORIES, 1951 *?
S. D. Hicxs *

Insect Systematics and Biological Control Unit, Entomology Division, Ottawa.

HE NORTHERN INSECT SURVEY, in

which a number of Arctic and subarctic
localities have been investigated each year
since 1947, is a project sponsored jointly by
Science Service of the Canada Department
of Agriculture and the Defence Research
Board, Canada Department of National De-
fence. The author, aided by Mr. Wallace
Findlay, a summer assistant, conducted an
investigation of the Coppermine area in
1951. Most of the survey work was con-
centrated within one mile of the settlement.
The author collected entomological speci-
mens for the Canadian National Collection of
Insects and kept a diary on the zoology of
the region. Mr. Findlay collected botanical
specimens for the Botany and Plant Patho-
logy Division, Science Service, Ottawa.

Features of the Coppermine Area

Coppermine is slightly to the west of the
mouth of the Coppermine River in Corona-
tion Gulf. The site is probably the most
suitable for settlement, and the buildings the
best, along the western Arctic coast. Most
of the buildings are in a line along the
sandy shore of the Gulf for about half a mile.
The terrain back of the buildings is low-lying
and marshy. A few drainage ditches carry
off the surface water present most of the
season on account of permafrost.

The settlement is built on the northern
border of the Canadian Shield. According to
geologists (Chipman and Cox, 1924), the coast
on either side of Coppermine is composed of
Coppermine River series rock for several
miles. It is predominantly amygdaloids with
some conglomerate in the lower part, passing
upwards into a great series of interbedded
shales and sandstones. The Coppermine
River reaches the coast through two mouths,

1) Contribution No. 3399, Entomology Division, Science
Service, Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Canada.

2) Received for publication January 5, 1956.

3) Technician.

which surround a large, low, grass-covered
island, with two diabase hills on the northern
end. Not far above the mouth, the river
narrows considerably and has steeply sloping,
alluvial cut banks.

The volume of Coppermine River water
pouring into the Gulf creates a large body
of fresh water for miles in front of the settle-
ment. Tremendous quantities of ice from
spring break-ups erode the soil banks and
the resultant silt forms many sand bars in
the river, at the mouth and in the Gulf east
and west of the settlement. The sand bars
make travel by boat hazardous and one needs
knowledge of the negotiable channels for safe
travel by boat.

Outcroppings of basalt become evident as
the land rises gradually from the coast to-
ward the south. A broad valley directly back
of the settlement fans out into smaller val-
leys between high cliffs, where it meets the
tundra country. The main valley has pre-
dominantly grasses and sedges, among which
there are many pools that remain until the
dry summer season. Three basaltic cliffs
stand in bold relief a mile to the south of
the settlement. The highest of the cliffs is
near the Coppermine River. It has an abrupt
drop of approximately 150 feet, a charac-
teristic of all the cliffs in this region. The
most interesting collections of plants and
insects were made at the base of this cliff.

Weather Conditions

Throughout the three months stay, weather
conditions were extremely variable; many
days were unpleasantly wet, cold, and dull.
During most of the time a cold wind blew
from the east, and only occasionally was there
a warm southwest wind. On good authority
we were informed that the winds are re-
versed in the winter time. With such con-
ditions, little time was suitable for field col-
lecting. However, on August 3 the tem-

‘Oct.-Dec., 1955]

perature was 77°F. Coppermine has been re-
corded as having the highest temperature,
86°F., of all of the western Arctic settlements.

On June 17 the Coppermine River ice broke
up and moved into the Gulf. The spring
break-up is important to the residents of the
settlement in many ways. There is no land-
ing strip at Coppermine and the local popula-
tion depends on firm sea ice or open water
in front of the settlement for aeroplane land-
ings. The action of the river ice breaks up
the heavy sea ice, preventing further travel
by dog team for hunting or other purposes
to the islands and distant points. Once the
Gulf is open for boat travel, nets are set
for Arctic char, upon which the residents
depend for food for both themselves and
their dogs. Stored ice blocks from the Cop-
permine River are used for drinking water
during the summer.

Vegetation

An annotated jist of the plants collected
by Mr. Findlay was published by Cody in
1954. However, the following supplementary
notes on general botanical conditions are
given as a more detailed indication of the
flora. The northern limit of trees is approxi-
mately 20 miles south of the settlement.
Willows form the highest vegetation every-
where, often occurring in extensive, dense
patches. The tundra is comparatively flat
and composed of caribou moss, grasses, sed-
ges, and scattered, showy-flowering plants.
The low-lying area in the settlement is
marshy and produces many species of peren-
nials. Carex meadows are noticeable as one
moves up the valleys toward the three rock
cliffs on the south. There are mats of
Ledum, Rhododendron, Vaccinium, and oc-
casional patches of dwarf Betula in many
places on rock or soil. The most ideal plant
situations were observed to be at the bases of
the basalt cliffs. Protected from the pre-
dominant cold east wind, plants probably
attain their maximum height here, where
the highest local temperature is maintained.

Spring Observations

As the party arrived at so early a date,
little collecting could be done on account of
winter conditions. Daily temperatures ranged
between 20° and 40° F. for some days, and ice
and snow covered the ground to a depth of
two feet. At this time the willows, knee-high
and higher, were showing well-developed cat-
kins. The following notes are daily records
of the natural history of the region as the

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

163

season advanced. These observations establish
the date of appearance after the winter season
for some of the first zoological specimens.

May 18. Rock ptarmigan were common
and two shot by an Eskimo were examined
for external parasites. Flies were beginning
to appear around the windows and on the
white walls of the government school;
several species were collected from these
places and on snow. A few bluebottle flies,
Protophormia terrae-novae (Robineau-Des-.
voidy), were collected on the south side of

sunny, cliff rock about a mile from the
settlement.
May 19. Two more ptarmigan shot by an

Eskimo were examined and a few lice col-
lected. Flocks of snow buntings were com-
mon, and ravens were observed flying near
the school.

May 20. The first geese were observed
flying south of the settlement.

May 21. The first horned larks appeared.

May 22. Birds were beginning to arrive in
numbers, geese and ravens were more com-
mon, and the first white-crowned sparrows
were seen. :

May 23. Herring gulls were noticed for
the first time. This was the only species of
gull observed in the region.

May 26. The gulls were more numerous,
the first gyrfaleon was observed circling the
school, and the first spider was collected.

May 27. A red-backed mouse was trapped
and examined for fleas.

May 29. The first mosquito larvae were
noticed in a rock pool slightly to the south-
east of the school. Snow still covered the
ground; large patches in some places were
from one to two feet deep. Some pools had
a thin coating of ice. The temperature of
the air was 37°F. and that of the surface
water in the pools was 42°F. Larvae were
not abundant in any of the pools in the area;
it took 20 minutes to secure 25 for rearing.

May 31. Mosquito larvae were observed to
be active even in pools covered by a coat of
ice. Several spiders and the first Collembola
were collected on snow. Six small ground
beetles were also collected on snow. These
were the only beetles observed on snow at
any time, although a diligent search for ad-
ditional specimens was continued.

June 1. The first water beetles were ob-
served moving around in pools. A number
of mosquito larvae were collected from a

164 THE CANADIAN
grassy meadow pool on the west side of the
settlement. These were lighter-coloured
than those in the rock pools and probably of
another species.

June 2. The first bumble bee was noticed.
A number of a new species of fly were taken
on old grass stems along the beach west of
the settlement. Local residents stated that
plants of purple mountain saxifrage, Sazi-
fraga oppositifolia L., were commencing to
show their striking flowers. According to
them, this is the first colourful plant to flower
in the area.

June 3. Many more purple mountain saxi-
frage were showing bloom, especially on
peculiar, slightly raised mounds of wet clay.
The first arctiid caterpillar, Parasemia lap-
ponica gibsoni B.-H., collected as it crawled
across the snow, was put into a glass-topped
tin and was later reared to maturity; this
caterpillar was very rare. Several spiders
were collected.

June 4. The maximum temperature was
52°F. Mosquito larvae were developing and
another series was collected. Mr. Findlay
collected another arctiid caterpillar of the
same species; it was also reared to the
moth. Some water beetles were collected
from pools, as well as several of the first
caddisfly larvae. A bumble bee was collected
for the first time.

June 5. The first overwintered adult
mosquito, Culiseta alaskaensis (Ludl.), was
noticed and collected at the south side of
the rock cliffs. Tree sparrows were com-
mon. Many species of low, colourful plants
were beginning to show flower buds, and the
willows were producing pollen.

June 8. Since the weather was unsuitable
for collecting, time was spent preserving
different stages of mosquito larvae; emerged
adults were pinned, and about 20 larvae
were collected from rock pools. There was
no sign of any mosquito pupae in the pools
yet.

June 12. This was the first good collect-
ing day. There was a warm southwest wind,
which made the insects active. A good series
of bees was collected, several species of
flies, some small Hymenoptera, three small
weevils, and the first and only coccinellid.
The first cranefly was noticed. The birds
were becoming more abundant. American
pipits, redpolls, and longspurs were ob-
served in numbers. Residents reported mos-
quito bites for the first time. From this

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

date the weather became more suitable for
general collecting, and a more detailed re-
port is given of species under “Biting Flies”
and “Other Insects’.
Biting Flies

No species of Tabanidae or Simuliidae
were found in the area. Mosquitos were
abundant from mid-June until the end
of July. There was only little more than
a month, therefore, when they might re-
quire control measures. At the peak of
their season, an “S” sweep with a net
would collect about 65 specimens. Fre-
quent applications of fly repellent made
collecting conditions bearable. The first and
only adult specimen of Culiseta alaskaensis
(Ludl® was taken in the field on June 5.
All other species of mosquitoes were first
abundant on June 23, when the temperature
reached a high of 64°F. The following
species were identified: Aedes impiger
(Walk.), reared from larvae, and a few
wild-caught females; Aedes nigripes (Zett.),
almost all wild-caught females; and Aedes
hexodontus Dyar’ a few wild-caught females.
Further examination of the material may
reveal additional species.

Other Insects

Approximtely 1500 specimens other than
biting flies were brought back for study.
These represented mainly the orders Lepi-
doptera, Coleoptera, Diptera, Hymenoptera,
and Arachnida. To date, the following spe-
cies have been determined.

In the Lepidoptera, the following species
are represented: Anarta richardsoni Cutt.,
Parasemia lapponica gibsoni B.-H., Oeneis
melissa Fabr., O. taygete Gey., Lycaena
phlaeas feildeni McLach., Colias hecla Lef.,
C. nastes Bdv., Boloria polaris Bdv., B. frei-
ja Thun., B. chariclea Schneid., B. improba
Butl., B. pales D. & S., Erebia rossiz Curt.,
E. fasciata Butl., E. disa subarctica McD.,
Androloma maccullochi Kirby, and Aspila-
tes orciferarius Wlk. Two specimens of
Coenonympha sp., probably southern intru-
sions, were collected.

The total collection of Coleoptera repre-
sents 13 families and 33 genera. In the
Carabidae, 20 specimens of a Strikingly
beautiful ground beetle, Carabus vieting-
hoffii Adams, were taken. The only other
species of Carabus taken was C. chamissonis
Fisch., a good series being obtained. Other
carabids were Blethisa catenaria Br. (two
males), known previously only from the

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN
female; Stereocerus haemotopus
(Dej.); and species of Nebria, Cryobius,
Bembidion, Curtonotus, Elaphrus, and Pe-
lophila. Two genera of Elateridae were re-
presented, Hypolithus with two species and
Negastrius with one species. The family
Dytiscidae was represented by the genera
Ilybius, Hydroporus (three or more _ spe-
cies), Agabus (four or more species, and
Hygrotus, and Colymbetes. There were
two genera, Helophorus and Cercyon, in the
Hydrophilidae. One specimen of a rather
rare coccinellid, Ceratomegilla ulkez Cr.,
was collected. Podabrus was the only genus
represented in the Cantharidae; Morychus
and Byrrhus in the Byrridae; Silpha lappo-
nica Hbst. in the Silphidae; Haliphus in the
Haliplidae; Tachinus (or near) and Olo-
phrum (or near) in the Staphylinidae; Me-
lanophila acuminata (Deg.) (one specimen)
in the Buprestidae; and four species, Ac-
maeops proteus (Kby.), A pratensis (Laich.),
Asemum atrum Esch., and Arhopalus agres-
tis (Kby.), in the Cerambycidae. By the end
of the third month no additional species
were found. Therefore, this is probably a
fairly representative list of the beetles in the
Coppermine area.

About 125 specimens of bees were collected.
The following were identified: Bombus syl-
vicola Kby., B. balteatus Dahlb., B. strenuus
Cress., B. neoboreus Slad., B. sylvicola var.
johanseni Slad., and two specimens of Osmia
sp. The following genera of parasitic Hyme-
noptera were represented: Amblyteles, Apan-
teles, Atractodes, Campoplex, Cteniscus,
Ctenochira, Endasys, Erromenus, Ichneumon,
Ichneutes, Mesoleius, Phygadeuon, Polyblas-
tus, Syndipnus, and several genera in the
subfamilies Plectiscinae and Alysiinae.

The Arachnida were represented by the
following:Gnaphosa brumalis Thorell (one
2), G. sp. (immature ¢), Pardosa gertschi
C. & I. (one ¢), P. modica brunnea Com.
(one 2 & ¢), P. glacialis (Thorell) (one
9), P. wumanchi (one ¢), P. prosaica C. & I.
(one ¢), P. tristoides C. & I. (one @), P.
sp. (immature 2), Xysticus labradorensis
Keys ($6 & 922), Tarentula sp. (pictilis
Emert. ?) (immature @ and ¢, and adults),
Callilepsis sp., and Haplodrossus hiemalis
(Emert.) (one 9).

Many species of Diptera and a few of Tri-
choptera were collected but almost all of
those have not been identified.

The Diptera were examined by Dr. J. R.
Vockeroth, the Lepidoptera by Dr. T. N. Free-

type, a

FIELD-NATURALIST

165

man and Mr. D. Hardwick, the Coleoptera
by Mr. W. J. Brown, and the Hymenoptera
by Drs. W. R. M. Mason and R. Lambert, all
of the Entomology Division, Ottawa. The
Arachnida were identified by Mr. D. Gray,
formerly of the Entomology Division.

Effects of Weather on Insects

Two phenomena were noticed concerning
the effect of weather on insects. Sudden
drops in temperature occurred frequently
throughout the summer. When this hap-
pened,’several species of Diptera were easily
collected from the white walls of the govern-
ment school and other resting places be-
cause of their torpid condition. A more in-
teresting observation concerned the butter-
flies. On a normal sunny day which was
ideal for collecting, dozens of the few spe-
cies of butterflies common to this area dot-
ted the landscape. Several times the writer
noticed that as soon as a cloud obscured the
sun all the butterflies disappeared. When
the sun emerged, the butterflies would
gradually re-appear and resume their flight
over the tundra.

Nearby Localities of Interest

On July 7 an attempt was made to reach
the Richardson River and travel up it for
some distance to make collections. Un-
fortunately, the wide bay at the mouth was
still choked by sea ice and further progress
was impossible. A landing was made on
the east side of the bay, where some of the
country was investigated. It was very simi-
lar to the Coppermine area, except that
the influence of the salt water of the Arctic
Ocean was more noticeable. In some spots
along the shore line there were heavy de-
posits of old sea-urchin shells, and both
salt and fresh water shells.

On the way back, stops were made at three
of the group of islands to the northwest of
the settlement. Collections of plants and
insects, and general observations, suggested
that the islands were similar to the main-
land. The rock, according to investigations
by geologists (Chipman and Cox, 1924), is
of the Coppermine series, capped by dia-
base or basalt, with the usual mixture of
shales and sandstones.

On July 26, a trip was made to the mouth
of the Nipartoktuak River, about 12 miles
east of Coppermine. The river is wide and
shallow at its mouth, and gradually narrows
inland between moderately high clay banks.
In about an hour’s collecting, many speci-

166 THE CANADIAN
mens of plants and insects were obtained.
These appeared to be very similar to those
taken near the settlement.

Two trips were made on July 17 and 26
to Bloody Falls, the most interesting locality
close to Coppermine. Situated about 12
miles up the Coppermine River, Bloody Falls
is actually a gorge about a mile long, with
deep, rapid water and steep banks rising to
200 feet. Owing to the heavy current, it is
possible to reach the start of the rough wa-
ter only by boat. It is necessary to get out
and travel overland almost half a mile be-
fore reaching the gorge. On both occasions,
the insects and plants collected appeared
to be similar to those taken close to the set-
tlement.

The area around Coppermine is of great
historical interest since many early ex-
plorers passed through this country. At
Bloody Falls, one event is of special in-
terest. Preble (1908) states, “‘At Bloody
Falls, named from the circumstances, the
Indians, small parties of whom had joined
the company from time to time, fell upon
a large party of Eskimos, then their bitter
enemies, and, much to Hearne’s horror and
disgust, massacred the entire company.”
Preble also records on the same page that
Samuel Hearne was the first European
traveller to penetrate the Great Slave region
and therefore most likely the first to reach
the Arctic coast by land. He writes that this
event happened during Hearne’s attempt in
1771 to discover the source of copper re-
ported by Indians to have come from near
the banks of a large river far to the north-
west and at the same time to throw light on
the supposed existence of a feasible passage
by sea to the westward for the Hudson’s Bay
Company.

Eskimos and Eskimo Names

About 30 Eskimos were living at Copper-
mine in the spring of 1951. This number
increased to approximately 70 in late
summer, when other Copper Eskimos from
outlying districts arrived to help unload
the supply boat from Aklavik. Among those
resident at Coppermine, two were worthy
of mention. One, Ikey Bolt, had assisted
Stefansson in collecting insects for the Can-
adian Arctic Expedition, 1913-1918. He
acted as an interpreter and was helpful in

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

many ways during our stay. The other, Jim
Koiyakoak, known as a mighty hunter, was
the oldest member of the Copper Eskimo.
tribe that settled at Coppermine.

There are Eskimo names for many place
names in the Coronation Gulf region, and
these and their meanings follow for a few
of the names mentioned in this article.
Coppermine River is “Kogluktok”, which
means “big river’. Richardson River is
“Kugnahirk”, meaning ‘a mere river”. The
first small river east of the Coppermine is
Nipartoktuak, which means “it has spruce
trees”. Bloody Falls is “Hagavaktok”, mean-
ing “cascade, tide-rip, current”. The trans-
lation and etymology of Eskimo names fol-
low the interpretation of Jenness (in Chip-
man and Cox, 1924), ethnologist of the 1913-
1918 Canadian Arctic Expedition.

Acknowledgements

The author is indebted to Mr. A. C. Jones,
Defence Research Board, and Dr. T. N. Free-
man, Co-ordinator of the Northern Insect
Survey, for their co-operation. Transporta-
tion was supplied largely by aircraft of the
R.C.A.F. Transport Command. Many thanks
were due to Mr. D. B. Lord, teacher and
social welfare worker for the Coppermine
settlement, Canon Webster, Anglican mis-
sionary, Mr. G. S. F. Jackson, Department
of Transport operator, and Mr. L. Manning,
Hudson Bay manager, for generous aid in
providing local transportation, information,
and accommodation. In general, all residents
assisted wth many kindnesses, which made
our stay an enjoyable and profitable experi-
ence.

References

Chipman, K.G. and Cox, J.R. Report of the

Canadian Arctic Expedition, 1913-1918,
Vol. XI, part B, 57 pp., 1924.

Cody, W.J. Plant records from Coppermine,
MacKenzie district, N.W.T., Can. Field-
Nat., Vol. LXVIIT, No. 33) ppu aise
1954.

Hicks, S.D. Distribution of Carabus vieting-
hoffit in North America, Coleopterists’
Bull.;, Vol. III, No. 1, pp. 1-8, 1953:

Preble, E.A. A _ biological investigation of

the Athabaska-Mackenzie region, U.S.
Dept. Agric., North American Fauna
No. 27, 1908.

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN

FIELD-NATURALIST

167

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS

Notes on the Four-toed Salamander in the
Province of Quebec. — On October 10, 1953,
a four-toed salamander (Hemidactylium scu-
tatum) was taken by the writer at Glen-
eagle, 7 miles north of Hull, Quebec. (Re-
ported by S. Bleakney in Canadian Field-
Naturalist 68(4).) This appears to be the
first record for the province. The specimen
was found in a partly rotted white pine log.
The log was located under a large pine tree,
about fifty yards from a small permanent
brook and about one-quarter of a mile from
the main highway. In this area the majority
of the trees are deciduous, with a few scat-
tered softwoods, and considerable ledge
showing on the higher ground.

On April 25, 1954, six four-toed sala-
manders were collected at a spot one-quarter
of a mile distant from the location where
the first specimen was taken. Here the
habitat was much different as the six speci-
mens were found in an old log which jutted
into a small woodland “frog pond”. The
salamanders were very inactive and had
probably hibernated in the log during the
winter. No doubt there would be no water
near the log during the winter months as
the pond is much larger in spring due to
the melted snow.

On April 27, 1954, at the same spot two
more four-toed salamanders were taken by
Mr. Bleakney (Herpetologist, National Mu-
seum of Canada), Mr. Francis Cook, and
myself.

On June 6, 1954, one of the female speci-
mens taken on April 25 laid eggs while in
captivity.

On July 24, 1954, a four-toed salamander
was taken under moss on an old log about
one-eighth of a mile distant from the second
collecting spot, and in a much drier habitat.

On July 27, 1954, Mr. Bleakney and Mr.
Cook collected a female four-toed sala-
mander in a small sphagnum moss bog in
Gatineau Park at Kingsmere. This is about
4 miles west of Gleneagle.

Of the eleven specimens captured, two
escaped and the rest were preserved, there
being two specimens in the writer’s private
collection, one at the New Brunswick Mu-
seum, St. John, N.B., and 6 at the National
Museum of Canada, Ottawa.

I wish to thank Mr. S. Bleakney for his
co-operation in regard to my publishing these

notes. — STANLEY W. GORHAM, National
Museum of Canada, Ottawa.

Observations on the Habitat and Food of
the Queen Snake, Natrix septemvittata, at
London, Ontario. — During July, 1955 it was
discovered that specimens of the Queen
Snake, Natrix septemvittata Say, could be
found along the one-half mile stretch of
Medway Creek ending at its confluence with
the Thames River in London, Middlesex
County, Ontario. Logier (1939, Royal Ont.
Mus. Zool., Handbook No. 4) records that
this snake has been found in Middlesex
County and that it is “not common” in
Ontario. During the summer, such as that
of 1955, the water in Medway Creek is
low and is flanked by clay flats which are
several yards in width and which have
rounded boulders and flattened water-
washed stones plentifully scattered over
them. The snakes were found either swim-
ming in the water or coiled beneath stones
within one yard of the water’s edge. Five
specimens were collected during afternoons
in July between 2 and 4 P.M. (E.D.S.T.).

1. This snake, found on July 11 beneath
a Stone 1 yd. from the water, was kept in a
jar with stones and water till Aug. 9 and
was offered small crayfish as food but did
not eat any. On Aug. 9 its measurements
were: total body length — 30.3 cm; tail
length — 7.3 cm.

2. This snake, collected on July 18, was
swimming in the creek close to shore and
its measurements were: total body length —
28.3 cm.; tail length — 6.6 cm.

3. A second snake was found on July 18
beneath a rock. No measurements were
taken.

4. A snake collected on July 31 from be-
neath a rock 1 yd. from the water’s edge was
put in a collecting jar and one-half hour
later it ejected about 1 cc. of brown fecal
material. When examined under the bino-
cular microscope this material was found
to contain two intact antennal (excretory)
glands of a crayfish as well as portions of
other broken antennal glands, thus indica-
ting that the snake had recently digested at
least two crayfish. The snake was dissected |
and no contents were found in the stomach,
midgut or hindgut. The measurements of
the snake were: total body length — 30.1
em.; tail length — 7.4 cm.

168 THE CANADIAN

5. A second snake, collected on July 31
from beneath a rock 1 yard. from shore, was
put in a collecting jar and 10 mins. later
disgorged two crayfish both with a body length
of about 4 cm. and with their complement
of appendages complete. The snake was
measured (total length — 37.3 cm.; tail
length — 9.6 cm.) and its stomach, midgut
and hindgut were dissected out separately.
In the stomach was a legless body of a cray-
fish, about 4 cm. long, with the anterior
end considerably digested and in the midgut
were two pereiopods and two antennal
glands, probably parts of the crayfish found
in the stomach. The hindgut was empty. It
is thus evident that this snake was in the
process of digesting three crayfish when
captured.

The presence of crayfish in the diet of the
queen snakes caught at London is in accord
with the conclusions of several authors e.g.
Pope, C.H. (1944, Amphibians and Reptiles
of the Chicago Area, Chicago Nat. Hist.
Mus., p. 193), Schmidt, K.P. and D.D. Davis
(1941, Field Book of Snakes of the United
States and Canada, G.P. Putnam’s Sons, New
York, p. 213) and Logier, E.B.S. (op. cit.,
p. 28) who attest that crayfish form the bulk
of the diet of this snake.

The five snakes showed the typical color
pattern of the species with the black median
dorsal line and the two lines on the fifth
row of scales distinct and the two dusky
bands on the mid-ventral region present and
separate. — W.W. JUDD, Department of Zoo-
logy, University of Western Ontario, Lon-
don, Ontario.

Ruff and White Pelican at Fort Severn. —
While on a visit to Fort Severn on June 12,
1955, the writer was given a specimen of a
ruff, Philomachus pugnax (Linne), by Mr.
R. Still, manager of the Hudson’s Bay Com-
pany Post. The bird had been shot by an
Indian a few days earlier on the shore of
the Severn River, just below the village.
He killed it because he did not know what it
was, never having seen one before. The
bird was a male in full breeding plumage
having a ruff, chesnut in colour, with black
bars. The testes were enlarged. The skin is
now in the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoo-
logy and Palaeontology.

Two other specimens have been collected
in Ontario. J.A. Morden and W.E. Saunders
(Canadian Sportsman and Naturalist, Vol. 3,

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69
No. 6. June 1883) recorded a male killed on
the bay at Toronto in the spring of 1882.
This specimen was in the possession of a
Mr. Young of Toronto, but is now lost. The
other specimen, also a male, was shot by a
Mr. Wightman in 1887 at the Scarborough
Bluffs near Toronto. This specimen is pre-
served in the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoo-
logy and Palaeontology.

The chief of the Severn Indian band,
Eseas Thomas, gave the writer the mummi-
fied head and cleaned radius and ulna of a
White Pelican, Pelecanus erythrorynchos
Gmelin. He had found the decomposing
carcass of the bird on June 8, 1955, on the
bank of the Severn River a short way up-
stream from the Post. The Severn Indians
said they had never seen a pelican before.

The head of this bird and pictures were
shown to the Indians at some of the posts
in the central and western part of the Patri-
cia portion of Ontario. While none of them
were able to give the Cree name for a peli-
can (cha’chukew of the Plains Cree) some
did say that they had occasionally seen or
shot this bird. Johnny Yesno of Fort Hope
said that two were shot there about 1924.
He added that he had dropped two large
suckers down the dead bird’s throat to see
how big a fish it could handle. David Baxter
from Ogoki said he had seen two killed at
English River many years ago.

Manning (Birds of the west James Bay
and southern Hudson Bay coasts. Nat. Mus.
Canada, Bull. 125, 1952) records four speci-
mens from the vicinity of Hudson Bay.

These were all taken prior to 1859 and
two were used by Gmelin in his description
of the species in 1789. Manning suggests
that these specimens may have been taken
inland.

Baillie (Canadian Field-Naturalist, Vol.
53, No. 9, pp. 130-131, 1939) records the
breeding of pelicans on Dream Island near
Massacre Island in the Ontario portion of
the Lake of the Woods. There have been
some scattered sight records from northern
Ontario in recent years which seem to indi-
cate that the bird wander frequently into
the Province. — H. G. LUMSDEN, Ontario
Dept. of Lands and Forests, Maple, Ont.

The Laysan Albatross off the British Columbia
Coast. — The Laysan Albatross (Diomedea
immutabilis) is not mentioned in the au-
thoritative “Review of the Bird Fauna of

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN
British Columbia” by Munro and Cowan
(1947).

In September 1954 while the U.S.C.G.C.
Northwind was crossing the northeast Paci-
fic from Unimak Pass (Aleutian Islands)
to Victoria, B.C., the ship was accompanied
by this species over much of the distance.
Specifically, Laysan Albatrosses were ob-
served during daylight hours on September
24, 25 and 26 from approximately lat. 54°N,
long. 157°W to lat. 51°45’N, long. 137°30'W.
The latter position is 200 sea miles from the

FIELD-NATURALIST

169

west coast of the Queen Charlotte Islands
and is definitely closer to British Columbia
than to any other land. The number of
individuals in sight at any one time varied
from one to six or more. Birds were photo-
graphed at close range on several occasions.
They were accompanied by much larger num-
bers of Black-footed Albatrosses (D.nigri-
pes). The latter species maintained its at-
tendance to within 50 or 60 miles of the Van-
couver Island coast. — FERRIS NEAVE,
Biological Station, Nanaimo, B.C.

REVIEWS
Animal Camouflage. By E.M. Stephenson phore and melanophore cells in vertebrates
and Charles Stewart (London, Charles and from dogfish to snakes. Nervous control of
Adam Black). Distributed by the MacMil- these cells (in contrast to hormonal) be-
lan Company of Canada $3.00, Second Edi- comes more common as one reaches higher

tion 1955; 1-179, Glossary 180-187, Biblio-
graphy 188-189, Appendices 190-195; 15 pla-
tes, 9 figures.

This interesting book, first published in
the Pelican series in 1946, has been brought
up to date and more extensively illustrated
in the present cloth-bound edition.

The book covers a wider field of informa-
tion than the title suggests. In addition to
the general chapters on camouflage, with
their many well-chosen examples, there are
philosophical discussions of ‘Camouflage
and its Contribution to Survival’ and “What
is the Real Significance of Camouflage’.
These chapters review the selective action
of camouflage and its possible mode of
action in regard to survival. Also discussed
are the complicated types of camouflage
that seem almost impossible to explain by
mutation and natural selection only.

Supplementing the general discussions of
camouflage and its values there are several
chapters devoted to colour changes and the
hormonal and nervous control under which
they take place in the different phyla of
animals.

A chapter on mimicry deals with both
form and behaviour and discusses the
reasons why mimicry may be useful under
varied conditions. Two chapters deal with
colours and patterns, the bases for many
types of camouflage. Of these ‘“Nature’s
Pigments and Colour Effects” deals with
colour produced by pigments and by surface
structure. “Control of Colour Change in
Vertebrate Animals” goes into detail on
nervous and hormonal control of chromato-

orders.

The final chapter on ‘Sight in the Animal
World” brings together much useful informa-
tion on what the different animal groups
can and cannot “see” in relation to the
structure and location of their eyes.

This compact book will be welcomed by
both biologists and general readers. The
complexities of camouflage are discussed,
some are explained, and the need for ad-
ditional research is made apparent. The
data are presented and conclusions are
drawn with commendable freedom from bias
and preconception.

The type is easy to read, the format
pleasing and the illustrations well chosen.
Typographical irregularities are pleasantly
few. — V.E.F. SOLMAN.

Check-List of Amphibians and Reptiles of
Canada and Alaska. By E. B. S. Logier, and
G. C. Toner (Contributions of the Royal
Ontario Museum of Zoology and Palaeonto-
logy No. 41, August 31, 1955).

Two major groups of common Canadian
vertebrates are the amphibians and reptiles
which occur from coast to coast and north-
wards to the tree line. As a source of food
they form an indispensible item in the diet
of many other animals. The astronomical
numbers of insects and the vast numbers of
rodents that they annually consume are testi-
mony of their economic value to Canada.
Yet this segment of our fauna has had so
little attention that until August of 1955
there was only one comprehensive check
list of Canadian amphibians and reptiles

170 THE CANADIAN
(R.C. Mills, 1948) and it contained no maps
and cited no records. The few obsolete local
lists that are in existence constitute a situa-
tion sharply in contrast with that occurring
in the United States where there is a
separate handbook each for frogs, sala-
manders, turtles, lizards and snakes of the
country, where nearly every state has its
own herpetofaunal handbook, and where
distribution maps are frequently published
showing new county records. It is, there-
fore, with gratitude that we greet the Check-
List of Amphibians and Reptiles of Canada

and Alaska by E. B. S. Logier, and G. C.

Toner (Contributions of the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology No.
41, August 31, 1955) which contains the
first Canadian herpetofaunal distribution
maps ever to be published.

This eighty-eight page volume represents
the work of over a decade of accumulating
seattered records and reports from various
Canadian and American sources, and a
glance at the acknowledgements section im-
presses one with the number of contributors
involved. The order, families, genera, spe-
cies, subspecies and common names are
conveniently listed phylogenetically in the
table of contents. There follows a four page
introduction, a list of abbreviations, ac-
knowledgements, and pages 7 to 75 are de-
voted to maps and text. The remainder of
the book consists of a list of 187 references.

The 44 amphibian and 54 reptile species
are treated each in three paragraphs: scien-
tific and common name; brief description
of range in Canada; and a list of Canadian
locality records arranged alphabetically by
province. As the authors point out their
check list is not an inventory of records but
an outline of distribution, and consequently
they have cited only one or two of the
available records for any given area. Each
of these records is represented by a spot
on the distribution map for that species.
These maps are conveniently located ad-
jacent to their respective species in the
text. In addition to this treatment of the
text material, there is a special discussion
on the taxonomic status of Bufo americanus
copeiz in eastern Canada and on Thamnophis
sirtalis ssp. in British Columbia. The taxo-
nomist and student of animal populations
will find these two discussions most informa-
tive and should be struck by the fact that
the taxonomy and distribution of even our

FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 69
common toad and garter snake have as yet
been insufficiently studied.

In the opinion of the reviewer, the value
of this book is greatly enhanced by the
introduction. In this section, Mr. Logier
and Mr. Toner deplore our paucity of
knowledge in respect to Canada’s herpeto-
fauna and present a few of the challenging
problems which confront the would-be in-
vestigator. Foremost of these is the con-
cept of the species and subspecies and the
justification in describing new forms. The
two writers are of the opinion that a form
should be thoroughly studied and then
named (if it proves to be unique) rather
than first naming and then studying (the
latter usually resulting in another synonym
for the literature). The authors poignantly
state “To note differences and resemblances
where they may be observed by any means
whatever is a legitimate function of the
study of zoology, but to attach trinomials or
quadrinomials to any vagary of variation
that appears in a population is something
else again... In the same train of thought,
we should remark with considerable empha-
sis that the application of racial names to
geographic gradients of variation is a highly
dubious procedure, but the variations and
factors relating to them are worthy of care-
ful study”. The reviewer hopes that their
introduction and distributional maps both
will serve as guides to future Canadian
herpetologists.

As is inevitable in a work of this nature,
there are a few errors. On page 9 under
Ambystoma jeffersonianum, the Nova Scotia
reference of Bleakney 1953 should read
1952. In Rana sylvatica the Quebec locality
records have been repeated under Labrador
where the records of Backus 1954 were
meant to have been quoted. The Atlantic
ridley turtle is designated as Leptochelys
instead of Lepidochelys. On the erratum
slip on page 49 the painted turtle from
Laval County, Quebec, should certainly be
referred to Chrysemys picta marginata and
not C. p. picta. One Canadian snake species,
Contia tenuis of British Columbia, was
omitted from this check list. Perhaps the
greatest criticism that can be levelled
against this volume is the poor quality glue
used in attaching the paper cover. It is an
admirable thing to reduce the selling price
of a volume through such a cover, but it is
deplorable that such a significant work as

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN
this Check-List of Amphibians and Reptiles
of Canada and Alaska did not receive one
of a more tenacious nature. — SHERMAN
BLEAKNEY, National Museum of Canada,
Ottawa.

The Mammal Guide. By Ralph S. Palmer.
Doubleday and Company Inc., Garden City,
New York, 384 pp, 40 colored plates, 37
line drawings, 145 maps, 1954. Price $5.50.

Although numerous field guides and
handbooks dealing with birds, reptiles,
amphibians, insects and marine invertebrates
have appeared within the last decade or so,
similar works dealing with mammals have
been conspicuous by their absence. Without
up-to-date references amateur naturalists
have tended to neglect mammalogy, to the
disadvantage of the science as a whole, since
non-professional persons have, in the past,
made most worthwhile contributions. They
are responsible for many of the specimens
in our museums and their studies and ob-
servations of the animals in the wild have
added greatly to our knowledge of species
whose life history would otherwise remain
unknown.

But if the amateur mammalogists were
obliged to wait for suitable reference, they
did not wait in vain. In 1952 “A Field Guide
to the Mammals” by Dr. William H. Burt
and illustrated by Richard P. Grossenheider
appeared, followed in 1954 by ‘The Mam-
mal Guide” by Dr. Ralph S. Palmer. Both
books are guides to identification of North
American mammals, but Dr. Palmer’s book,
in addition has brief accounts of the bio-
logy of each species, with a paragraph
devoted each to habitat, reproduction, habits
and economic status. There is a short but
adequate description of each species and
either a line drawing or a colored plate as
a further aid to identification. There are
250 figures in color depicting 182 species.
The range of each species is delineated on a
small map accompanying the text. In those
cases where a number of species are closely
related and have similar habits, they are
treated as a group. Most of these are the
smaller species for which very little definite
information is available, in any case.

It is obvious that the author has devoted
a great deal of time and effort in the
preparation of this work, including the
examination of a tremendous mass of litera-
ture. It is therefore not surprising that
there is little to criticize.

FIELD-NATURALIST

fi

_ However, there could be some improve-
ment in the reproduction of the colored
plates. It is doubtful whether the amateur
could distinguish between the varying and
brown lemmings, using the colored figures
as guides. And even the professional mam-
malogist would have difficulty identifying
the meadow vole, the pine mice or the red-
backed mouse without the aid of the
captions. However, since the identification
of many small mammals is dependent upon
the examination of minute characters not
obvious in a small figure, this criticism is not
as serious as it might at first appear. In a
few cases the range maps may be mis-
leading, as in some cases the distribution
as shown is that of the range of the species at
the time when the white man arrived on
the continent (pronghorn), while others
delineate the range as it is today (bison,
gray wolf).

Some of the vernacular names used may
cause confusion. It is obvious that mamma-
logists should come to some agreement re-
garding the English names to be applied to
species of the genus Peromyscus, and that
either Phenacomys should be retained as the
vernacular for the rodents of that genus,
or, “spruce mouse”, as used by Dr. Palmer,
should be adopted.

For those who want a single volume, of
the field guide type, which at the same time
provides a certain amount of information
on the biology of the species treated, this
book can be highly recommended. Both the
author and the publishers are to be compli-
mented on the excellence of this publica-
tion. — AUSTIN W. CAMERON.

A Study of Variations in the Maskinonge
from Three Regions in Canada. By A. S.
Hourston, 1955. Contrib. Roy. Ont. Mus.
Zool. and Palaeo. No. 40, 13 pp., 4 tables,
16 pls.

This interesting and carefully conducted
study indicates that there is considerably
more geographical variation in the maski-
nonge than had probably been realized. The
author discusses the names and taxonomic
history of the two sub-species of maskinonge
and examines the nature and extent of the
subspecifie differences between maskinonge
from different parts of their range. |

To this end, fish were collected, by means
of angler co-operation, from three distinct
areas in Ontario and Quebec where the spe-

172 THE CANADIAN
cies is reported to be abundant. A test of
the reliability of body markings for taxono-
mic classification was made by classifying
the various types of markings found and
examining all fish accordingly. These mark-
ings are shown to be useful in subspecific
distinction. An analysis of measurements of
body proportions and other features indi-
eated significant differences among the
three groups of fish. Unfortunately, the
data are not presented in a way that is
easily understood, verified or compared. It
is felt that a graphic presentation of the

/YINDEX TO
ssn glia

Acanthis, 5; flammea, 113; hornemanni, 113

Accipiter gentilis, 102

Acer rubrum, 89

Achillea millefolium, 91

Acrochaetium Alariae, 150

Actaea rubra, 88

Actitis macularia, 105

Additions to the flora of Yarmouth County,
Nova Scotia, by W. L. Klawe, 129

Agelenopsis utahana, 37

Agrimonia gryposepala, 89

Agrimony, 89

Agropyron repens, 86

Agrostis alba var. palustris, 86; gigantea, 86;
perennans, 86; scabra, 86

Alaska Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca zaboria
Oberholser and Oregon Junco Junco ore-
ganus oreganus (Townsend) in the Caribou
Parkland, B.C., The, by Leo Jobin, 65

Albatross, Laysan, 168

Alder, Speckled, 87

Alfalfa, 89

Algae, Red, 150

Allin, A. E.
Nutria, Myocastor coypus, in Thunder Bay
District, Ontario, 25

Allotheridion differens, 32; montanum, 32;
ohlerti, 32; sexpunctatum, 33; zelotypum,
33

Alnus crispa, 158; rugosa, 87

Alopecurus aequalis, 86; alpinus, 122

Ambrosia artemisiifolia, 91

Ameiurus nebulosus, 84

Amelanchier sanguinea, 88

Amphicarpa bracteata, 89

Anaphalis margaritacea var. intercedens, 92

Anas acuta, 43, 100; carolinensis, 100; platy-
rhynchos, 99; rubripes, 99

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

data would have enhanced the readability
of the paper.

The author supports recent taxonomic
opinions that differences exist between
maskinonge from the St. Lawrence River
and Lake of the Woods region. He further
indicates differences of lesser magnitude
between populations from the St. Lawrence
River and the Kawartha Lakes.

The paper, which includes pertinent photo-
graphs concerning body markings, is a dis-
tinct step forward in the difficult taxonomic
problem of recognizing sub-species within
the maskinonge group. — F. H. SCHULTZ.

VOLUME 69

Andromeda polifolia, 160

Andropogon gerardii, 86

Anemone canadensis, 88; parviflora,
richardsonii, 158; riparia, 88

Anemone, Canada, 88

Animal Camouflage, reviewed by V. E. F.
Solman, 169

Anser albifrons, 99 ;

Antennaria angustata, 161; isolepis, 161;
petaloidea, 91; pygmaea, 161

Anthus spinoletta, 41,112; spinoletta rubes-
cens, 5, 42

Apios americana, 89

Aplodinotus grunniens, 84

Apocynum sibiricum, 90

Apollophanes patricia, 39

Apple, 88

Aquila chrysaétos, 13, 102; chrysaetos cana-
densis, 4

Araneus gemmoides, 36; marmoreus, 36;
nordmanni, 36; patagiatus, 36; solitarius,
36; trifolium, 36

Araniella displicata, 36

Arctagrostis latifolia, 123

Arctium minus, 91

Arctosa alpigena, 37

Arctostaphylos alpina, 160; rubra, 160; wva-
ursi, 160

Ardea herodias, 98

Arenaria interpres, 105; lateriflora, 88; ros-
sti, 125; rubella, 125, 158

Arisaema atrorubens, 87

Arnica attenuata, 161

Arrow-wood, Downy, 91

Artemisia tilesii, 161; vulgaris, 91

Asclepias incarnata, 90; syriaca, 90

Ash, Prickly, 89; Red, 90; White, 90

Asio flammeus, 109

Aster cordifolius, 91; ericoides, 129; lateri-
florus, 91; ontarionis, 91

158;

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE CANADIAN

Aster, 91; Heart-leaved, 91; Ontario, 91

Astragalus alpinus, 159

Athyrium filix-femina, 86

Atriplex, 92

Atton, F. M. and R. P. Johnson
First records of eight species of fishes in
Saskatchewan, 82

Audubon Guides, All the birds of Eastern
and Central North America, reviewed by
W. Earl Godfrey, 28

Avens, White, 88; Yellow, 88

Aythya collaris, 130; marila, 100

—B—

Badger, 12

Badgers in Kent and Elgin Counties, Ontario,
by C. O. Bartlett, 12

Baillie, James L.
On the spring flight of Blue and Snow
Geese across northern Ontario, 135
The Golden Eagle nesting in the Gaspe
Peninsula, Quebec, 13

Balaena mysticetus, 41

Baldpate, 57-59, 100

Baneberry, Red, 88

Barbarea vulgaris, 88

Barred Owl in Alberta, The, by A. F. Oeming
and E. T. Jones, 66

Bartlett, C.O.
Badgers in Kent and Elgin Counties, On-
tario, 12

Basswood, 89

Bat, Least, 31

Bathyphantes pullatus, 33

Bear, Grizzly, 44; Polar, 41

Bedstraw, Marsh, 91; Sweet-scented, 91

Beech, Blue, 87

Beggar-ticks, 91

Bent, Black, 86

Berner, L.
New outlines on comparative odontology,
140

Betula glandulosa, 157; papyrifera, 92

Bibliographic survey of James Fletcher’s
Flora Ottawaensis, by B. Boivin and W J.
Cody, 79

Bidens vulgata, 91

Birch, White, 92

Bird breeding census, 1953, by fF. 1 Mor
land, 25

Bird observations from southern Keewatin
and the interior of northern Manitoba, by
Farley M. Mowat and Andrew H. Lawrie,
93 '

Bird, Ralph D.
Melanism in the varying hare, Lepus amer-
icanus Erxleben, 11

FIELD-NATURALIST

173

Bird, Surf, 58

Birds and mammals observed on a cruise in
Amundsen Gulf, N.W.T., July 29th-August
16th, 1953, by E. O. Hohn, 41

Birds of the lower Back River, Northwest
Territories, Canada, by W. J. Breckenridge,
1

Birds of Washington State, reviewed by I.
McT. Cowan, 29

Bittern, American, 98

Bittersweet, Climbing, 89

Blackberry, 89

Blackbird, Brewer’s, 56-59; Red-winged, 52-
54, 56, 58; Rusty, 113

Bleakney, Sherman
Review of: Check-list of amphibians and
reptiles of Canada and Alaska, 169

Bluebird, Mountain, 112; Western, 58

Bluebur, 92

Bluegrass, Canada, 86; Kentucky, 86

Blue Joint, 86

Boehmeria cylindrica, 87

Boivin, B. and W. J. Cody
Bibliographic survey of James Fletcher’s
Flora Ottawaensis, 79

Boletaceae, 44

Boletinus, 44; cavipes, 45; glandulosus, 45;
spectabilis, 46

Boletus, 44; edulis, 46; scaber, 44

Bombycilla garrula, 112

Bonasa umbellus, 103

Boneset, 91

Botanical investigations on coastal southern
Cornwallis Island, Franklin District, N. W.
T., by W. B. Schofield and W. J. Cody, 116

Botaurus lentiginosus, 98

Botrychium, 92

Bousfield, E. L.
Viviparus viviparus L. in eastern Canada,
27

Brant, American, 99

Branta bernicla, 99; canadensis, 3, 98; cana-
densis parvipes, 3

Brassica kaber var. pinnatifida, 88

Braya purpurascens var. dubia, 126

Breckenridge, W. J.
Birds of the lower Back River, Northwest
Territories, Canada, 1

Bromus, 92

Bubo virginianus, 109

Bucephala albeola, 100; clangula, 100

Buckthorn, Alder, 89; Common, 89

Buckwheat, Wild, 88

Buffle-head, 52, 54, 55, 57-59, 100

Bugleweed, 90

Bullhead, Brown, 84

Bulrush, 86

174 Tue. CANADIAN

Bunting, Snow, 6, 41, 48, 44, 52-54, 56, 115

Burdock, Common, 91

Bush-tit, 57, 58 -

Buteo lagopus, 102; lagopus s.-johannis, 4, 42;
platypterus, 102

Butter and eggs, 90

Buttercup, Small-flowered, 88; Tall, 88

Buttonbush, 91

eras

Calamagrostis canadensis, 86, 156

Calcarius lapponicus, 41, 115; lapponicus lap-
ponicus, 6; pictus, 115

Calidris canutus, 106

Callobius nomeus, 40

Cameron, Austin W.
Review of: Social behaviour in animals with
special reference to vertebrates, 69
Review of: The mammal guide, 171

Campion, Bladder, 88

Canachites canadensis, 103

Canvas-back, 55, 57-59

Cap Thomson’s Fish game & nature guide to
the 1,000 Islands, reviewed by Graham
Cooch, 68

Capella gallinago, 105

Capsella bursa-pastoris, 92

Cardamine bellidifolia, 125; pensylvanica, 88;
pratensis, 126

Cardinal, 54, 55, 56

Cardinal-flower, 91

Carex alopecoidea, 87; aquatilis, 123; arctata,
87; bigelowii, 157; blanda, 87; cephaloidea,
87; glacialis, 157; gracillima, 87; lanuginosa,
87; lenticularis, 87; membranacea, 157;
misandra, 123; peckii, 87; retrorsa, 87;
rosea, 87; rotundata, 157; scirpoidea, 157;
sparganioides, 87; sprengelii, 87; tenera,
87; tribuloides, 87; vesicaria, 87; viridula,
87; vulpinoidea, 87

Caribou, Barren Ground, 43

Carp, 83

Carpinus caroliniana, 87

Carpodacus purpureus, 113

Carrion-flower, 87

Carya cordiformis, 87

Casmerodius albus egretta, 67

Cassiope tetragona, 128, 160

Catchfly, Night-flowering, 88

Catnip, 90

Cat-tail, 92

Cedar, Western Red, 132; White, 86

Celastrus scandens, 89

Cepaea nemoralis, 148

Cephalanthus occidentalis, 91

Cerastium alpinum, 124; biebersteinii, 129;
regelii, 124; vulgatum, 88

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69 :

Ceraticelus, 35; atriceps, 34; crassiceps, 34;
fissiceps, 34; rowensis n.sp., 34

Ceratinella brunnea, 35

Ceratinops, 35

Chaetura vauxi vauxi, 131

Chalcoscirtus carbonarius, 39 - °

Charadrius hiaticula, 104; inenente ead
matus, 4, 43; vociferus, 105° ;

Check-list of amphibians and reptiles of
Canada and Alaska, reviewed by Sherman
Bleakney, 169

Chelone glabra, 92 }

Chen caerulescens, 99, 135; harpenoeneen 3, 99,
135; hyperborea hyperborea, 44; rossi, 26

Chenopodium album, 88; capitatum, 88;-:hy-
bridum var. gigantospermum, -88

Cherry, Bird, 89; Choke, 89; Pin, 89

Chickadee, 56; Acadian, 52; Black-capped,
51-57; Brown-capped, 51, 52; Chestnut-
backed, 57-59; Hudsonian, 111; Mountain,
57

Chickweed, Common, 92;
88 ;

Chillcott, J. G.
See Cody, W. J. and J. G. Chillcott

Chordeiles minor, 109

Christmas bird census—1954, 51 :

Chrysanthemum leucanthemum var. pinnati-
fidum, 91

Chrysosplenium tetrandrum, 128

Cicely, Sweet, 90

Cinquefoil, Rough, 92; Silvery, 88

Circaea quadrisulcata var. canadensis, 90

Circus cyaneus, 102

Cirsium arvense, 91; vulgare, 91

Clangula hyemalis, 3, 41, 100

Clearweed, 87

Cleavers, 91

Clover, Alsike, 89; Hop, 89; Red, 92; White,
89; White Sweet, 89

Clubiona canadensis, 38; trivialis, 38

Clubionidae, 38

Cochlearia officinalis var. groenlandica, 125

Cody, W. J.
See Boivin, B. and W. J. Cody; Schofield,
W. B. and W. J. Cody

Cody, W. J. and J. G. Chilcott
Plant collections from Matthews and Mus-
kox Lakes, Mackenzie District, N.W.T., 153

Colaptes auratus, 109

Collinsia clypiella, 35; ksenia, 35; plumosa,
35; wilburi n. sp., 35

Coloncus, 36; siou, 36

Columnar form of the western red cedar —
an environmental modification, The, by
H. L. J. Rhodes, 182

Colymbus auritus, 98

Gonmacn Moan

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

Convolvulus sepium, 92

Cooch, Graham
Review of: Cap Thomson’s fish, game &
nature guide to the 1,000 Islands, 68.
Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris), breed-
ing in Saguenay County, Quebec, 130

Coot, 58, 59; American, 55, 57:

Corallorhiza maculata, 129

Cormorant, Baird’s, 57, 58; Brandt’s, 58;
Double-crested, 57-59; European, 52; Pela-
gic, 57, 59

Cornus obliqua, 90; racemosa, 90; Sel oniene)
90

Corvus brachyrhynchos, 111: corax, 41, 110;
corax principalis, 5

Corydalis aurea, 92

Corydalis, Golden, 92

Cottonwood, 92

Cougar, 26

Cougar or mountain lion reported in north-
western Ontario, by L. S. Dear, 26

Cowan, I. McT. ,
Review of: Birds of Washington. State, 29

Cowbird, 52

Cranberry, Highbush, 91 ;

Crane, Little Brown, 104; Whooping, 104

Crataegus, 88

Creeper, Brown, 52-56, 58, 59; Virginia, 89

Cress, Bitter, 88; Winter, 88

Crocethia alba, 43, 107

Crossbill, American, 59; Red, 51,
White-winged, 51, 52, 55, 56

Crow, 51, 53, 54, 57, 111; American, 52, 54,
56, 57; Northwestern, 57-59; Western, 59

Cryphoeca peckhami, 37

Ctenium vigerens, 32

Curlew, Hudsonian, 58, 105

Currant, Wild Black, 88

Cyanocitta stelleri annectens, 65

Cyclosa conica, 36

Cygnus columbianus, 98

Cyperus strigosus, 86

Cyprinus carpio, 83

Cypseloides niger borealis, 131

54, 59;

jp

Daisy, Ox-eye, 91
Dactylis glomerata, 86
Dancing bees, an account of the life and

senses of the honey bee, The, reviewed by :

Robert Lambert, 69

Dandelion, Common, 92; Red-seeded, 92

Dark specimen of the giant slug, Limax
maximus L., collected at London, Ontario,
A, by W. W. Judd, 130

Darter, Black-side, 84

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

175

Dear, L.S.
Cougar or mountain lion reported in north-
western Ontario, 26

Delphinapterus leucas, 41

Dendrocopos villosus, 110

Dendroica castanea, 65; coronata, 112; magno-
lia, 65; palmarum, 65; striata, 112

Dennstaedtia punctilobula, 129 ©

Desmodium, 92

Dictyna alaskae, 40; annulipes, 40; coloraden-
sis, 40; major, 40; peragrata, 40; phylax, 40

Dictynidae, 40

Digitaria sanguinalis, 86

Diomedea immutabilis, 168

Dipoena nigra, 32

Dipper, 57; American, 57

Disembolus chera, 36

Dismodicus modicus, 36

Distribution and populations of the European
hare in southern Ontario, by J. K. Reynolds,
14

Dock, Curled, 88

Dogwood, Racemose, 90; Red Osier, 90; Silky,
90

Dore, W. G.
Review of: Field book of American wild
flowers, 134

Dove, Mourning, 51, 54, 55, 57, 109

Draba alpina, 126; fladnizensis, 126; nivalis,
158; subcapitata, 126.

Drassodes neglectus, 38

Dropseed, 86

Dryas integrifolia, 128, 159

Dryopteris fragrans, 156;
pubescens, 92

Duck, Black, 51-56, 99; Greater Scaup, 57,
100, Harlequin, 58; Mallard, 57; Pintail,
57; Ring-necked, 130; Ruddy, 55, 58; Wood,
53, 58

Dupontia fisheri, 123

eae

Eagle, Bald, 51-53, 55, 57-59, 102; Golden, 4,
Leone 102

Egret, American, 67

Eider, Common, 51, 52; King, 41, 43, 44, 101;
Pacific, 43, 44

Elder, Red-berried, 91

Eleocharis calva, 86; compressa, 86; smallii,
86

Elm, American, 87; Slippery, 87

Elodea canadensis, 86

Elymus virginicus, 86

Empetrum nigrum, 159

Epilobium angustifolium, 92, 159; glandulo-
sum var. adenocaulon, 92; latifolium, 159;
palustre, 159

thelypteris var.

176 THE CANADIAN

Equisetum arvense, 85, 156; fluviatile, 92, 156;
palustre, 85; sylvaticum, 156; variegatum,
122

Eragrostis poaeoides, 86

Eremophila alpestris, 5, 41, 110

Ereunetes pusillus, 43, 107

Erigeron annuus, 91; canadensis, 91;
delphicus, 91

Erignathus barbatus, 41

Erigone, 36; denticulata, 36

Eriophorum angustifolium, 157; angustifolium
var. triste, 123; scheuchzeri, 123; vagina-
tum, 157

Erolia alpina, 5, 106; bairdii, 4, 41, 106; fus-
cicollis, 4, 106; melanotos, 106; minutilla,
106

Erskine, David
Torilis japonica in the Ottawa District,
131
Two red algae new to Nova Scotia, 150

Erysimum cheiranthoides, 88

Eupatorium maculatum, 91; perfoliatum, 91,
129; rugosum, 91

Euphagus carolinus, 113

Eutrema edwardsii, 125

Evarcha hoyi, 39

Everlasting, 91; Pearly, 92

phila-

—F—

Falco columbarius, 103; peregrinus, 103;
peregrinus anatum, 4, 43; rusticolus, 102

Falcon, Peregrine, 4, 55, 59

Feeding habits of juvenile Ring-necked
Pheasants on Pelee Island, Ontario, by A.
G. Loughrey and R. H. Stinson, 59

Fern, Grape, 92; Lady, 86; Marsh, 92; Royal,
86; Sensitive, 86

Festuca baffinensis, 123; saximontana, 156

Feverwort, 92

Field book of American wild flowers, re-
viewed by W. G. Dore, 134

Fimbristylis autumnalis, 86

Finch, California Purple, 58; House, 58, 59;
Purple, 51-59, 113

Fire-weed, 92

First record of the Dakota Song Sparrow
Melospiza melodia juddi Bishop for British
Columbia, by Leo Jobin, 66

First record of the Starling in the Northwest
Territories, by W. A. Fuller, 27

First records of eight species of fishes in
Saskatchewan, by F. M. Atton and R. P.
Johnson, 82

First records of the American Egret in Al-
berta, by A. F. Oeming and F. H. Riggall,
67

Flag, Blue, 87

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Fleabane, Canada, 91; Daisy, 91; Philadel-
phia, 91

Flicker, 51, 109; Red-shafted, 57-59; Yellow-
shafted, 54, 55, 58

Food habits of marten (Martes americana)
in northern British Columbia, by Horace
F. Quick, 144

Foxtail, 86

Fragaria vesca var. americana, 88; virginiana,
88

Fraxinus americana, 90; pennsylvanica, 90

Fuller, W. A.
First record of the Starling in the North-
west Territories, 27

Fumaria officinalis, 92

Fumitory, Common, 92

ahr ns

Gale, Sweet, 87

Galingale, 86

Galinsoga ciliata, 91

Galium aparine, 91, 129; palustre, 91; trifi-
dum, 161; triflorum, 91

Gannet, 52

Gardner, George C.
Purple Martins, 66

Gavia adamsi, 3, 41, 97; arctica, 3, 42, 97;
immer, 97; stellata, 3, 98

Gerardia maritima f. alba f. nov., 129

Geum allepicum var. strictum, 88; canadense,
88

Glyceria grandis, 86

Gnaphosa brumalis, 38; muscorum, 38; par-
vula, 38

Gnaphosidae, 38

Godfrey, W. Earl
Review of: An introduction to ornithology,
134
Review of: Audubon Guides, All the birds
of Eastern and Central North America, 28
Review of: Summer birds of western On-
tario, 68
Review of: The lives of wild birds, 30

Golden Eagle nesting in the Gaspe Peninsula,
Quebec, The, by James L. Baillie, 13

Golden-eye, American, 51-59, 100; Barrow’s,
51, 57, 59; Common, 58

Goldenrod, 91; Blue-stem, 91; Canada, 91;
Narrow-leaved, 91; Stout Ragged, 91

Goldfinch, 53, 54, 57; American, 52-56, 58

Goose, Blue, 99, 135; Canada, 3, 51, 52, 58,.
98; Lesser Canada, 3; Lesser Snow, 3, 44,
57; Ross’s, 26; Snow, 99, 135; Tundra Cana-
da, 3; White-fronted, 99

Goosefoot, Maple-leaved, 88

Gorham, Stanley W.
Notes on the four-toed salamander in the

Oct.-Dec., 1955] THE ‘CANADIAN
Province of Quebec, 167

Goshawk, 52-54, 56, 57, 59, 102

Grackle, Bronzed, 53

Grape, River-bank, 89

Grass, Beard, 86; Blue-eyed, 87; Brome, 92;
Cord, 86; Crab, 86; Creeping Bent, 86; Fowl
Meadow, 86; Hair, 86; Love, 86; Lyme, 86;
Old Witch, 86; Orchard, 86; Panic, 86; Reed
Meadow, 86; Upland Bent, 86; Wedge, 86;
Wool, 86

Grebe, Eared, 57, 58; Holboell’s, 58; Horned,
52, 55, 57-59, 98; Red-necked, 58, 59; West-
ern, 57-59

Groh, Herbert
Let us now praise famous men, 75
Plants of Cunningham Island, Ottawa, On-
tario, 85

Gromwell, Common, 90

Grosbeak, Evening, 51-58; Pine, 51-57, 113

Groundnut, 89

Grouse, Ruffed, 51-59, 103; Sharp-tailed, 56,
104; Spruce, 103

Groves, J. Walton and Sheila C. Thomson
Notes on fungi from northern Canada II

Boletaceae, 44

Grus americana, 104; canadensis, 104

Guillemot, Black, 51, 52; Pigeon, 58, 59

Gull, Bonaparte’s, 58, 108; California, 58;
Glaucous, 5, 41-44, 51, 55; Glaucous-winged,
57-59; Great Black-backed, 51, 52, 54, 55,
108; Herring, 5, 41-43, 51-59, 108; Iceland,
51, 54, 55; Ring-billed, 52, 54, 55, 108;
Sabine, 44; Short-billed, 57-59; Thayer’s,
42, 59

Gyrfalcon, 51, 56, 102

es ae

Hadropterus maculatus, 84

Haliaeetus leucocephalus, 102

Halichoerus grypus, 151

Hare, Arctic, 41, 44; European, 14; Varying,
11

Harlequin, 58

Harvestmen, 32

Hawk, American Rough-legged, 42-44, 102;
Broad-winged, 102; Cooper’s, 55, 58; Duck,
43, 44, 58, 103; Marsh, 54-57, 102; Pigeon,
53, 54, 58, 103; Red-tailed, 51, 52, 54-59;
Rough-legged, 4, 51, 52, 54, 56; Sharp-
shinned, 51, 53, 54, 57, 59; Sparrow, 51-59

Hawthorn, 88

Helenium autumnale, 92

Hemidactylium scutatum, 167

Hemlock, Ground, 92

Hemp, Bog, 87; Indian, 90

Heron, Great Blue, 54-59, 98

Hickory, Bitternut, 87

FIELD-NATURALIST

177

Hicks, '5. D.
Natural history survey of Coppermine,
Nortiiwest Territories, 1951, 162

Hieracium florentinum, 92

Hierochloe alpina, 156

Hitchcock, Harold B.
A summer colony of the Least Bat, Myotis
subulatus leibii (Audubon and Bachman),
31

Hog-peanut, 89

Hohn, E. O.
Birds and mammals observed on a cruise
in Amundsen Gulf, N. W. T., July 29th-
August 16th, 1953, 41

Holdom, Martin W.
White Pelicans at Crescent Beach, B.C., 27

Homolophus biceps, 32

Honeysuckle, 91; Tartarian, 91

Horse-tail, Common, 85; Marsh, 85

Hylocichla minima, 112; ustulata, 112

Hypericum ellipticum, 89; majus, 89; per-
foratum, 89

Hypochoeris radicata, 129

Hyptiotes gertschi, 39

Ee iat

Impatiens capensis, 92

Interesting records of birds collected in the
Peace River Parkland, British Columbia,
by Leo Jobin, 65

Introduction to ornithology, An,
by W. Earl Godfrey, 134

Iridoprocne bicolor, 110

Iris versicolor, 87

Ironwood, 87

Islandiana alata, 36

Ivy, Poison, 89

reviewed

a ps

Jack-in-the-pulpit, 87

Jaeger, Long-tailed, 5, 24, 41, 43, 108; pie.
sitic, 5, 107; Pomarine, 41, 43, 107

Jay, Black-headed Steller, 65; Blue, 52-56;
Canada, 52, 110; Gray, 55, 56; Steller’s, 57,
59

Jobin, Leo
First record of the Dakota Song Sparrow
Melospiza melodia juddi Bishop for British
Columbia, 66
Interesting records of birds collected in the
Peace River Parkland, British Columbia,
65
Notes on the Black Swift and Vaux Swift
at their nesting sites in central British
Columbia, 131
The Alaska Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca
zaboria Oberholser and Oregon Junco Jun-
co oreganus oreganus (Townsend) in the
Caribou Parkland, B.C., 65

178 THE CANADIAN
‘Joe-pye-weed, 91
Johnson, R. P.
See Atton, F. M. and R. P. Johnson
Jones, E. T.
See Oeming, A. F. and E. T. Jones
Judd, W. W.

A dark specimen of the giant slug, Limax ©

maximus L., collected at London, Ontario,
130
Observations on a second colony of the
land snail Cepaea nemoralis (L.) at Lon-
don, Ontario with a consideration of the
banding patterns in the two colonies, 148
Observations on the habitat and food of the
queen snake, Natrix septemvittata, at Lon-
don, Ontario, 167

Junco hyemalis, 114; oreganus oreganus, 65

Junco, Oregon, 57-59, 65; Slate-coloured, 52-
56, 58, 114

Juncus biglumis, 124; castaneus, 157; nodo-
sus, 87

Juneberry, 838

Juniperus communis var. depressa, 156

ie

Kalmia polifolia, 160

King Devil, 92

Kingfisher, Belted, 54-59, 109

Kinglet, Golden-crowned, 51, 52, 54-59; Ruby-
crowned, 55, 57-59

Killdeer, 52, 57-59, 105

Klawe, W. L.
Additions to the flora of Yarmouth County,
Nova Scotia, 129
Pseudomma affine G. O. Sars: an addition
to the list of the Mysidacea of Eastern
Canada, 66

Knot, American, 106

Knotweed, 88

——

Lactuca scariola, 92

Lady’s Thumb, 88

Lagopus lagopus, 42, 103; mutus, 44, 104;
mutus rupestris, 4, 44

Lambert, Robert
Review of: The dancing bees, an account
of the life and senses of the honey bee, 69

Lamb’s Quarters, 88

Lanius excubitor, 112

Lappula, 92

Lark, Horned, 5, 41, 42, 44, 52, 57, 110

Larus argentatus, 41, 108; argentatus smith-
sonianus, 5; argentatus thayeri, 42; dela-
warensis, 108; hyperboreus, 41; hyperbo-
reus hyperboreus, 5; marinus, 108; phila-
delphia, 108

FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Lathyrus palustris, 89

Lathys alberta, 40

Lawrie, Andrew H.
See Mowat, Farley M. and Andrew H. Law-
rie

Laysan Albatross off the British Columbia
Coast, The, by Ferris Neave, 168

Leccinum, 47; aurantiacum, 50; scabrum, 50;
scabrum ssp. niveum, 50; scabrum ssp.
rotundifoliae, 50

Ledum palustre var. decumbens, 159

Leiobunum paessleri, 32

Leonurus cardiaca, 90

Lepthyphantes aldersoni n.sp., 33; arborea,
33; berthae n. sp., 33; calcarata, 33; cham-
berlini, 33; pollicaris, 33; rainieri, 33;
sammamish n. sp., 33

Lepus americanus, 11; americanus virginia-
nus, 11; arcticus, 41; europaeus hybridus,
14

Lettuce, Prickly, 92

Let us now praise famous men, by Herbert
Groh, 75

Levi, Herbert W.
See Levi, Lorna R. and Herbert W. Levi

Levi, Lorna R. and Herbert W. Levi
Spiders and harvestmen from Waterton
and Glacier National Parks, 32

Limax maximus, 130

Linaria vulgaris, 90

Linyphia marginata, 34; pusilla, 34

Lion, Mountain, 26

Lithospermum officinale, 90

Lives of wild birds, The, reviewed by W.
Earl Godfrey, 30

Lloyd, Hoyes ’
Mid-Atlantic migration of Longtailed Jae-
gers and Terns (sp. ?), 24

Lobelia cardinalis, 91; inflata, 91;
129

Lobipes lobatus, 5, 43, 107

Loiseleuria procumbens, 160

Longspur, Lapland, 6, 41-44, 52, 54, 115;
Smith’s, 115

Lonicera dioica, 91; tatarica, 91

Loon, Arctic, 3, 58; Black-throated, 57; Com-
mon, 52, 57-59, 97; Pacific, 42, 43, 59, 97;
Red-throated, 3, 57-59, 98; Yellow-billed,
3, 41-43, 97

Loosestrife, Fringed, 90; Purple, 92; Yellow,
90

Lophodytes cucullatus, 101

Loughrey, A. G. and R. H. Stinson
Feeding habits of juvenile Ring-necked
Pheasants on Pelee Island, Ontario, 59

spicata,

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

Lumsden, H. G.
Ruff and White Pelican at Fort Severn,
168

Luzula confusa, 157; nivalis, 123; wahlenber-
gti, 157

Lychnis apetala var. arctica, 124; ostenfeldiz,
158

Lycopodium annotinum, 156; selago, 156

Lycopus americanus, 90; uniflorus, 90

Lycosa pratensis, 38

Lysimachia ciliata, 90; nummularia, 90; ter-
restris, 90

Lythrum salicaria, 92

==

Magpie, 56; American, 56, 57, 111

Mallard, 52, 54-59; Common, 99

Mammal Guide, The, reviewed by Austin W.
Cameron, 171

Maple, Red, 89

Marchantia polymorpha, 156

Mareca americana, 100

Mark Trail’s book of North American mam-
mals, reviewed by D.B.O. Savile, 133

Marten, 144

Martes americana, 144

Martin, Purple, 66

Maso sundevalli, 36

Mellwraith, T. F.
The relation of man to nature through the
ages, 71

Meadowlark, 54; Western, 57-59

Meadow-rue, Early, 92; Tall, 88

Medicago lupulina, 89; sativa, 89

Medick, Black, 89

Megaceryle alcyon, 109

Meionetay 34; ordinaria, 34

Melanism in the varying hare, Lepus ameri-
canus Erxleben, by Ralph D. Bird, 11

Melanitta deglandi, 101; perspicillata, 101

Melilotus alba, 89

Melospiza lincolnii, 115; melodia, 115; melo-
dia juddi, 66

Menispermum canadense, 92

Mentha arvensis var. villosa, 90

Mercurialis annua, 89

Mercury, Three-seeded, 89

Merganser, American, 51-59, 101; Hooded,
53, 55, 57, 58, 101; Red-breasted, 43, 52,
54, 55, 57-59, 101

Mergus merganser, 101; serrator, 43, 101

Metaphidippus californicus, 39; clematus, 39;
nigromaculatus, 39; uteanus, 39

Micaria altana, 38; hesperella, 38

Micropalama himantopus, 107

Mid-Atlantic migration of Long-tailed Jaegers
and Terns (sp. ?), by Hoyes Lloyd, 24

Milfoil, Water, 90

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

179

Milkweed, Common, 90; Swamp, 90

Mimulus ringens, 90

Mint, Canada, 90

Misumena vatia, 39

Mitteilungen, Institut fiir Auslandsbeziehun-
gen, reviewed by R. J. Moore, 133

Mockingbird, 55

Moneywort, 90

Monkey-flower, 90

Monotropa hypopithys, 129

Moonseed, Canada, 92

Moore, R. J.
Review of: Mitteilungen. Institut fiir Aus-
landsbeziehungen, 133

Morland, T. F. T.
Bird breeding census, 1953, 25

Morning-glory, Wild, 92

Motherwort, 90

Mowat, Farley M. and Andrew H. Lawrie
Bird observations from southern Keewa-
tin and the interior of northern Manitoba,
93

Moxostoma anisurum, 83

Mugwort, Common, 91

Muhlenbergia mexicana f. setiglumis, 86

Mullein, Common, 92

Murre, Brunnich’s, 109; California, 59; Com-

mon, 58; Thick-billed, 41, 43

Murrelet, Ancient, 58; Marbled, 58, 59

Muskrat, 9

Mustard, Hedge, 92; Wild, 88; Wormseed, 88

Myers, Betty June
The rearing of a grey seal in captivity, 151

Mynah, Crested, 58

Myocastor coypus, 25

Myotis subulatus leibii, 31

Myrica gale, 87

Myriophyllum alterniflorum, 90

i

Nannyberry, 91

Natrix septemvittata, 167

Natural history survey of Coppermine, North-
west Territories, 1951, by S. D. Hicks, 162

Neave, Ferris
The Laysan Albatross off the British Co-
lumbia Coast, 168

Neoscona arabesca, 36

Nepeta cataria, 90

Nettle, Slender, 92

New outlines on comparative odontology, by
L. Berner, 140

Nighthawk, 109

Nightshade, 90; Enchanter’s, 90

Notemigonus crysoleucas, 83

Notes on fungi from northern Canada II
Boletaceae, by J. Walton Groves and Sheila
C. Thomson, 44

180

Notes on movements of banded muskrats,
by L. E. Wragg, 9

Notes on the Black Swift and Vaux Swift at
their nesting sites in central British Co-
lumbia, by Leo Jobin, 131

Notes on the four-toed salamander in the
Province of Quebec, by Stanley W. Gor-
ham, 167

Notropis cornutus, 84; deliciosus, 84

Numenius phaeopus, 105

Nutcracker, Clark’s, 57

Nuthatch, Pygmy, 57; Red-breasted, 52-58;
White-breasted, 52-57

Nutria, 25

Nutria, Myocastor coypus, in Thunder Bay
District, Ontario, by A. E. Allin, 25

Nyctea nyctea, 109

na Vise

Oak, Mossy-cup, 87; Red, 87

Observations on a second colony of the land
snail Cepaea nemoralis (L.) at London,
Ontario, with a consideration of the band-
ing patterns in the two colonies, by W. W.
Judd, 148

Observation on the habitat and food of the
queen snake, Natrix septemvittata, at Lon-
don, Ontario, by W. W. Judd, 167

Odontology, Comparative, 140

Oeming, A. F. and E. T. Jones
The Barred Owl in Alberta, 66

Oeming, A. F. and F. H. Riggall
First records of the American Egret in
Alberta, 67

Oenothera biennis, 90; biennis var. hirsutis-
sima, 129

Oidemia americana, 101

Old-squaw, 3, 41, 438, 51, 52, 54, 55, 57-59, 100

Oloboridae, 39

Onoclea sensibilis, 86

On the spring flight of Blue and Snow Geese
across northern Ontario, by James L. Bail-
lie, 135

Orach, 92

Orodrassus coloradensis, 38

Osmorhiza claytoni, 90

Osmunda regalis, 86

Osprey, 102

Ostraya virginiana, 87

Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Presidents, 74
75th Anniversary, 78
Seventy-sixth annual meeting,
2, 1954, 21
Statement of financial standing, November
26, 1954, 23

Club

December

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Our wildlife legacy, reviewed by V. E. F.
Solman, 28

Owl, Barred, 52, 54, 66; Great Horned, 53,
55, 56, 109; Hawk, 109; Horned, 52, 54, 56,
57; Long-eared, 52, 54, 55; Pygmy, 57;
Screech, 52, 53, 55, 57; Short-eared, 52, 54,
56, 57, 109; Snowy, 52-54, 56, 109

Oxalis europaea, 89

Oxyria digyna, 124

Oxytropis arctica, 159; maydelliana, 159; vis-
cida var. hudsonica, 159

Oyster Catcher, Black, 58

pe

Pagomys monticola, 40

Pandion haliaetus, 102

Panicum capillare, 86; lanuginosum, 86

Papaver radicatum, 125

Paraphidippus marginatus, 39

Pardosa anomala, 38; coloradensis, 38; con-
cinna, 38; fuscula, 38; groenlandica, 38;
mackenziana, 38; moesta, 38; solituda, 38;
sternalis, 38; wyuta, 38

Parnassia kotzebuei, 158

Parrya arctica, 126; arctica f. albiflora, 126

Parsnip, Water, 90

Parthenocissus quinquefolia, 89

Partridge, European, 51, 53, 55-57; Hungar-
ian, 53, 56, 58

Parus hhudsonicus, 111

Passerculus sandwichensis, 6, 113

Passerella iliaca, 115; iliaca zaboria, 65

Pedicularis flammea, 160; labradorica, 160;
lapponica, 160

Pedioecetes phasianellus, 104

Pelecanus erythrorhynchos, 27, 168

Pelecopsis sculptum, 36

Pelican, White, 27, 168

Pellenes lagganii, 39

Penthorum sedoides, 92

Perisoreus canadensis, 110

Petasites sagittatus, 161

Petrochelidon pyrrhonota, 5, 110

Phalangium opilio, 32

Phalarope, Northern, 5, 43, 107; Red, 41,
107

Phalaropus fulicarius, 41, 107

Phasianus colchicus, 59

Pheasant, 51, 58; Ring-necked, 52-57, 59

Phidippus altanus, 39; johnsoni, 39

Philodromus alascensis, 39; aureolus, 39

Philomachus pugnax, 168

Phippsia concinna, 123

Phleum pratense, 86

Phoca hispida, 41

Pica pica, 111

Picea mariana, 156

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

Picoides tridactylus, 110

Pilea pumila, 87

Pine, White, 92

Pinguicula villosa, 160

Pinicola enucleator, 113

Pintail, 43, 44, 52, 54, 57-59; American, 100

Pinus strobus, 92

Pipes, 92

Pipit, American, 5, 41, 42, 53, 59, 112

Pityohyphantes cristatus, 34

Plantago major, 92; oliganthos, 129; rugelii,
91

Plantain, Common, 92; Rugel’s, 91

Plant collections from Matthews and Mus-
kox Lakes, Mackenzie District, N.W.T., by
W. J. Cody and J. G. Chillcott, 153

Plants of Cunningham Island, Ottawa, On-
tario, by Herbert Groh, 85

Plectrophenax nivalis, 41, 115; nivalis niva-
lis, 6

Pleuropogon sabinei, 123

Plover, American Golden, 42, 44, 105; Black-
bellied, 51, 65, 105; Golden, 4; Semipalm-
ated, 4, 43, 104

Pluvialis dominica, 42, 105; dominica domi-
nica, 4

Poa abbreviata, 123; arctica, 123, 156; com-
pressa, 86; glauca, 156; palustris, 86; pra-
tensis, 86, 156

Poecilochroa montana, 38

Polygonatum pubescens, 87

Polygonum amphibium, 88; aviculare, 88;
convolvulus, 88; persicaria, 88; vivparum,
124, 158

Pondweed, 86, 92

Poplar, Aspen, 87; Balsam, 87

Populus balsamifera, 87; deltoides, 92; tre-
muloides, 87

Potamogeton gramineus, 86; spirillus, 92

Potentilla argentea, 88; hookeriana, 158; nor-
vegica, 92; palustris, 159

Prenanthes, 92

Presidents of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Club, 74

Primrose, Evening, 90

Progne subis, 66

Prunella vulgaris, 90

Prunus pensylvanica, 89; virginiana, 89

Pseudomma affine, 66

Pseudomma affine G. O. Sars: an addition to
the list of the Mysidacea of Eastern Cana-
da, by W. L. Klawe, 66

Ptarmigan, Rock, 4, 44, 104; Willow, 42, 44,
103

Puccinellia angustata, 123; phyrganodes, 123

Purple Martins, by George C. Gardner, 66

THE CANADIAN ‘FIELD-NATURALIST

181

Pyrola grandiflora, 159
Pyrus, 88

aig:

Quail, California, 58, 59

Quercus macrocarpa, 87; rubra, 87

Quick, Horace F.
Food habits of marten (Martes americana)
in northern British Columbia, 144

age

Ragweed, Common, 91

Ragwort, 92

Rangifer arcticus, 43

Ranunculus abortivus, 88; acris, 88; hyper-
boreus, 125; lapponicus, 158; reptans, 88;
sulphureus, 125

Raspberry, Black, 89; Purple Flowering, 88;
Wild Red, 89

Rattlesnake-root, 92

Raven, 5, 41, 42, 44, 51, 57-59, 110; American,
52, 55; Common, 52, 55-57; Northern, 54

Rearing of a grey seal in captivity, The, by
Betty June Myers, 151

Redhead, 55, 57

Redhorse, Silver, 83

Redpoll, 5, 51-54, 56; Common, 52-56, 113;
Hoary, 113

Relation of man to nature through the ages,
The, by T. F. MclIlwraith, 71

Reynolds, J. K.
Distribution and populations of the Euro-
pean hare in southern Ontario, 14

Rhamnus cathartica, 89; frangula, 89

Rhodes, H. L. J.
The columnar form of the western red
cedar — an environmental modification,
132

Rhododendron lapponicum, 160

Rhus radicans, 89; typhina, 89

Ribes americanum, 88

Riggall, F. H.
See Oeming, A. F. and F. H. Riggall

Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris), breed-
ing in Saguenay County, Quebec, by Gra-
ham Cooch, 130

Robin, 51-54, 57, 111; American, 52, 54, 55,
57, 58; Northwestern, 58

Rosa acicularis, 89; blanda, 89

Rose, Early Wild, 89; Wild, 89

Ross’s Goose in Ontario, by L. L. Snyder, 26

Rubus, 89; acaulis, 158; chamaemorus, 158;
idaeus var. strigosus, 89; occidentalis, 89;
odoratus, 88

Ruff, 168

Ruff and White Pelican at Fort Severn, by
H. G. Lumsden, 168

182

Rumex acetosella, 92; crispus, 88; orbiculatus,
129

Rush, 87; Spike, 86

ee CES

Sac-spiders, 38

Sagittaria cuneata, 129; latifolia f. gracilis,
92

St. John’s-wort, 89; Common, 89

Salamander, Four-toed, 167

Salix arbusculoides, 157; arctica, 124; arcto-
phila, 157; discolor, 87; glauca, 157; inter-
ior, 87; nigra, 87; petiolaris, 87; planifolia,
157; richardsonii, 157; serissima, 87

Salsola kali, 129

Salticidae, 39

Sambucus pubens, 91

Sanderling, 43, 57, 107

Sandpiper, Aleutian, 58; Baird’s, 4, 41-43,
106; Least, 106; Pectoral, 106; Purple, 52;
Red-backed, 5, 57, 106; Semi-palmated, 43,
107; Solitary, 105; Spotted, 105; Stilt, 107;
Western, 57, White-rumped, 4, 44, 106

Sandwort, 88

Sanicula gregaria, 90

Sarracenia purpurea f. plena f. nov., 129

Savile, D.B.O.
Review of: Mark Trail’s book of North
American mammals, 133

Saxifraga caespitosa, 126; flagellaris, 127; hir-
culus, 127; nivalis, 127; oppositifolia, 127;
stellaris var. comosa, 127; tricuspidata, 127,
158

Scaup, 52; Greater, 52-55, 57, 59; Lesser, 55,
57

Schofield, W. B. and W. J. Cody
Botanical investigations on coastal south-
ern Cornwallis Island, Franklin District,
INGWeielall6

Schultz, F. H.
Review of: A study of variations in the
maskinonge from three regions in Canada,
171

Scirpus acutus, 86; atrotinctus, 86; caespi-
tosus var. callosus, 157; cyperinus var. pe-
lius, 86

Seoter, American, 57, 58, 101; Surf, 51, 57-
59, 101; White-winged, 55, 57-59, 101

Scotinella pelvicolens, 39

Scutellaria lateriflora, 90; parvula, 90

Seal, Bearded, 41; Grey, 151; Ringed, 41, 43

Sedge, 87

Seiurus noveboracensis, 113

Selfheal, 90

Senecio, 92

Setaria glauca, 86

Seventy-fifth anniversary,
turalists’ Club, 78

Ottawa Field-Na-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Seventy-sixth annual meeting of the Ottawa
Field-Naturalists’ Club, December 2, 1954,
The, 21

Sheepshead, Fresh-water, 84

Shepherd’s Purse, 92

Shiner, Common, 84; Golden, 83; Sand, 84

Shoveller, 58, 100

Shrike, 56; Gray, 52, 55, 56; Loggerhead,
56; Northern, 51, 53, 54, 56-58, 112

Sialia currucoides, 112

Silene cucubalus, 88; noctiflora, 88

Singa variabilis, 36

Sisicottus, 36

Siskin, 59; Pine, 52-55, 57-59

Sisymbrium officinalis, 92

Sisyrinchium angustifolium, 87; montanum,
87

Sitticus finschii, 39; palustris, 39;
39

Sium suave, 90

Skulleap, Mad-dog, 90; Small, 90

Skylark, European, 58

Slug, Giant, 130

Smartweed, Water, 88

Smilacina racemosa, 87

Smilax herbacea, 87

Snake, Queen, 167

Snakeroot, Black, 90; White, 91

Sneezeweed, 92

Snipe, Wilson’s, 52, 54, 57-59, 105

Snowberry, 92

Snyder, L.L.

Ross’s Goose in Ontario, 26

Social behaviour in ,animals with special re-
ference to vertebrates, reviewed by Austin
W. Cameron, 69

Solanum americanum, 90

Solidago caesia, 91; canadensis, 91;
nifolia, 91; lepida, 91;

Solitaire, Townsend’s, 57

Solman, V.E.F.

Review of: Animal Camouflage, 169
Review of: Our wildlife legacy, 28

Solomon’s Seal, 87

Somateria mollissima v. nigra, 43;
lis, 41, 101

Sonchus asper, 92

Sorrel, Sheep, 92; Wood, 89

Sparrow, Alaska Fox, 65; American Tree,
52, 53, 55, 56; Dakota Song, 66; Eastern
Tree, 114; English, 51-54, 56-58; Fox, 52,
57-59, 115; Gambel’s, 6; Golden-crowned,
58, 59; Harris’s, 114; House, 52-59; Lin-
coln, 57, 115; Puget Sound, 58; Savannah,
6, 113; Song, 52, 54, 55, 57-59, 115; Swamp,
54, 55; Tree, 52-54, 57; White-crowned, 57,
58, 114; White-throated, 52, 54, 115

ranieri,

grami-
squarrosa, 91 -

spectabt-

Oct.-Dec., 1955]

Spartina pectinata, 86

Spatula clypeata, 100

Spearwort, Creeping, 88

Speedwell, Marsh, 90; Thyme-leaved, 90

Sphenopholis intermedia, 86

Spiders and harvestmen from Waterton and
Glacier National Parks, by Lorna R. Levi
and Herbert W. Levi, 32

Spiders, Comb-footed, 32; Crab, 39; Dwarf,
34; Feather-foot, 39; Jumping, 39; Run-
ning, 38; Wolf, 37

Spikenard, False, 87

Spiranthes romanzoffiana, 129

Spizella arborea, 114

Squatarola squatarola, 65, 105

Starling, 27, 51-54, 57; Common, 52, 54-56;
European, 58, 59

Statement of financial standing, The Ottawa
Field-Naturalists’ Club, November 26,
1954, 23

Steatoda hespera, 32

Stellaria graminea, 88; laeta, 124, 158; me-
dia, 92; monantha, 158; monantha var.
monantha, 125

Stercorarius longicaudus, 5, 24, 41, 108; pa-
rasiticus, 5, 107; pomarinus, 41, 107

Sterna hirundo, 108; paradisaea, 5, 43, 109

Stinson, R.H.
See Loughrey, A. G. and R. H. Stinson

Stitch-wort, Common, 88

Stone-crop, Ditch, 92

Strawberry-blite, 88

Strawberry, Wild, 88; Woodland, 88

Strix varia, 67

Strobilomyces, 44

Study of variations in the maskinonge from
three regions in Canada, A, reviewed by
F.H. Schultz, 171

Sturnus vulgaris, 27

Suillus hirtellus, 46; piperatus, 46

Sumac, Staghorn, 89

Summer birds of Western Ontario, reviewed
by W. Earl Godfrey, 68

Summer colony of the Least Bat, Myotis su-
bulatus leibii (Audubon and Bachman), A,
by Harold B. Hitchcock, 31

Surnia ulula, 109

Swallow, Cliff, 5, 110; Tree, 110

Swan, Whistling, 98

Swift, Black, 131; Vaux, 131

Symphoricarpos albus, 92

a

Taraxacum erythrospermum, 92;
reum, 161; officinale, 92
Tarentula aculeata, 38; kochi, 38

hyperbo-

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

183

Taxidea taxus, 12

Taxus canadensis, 92

Teal, Blue-winged, 58;
57, 58, 100

Tern, Arctic, 5, 24, 43, 44, 109; Common, 108

Tetragnatha extensa, 36; laboriosa, 36; numa
n.sp., 37; versicolor, 37

Thalarctos maritimus, 41

Thalictrum dioicum, 92; polygamum, 88

Thanatus, 39

Theridion differens, 32; montanum, 32;
ohlerti, 32; rugosa, 33; sexpunctatum, 33;
zelotypum, 33

Thimbleweed, 88

Thistle, Bull, 91; Canada, 91; Spiny Annual
Sow, 92

Thomisidae, 39

Thomson, Sheila C.
See Groves, J. Walton and Sheila C.
Thomson

Thrasher, Brown, 54, 56
Thrush, Gray-cheeked, 112; Hermit, 58, 59;
Olive-backed, 112; Pacific, 58; Varied, 57,
58

Thuja occidentalis, 86; plicata, 132

Tibellus oblongus, 39

Tigellinus, 36

Tilia americana, 89

Timothy, 86

Titanoeca, 40

Titmouse, Tufted, 55

Toadflax, 90

Tobacco, Indian, 91

Tofieldia pusilla, 157

Togwoteeus granipalpus, 32

Torilis japonica, 131

Torilis japonica in the Ottawa District, by
David Erskine, 131

Totanus flavipes, 106; melanoleucus, 105

Touch-me-not, Spotted, 92

Towhee, 54, 57; Oregon, 58, 59; Spotted, 57,
59

Trailliella intricata, 151

Trefoil, Tick, 92

Trifolium agrarium, 89; hybridum, 89; pra-
tense, 92; repens, 89

Tringa solitaria, 105

Triosteum aurantiacum, 92

Trisetum spicatum, 156

Turdus migratorius, 111

Turnstone, Black, 57, 58; Ruddy, 44, 105

Turtlehead, 92

Two red algae new to Nova Scotia, by David
Erskine, 150

Typha latifolia, 92

Green-winged, 54,

184

pee jae

Ulmus americana, 87; rubra, 87
Uria lomvia, 41, 48, 109

Ursus horribilis, 44

Urtica procera, 92

ne Par

Vaccinium microcarpum, 160; uliginosum,
128, 160; vitis-idaea var. minus, 160

Verbascum thapsus, 92

Veronica scutellata, 90; serpyllifolia, 90

Vetch, American, 89; Tufted, 89

Vetchling, 89

Viburnum lentago, 91;
trilobum, 91

rafinesquianum, 91;

Vicia americana, 89; cracca, 89
Viola canadensis, 92; conspersa, 90; nephro-
phylla, 89; palustris, 159; pensylvanica,

90; septentrionalis, 89

Violet, Canada, 92; Leafy Blue, 90; Smooth
Yellow, 90; Stemless Blue, 89

Vireo philadelphicus, 65

Vireo, Philadelphia, 65

Vitis riparia, 89

Viviparus viviparus, 27

Viviparus viviparus L. in eastern Canada, by
E.L. Bousfield, 27

A 1 fe

Walckenaera vigilax, 36
Warbler, Bay-breasted, 65;
Magnolia, 65; Myrtle,

Townsend’s, 58
Water-thrush, Northern, 113

Black-poll, 112;
112; Palm, 65;

THE CANADIAN. FIELD-NATURALIST

[Vol. 69

Water-weed, 86

Waxwing, Bohemian, 56-58, 112;
58

Weavers, Funnel-web, 37; Hackled Band, 40;
Orb, 36; Sheet-web, 33

Whale, Bowhead, 41; White, 41

White Pelicans at Crescent Beach, B.C., by
Martin W. Holdom, 27

Willow, Black, 87; Pussy, 87

Cedar, 55,

Woodpecker, American Three-toed, 110;
Downy, 51, 53-58; Hairy, 52-57, 59, 110;
Harris, 59; Pileated, 52-54, 56-59; Red-
headed, 54

Wragg, L.E.

Notes on movements of banded muskrats, 9
Wren, Bewick’s, 57-59; Long-billed Marsh,
57; Seattle, 58; Winter, 53, 55-59

Bhs

Xanthoxylum americanum, 89

Xema sabini, 44

Xerocomus chrysenteron, 47; subtomentosus,
47

Xysticus benefactor, 39;
lutulentus, 39

labradorensis, 39;

a dave

Yarrow, Common, 91

Yellow-legs, Greater, 105; Lesser, 58, 106

eieg ai

Zelotes subterraneus, 38

Zenaidura macroura, 109

Zonotrichia albicollis, 115; leucophrys, 114;
leucophrys gambeli, 6; querula, 114

ig

A o
;
Vee dei ata
CHAS HA Be abe Sitch
eas oF citi oY OA Es
¥ t a ‘ \
Z : \ Sree nny ‘ h
4 AS Tete ie SE eee oo oa roe 4 by
h
3
|

;
;
j
4

Archaeology: Chairm. Mrs. P.

yichibyology: Chairm. G. E. BUTLER, Sec. W.

fe OAPRILIATED| SOCIETIES

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY
OF MANITOBA

OFFICERS FOR 1953-54

Esenident Emeritus: C. W. LOWE; Hon. President: A.
LAWRENCE; President: R. K. meee HAY; Vice-

suas Naan C. I. TILLENIUS, Mrs. W. A. CARTWRIGHT;

Treasurer: H. MOSSOP; Asst. Treasurers: Miss W.

DOWNES, J. J. MOTT; Gen. Secretary: J. J. McDONALD;

eee Secretary: Mrs. G. I. KEITH; Social Convenor:
. A. A, STEEL; Auditor: W. A. CARTWRIGHT.

SECTIONS—

H. STOKES; Sec. Mrs.
R. K. HELYAR; Botany: Chairm. J. S. ROWE, Sec.
Miss E. O. eager Entomology: Chairm. R. M.
PRENTICE, Sec. J. A. DROUIN; Geology: Chairm. E.
I. LEITH, Sec. Mrs. A. C. CRANSTONE; Herpetology:
STEWART-HAY, Sec. G. S. cee
F. JOHNS-
ON; Mammalogy: Chairm. C. I. TILLENIUS, Sec. S.
es Ornithology: Chairm. J. J. MOTT, Sec. Miss

Lectures on the first and third Mondey evenings of

Chairm. R. K.

each month will be held in the 4th floor Board Room

of the Free Press. Friday evening lectures will be
held in Room 204 of the University Extension Service,
Memorial Boulevard. The meetings open at 8.00 p.m.,
the lectures commencing at 8.15 p.m.

PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL
HISTORY OF CANADA

OFFICERS FOR 1955

President: T. J. HUNTER; Ist | Eos J. AS
BIGONESSE; 2nd Arico vioriaunts J. K. HILL; Secretary-
Treasurer: Geo. A. Le CLERC; Chief- Scientific Sect.: Dr,
D. A. DERY; Chief-Protection Sect.: Napoleon BEAUDET:
Chief-Propaganda Sect: iia G. | COOTE; Chief-Informa-
tion Sect.: Frs, HAMEL. Other directors: O. MARCEAU,
R. MEREDITH, J. ee SEAECE: F. D. ROSS, Jos. MORIN,
Dr. V. PLAMONDO

Secretary’s address : Geek Baile CLERC, 300 Fraser St.,
Quebec, P.Q.

THE TORONTO FIELD-NATURALISTS’
CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1950-1951

President: A. A. OUTRAM; Vice-President: J. L.
BAILLIE; Secretary-Treasurer: MRS. J. B. STEWART,
21 Millwood Rd., Toronto; President of Junior Club:
MRS. J. MURRAY SPEIRS; Vice-President of Junior Club:
MRS. L. E. JAQUITH. Executive Council: G. M. BART-
MAN, J. BARNETT, MRS. N. BROWN, ALFRED BUNKER,
MISS F. BURGESS, ALEXANDER CAMERON, MISS VERA
CLARK, MISS B. DOUGLAS, PROF. T. W. DWIGHT, DR.
M. FRITZ, W. W. H. GUNN, DR. L. E. JAQUITH, MRS.
J. D. KETCHUM, MISS V. KOHLER, MRS. H. H. MARSH,
C. S. McKEE, D. S. MILLER, JOHN MITCHELE, R. M.
SAUNDERS, EARL STARK, H. H. SOUTHAM, Ex. Officio:
A. J. V. LEHMANN, C. A WALKINSHAW, T. F. MclIL-
WRAITH.

Meetings are held at 8.15 p.m. on the first Monday otf
each month from October to May at the Royal Ontario
Museum, unless otherwise announced. Field trips are
held during the spring and autumn and on the second
Saturday of each month during the winter.

Prof. G. J. S

VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY
SOCIETY

OFFICERS 1955-56

Hon. President: Dr. N. A. M. MACKENZIE; Past President:
F, WAUGH; President: A. R. WOOTTON; Vice President:
J. J. PLOMMER; Hon. Secretary: C. B. W. ROGERS; Re-
cording Secretary: Mrs. Augusta MARTIN; Programme
Secretary: J. GARDNER; Hon. Treasurer: F. SANFORD:
Librarian: Mrs. Dorothy BRADLEY; Editor of ra
N. PURSSELL; Chairmen of Sections: Botany-Dr. T. M. C.
TAYLOR; rageleboea J. E. ARMSTRONG; Entomology—
NNCER; Ornithology—W. HUGHES; Mam-
mology—Dr P MST. COWAN; Marine Biology—Myrs. M.
L. McLUCKIE; Photography—B. GLEIG; euaeer Section—
Miss W. L. PEARSON; Mycology—Dr. R. STACE-SMITH;
Audubon Screen Tours—S. BRADLEY; Additional Mem-
bers of Executive: Dr. V. C. BRINK, Dr. M. Y. WILLIAMS.

All meetings at 8 p.m. Room 100, Applied Science
Building, University of British Columbia, unless other-
wise announced.

McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB
LONDON, ONT.

OFFICERS FOR 1955

Past President: Mrs. G. CUMMINGS, RB.R. #4, yendons
President: Mr. F. Howard KEAST, 44 Graydon St.,

don; Vice-President: Dr. W. W. JUDD, 685 Stratameyer
St., London; Recording Secretary: Miss M. J. HEIGHWAY,
66 Ciliftonvale Ave., London; Treasurer: Mr. J. Cc.
LAUGHTON, R.R. #4, London; Corresponding Secretary:
Mrs. W. R. JARMAIN, 301 Oxford St., tape aes
bon Secretary: Mr. J. LEACH, Platts Lane, 3,
ondon.

Meetings are held at 8.30 p.m. in the Public Library
building on the second Monday of each month from
September to May.

Field trips are held during the spring and a special
excursion in September.

PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR
THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS INC.

OFFICERS FOR 1954-1955

President: Dr. M. J. DUNBAR; Vice-President: J. P.
ANGLIN; nace ere mdont: J. L. VAN CAMP; Treasurer:
W. H. RAWLINGS; Secretary: Miss R. S. ABBOTT,

166 Beemae ict Road, Senneville, P.Q.

COMMITTEE

Miss P. C. ABBOTT, Miss R. S. ABBOTT, J.
W. R. B, BERTRAM, Miss R. B. BLANCHARD, Miss S.
BOYER, Mrs. P. H. du BOULAY, J. D. CLEGHORN,
Dr. M. J. DUNBAR, D. G. ELLIOT, Mrs. D. G.
DeLISLE GARNEAU, me ER H

R. LEPINGWELL, IAN McLAREN,

Miss G. HIBBARD, A.
G. H. MONTGOMERY, W. H. RAWLINGS, J. W. ROBIN:
soy C. C. SAIT, Miss M. SEATH, H. G. SEYMOUR,

. J. H. SUMMERBY, J. L. VAN CAMP.

aera held the second Monday of the month except
during summer. Field Trips held in spring and autumn.

ANGLIN,

BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND
MAMMAL SOCIETY

President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-Prseident: H. M.
LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. of
Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B.C.

CALGARY NATURALISTS’ CLUB

OFFICERS FOR 1954

President: Miss JULIE HRAPKO; Vice-President: J. C.
BARNHARDT; Secretary-Treasurer: Miss MARGARET
COPE, 1719 — 13th Ave. W., Calgary, Alta.

LAL OBIO GRAP HY ; | ;

OF

Mr. W. J. CODY, Business Manager,
Field-Naturalists’ Club, Division of Botany, Scilucs,
Service, Dept. of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

peaiel
ao]

HS

ERNST MAYR LIBRARY

OL ATT

| 3 2044 114 198 070

en aang
=e tte at

hie
; Mh piancyayean anne.
: SKE bea es
Sr reasearch ni
aad 9 APA leas Pacman an. a a